expresse in v. 4 5 6. shall be forced to let Jacob and Israel goe free The Lord will as it is v. 19. do a NEW THING which must properly signifie a thing never done afore to make way for their returne and liberty as it is expresse v. 19. c. before set downe at large Which wanton wits may endeavour to elude with Allegories and Phantasmes of their owne hatching which neither can convince a rationall Christian nor deliver the Jewes according to the intent of the Prophet Who though afore that their deliverance as in v. 22. c. they should not call upon God as they ought but should be weary of the Lord and should weary the Lord with their iniquities and therefore they are given up to the curse and to the reproach yet after these things as it followes in the 44. Chapter and first seven verses as an Antithesis to their said evill condition the Lord promiseth and the Prophet prophesieth it that they should have a glorious condition saying Yet now heare O Jacob my servant and ISRAEL whom I have chosen Thus saith the Lord that made thee c. Fear not O Jacob and thou Jesurun the name also of the twelve Tribes Deut. 32. I will poure water upon him that is thirsty and flouds upon the dry ground I will POUR MY SPIRIT upon thy seed and my blessing upon thine off-spring And they shall spring up among the grasse as willows by the water-courses One shall say I am the Lords and another shall call himselfe by the name of Jacob and another shall subscribe with his hand unto the Lord and surname himselfe by the name of Israel Thus saith the Lord the KING of Israel I am the first and I am the last Who as I shall CALL and declare it and SET IT IN ORDER for me since I appointed the ancient people and the things that ARE COMMING and SHALL COME § 5 Thus you see the present state of the Jewes as in the latter end of the former Chapter viz. sinfull and dolefull you see their names viz. Jacob Israel and Jesurun all names of the twelve Tribes you see what is meant by pouring water upon the thirsty viz. pouring out of the spirit you see what is meant by growing as willows by the water-courses viz. by the effusion of the Spirit multitudes shall own the Lord you see what Titles Christ hath of KING of ISRAEL and of FIRST and LAST which are his Titles when he prophesies of his visible Kingdome to be on earth repeated several times in the Revelation Now then deal ingeniously and compare the expressions with the Jewes condition for above these one thousand six hundred and fifty yeers to this very day and see then whether you can indeed and bonâ fide imagine that these Prophesies have been ever yet fulfilled or that it is proper or feisable that they should be fulfilled at the ultimate day of Doom SECT XIX THe tenth place in Isaiah is Chapter 45. v. 14. * Touching v. 14. to v. 22. I will onely insert Mr. Medes Notes in the margin because it came not timely enough to bee put into the Text Esaiae vaticinium cap. 45. a versu 14. deinceps in eodem Adventu secundo Christi implendum restatur Apostolus ad Rom. c. 14. v. 11. omnes enim inquit stabimus ante Tribunal Christi scriptum est enim nempe in hoc Esaiae vaticinio vivo ego dicit Dominus quoniam mihi flectetur omne genu omnis lingua confitebitur Deo Quod si haec Prophetiae pars in secundo Christi adventu in die nimirum Judicii adimplenda restet etiam reliqua eodem pertinere necesse est Est autem Prophetiae initium hujusmodi Sic dicit Dominus labor Aegypti negotiatio Cush Sabaeorum VIRORUM MENSURAE i. e. MERCATORUM 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sic Targum quod mensuris utantur non MEN OF STATUR ad te O tu captiva vel O civitas mea transibunt tui erunt post te ambulabunt in compedibus ad te incurvabunt se te deprecabuntur dicentes Tantum in te Deus est non est alius praeter ipsum Deus In Hebraeo enim omnia haec pronomina sunt generis faeminini quare ad Cyrum referri nequeunt sed ad Jerusalem captivam de qua in versu praecedenti mentionem habuit quemque ad majorem rei evidentiam sic verterem ego suscitavi Cyrum in justitia omnes vias ejus dâ—â—gam Ipse aedificabit civitatem meam captivam meam 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 DIMITTET idque fine pretio muncre dicit Dominus exercitum Tunc sequuntur verba quae paulo ante recitavi Sic dicit Dominus labor Aegypti c. q. d. parum est quod reaedificaberis â—emitteris Imo vero magna re O captiva mea O civitas mea manet olim faelicitas Observandum est enim Dominum inde a fine versus undecimi espondere quasi interrogationi de Fatis filiorum fuorum juxra quod praemisit ventura interrogate me de filiis meis de operibus mamanuum earum praecipite mihi nempe ut narrem vobis quae futura sunt Thus far Mr. Mede By which it is most plaine that he thinks and shews for it great strength of reason that this place of Isa is to be understood of a glorious state of the Church to be on earth at Christs second coming to the end of the Chapter but specially verse 22 23 24 25. viz. verse 22. Looke unto me and be yee saved all the ends of the earth for I am God and there is none else 23. I have sworne by my selfe the word is gone out of my mouth in righteousnesse and shall not returne that unto me every knee shall bow every tongue shall swear 24. Surely shall one say in the Lord have I righteousnesse Heb. righteousnesses and strength even to him shall men come and all that are incensed against him shall be ASHAMED 25. In the Lord shall the seed of Israel bee justified and shall glory § 1 For those foure last verses of the Chapter this is that I have to say The Prophet having spoken to JACOB and ISRAEL v. 17 18 19. Israel shall be saved in the Lord with an everlasting salvation and shall not be ASHAMED nor confounded world without end for thus saith the Lord that created the Heavens and formed the earth hee hath created it not in vaine he formed it to be INHABITED which phrases Not ashamed c. and to be inhabited extend that everlasting salvation to comprehend a blessed salvation on earth too I have not spoken in secret in a darke place of the earth I said not to the seed of JACOB seek ye me in vaine I say the Prophet having spoken to Jacob and Israel names comprehending all twelve Tribes next he extends his speech more generally with them to all the Nations of the world v.
to this day falls far shorter of the fulnesse of the Gentiles coming in and therefore shorter yet of the Saving all Israel as the Apostles phrases are Rom. 11 We have it from day to day before our eies that not one of ten Christians hardly is more then called a Christian and not one Jew of ten thousand bears the name of a Christian And therefore in this first branch this place of Ioel is not in the main yet fulfilled 2. This of this second of Ioel is not yet fulfilled That at the time the Prophet mainly means there must be such wonders in Heaven and in Earth as must be accompanied with blood and fire and pillars of smoake and such a darkning of the Sun and discolouring of the Moon c. As all these things must amount to the making up of a GREAT and TERRIBLE DAY OF THE LORD And that in relation to the destruction of them that believe not so as to call upon God in faith as the last verse intimateth Whosoever shall call upon the Name of the Lord shall be saved And the destruction shall be especially of those unbelievers that are enemies to the Jews as the same last verse of this second Chapter and the first and second verses of the third Chapter do evidently hint For in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance as the Lord hath said and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call For behold in THOSE DAYES and in THAT TIME when I shall bring again the captivity of JUDAH and JERUSALEM I will also gather ALL NATIONS and will bring them down to the valley of Jehoshaphat and will PLEAD with them there for my people and for my heritage ISRAEL whom they have scattered For by the wonders at the passion of Christ Matth. 27. there was no destruction of any man At the effusion of the Spirit after his ascension Acts 2. There was nothing but consolation or at least admiration At the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus according to Matth. 24. there was the sad destruction of the Jews but of none of the Jews enemies 3. This of this prophesie of Joel is not yet fully fulfilled viz. In Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance AS THE LORD HATH SAID and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call For this was not compleated in the few Jews converted in the Acts or since as these Reasons induce me to think 1. The Apostle Peter in Acts the second quoting Joel makes not the least mention of this clause 2. Christs coming to Jerusalem as a Spiritual Deliverer in his publick ministration of the Gospel was before that of pouring out of the Spirit about five years as his disputing with the Doctors was two and twenty years before and his incarnation above four and thirty years afore But the deliverance mentioned according to the Apostles method yea and of the Prophets is after the pouring out of the Spirit And indeed follows after as naturally as the effect succeeds the cause This pouring out of the Spirit fitting instruments for the salvation of those ages 3. The Prophet addes as the Lord hath said viz. By his Prophets But they mainly spake of the Jews corporal deliverance as we have before opened in the discuss of many places For as for spiritual they then had it and there was no doubt but it should be continued in all ages else the Church would be extinct or Gods Covenant with Abraham and David would fail 4. The Deliverance must be not onely in Jerusalem but in the remnant whom the Lord shall call But Christ did not at his being on Earth save the generality of the remnant either corporally or spiritually The Two Tribes were then under the Roman captivity and they generally refused Christ John 1.11 Acts 13.46 47. and for the Ten Tribes they for the generality neither saw nor heard Christ but continued in their captivity in Assyria c. 1 Pet. 1.1 Jam. 1.1 They were not returned to Zion or Jerusalem and for the Gentiles if any will make them of the remnant which is hatsh being the greater part of the world they and the Jews were never yet incorporated in Religion as the copulative And promiseth viz. There shall be deliverance in those days and at that time in Jerusalem AND in the remnant whom the Lord shall call 5. The Prophet Joel speaks of such a deliverance of the Jews as shall be by bringing down their enemies to the valley of destruction to them though of salvation to the Jews as the next Chapter vers 1 2 c. shews But this hath not been yet fulfilled as was touched afore neither can it be fulfilled at the last judgement For that being once come there is no effectual salvation or invocation as the last verse of the second Chapter mentions SECT XLI THe second and last place we shall touch in this Prophet Joel is Chap. 3. v. 1 c. to the end of the Chapter For behold in § 1 those days and in that time when I shall bring again the captivity of Judah and Jerusalem 2. I will also gather all Nations and will bring them down into the valley of Jehoshaphat and will plead with them there for my people and for my heritage Israel whom they have scattered among the Nations and parted my Land 3. And they have cast lots for my people and have given a Boy for a Harlot and sold a Girle for Wine that they might drink 4. Yea and what have ye to do with me O Tyre and Zidon and all the coasts of Palestine will ye render me a recompence and if ye recompence me swiftly and speedily will I return your recompence upon your own head 5. Because ye have taken my silver and my gold and have carried into your Temples my goodly pleasant things 6. The children also of Judah and the children of Jerusalem have ye sold unto the Grecians that ye might remove them far from their border 7. Behold I will raise them â—ut of the place whither ye have sold them and will return your recompence upon your own head 8. And I will sell your sons and your daughters into the hand of the children of Judah and they shall sell them to the Sabeans to a people far off for the Lord hath spoken it 9. Proclaim ye this among the Gentiles prepare war wake up the mighty men let all the men of war draw near let them come up 10. Beat your plough-shares into swords and your pruning-hooks into spears let the weak say I am strong 11. Assemble your selves and come all ye heathen and gather your selves together round about Thither cause thy mighty ones to come down O Lord. 12. Let the Heathen be wakened and come up to the valley of Jehoshaphat for there will I sit to judge all the Heathen round about 13. Put ye in the sickle for the harvest is ripe Come get you down for the oress is full the fats overflow for the wickedness is great
certain 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Formes of Ecclesiastical doctrines according to which all Teachers in the Church were to frame their discourse and direct their opinions Some of these 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Formes of Ecclesiastical doctrine are recorded by Gelasius Cyzicenus in his Historiâ Actorum Concilii Niceni History of the Acts of the Council of Nice Amongst these there is this Forme for the Doctrine of the state of the Resurrection * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Cap. 7.18 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Pâ— 27.13 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Mat. 5.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 â—â—a 26.6 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The world was made more minute or lesse i.e. imperfecter or viler because of fore-knowledge For God fore-saw that man would sinne Therefore we expect NEW HEAVENS AND A NEW EARTH accrding to the holy Scriptures when shall shine forth the apparition or appearance and Kingdome of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ And THEN as Daniel saith Chap. 7.18 The Saints of the most HIGH SHAL TAKE THE KINGDOME and there shal be a pure earth holy a land of the living and not of the dead which David fore seeâ—ng by the eye of faith cryes out Psal 27.13 I beleeve to see the goodnesse of the Lord in the LAND OF THE LIVING A land of the meck and humble For blessed saith Christ Matth. 5.5 are the meek for they shall POSSESSE THE EARTH And the Prophet s aith Isa 26.6 The feet of the meek and the humble shall tread upon it 1. Judge by this notwithstanding fifty yeers opposition how powerfull the Chiliastical party yet was at the time of that Council By some whereof if this Forme were not framed and composed yet was it thus moderated as you see that both parties might accept it every mans interpretation being safe to himselfe as being delivered in the terms and language of Scripture 2 Judge whether in my explication of the state of the Thousand yeers I have not kept within the compasse of this Forme and not swerved one jot there-from This you see was the opiâ—â—on of the whole Orthodox Christian Church in the age immediately following the death of S. John when yet Polycarp and many of the Apostles Disciples were living as Justin Martyr expresly affirmes A Testimony absolute without all comparison to perswade such as rely upon authority and antiquity even as you have seen the same opinion continued throughout the next age following that And therefore it is to be ADMIRED that an opinion once so generally received in the Church should ever have been so cryed down and buried But those times which extinguished this brought other alterations into the Church beside this and perhaps something in lieu of that and relating to it which perhaps few observe that have knowledge enough of the rest namely that this opinion of the FIRST RESURRECTION was the reall ground and mother of prayers for the dead so anciently received in the Church which were then conceived after this manner THAT THEY MAY HAVE THEIR PART IN THE FIRST RESURRECTION See Tertullian who first mentions them The reason was because this having part in the first resurrection was not to be common to all but to be a priviledge to some namely of Martyrs and Consessors equipollent to them if God would so accept them Moreover the beleefe of this Prerogative of Martyrs in the first resurrection was that which made the Christians of those times so joyously desirous of Martyrdome These things will perhaps seem strange but will be found true if examined And yet may not seem so strange to considering minds if they take notice that even so neer to us as in King Edward the sixth his time in comparison of those ancient times though now an antiquity in parallel with later times this our opinion of the glorious state on earth yet to come before the ultimate judgement was given to that age as a Catechismal fundamental King Edward the fixth his Catechisme alleadges for our opinion to be drunk in by all that should receive the true Christian or Protestant Religion For the Author of the Catechisme set forth in that King Edward the fixth his time and by that King authorised May 20. in the last yeer of his reigne explicates the second Petition of the Lords prayer thus Q. How is that Petition Thy Kingdome come to be understood A. Wee aske that his Kingdome may come for as yet we see not all things subject to Christ wee see not how or that the stone is cut out of the mountaine ☞ without humane helpe which BREAKS INTO PEECES AND REDVCETH into NOTHING THE IMAGE DESCRIBED BY DANIEL how or that the onely rocke which is Christ doth POSSESSE AND OBTAINE THE EMPIRE OF THE WHOLE WORLD given him of the Father As yet Antichrist is not slaine whence it is that we desire and pray that at length it may come to passe and be fulfilled and that Christ alone may reigne with his Saints according to the divine promises And that be may live and have dominion in the world according to the decrees of the holy Gospel and not according to the traditions and laws of men and the wils of the TYRANTS of the World God grant saith the Reply of the Questionist that his Kingdome may come most speedily In Mr. Foxe his Martyrologie you shall find in the examination of Mr. Philpot that the Bishops when they came brought this Catechisme with them but what special relation it had to him I know not nor is ought there mentioned about it The Kings Letters before it begin thus Cum brevis explicata c. Whereas a compendious and plain way or forme of Catechisme written by a learnedman was presented unto us we committed the perusal and trial thereof to certain Bishops and other learned men c. And in the same Catechisme concerning the end of the world The Question being put thus The end of the world the sacred Scripture cals the consummation and perfection of the MYSTERY OF CHRIST and the RENOVATION OF ALL THINGS So the Apostle Peter speaks 2 Ep. Chap. 3. We expect new heavens and a new earth according to Gods promise wherein dwels righteousnesse And it seems agreeable to reason that the corruption mutability and sinne to which the whole world is subject should at last cease Now by what means or wayes of circumstances those things shall be brought to passe I desire to know of thee Answ I will declare as well as I can the same Apostle attesting The heavens in manner of a stormy tempest shall passe away and the elements estuating shall be dissolved and the earth and the works therein shall be burnt As if the Apostle should say The world like as wee see in gold shall be wholly purged with fire AND SHALL BEE BROVGHT TO ITS UTMOST PERFECTION which the little world man imitating shall likewise bee freed from corruption and mutation And so for mans sake for whose use the great world was
plaine text without sophistication or allegorising contrary to the scope of the pace as far as possible or light can lead us Thirdly That the consummation of the world doth gloriously begin at the beginning of these thousand yeers as wee have demonstrated out of severall texts and so it rather hastens then prorogues Fourthly turning to Cornelius Alapide on this 20. of Rev. according to the Doctors direction thinking to finde some great matter I found onely this of that businesse That he saith we approach very neer the end of the world First because we see the Gospel preached almost to all the world Secondly the Saint Vincent who dyed one thousand foure hundred and eighteen did confidently preach this and that by the command of Christ as it is in the History of his life Thirdly that it is a constant oracle among the Turks that Mahomets sect is to endure a thousand yeers which yeers are now neere expired Fourthly so is the Prophesie of St. Malachy A.B. of Hibernia whose life St. Bernard did write Thus you see what Cornelius Alapide saith and what stuffe it is Two arguments out of the Popish legend Another from the Turks Alcoran or Tradition The other intimates a Scripture viz. that Mat. 24.14 But there is no Almost I would the Jesuit said true that almost It is not yet preached to the vast Kingdomes and places of China of the Turke of the Indians of the Tartars c. We do indeed grant that the consummation of the world is neer and we said so but now But that we set it backward or forward beside Scripture neither the Doctor nor his Alapide hath proved it one jot Nor can it seem lesse then some kinde of contradiction for the Doctor to say we doe prorogare ultra mille adminimum annos indefinito auctario That we do prolong the time at least a thousand yeers with an indefinite argument For if it be for a thousand yeers how is it indefinite If indefinite how is it for a thousand yeers And Alapide confesseth it is uncertain when the world shall end Ibid. ¶ Third Inconvenience the Doctor urgeth is That this opinion in our point feigneth a state of the Church militant in or at the comming of the Lord in adventu Domini triumphant and tranquillous contrary to Luke 18.8 When the Son of man shall come shall he finde faith on earth Answer wee doe not say that the Church shall triumph at the very first appearance of Christ which is to call the Jews yea we have said the contrary on Dan. 12. that for five and forty yeers will be a time of trouble to the Jews after their call and afore the triumph comes But when Christ hath once appeared to destroy all the Churches enemies the Church shall triumph and bee tranquillous many yeers as we have seen innumerable places in O. T. and just a thousand yeers according to St. John in Rev. compared with Dan c. of which afore That place of Luke is evidently of the weak faith not of no faith of true beleevers at the sight of the great troubles that are the sad Antecedent to the joyful Comedian Catâ—strophe of the Churches deliverance as Dan. 12. and Rev. 11. to the end of 19. set it out But when Christ comes it is at a pinch to raise their faith and after to settle that their triumph on earth As he appeared in incarnate when the Saints faith was low as wee see in Nathanael And at the Resurrection as we see in the two Disciples Luke 24. and in Thomas John 20. But when manifest he raised them high So at his next coming ¶ Fourth Inconvenience is saith the Doctor it doth interpose at least a thousand yeers between the ruine of Antichrist and the dissolution of the world which Antichrist Paul foretold should be destroyed with the bright comming of our Saviour and by the breath of his mouth We answer first That if he means before the last dissolution at the last judgement even so doth St. John most emphatically interpose Compare Rev. 19. the two last verses with Ch. 20.4 compared with v. 12. And so methodically and exactly Antichrist shal be destroyed by the brightnes of Christs first coming His breath of his mouth viz. his Word and Spirit having made the Kings of the earth to hate the Whore Secondly we answer that at Christs appearance at the beginning of the thousand yeers there is a kinde of dissolution of the world 2 Peter 12.13 compared with Isaiah 65.17 ¶ Fifth Inconvenience is That this opinion as the Doctor affirms inventeth such an assumption of bodies as the Papists feigne of the blessed Virgins or brings downe from heaven soules to be united to bodies that perhaps they may get children possesse earthly things and be subject to other conditions of mortall men Wee answer first for the Drs. assumption of bodies feigned by the Papists the Dr. doth not tell us what he means and we cannot divine what the Papists may dream This arrow doth not appear ergo we need not hold up our buckler Secondly for the bringing soules downe from heaven to the body upon earth what wonder is this more then the returning of the soul of Lazarus and of those at Christs Passion and those in the Prophets to their bodies on earth especially seeing they that returne in the other world to their bodies upon the inhabitable world for that time of the thousand yeers Heb. 2.5 is to a glorious estate Indeed unlesse we can overthrow a world of places which we have urged this must be granted Thirdly For their begetting children at that time We doe not affirme it But if wee should I know not what grand Inconvenience would follow seeing Adam once might have done it without sinne or carnality of mind when his soule came new out of Gods hands which are more glorious then heaven and the Virgin Mary so conceived Christ And the Apostle Heb. 2. implies our state then shall be as innocent Adams was All earthly things that the Saints then shall enjoy shall but increase their happines not sin or carnality in the least That shall be fulfilled Matth. 19.29 If the full of happinesse in glory shall fill all the senses with joy and comfort sutable to that place why may not the Preface upon earth proportionally But the Doctor objects but with a fortasse perhaps Fourthly for their enjoyment of earthly things though the things bee earthly yet the Saints shall enjoy them in a spirituall manner under a spirituall notion and to a spirituall end as Adam in innocency For fifth of being subject to the condition of mortal men I doe not know that they that are Saints shall dye in that thousand yeers or any more seeing they that are alive shall only be changed ¶ 6 The sixth and last Inconvenience the Doctor urgeth is as hee saith that this opinion doth raise up againe Papisme at the end of the world viz. then for men to dye with the rest of
a glorious state of all things Gen. 1.26 And God said Let us make man in our Image after our likenesse and let them have dominion over the fish of the Sea and over the fowle of the Aire and over the Cattell and over all the earth and over every creeping thing that creepeth on the earth 27. So God created man in his owne Image c. 28. And God blessed them and God said unto them be fruitfull and multiply and replenish the earth and SVBDVE IT and have DOMINION over the fish of the sea and over the fowle of the aire and over EVERY LIVING THING that moveth on the earth Psal 8.1 O LORD our LORD how excellent is thy name IN ALL THE EARTH who hast set thy glory above the heavens 2. Out of the mouth of babes and sucklings thou hast ordained strength because of thine enemies that thou mightest still the enemy ard the avenger 3. When I consider thy Heavens the worke of thy fingers the Moone and the Stars which thou hast ordained 4. What is man that thou art mindfull of him and the Sonne of Man that thou visitest him 5. For thou hast made him a little lower then the Angels and hast crowned him with glory and honour 6. Thou madest him to have DOMINION OVER THE WORKES OF THY HANDS thou hast put ALL THINGS UNDER HIS FEET c. Heb. 2.5 For unto the Angels he hath not put in subjection the WORLD TO COME whereof we speake 6. But one in a certaine place testified saying what is man that thou art mindfull of him or the sonne of man that thou visitest him 7. Thou madest him a little lower then the Angels thou crownest him with glory and honour and didst set him OVER the workes of thy hands 8. Thou hast put ALL THINGS in subjection UNDER HIS FEET for in that hee hath put ALL in subjection under him he left NOTHING that is not put under him 9. But now WEE SEE NOT YET ALL THINGS put under him but we see Jesus who was made a little lower then the Angels for the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour that he by the grace of God should taste of death for every man § 1 AS Saint Iohn fetcheth in the Notions of the terrestriall Paradise to describe New Hierusalem of which Revel 21. or which is all one the glorious state of the Church that it shal have on earth before the last Judgement Revel 22. or else we shall make John to speake impertinently for in supreame glory is no need of a river of water or of streets or of a tree of Life or of twelve sorts of fruit one for each month or of leaves to heale the Nations or to make him speake untruly if any would turne it to an Allegory of a fountaine of Doctrine or of more and fresh effusions of the Spirit or of Christ to beare any further fruit he there laying downe all 1 Cor. 15.28 even so the Prophet David falls upon a divine meditation of the estate of Adam in innocency to compose a Propheticall Psalme of praise for what God would doe for his people on earth before the ultimate end of the world as the Apostle Paul expounds him in the place aforesaid § 2 Should seem that though some things by Adams fall were irrecoverably lost in specie in their proper kind though not vertually and equivalently as mans freedome from corporall death yet other things as this dominion of man over all things was not so forfeited but that in Christ first or last it is recovered And therefore though David knew full well Adams fall as appeares by Psal 51.5 yet looking upon the SONNE OF MAN Christ in this Psalme he holds up his head and heart and sings out shrilly this praise in this Psalme of hope that this dominion shall be made good to man on earth to the utmost § 3 For surely there is no imagining of this state to be of Saints in the highest Heavens that there they should have dominion over the Beasts Fishes and Fowls or over wicked men properly that are then in the infernal Lake wholly under the sole power of the Prince of Darknesse and this was not performed on earth unto Davids time who from his youth to his end was ever and anon in danger of Beasts or beastiall men of the Lion and the Beare of Goliah of Saul of Absolom of forreigne enemies c. Nor was it ever since fulfilled but that the Saints the Members of the SONNE OF MAN have been at the same passe for the generall with David or worse as we have and shall heare abundantly § 4 Yet this must be fulfilled visibly on earth as saith the Psalmist in this eighth Psalme so as the enemy and avenger among men must bee stilled ver 2. And all the Creatures subdued as it is in the rest of the Psalme and both so as that the Saints mouthes may be full of praise according to the forme of this Psalme and this must be fulfilled too visibly on earth saith the Apostle in the said second of Hebrewes Unto the Angels saith he ver 5. God hath not subjected THE WORLD TO COME of which WE SPEAKE No for they are charged to be in subjection to Christ chap. 1. ver 6. Nor hath God said to any of the Angels sit thou at my right hand * Mat. 24.14 Luke 2.1 Luke 4.5 Luk. 21.26 Acts 11.28 Act. 17.6 Act. 17.31 Act. 19.27 Act. 24.5 Rom. 10.18 Hebr. 1.6 Heb. 2.5 Rev. 3.10 Rev. 12.9 Rev. 16.14 untill I make thine enemies thy footstool ver 13. but this must be fulfilled on earth to men in Christ through him For the Apostles first phrase in that fifth verse of the second Chapter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is spoken with great emphasis with a double emphaticall Article sounding as we speake in English THAT SAME world even THAT that is TO COME and yet still meaning a state on earth for the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 rendered world in propriety of signification signifies the inhabited world as men inhabite their dwelling houses 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 an house being of the Kindred of the world and in common use it is put to signifie the world on earth yea so used by the Holy Ghost in the New Testament at least fifteen times * The Greek is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. The word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 being the first Aor of subj mood as I conceive hath the signification of a suture Of this place of Scripture see more in this third Book chap. 2. Sect. 10. and sometimes in those places earth is adjoyned for plainer expression yea used so to signifie the world on earth in most of the said places as thereby to meane the Roman Monarchy the Romans then ruling the whole earth when the Apostles wrote as in two of those places viz. Luke 2.1 Act. 11.28 the Roman Emperour is expressed by name Yea lastly so constantly used in the New Testament
we see him for the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour which is not a subjection of the INHABITABLE WORLD TO COME unto him much lesse of ALL THINGS therein The Angels are in Heaven as well as he and so in place they as well as hee are above the things below But Christ must have the inhabited world and All things so subject to him and ' under him as they shall not be to Angels So that if we heed the Text and that which followes the Apostle tells us that in one way and sense Christ is exalted above all viz. in his possession of the highest Heaven through sufferings But withall this is in another place then the inhabited world to come viz. the world on earth yet to succeed and upon another account then the precise formall dominion over it viz. to taste of death for every man And it was in prosecution of a designe verse 10. viz. to bring many sonnes to glory not a perfecting of a thing finished viz. of the atchievement and attainment of his absolute dominion on earth over Turkes Jewes Papists and Heathens c. But this must be Christ and his members must have absolute dominion over the world below in that estate of it that is yet to come 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the habitation of the world is not to be subjected to the Angels Heb. 2. v. 5. They are but the Churches servants It is an estate that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to come after Pauls time though Christ had before ascended But it must be subject to MAN and the SONNE OF MAN v. 6. God 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 made him a little lower and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for a little time Christ or Christians were not lower at all then Angels in nature or spirituall condition but onely in outward dominion and state of life Phil. 2. Heb. 2. and that but for a little time till the time of that world to come on earth which must be before the last day of judgement for then is not any subjection of any thing to Saints or Christ but he and so they to lay down all dominion 1 Cor. 15.28 SECT V. Wherein the Promises God made to Abraham Gen. 12.1 2 3. Gen. 15.4 5 6. Gen. 17.1 2 3 4 5 6 7. Gen. 18.18 Gen. 22.18 paralleled with other promises to his posterity Gen. 26.4 Gen. 48.19 v. 26. and with the Apostles explications and applications of those Promises Rom. 4. v. 3. to v. 25. Gal. 3. v. 6. to 17. Heb. 11. v. 8. to 17. are discussed for the cleering of the said generall Position Gen. 12. v. 1. Now the Lord had said unto Abram Get thee out of thy Country c. Verse 2. And I will make of thee a great Nation and I will blesse thee and make thy name great and thou shalt be a blessing Verse 3. And I will blesse them that blesse thee and curse him that curseth thee and in thee all families of the earth shall be blessed Gen. 15. v. 4. Behold the word of the Lord came to Abram saying This shall not be thine heire but he that shall come forth out of thine owne bowels shall be thine heire And he brought him forth abroad and said Look now toward heaven and tell the Starres if thou be able to number them And he said unto him so shall thy seed be Vers 6 And he beleeved in the Lord and he counted it to him for righteousnesse Gen. 17. v. 1. The Lord appeared to Abram and said unto him I am the Almighty God c. Verse 2. And I will make my Covenant between me and thee and will multiply thee exceedingly Verse 3. And God talked with Abram saying Verse 4. As for me behold my Covenant is with thee and thou shalt be a Father of many Nations * In the Heb. it is both in the 4. v. 5. vers 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is A Father of a MULTITUDE of Nations Neither shall thy name be called any more Abram but thy name shall be Abraham for a Father of many Nations have I made thee * Verse 6. And I will make thee exceeding fruitfull and I will make Nations of thee and KINGS shall come of thee V. 7. And I will establish my Covenant between mee and thee and thy seed after thee in their Generations for an everlasting Covenant Verse 8. And I will give unto thee and thy seed after thee the land wherein thou art a stranger all the land of Canaan for an EVERLASTING possession and I will bee THEIR GOD. Gen 18.18 Abraham shall surely become a great and a mighty Nation and all the Nations of the earth shall be blessed in him Gen. 22. v. 15 16. The Angel of the Lord called to Abraham c. by my selfe have I sworne that in blessing I will blesse thee and in multiplying I will multiply thy seed as the starres of Heaven and as the sand which is upon the Sea-shore and thy seed shall possesse the gates of his enemies ver 18. In thy seed all the Nations of the earth shal be blessed Gen. 26.4 The Lord appeared to Isaac and said I wil make thy seed to multiply as the Stars of Heaven and wil give unto thy seed all these Countries and in thy seed shal all the Nations of the earth bee blessed Gen. 48. ver 19. And his father Jacob refused and said I know it my Sonne I know it that Manasseh is the first borne he also shal become a People and he also shall be great but truly his younger brother Ephraim shall be greater then he and his seed shal become a MVLTITUDE of NATIONS * Heb. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is THE FVLNESSE OF THE GENTILES whence the Apostles phrase Rom. 11.25 The fulnesse of the Gentiles shall come ver 20. And he blessed them in that day saying In thee shal Israel blesse saying God make thee as Ephraim and as Manasseh and he set Ephraim before Manasseh Gen. 49. ver 26. The blessings of thy Father have prevailed above the blessings of my Progenitors unto the utmost bounds of the everlasting hills they shal be on the head of Joseph and upon the crowne of the head c. Rom. 4. ver 11. And Abraham received the signe of Circumcision a seale of the righteousnesse of the faith which he had yet being uncircumcised that he might be the Father of all them that beleeve though they be not circumcised ver 13. For the promise that hee should be the Heire of the world was not to Abraham and his seed through the Law but through the righteousnesse of faith ver 16. Therefore it is of faith that it might be by grace to the end the Promise might be sure to all the the seed not to that only which is of the Law but to that also which is of the faith of Abraham who is the FATHER OF US ALL. ver 17. As it is written I have made thee a father of many
Felix Jun. and the Country of Madianaea on the South of Arabia Hieron Fourthly Midian of whom came the Midianites those arch enemies of the Jews for which God commanded to vexe them of whom was Balaam which gave that wicked counsell against Israel Their maine Country also had from them the name of Madianitis in the borders of Arabia petraea But because also some of them dwelt in the Countries adjoyning to the Ishmaelites therefore they are sometimes called Ishmaelites though of so different an original as aforesaid Gen. 37.25.28 Judg. 7.33 and 8.24 Fifthly There came of Keturah Ishbak who was the founder of Laodicea Scabiosa in Suria Sixthly Shuah of whom came the Saccai inhabiting the East part of Syria by Batanaea Jun. Seventhly Sheba whose posterity dwelt in Arabia deserta Prerer Jun. Eightly Dedan of whom came the ' Dedaneans who inhabited as Hieron supposeth in Aethiopia or in the Country next to the Idumeans as it seems to be hinted Jer. 49.7 8. or in Adadi in Syria Palmerene Jun. Ninthly Epha whose Country is named in Isa 60.6 and is scituated beyond Arabia called Saba Hieron l. 17. in Isa Tenthly Epher of whom saith Josephus Africa had its name Of the rest named in that of Gen. 25. the Countries are not knowne only they are said in verse 6. to dwell East-ward in the East-Country that is Arabia or Syria So that we see many Kingdomes and Nations both of Jews and Gentiles thus far as we have computed came out of Abrahams loynes according so the aforesaid promises and how many Nations since who is able to reckon Now say the above-mentioned Scriptures out of the Old Testament the multitude of Nations to come of Abraham are to partake of the Covenant as an everlasting Covenant God to be their God Yea ALL the Nations of the earth to be blessed in ABRAHAM and to be blessed IN HIS SEED often there repeated 4 ¶ The Lord addes in the said Old-Testament quotations an obsignation or sealing if I mistake not of all the three particulars afore mentioned viz. Of spirituall salvation Of an happy possession of the earth and of a numerous multiplication in Jewes and Gentiles over the face of whole earth accompanied with that salvation in that their injoyment of that universal possession 1 Of salvation he gave them the seale of Circumcision which was a signe and seal of the Covenant of grace viz. of the righteousnesse of faith Rom. 4.11 And it is said afore in that Gen. 17. that this Covenant or token of the Covenant should be in their flesh for an everlasting Covenant because as in the substance God would continue a Seal of his Covenant for ever till the Restitution of all things as the Covenant it selfe should bee for ever still the same salvation should be sealed still the same use of the seale to confirme the assurance of faith still upon the same ground of the tenor of the Covenant of grace as we shall see after onely the matter of the seale to bee changed viz. the Green waxe of water to be put in the room of the Red waxe of bloody Circumcision Secondly Of that happy possession upon the face of the whole earth he gave them the seale of the seven Kingdomes of the whole Country of Canaan and that for an everlasting possession so as still as it is annexed to be their God For from the time they first entred Canaan according to the promise they were never universally and absolutely expelled out of it and shall there keep possession till they be most gloriously restored to the possession of it the seed of Abraham the beleeving Jews and Gentiles ruâ—â—ng there and over the whole earth as long as ever there shall be any habitation on earth as the Rere of testimonies yet to march up shall abundantly testifie And if any enemies shall rise up against the Nations of Jewes and Gentiles the seed of Abraham by faith they shall as surely conquer them as they did the land of Canaan Thirdly Of their numerous blessed multiplication God gives the seale of changing Abrams name to Abraham He should not be onely Ab-rom that is an High-father but Ab-Rom-Hamon an High-father of a multitude even as he changed Sarais name to the same intent from Sarai my Mistresse to Sarah A or the Mistresse § 4 Sutably how are the said promises to Abraham extended in their utmost breadth to his posterity viz. Isaac Jacob Joseph Ephraim and Manasseh Gen. 26.4 Gen. 48.19 Gen. 49.26 quoted afore at large all sounding of an universall happy dominion over the face of the whole earth § 5 Consonant to this Old-Testament Plat-forme doe the excellent Master-builders the Apostles in the New Testament reare the superstructure with distinct reference to the places and particulars of the Old ¶ 1. For Salvation they often expresse it under the notion of the righteousnesse of faith and of imputing faith for righteousnesse and of being blessed through faith ¶ 2. For Possession it is afore expressed by the Apostle that their leaving of Mesopotamia their owne native Country and never returning though they might and after that their sojourning in Canaan so long as strangers and pilgrims in Tents and Tabernacles though it was promised them for an inheritance and doing all this by faith not seeing the Promise fulfilled by sence did argue that they sought a Country an heavenly one a City that hath foundations prepared of God made and built by God All which how can we better and safelier expound then by the Scriptures which having told us Rev. 20. we shall reigne with Christ on earth as the meaning hath been proved even where Gog and Magog shall after make opposition a thousand yeares In the next chapter viz. 21. they shew us the place and state where and how viz. in the New Heaven and New EARTH in the holy City new Hierusalem coming downe from Heaven where God himselfe will be with them and be their God and all teares shall be wiped away with many other Characters and Circumstances fully answering to that afore of Heb. 11. Which as we have before demonstrated cannot be meant of the Highest Heaven but of a state on earth The like wherof we have in 2 Pet. 3.13 that the Saints shall injoy a new earth according to Gods promise which Promise extant Esa 65.17 will not indure to be interpreted but of a state on earth as the branches of it evince ¶ 3. For Multiplication As the generality of the world Jews and Gentiles have according to the flesh come out of the loynes of Abraham so the Apostles exposition of the Promises holds forth that the generality of the world shall be the Children of Abraham by faith and blessed in THAT SEED of him viz. Christ That they that are of the faith of Abraham are the children of Abraham That God would justifie the HEATHEN through faith according to the GOSPEL he preached to Abraham That the sence of that Promise In thee Abraham all the
indure for ever Psal 136. v. 4. v. 13 14 15 in bringing them to the land of promise Lastly The Lords Supper doth not onely in the elements typifie our spiritual nourishment and cherishment by Christ but in the posture of sitting signifies our reigning and judging with Christ the whole earth as ruling and judging is oft expressed in Scripture by sitting Mat. 19.28 Rev. 4.4 Rev. 20.4 even as in Luke 22.29 30. Eating and drinking at a table with Christ is put as a signe of a Kingdome and sitting on seats or thrones a signe of judicature § 6 The summe of this Section is that there shall come so many out of the loynes of Abraham both of Jewes and Gentiles to whom God will be their God and blesse them over the face of the whole earth in the seed of Abraham making them partakers of the righteousnesse of faith c. as is afore more largely enumerated that the generality of the whole world shall become beleevers and be the governou of the entire universe All which must be fulfilled as sure as God cannot lie § 7 But these things in all those promises aforesaid have never yet been fulfilled The ten Tribes carried away by Salmanazar remaine still scattered among the Heathen not having received if ever they heard of the word of faith the Gospel of Christ And the two Tribes of Juda and Benjamin do not to this day acknowledge the New Testament The Turkes Arabians Hagarens Tartarians Persians Indians c. have no acquaintance with Christ and salvation We see not yet all Nations under the Stars numerous as the sands of the sea blessed in the seed of Abraham viz. in Christ converted to the faith Some inhabitants of a few spots of ground are called Christians but the most and mightiest Imperialties or dominions know not Christ Wee see not yet Ephraims posterity according to Gen. 48.19 afore quoted to become 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the fulnesse of the Gentiles or to come in as the fulnesse of the Gentiles which phrase the Apostle exactly keeping Rom. 11.25 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 untill the fulnesse of the Gentiles come in and so all Israel to be saved interprets it of the conversion of the world of Iewes and Gentiles to faith in Christ But alas for the posterity of Ephraim they are not delivered from their captivity temporall or spiritual to this day Nor is one Kingdome of ten over the whole world converted unto the faith Nor is Iosephs posterity blessed according to Gen. 49.26 to the utmost bounds of the everlasting Hils that is saith learned Ainsworth over the face of the whole earth Nor have the Hebrews since the Apostle wrote to them that Epistle so named attained any Country or City that is heavenly or built by God being not converted to this day as fit for any better condition on earth or in heaven And they must be in a better spiritual condition on Earth according to the tenour of all the Scriptures afore they can be received into Heaven Of which more after especially when we come to discusse the 4. Chap. of this Epistle to the Hebrews § 8 Nor can these things be fulfilled at the last general judgement being every way inconsistent with that time being no time then of conversion or dominion of men but of confusion of the wicked and the subjection of all the good yea of Christ himselfe as Christ to God who then is to be all in all as we have oft minded out of 1. Cor. 15.28 SECT VI. Wherein the Prophesie in Numb 24.16 to 25 is discussed as proof of the generall Position Numb 24. v. 16. He hath said or he assuredly saith which heard the words or oracles of God and knew the knowledge of the most High which saw the vision of the Almighty falling into a trance but having his eyes open Verse 17. I shall see him but not now I shall behold him but not nigh There shall come a STAR out of lacob and a Scepter shall arise out of Israel and shall smite or smite thorow the corners or Princes of Moab and shall destroy Heb. * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall unwall all the children of Sheth Verse 18. And Edom shall be a possession Seir also shall be a possession for his enemies and Israel shall doe valiantly Verse 19. Out of Iacob shal come he that shall have dominion and shall destroy him that remaineth of the City Verse 20. And when he looked on Amalek he took up his parable and said Amalek was the first of the Nations †That is the first of the Nation warred against Israel Exod. 17. but his latter end shall be that hee perish for ever Verse 21. And he looked on the Kenites and tooke up his parable and said Strong is thy dwelling place and thou puttest thy nest in a rock Verse 22. Neverthelesse the Kenite Heb. Kain * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall be wasted untill Ashur shall carry thee away captive Verse 23. And he took up his parable and said Alas who shall live when God doth this ** The Geneva Notes say Some read Oh who shall not perish when the encâ—â—y that is ANTICHRIST shall set himself up as God Verse 24. And ships shall come from the coasts of Chitim and shal afflict Ashur and shall afflict Eber and he shall perish for ever § 1 IT will be a faire Preface to what we are to infer from these words to our purpose if in the first place wee give you the exposition of the Verses above quoted in the words of the Hebrews Targum Talmud and Rabbins and of the Greek Septuagint The man that spake this was Balaam but set downe by Moses as a most sure Prophesie and therefore shews us what a full manifestation he had from God of this Prophesie verse 16. It is not unusuall with God sometimes for extraordinary ends to reveale some particular Prophesies to some men at some certaine juncture of time for a present occasion whiles such men are unregenerate So to Caiphas Joh. 11.49 50 51. So to the Sibyls of whom afore in the first Book in the large quotations of Lactantius I say not that God gives them the spirit of Prophesie but that God dictated to them some particular Prophesies as of this Balaam it is said the Lord met him and gave him a charge what he should say and so he was enforced by the power of divine providence to blesse instead of cursing And of this Prophesie we have some touches and phrases repeated in the New Testament 2 Pet. 1.19 Until the day-star arise Rev. 22.16 I Jesus c. am the root of David c. and the bright and morning star yea and some of this Prophesie is punctually fulfilled in the Old Testament so long since as Davids time as wee shall see after § 2 The matter of the Prophesie is very considerable to our businesse if we understand it aright wherein the Hebrews admirably assist for of them
to compare Dan. 2.35 where all the foure Mettals are utterly broken to peeces and the little stone cut out of the mountaine became a great mountaine and filled the whole earth But I shall God assisting give you a more particular account viz. that both Iewes and Christians do understand the promises in this Chapter of a visible glorious estate of the Church yet to be on the face of the earth before the ultimate end of the world Of the latter sort wee will name onely the famous Piscator Alsted and Heurnius Of the former in briefe thus Their Talmud Gemara Sanhedrim pereck R. Ketina c. assert that this world doth continue six thousand yeers In one it shall be destroyed so as to be purified as gold and freed from the CURSE of which it is said Isa 2. The LORD ALONE SHALL BEE EXALTED IN THAT DAY And R. Scelomo quoting also this second of Isa saith The Lord shall arise and shake the earth terribly in the day of judgement when he shall breake the wicked It is usuall with the learned Iewes to call this glorious time of Christs visible Kingdome on earth a day of judgement not dissentaneous to the wont of Scripture to compellate and compare any great time of Reformation as a day of judgement Psal 50.1 c. 1 Pet. 4.17 And indeed as John shewes us Rev. 11. in the beginning of this most glorious visible Kingdome there is a beginning of the day of judgement in that the wicked alive that submit not to Christ are destroyed and the living Saints have a reward given them together with the resurrection of the deceased Saints which St. Iohn calls the first Resurrection R.D. Kimchi saith In that day in the dayes of Messiah when the Lord shall execute his judgement on the wicked THE LORD ALONE SHALL BE EXALTED Isa 2. The Lord alone shall be exalted saith he is as much as to say AND THE LORD SHALL BE KING OVER ALL THE EARTH We might quote more but for hast and brevity § 4 And this must be IN THE LAST DAYES saith the second of Isa or nearer the Hebrew IN THE LAST OF DAYES or UTMOST END OF DAYES Therefore if the Prophet had looked at no further time then that of Christs first coming in the flesh he would not have called that the last of dayes since which have passed above one thousand six hundred and fifty yeers The last of dayes properly signifies those after which Aeternity next and immediately follows As it doth after the compleating of the thousand yeers of this visible Kingdome § 5 These things being premised let us view whether the promises afore-quoted out of the second of Isaiah have been fulfilled to this day 1 ¶ Surely that in the second verse and part of the third That the mountaine of the Lords house shall be established on the HEAD of the mountaines c. and peoples shall come and say Come ye and let us goe up to the mountaine of the Lord c. hath not been hitherto fulfilled and compleated For as yet neither the visible power and glory of Christ nor of his Church so as for Gentiles to say Come let us go up c. hath been established over the HEAD the Pope of the seven Hils of Rome or over the Turk the HEAD of the foure Hils of Ierusalem or over the height of power and glory of the Hils of the generality of the PEOPLES Gentiles or Nations of the world The Church at Ierusalem such as it was in Christs time was in Captivity under the Heathen Roman Empire and so continued till the rise of the Roman Bishops and immediately after that thraldome were subdued to the Turkes who keeps them in that thraldome to this day The Heathen Romans refused at the first the Lord Christ by vote of the Senate and after persecuted his Church for many yeers And the Turks blaspheme Christ in their Alcoran and hath warred against his Church from age to age since their rise And the rest of the world for the generality are Indians Barbarians and Semi-beasts that know neither God nor themselves nor what Christ is nor what a Christian is 2 ¶ Nor was the house of the Lord established in the top of the mountaines that is upon Zion the highest of the foure Hils of Jerusalem For presently after Christs death persecution scattered Christians from Jerusalem Act. 8. And within forty yeers or thereabout after Christs ascension the Temple of Jerusalem was destroyed and after a while the City and for about three hundred yeers onward the Church of Christ was extremely persecuted by the Heathen Romans and anon after Constantines time onely excepted or little more they were sorely persecuted by the Arian Hereticks So that instead of all Nations going up to the house of the Lord on the top of the Mountaines for divine worship Christian Jews and Gentiles were scattered among all Nations And though Act. 2. there were a handfull of severall Nations at Hierusalem if they were Gentiles and not rather Jewes yet this was farre from ALL NATIONS FLOWING to it saying Come let us goe up to the house of the Lord and he will teach us of his wayes and we will walk in his pathes For the generality of those very men Act. 2. mocked the Apostles whiles they taught them the wayes of the Lord. And as at Ierusalem so in the Countries round about the Christians were every where persecuted as the history of the Acts doth all along give us a particular account 3 ¶ Nor is that fulfilled to this day which is prophesied in the fourth verse Christ hath not hitherto so judged among the Nations and rebuked many people that they have beaten their swords into plow shares and their speares into pruning-hooks so that Nation hath not lifted up sword against Nation neither learned war any more 4 ¶ Nor hath that been yet fulfilled which is in verse 10 11 12 c. to v. 17. That men have so dreaded the Majesty of the Lord that they have hid themselves That the lofty lookes of men have been humbled and their haughtinesse bowed downe That THE LORD ALONE HATH BEEN EXALTED That the day of the Lord of hosts hath been upon EVERY ONE that is proud and lofty upon all the Cedars of Lebanon and Okes of Bashan that are lifted up upon ALL the high mountaines and hills that are lifted up upon EVERY high tower upon every fenced wall upon ALL the ships of Tarshish and upon all the pleasant pictures to bow down and bring down low all these so that the Lord alone may be exalted in THAT DAY Alas ever since Christs comming in the flesh the whole world generally hath been very high proud against the Lord Christ Antichrist hath been much exalted and the Lord hath been least exalted his Honour his Cause his People have been trampled on In the time of Constantine the Great some little was done in the Roman Empire for a little time for the Church of
c. even all the people that dwelt in the land of Egypt in Pathros answered Jeremiah c. See also Ezek. 29.14 and chap. 30. v. 14. And those Pathrusim were of the linage of Mitsraim or Egyptus Gen. 10.14 1 Chron. 1.12 Others say it signifies Parthos the Parthians of the Country of Parthia with an easie and usuall Metathesis which Parthia is on the borders of Media Or say others it may be Petra in Arabia of which see Esa 16.1 The land from SELA or as it is in the margine Petra whence Arabia Petrea Others say it is a part of Lybia inhabited by the Pharusii mentioned by Pliny and Ptolome and seated neer the Atlantick Sea Of the Jewes being scattered unto the Apostles times in the said Parthia Media Egypt Lybia Arabia we read in Act. 2.9 10 11. And from CUSH that is Ethiopia Compare chap. 18.1 And from ELAM that is Persia And from SHINAR that is a region in Chaldea Gen. 11.28 Jer. 51.24 35. Ezek. 23.16 And of their scattering even to the Apostles times in Elam or Persia and Mesopotamia which was part of Chaldea c. See Act. 2.9 10 11. And 1 Pet. 1.1 And from HAMATH that is Cilicia in Asia the lesse Of their scattering there see likewise Act. 2. ibid. and 1 Pet. ibid. Paul also an Hebrew saith of himselfe that he was borne at Tarsus a chiefe City of Cilicia And from the ISLANDS OF THE SEA that is the maritine Countries bordering upon the Sea or any Kingdome on the other side of the Sea from Judea as it is a common phrase in Scripture the Jews not understanding the nature of other Countries being no travellours or Sea-men to leave their Nationall Church for the barbarous Countries as they were in the times of the Old Testament So that Islands of the Sea comprehends all the World beside the Countries of Judea and Samaria So that according to this enumeration and description God must set his hand the second time to recover all the remnant of his people that are left in any of the said Countries Which is not yet done and therefore yet to be fulfilled Furthermore that in the twelfth verse proves that the Prophesie of this Chapter is not yet fulfilled Arg. 6 The words of that twelfth verse are And he shall set up an Ensigne for the NATIONS Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for the GENTILES that is The unbeleeving people without the Church that had not yet received the word And shall assemble the outcasts of ISRAEL that is the ten Tribes and gather together the dispersed of IUDAH that is the two Tribes from the FOURE CORNERS of the EARTH For first we see that this recovering of Gods Elect the Second time is of the Iews together with the Gentiles which recovering them the second time wee never saw yet At Christs first coming at his Incarnation most Iewes and Gentiles held off from imbracing the Gospel as we see in the story of the Evangelists and Acts of the Apostles And soon after Constantines time and downward more of both fell off And at this day all the Iews and the most of the Gentiles continue in infidelity Therefore this gathering of both is yet to come before the destruction of all unbeleevers at the ultimate judgement Secondly observe how distinctly the Prophet names 1 The Gentiles 2 The out-casts of Israel that is of the ten Tribes 3 The dispersed of Iudah that is of the two Tribes which was not done at the returne of the captivity out of Babylon or at the coming of Christ in the flesh nor to this day Thirdly Take notice that the elect of all Iewes Israelites and Gentiles must be called and gathered together from the foure corners of the earth that is from all parts of the world which is larger then Babylon which is not done to this day but the Iewes and Israelites are still found inhabiting in all quarters of the world as Travellours and Sea-faring men see with their eyes and the Rabbins confesse in their books And yet further it appears that the Prophesie of this Chapter is not to this day fulfilled by that in verse 13. c. to the end of the Chapter Arg. 7 The summe whereof is That all envy between Iudah and Ephraim shall cease and that all other that will not obey and comply with the Iewes in a right Gospel-worship of God shall be destroyed viz. The Philistims in the West and the people of the East all of them of Moab Ammon Edom and Egypt and there shall be a way for the remnant of the Iewes from Assyria as there was to them at their coming up out of Egypt But the Iewes in a great part are under the tyranny of the Turk and the rest scattered in all Nations none of their enemies are destroyed nor doe any Nations comply with them in point of Religion to this very day Lastly Arg. 8 It appears by the twelfth Chapter the seal of the eleventh that the Prophesie of the eleventh Chapter is not yet fulfilled For the Iews never yet were so delivered as in the 11. Chap. as in praise therefore to sing that Song of Thanks-giving in the twelfth Chapter Their harps are hung up as at their scattering in Babylon I my selfe have heard some of them bemoaning themselves that this their last captivity or dispersion is longer then ever any before They have not hitherto as it is in that Song verse 4. Declared the name and famous facts of God among the peoples but rather in refusing Christ have obscured his name Nor have they as verse 5. praised for the excellent things that God should doe for them in all the earth Now let the wise and understanding Reader review all that hath been said and be judge himselfe whether the Prophesie of this eleventh Chapter of Isaiah hath been fulfilled to this day And if not sure he will not dream of a fulfilling of it at the ultimate judgement there being something almost in every verse inconsistent with that time when no government as described in the first five verses is remaining in Christs hands 1 Cor. 15.28 c. No dwelling of the Wolfe and Lamb together as held forth in verse 6 7 8. No lifting up of an Ensign to bring men to a seeking after Christ as verse 10. No filling the earth with the knowledge of the Lord c. as v. 11. Therefore as sure as God is true this is yet to be fulfilled afore the ultimate day of judgement SECT XIV § 1 THe fourth place in Isaiah is Chapter 14. verse 1. c. to verse 8. Verse 1. The Lord will have mercy on JACOB and will yet choose ISRAEL and set them in their OWN LAND and the STRANGERS shall be joyned with them and they shall cleave to the house of JACOB Vers 2. And the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 PEOPLES shall take them and bring them to their place And the house of Israel shall possesse them in the land of the
brightnesse of the Sunne shall be nothing to it At which time as it follows the Lord of Hosts in Christ Iesus saith Diodat shall reign on Mount Zion and in Ierusalem types of the universall Church and that in great glory before his Ancientours who were the Church of the Jews by blood as well as by Profession Christ being considered as man as the local circumstance of Zion and Ierusalem cals for that notion § 3 Calvin again cleerly intimateth in many circumlocutions that his sense of this Text is that Christ speaking in the future of time after Calvins time shall establish his Church on earth in a most glorious estate Ego non dubito quin persequatur Propheta c. That is I doubt not but that the Prophet prosecutes the consolation which he had touched in the former verse to this sense or effect when the Lord shall visite his people and shall purge his Church from their filthinesses he shall settle his Kingdome and that so illustrious that it shall obscure the Sunne and Stars with its splendor which kinde of speech is usuall with the Prophets as we have already seen But here Isaiah speaks of the BODY of the Church and not onely of the HEAD Seeing therefore the Lord will ESTABLISH HIS KINGDOME upon MOUNT ZION so great shall be the Magnificence thereof in the INSTAURATION of the People as that the things that otherwise shone in the sight of men shall now be as darknesse Which that he might expresse to the life be names these things that above all are most splendent The word RULING is improperly drawn to signifie Gods vengeance For although God be said to reigne when he acts the office of a Judge yet this speech so comprehending within it concerning THE KINGDOME of God in MOUNT ZION it alwayes hath the notation of mercy and salvation For hee speaketh of the RESTITUTION of the Church Whence it follows that this is not fulfilled but in Christ He making a precise mention of Elders or Ancients useth a Synecdoche which is exceeding usuall in Scripture For he taketh a speciall part of the Church for the whole body of the Church yet not without a consult purpose He calls by the name of Ancients as well the PRIESTS as other RULERS who were chiefe over Discipline and Manners by whose moderation and prudence the rest are to be governed Under their names he comprehends all the people not onely because they represent the whole body as under their shadow the people was covered but also that believers might conceive hope of a future ORDER For otherwise it would little or nothing profit that the multitude should be left dissipated in manner of a dis-membred body or confused Masse Neither is it impertinently added BEFORE the ANCIENTS that the Jewes might know that the power of God should be MANIFEST and ILLUSTRIOUS c. For SO HE REIGNES that wee may PERCEIVE HIM PRESENT WITH US For if it should be beyond our COMPREHENSION no COMFORT would redound to us thereby For GLORY others read GLORIOUSLY others GLORIOUS I had rather take it in the substantive GLORY although it makes no difference in the sense For it teacheth how great shall be the magnificence and glory of God by ERECTING THE KINGDOME OF CHRIST in that all splendor is obscured and ONLY the glory of Christ must be eminent and CONSPICUOUS Whence it follows that THEN at length God shall injoy HIS OWN RIGHT AMONG US and have his due honour WHEN ALL HIS CREATURES BEING GATHERED INTO ORDER he alone is RESPLENDENT IN OUR EYES Thus Calvin whose words and phrases here can bear no lesse then a sense favouring a visible glorious Kingdome of Christ on earth though something of it as he saith must be comprehended by faith above sense To which visibility of Christs Kingdome on earth the correlative in 22 and 23. verses answering to our relative THEN in our Text of punishing the Kings of the earth upon the earth c. doth strongly bear witnesse § 4 Now lay altogether and then judge when was this Text ever fulfilled Surely in a litterall sense as to corporall Transactions not at their returne from Babylon For then the Babylonians were not punished nor put in prison Nor were the Iews in an outward glorious condition but as in subjection still to Babylon and made a scorn by Sanballat Tobiah c. with the multitude of their adherents hindring their building discouraging their work raising lyes laying plots to indanger them So that they were as long neer upon in repairing the Temple and City of Ierusalem and setling the state thereof from the first that they began it as they had been in Captivity * See the book of Ezra Nehemiah and Haggi Nor was this Text of Isa litterally and corporally fulfilled to them at Christs being on earth being then also under captivity and reproach by the Romans †See the story of the Evangelists and Acts. and to this day in the same condition under them and all Nations in the world Nor hath this been yet fulfilled in a spiritual sense from that time to this day in that not one of ten thousand of the Gentiles admired their Levitical glory And their Ancients the Scribes Pharisees Elders and Rulers of the Synogogues and People generally opposed and persecuted Evanagelical glory And though for a spurt some few favoured the Gospel Act. 1. Act. 2. yet by and by they universally Act. 13. fell off from this Glory and so continued untill these our times § 5 Nor can these be fulfilled 〈◊〉 â—ltimate judgement For then Christ RULES not 1 Cor. 15. v. 24. v. 28. SECT XVI § 1 THe sixth place in Isaiah is that which followes at the heels of this viz. Chapter 25. throughout but especially from v. 7. to the end of the Chapter with some passages of the 26 Chapter being also a Song of praise for the glorious state of the Church to be especially those passages v. 14. v. 19. The late invention of Chapters may not hinder our prospect upon the continued sense of this Chapter inseparably depending on the former where in the last verse the Prophet having said THEN shall the Moon be confounded and the Sun ashamed WHEN the Lord of Hosts shall REIGN in Mount Zion and Ierusalem c. explained afore he now begins this Chapter with a solemne praise to God for his preparation to and manifestation of that his glorious Reign To give you the maine passages of the whole Chapter v. 1. O Lord thou art my God I will exalt thee c. v. 2. For thou hast made of a City an heap of a defenced City a ruine a palace of strangers to be no City it shall never be built v. 3. Therefore the strong people shall glorifie thee c. v. 4. For thou hast been a strength to the poore and needy in distresse a refuge from the storme a shadow from the heat when the blast of the terrible ones is a storme against the
it Isa 26. the same things John applies to the fall of Antichrist and the ruine of his nest viz. the City where he rests Rev. 16.19 we have it once The City of Nations fell and great Babylon came in remembrance before God But in Revel 18. we have it three times viz. v. 2. v. 10. v. 18. SECT XVII UPon the seventh place in Isa viz. Isa 33. v. 20 21. I will onely aske this question of all the men and books in the world When was that ever fulfilled since Isaiahs time which is here spoken viz. Thine eyes shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation a Tabernacle that shall be taken down not ONE of the stakes thereof shal EVER be removed neither shall ANY cord thereof be broken But there the Lord will be to us a place of broad rivers and streams wherein shall go no Gally with Oars nor gallant ship passe by I say when since Isaiahs Prophesie was this fulfilled For about seventy yeers after his begining to prophesie Jerusalem was taken by the King of Babylon and the King and Nobles carried away captive into Babylon And whereas they returned againe about the yeer five hundred thirty six afore Christ and enjoyed their Country a good space of time yet about one hundred sixty seven yeers afore Christ Antiochus Epiphanes being ejected out of Egypt by the Romans invades Jerusalem with a great Army and spoyles and wastes both City and Temple About threescore and eleven yeers after Christs birth the Temple was destroyed by Titus the Roman About threescore and one yeer after that viz. a hundred thirty and one after Christ the City was destroyed by Adrian the Roman Emperour After these the Saracens and Turks invade Jerusalem and Judea possessing it to this day SECT XVIII § 1 THe eighth place in Isaiah is Chap. 34. v. 1. to v. 18. wee shall need but touch upon some passages of so plaine a place as this Vers 1 2 c. Come neer ye Nations to hear and hearken ye people let the EARTH hear and ALL that is therein the WORLD and ALL things that come sorth of it observe this Prophesie concerns the whole Universe for the indignation of the Lord is upon ALL Nations and his fury upon ALL their Armies he hath utterly destroyed them he hath delivered them to the slaughter with many more illustrations and all for the sake of Zion to be avenged of Zions enemies v. 8. But there was nothing of this done at the Jewes return from Babylon carried captive thither about seventy yeers after this was spoken And at Christs Incarnation they were under the Romans power And to this day under the Turks who next succeeded the Romans in dominering over them Therefore St. John carries this down to the New Testament and the later times thereof unto the ruine of the Antichristian Nations that are incorrigible enemies of Christ whereby to make way for the glorious Restitution of which wee treat Rev. 11. There was a great Earthquake and the tenth part of the City fell and there were slain of men seven thousand a number of perfection to signifie a sufficient number for the designe were taken off The Lord takes to him his great power and destroyes them that destroy the earth Rev. 19. One sate upon a white horse called faithfull and true his eyes were as a flame of fire c. and out of his mouth went a sharp sword that with it he might smite the NATIONS and rule them with a rod of IRON And an Angel cryed with a loud voice saying to the foules c. Come and gather your selves together c. that yee may eat the flesh of Kings and of Captains and of mighty men and of horses and of them that sit on them and the flesh of ALL men both free and bond both small and great c. § 2 Againe vers 8 9 10. of this 34. Isa it is prophesied It is the day of the Lords vengeance and the yeer of recompences for the controversie of Zion And the streams thereof shall be turned into pitch and the dust thereof into brimstone and the land thereof shall become a burning pitch and it shall not be quenched night nor day THE SMOAK thereof shall go up FOR EVER Now as there was none of this acted at the returne of the Jewes from Babylon or at Christs Incarnation or since but that still Antichrist both Easterne and Westerne dominere over most of the world So Saint John in the Revelation not onely in my judgement but in the judgement of the old Geneva Notes and of our New Annotationists too carries down these Prophesies of the destruction of the Antichristian world Rev. 14.11 Rev. 18.18 and Rev. 19.3 where it is said And the smoake of their torment ascended up for ever and they have no rest day nor night who worship the Beast and his Image and whosoever receiveth the mark of his name And they saw the smoak of the burning of Babylon and her smoak went up for ever and ever § 3 Again it is prophesied in the 11. â—erse of the 34. of Isa that in and upon the desolations of the enemies of the Church shall dwell the Cormorant Bittern and the Owle and Raven which being never fulfilled to the effect of Isaiahs Prophesie unto St. Johns time hee carries it downe as our New Annotationists consent with me unto the desolations yet to be made upon Antichrist Rev. 18.2 An Angel cryed mightily with a strong voice saying Babylon the great is fallen is fallen is become the habitation of Devils and the hold of every foule spirit and a cage of every unclean and hatefull bird § 4 And which is very considerable the Hebrew Rabbins and Chaldee Paraphrase interpret these judgements denounced in this chapter of the ruine of Rome Chal. v. 9. c. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. The streams of Rome shall be turned into pitch and its dust into brimstone and its land into burning pitch So the Chaldee which Kimchy cites and approves R. Kimchi also on verse 16. hath 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The ruine of Rome With which passages the Roman Clergy being offended leave out in their Editions of those Authors the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Rome and put in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. Cuthith and Javan that is Grecia § 5 And as all these things have not been hitherto fulfilled so they cannot be imagined to be fulfilled at the ultimate judgement at which time one place will be no more desolate then another no birds inhabiting desolations c. Therefore they must bee fulfilled in a time between this Age and the ultimate judgement § 6 If it be objected that the threats of this Chapter are directed against Idumea the Country of Edom or Esau and Bozra the Metropolis thereof v. 6. It is easily answered that though Idumea bee named in particular as a most intestine Jew-hating enemy as the manner of unreconciled kindred is and to be destroyed among the rest
20 21. Assemble your selves and come draw neer together yee that are ESCAPED of the Nations Tell ye and bring them neer Look unto me and be saved all the ends of the earth c. as it follows in the words above described at large So that by the connexion it is evident that the words above quoted concerne both Jews and Gentiles § 2 The words are not onely a prescript and precept to all the ends of the earth which must needs include Jewes and Gentiles but also a Prophesie and Promise that all the ends of the earth shall look to the Lord for salvation expresse in saying Be ye saved And in the 23 verse I have sworne by my selfe unto me every knee shall bow and every tongue shall vow surely shall each one say in the Lord have I righteousnesse c. which is the plaine language of a promise and is confirmed in manner of a promise with that great confirmation Gods oath § 3 First for the two former verses viz. the 22 and 23 of looking to God and bowing the knee to him the Apostle applies them twice in the New Testament to that future submission and subjection that all the world shall yeeld to Jesus Christ long after his ascention 1 ¶ The first time is in Rom. 14. v. 8 9 10 11. Verse 8. Whether we live we live to the Lord and whether we dye we dye unto the Lord whether we live therefore or dye we are the Lords 9. For to this end Christ both dyed and rose and revived that he might be Lord both of the dead and living 10. But why dost thou judge thy brother c. wee shall all stand before the judgement seat of Christ For it is written as I live saith the Lord every knee shall bow to me and every tongue shall confesse to God In which words 1 It is plainly held forth that the Apostle proves Christs Lordship or Kingly-hood over ALL both dead and living by this place of Isa That every knee shall bow to the Lord. And that as God made Christ a Priest by an oath Psal 110. emphatically urged by the Apostle Heb. 7.20 c. so he makes him Lord and King by an oath in this place of Isaiah and so applied by our â—postle in this 14 of Rom. to signifie the certainty of the thing 2 That being delivered in the future tense it must signifie more then Christs spirituall Kingdome which he then had when Isaiah prophesied 3 That the Apostles mentioning after Christs ascention his Lordship over the dead and our standing at his judgement seat must signifie a state now after Christ is in heaven yet to come For he is not God of the dead but as they are living in soule in order to a resurrection as Christ himselfe expounds in the Evangelist 4 That this must be a state on earth before the ultimate Doom in that the Apostle out of the Prophet asserteth that all must bow to him either sincerely or at least seemingly which cannot be so cleerly understood to be feisable at the ultimate day of judgement which is the finall destruction of all not sincere to Christ and the time of Christs Resignation of all his power 1 Cor. 15. For the wicked to submit and perish in the same houre were little honour to Christ and a short time for all the world to confesse to him 5 That this is a kind of day of judgement that is the beginning or preface to the great and ultimate day of judgement at the beginning of the thousand yeers when Christ destroyes all the open obstinate wicked and sets up the Church into a glorious estate Rev. 19. latter end And Rev. 20. first six verses compare v. 8.9 c. And at this beginning or preface do all believers stand at the judgement seat of Christ Revel 11. v. 15. v. 18. Rev. 20. first six verses where they receive honour and rewards of grace and favour For according to our Apostle this bowing c. must be at SOME day of judgement But it cannot be at the ultimate finall and therefore afore at the beginning of the day of judgement viz. at the beginning of the thousand yeers 2 ¶ The second time of the Apostles application of this of Isaiah touching bowing to the submission of all unto Christ is Phil. 2 v. 8 9 10 11. Ver. 8. Being found in fashion as a man hee humbled himself and became obedient unto the death c. 9 Wherefore God also hath highly exalted him and given him a name which is above every name 10. That at the name of Jesus every knee should bow of things in heaven and things in EARTH and things under the Earth 11 And that every tongue should confesse that Jesus Christ is LORD to the glory of God the Father 1 By the quotation of the place out of Isaiah it is evident that the meaning of bowing the knee at the name of Jesus is to submit to the Lordly and Kingly power of Christ 2 Every knee both of things in heaven that is of Angels as they shall in speciall bee imployed in gathering the Church and setting up the glorious state thereof Rev. oft and in earth that is of all men and under the earth that is at Christs pleasure there shall bee no sea Rev. 21.1 must needs import a state on earth Which in the third particular is more confirmed That every tongue shall confesse that Jesus Christ is the LORD to the glory of God the Father § 4 Now this of Isaiah intended for salvation of Jews and Gentiles and as explained by the Apostle touching submission to and glorifying of Christ cannot comport with the ultimate doome As they were never yet fulfilled but rather most knees and tongues as of Turks Papists Heathens Socinians and all prophane persons whatsoever are against Christ to this day And therefore these things must have a time on earth before the ultimate judgement to bee fairely and effectually fulfilled § 5 As for the two last Verses of this 45 of Isaiah Viz. v. 24 and 25. I need no more but aske the question was that ever fulfilled which is there spoken that every knee and tongue shall come and say for so is the connexion especially according to the Hebrew Text surely in the Lord have I righteousnesse and strength Or that fulfilled there also expressed That ALL that are incensed against the Lord shall bee ashamed Or that fulfilled which is the close of all That in the Lord all the seed of Israel shall be justified and shall glory I say when ever were these fulfilled You have seen that the persons spoken of are Israel and Jacob comprehending all the seed of the twelve Tribes and all the ends of the earth of Gentiles and that the Apostle expounds The Lord by the Lord Christ Therefore I may boldly aske when ever were these fulfilled Surely to our sorrow that are Beleevers wee see the contrary of all these in the generality of all men Turks
glory to shew favour to you if we have not done well in casting you out yet the Lord should appear to their joy that had been so hated and cast out for his name sake and those their false brethren should bee ashamed § 2 In the seven and eight verses most evidently the Prophet setteth forth the manner of the conversion of the Jews I say conversion their settlement will cost longer time as it seems Dan. 12. the three last verses viz. their conversion shall bee as the birth of a child before the mother is in pain as the birth of a Nation at once which well may bee being to bee done by the appearance of Christ in the Clouds § 3 In the 10. and 11. verses All Nations must rejoyce with Jerusalem because they shall suck the breasts of her consolations that is share in her comforts ## § 4 In the twelfth verse The Lord will extend peace to Jerusalem like a River and the glory of the Gentiles like a flowing stream See a glorious conjunction of Jews and Gentiles § 5 In the 13 and 14 15 16. verses is set forth the sensible comforts of the Church and the corporall destruction of their enemies As one whom his mother comforteth so will I comfort you and ye shall be comforted in Jerusalem and when ye see this your heart shall rejoyce and your bones shall flourish like an herb and the hand of the Lord shall be known towards his servants and his indignation towards his enemies For behold the Lord will come with fire c. For by fire and by his sword will the Lord plead with all flesh and the slain of the Lord shall be many Illustrated vers 24. They shall go forth and look upon the carkasses that have transgressed against me for their worm shall not dye nor their fire be quenched and they shall be an abhorring to all flesh Which in the generall to bee taken literally is confessed both by Jews and Christians Consult our new Annotationists upon the place See Sect. 41. § 5. ¶ 2. § 6 In the 18 19 20 and 21. verses is held forth to us the congregating of all Nations both Jews and Gentiles into union of true religious worship and beholding of the glory of God and that as the Jewish Doctors expound it in his destruction of the enemies of the Church in the dayes of the Messias In the 22. verse we have the height and length of this glorious estate of the universall Church of Jews and Gentiles on earth It is no lower then a state of a new Heaven and a new Earth And it is to be perpetuated It is to remain unalterable continue say our new Annotationists for ever § 7 Now these things were never yet fulfilled according to the phrases and circumstances of the place as to the Gentiles nor in the substance as to the Jews who remaine totally unconverted to Christ and are dispersed and despised to our sorrow throughout the world But God must be true therefore these must be fulfilled and on earth before the ultimate judgement as every verse doth hint unto us And therefore St. John in the Revelation Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 and Chapter 21. doth apply these in a way of Prophesie to the glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come at the fall of Antichrist I shal give you them in summe and short because I have before so often made particular applications of them Babylon the great is fallen is fallen How much she hath glorified her selfe so much sorrow and torment shall be given her Her plagues come in one day death and mourning and famine and she shall be utterly burnt with fire Rejoyce over her thou heaven and ye holy Apostles and Prophets for God hath avenged you on her And after these things I heard a great voyce of much people c. saying Allelujah salvation and glory and honour and power unto the Lord our God for true and righteous are thy judgementss for he hath judged the great Whore that hath corrupted the earth and hath avenged the blood of his Saints And again they said Allelujah And the foure and twenty Elders said Amen Allelujah And I heard as it were the voyce of a great multitude and as the voyce of many waters and as the voyce of mighty thunderings saying Allelujah for the Lord God Omnipotent reigneth And the beast and the false Prophet were taken and cast into the lake fire And the rest were slain with the sword But the Saints reigned with Christ a thousand yeers in the new Heavens and new Earth to whom the Kings of the earth and Nations of the world bring their honour § 8 Now let him that readeth understand and consider whether he were best to beleeve his owne phantasie or the opinions of men rather then St. Johns series and system of Visions and Prophesies so aptly in phrase and matter expounding the Prophet Isaiah of a future glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come Thus of the Prophet Isaiah SECT XXVII NExt we come to the Prophet Jeremiah The first place for our purpose is in Chapter 16. verse 14 15. compared with Chapter 23. verse 3. c. to verse 9. The words of that in Chapter 16. verse 14 15. are Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that it shall be no more said The Lord liveth that brought up the children of Israel out of the land of Egypt But the Lord liveth that brought up the children of ISRAEL from the LAND OF THE NORTH and from ALL THE LANDS whither he had DRIVEN THEM and I will bring them againe into THEIR LAND that I gave unto their Fathers § 1 The Prophet calling these of whom he speaks by the name of Israel and in relation to their returne out of the Land of the NORTH and out of All Lands whither they had been driven must needs comprehend as well the ten Tribes as the two And the more cleerly to hint to us that his meaning is not onely of a reduction of them to their own Land but of their conversion unto their God and this not at a petty call of a few of them but at the great call of the generality of them all he subjoyns the bringing in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles verse 19. The Gentiles shall come unto the Lord from the ends of the earth and shall say surely our Fathers have inherited lyes c. At which time of the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles as their coming from the ends of the earth fully expresseth All Israel saith the Apostle Rom. 11.25 26. shall be saved § 2 Now let us parallel this with that in the 23. Chapter verse 3 4 5 6 7 8. wherein wee have the same expressions with further illustrations and explanations to confirme the same The words of the Prophet there are verse 3. I will gather the remnant of my flock out of ALL Countries whither I have driven them and will bring
in opposition to both sorts of evils immediately afore recounted viz. not only to false Doctrines but to cruell persecutions and therefore a corporal as well as a spiritual salvation must be here meant and these to be performed on earth viz. in the inhabited world just where the Gospel preached converted them and where they endured to the end And unto which Christ doth gloriously appear FROM heaven ver 30 c. to make up the splendor of that state on earth we here speak of Now all these things cannot be fulfilled at the ultimate generall judgement nor are they hitherto fulfilled and therefore they remaine yet to be fulfilled which Mr. Mede solidly amplifies on Jer. 10. ver 11. thus Hitherto saith he we have spoken of the accomplishment of this prophecy for so much as is already past now let us see what that is which we expect as yet to come for though in regard of former times when Ethnicisme was so large and the worshipers of the living God so small a scantling the extent of the Church be now at this day a goodly and large portion of the world yet if we consider the number of Nations yet Pagans or not Christians it will seem too scant as yet to be the accomplishment of this and other prophecies concerning the largenesse of Christs Kingdome before the end of the world For one hath well observed that Christianity at this day is not above the sixth part of the knowne world whereas the Mahumetans have a fifth and all the rest are Ethnicks and Pagans So that if we divide the world into thirty parts Christianity is but as five in thirty Mahumetanism as six and Ethnicisme as nineteen and so is Christianity the least part of all and plain Heathenism hath far above the one half of the known world and the better part of the other is also Mahumetans And though Christianity hath been imbraced in former times where now it is not yet is it now spread in those places where in those times it was not And therefore all laid together we may account Christianity at this day as large I think as ever it was since the Apostles time But that this is not that universal Kingdome of Christ that flourishing and glorious estate of the Church which yet we expect hope for my reasons are these First These frequent places of Scripture which intimate that the Lord should subdue all People all Kingdoms all Nations and all the ends of the earth unto himselfe and that all these should one day worship and acknowledge him Psal 22.27 All the ends of the world shall turn unto the Lord and all the kindreds of the nations shall worship before him for the Kingdome is the Lords and he is governor among the Nations And Psal 47. Clap your hands all yee people for the Lord is a great King over all the earth he shall subdue the people under us and the nations under our feete And againe God is King of all the earth and reigneth over the Heathen Psal 66. Make a joyfull noise unto God all yee-lands through the greatness of thy power shall thine enemies submit themselves unto thee aâ— the earth shall worship thee and sing of thee they shall sing unto thy Name The whole Psal 67. which we read every day is as it were a prophecy and prayer for this great kingdome That the way of God may be knowne upon earth and his saving health among all the Nations let the people praise thee O God let all the people praise thee Then shall the earth yeeld her increase c. God shall blesse us and all the ends of the earth shall fear him And Psal 89. All nations whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and shall glorifie thy Name for thou art great and doest wondrous things thou art God alone And Isa 2. which is a prophecy of Christs Kingdome it is said That the Idols the Lord shall utterly abolish or as some read the Idols shall utterly passe away So Esay 54.5 speaking of the amplitude of the Church of the Gentiles Thy Redeemer saith the Prophet the holy one of Israel the God of the whole earth shall be called Certainly this constant stile of universality implies more then this scantling which yet is small being but one of the least parts of the whole earth Secondly The same conclusion may be gathered from 1 Cor. 15.25 26. compared with Heb. 2.8 Christ must reigne saith St. Paul in the first place quoted till he hath put all his enemies under his feet the last enemy which shall be destroyed is death Hence it followes that Christ shall subdue all his enemies whereof the Prince of this world is the cheife before the last rising of the dead for the subduing of death that is the rising of the dead shal not be afore the rest shall be done the vanquishing of death being the last act of Christs reigning which done he shall yeeld up the Kingdome unto his Father In the other place Heb. 2.8 the Apostle speaking of the same thing alleadgeth that of Psal 8. Thou hast put all things in subjection under his feet and then adds for in that he put all in subjection under him But now marke it we see not all things put under him If any say that the Apostle speakes here of the Kingdome of Glory in Heaven and not of the Kingdom of Grace on Earth I reply first out of the former place that he speaks of such a subjection whereof the rising of the dead shall be the last act of all and which shall be before he yeelds up the kingdome to his Father But neither of these can be affirmed of the kingdome of glory but the contrary viz. The rising of the dead is at the beginning and not at the end of the Kingdome of glory and so is also his yeelding up of his kingdom unto his Father Secondly I reply out of this place that the Apostle speaks of that kingdome and subjection of the earth or state of the earth which was to come For so he speaks v. 5. Unto the Angels he hath not put in subjection 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth or state of the earth which shal be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of which we speak Here he affirms that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is that of whose subjection he meaneth If then 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signâ—â—â—s onely the earth ' and the earths inhabitants and is no where in the Scripture otherwise used I cannot see how this place can well beare any other exposition First then to confirme this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is the same which the Hebrews call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for so the Septuagint renders it whose use of speaking I doubt not but the Apostle followes But 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 most constantly signifies the habitable earth or the earth with the things that live and dwell therein whence the Septuagint though they commonly render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 yet sometimes they render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth some-times 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that which is under heaven Therefore with the Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth and that which is under the heavens If this suffice not we may yet consider that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is a participle of the feminine gender and therefore understands 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth which is inhabited Lastly wheresoever elsewhere this word is found in the New Testament it is most expresly used of the earth and inhabitants thereof In the beginning of this Epistle we reade Thou Lord in the beginning hast laid the foundations of the earth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the heavens are the workes of thine hands Mat. 24.14 This Gospel of the kingdome shall be preached 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 over all the earth and then shall the end come Luke 2.3 Then went a decree from Augustus that all the world should be taxed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The rest behinde are farre more expresse but I leave them to your owne leisure and will onely adde this one thing that our English rendring in this place of the Hebrewes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the world to come makes it not only ambiguous but seeming to meane the Kingdome of glory But we shall finde that the world in that sense is alwayes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but no where in all the Bible 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 And so I leave this with submission to the judgement of others My next reason shall be from that we read in the Revelation where the Church by the conquest of Michael set free from the Dragons fury is said to escape into the wildernesse that is into a state though of safety peace and security yet of hardship misery and scarcity for it seemes to bee an allusion to the Israelites escaping the tyranny of Pharaoh by going into the wildernesse In this wildernesse or place of hardship scarcity misery and much affliction the Church must remaine saith St. John a time times and halfe a time or as he elsewhere speaketh 1260. daies that is a yeare yeares and halfe a yeare and when this time shall be expired that is as learned Divines thinke when so many years shall be ended as those dayes are taking the beginning of our reckoning from Michaels Trophee then saith our Apostle◠shall the kingdomes of the world become the kingdomes of our Lord and of his Christ and he shal reigne for ever and ever Rev. 11.15 Whereby it should seeme that the Church is yet in the Wildernesse and that the promised happinesse of the ample and flourishing glory thereof before the end of the world is yet to come My last reason shall bee from Rom. 11. where St. Paul speaking of the future restoring and calling of the Jewes saith it shall be when the fulnesse of the Gentiles is come in I would not saith he that yee should be ignorant of this Mysterie c. ver 25. Now because the Jewes are not yet called it followeth that the fulnesse of the Gentiles is yet to come and what should then this fulnesse be but the fulnesse of the Gospels extent over all the nations of the world which our Apostle ver 15. calls life from the dead for if the casting away of the Jewes be the reconciling of the world what shall the receiving of them be but life from the dead As if the Church of the Gentiles were as yet halfe dead if it be compared with that glorious vigour and accession which shall come unto it when the Jewes shall be againe received into favour In briefe the fulnesse here spoken of is either a fulnesse of grace a fulnesse of extent or a fulnesse of time A fulnesse of time onely it cannot be because our Apostle saith this fulnesse shal enter in namely shall enter into the Church of Christ but this I see not how it can be spoken of a period of time As for a fulnesse of grace and spirituall gifts that was greater when St. Paul spake then ever it was since and therefore if it be meant it must be yet to come And for the fulnesse of extent it was as large for the number of Nations in the Apostles times as it is now in ours for as for the American Christians they are onely so in name being forced only to seeme so by the Spaniards whatsoever fulnesse then the Apostle here meaneth is yet to come I will adde only one thing more and so end this point some thinke that St. Paul in this place hath reference unto that speech of Christ Luke 21.24 where he foretels That the Jewes should fall by the edge of the sword and be led captive into all nations and Jerusalem should be trodden downe of the Gentiles untill the times of the Gentiles should be fulfilled or accomplished But it seemes to me that the fulness of the Gentiles and the fulfilling or accomplishment of their times should not be the same howsoever they may be co-incident It should rather seeme that our Saviour hath reference as to a thing knowne unto the Prophecy of Daniel where the times of the Gentiles or the times wherein the Gentiles should have dominion with the misery and subjection of the Jewish Nation are set forth in the vision of a four-fold image and foure beasts which are the foure Monarchies the Babylonian Persian Greek and Roman The first began with the first captivity of the Jewish Nation and through the times of all the rest they should be in subjection or in a worser estate under them But when their times should be accomplished then saith Daniel The Saints of the most high God shall take the kingdome and possesse the kingdome for ever and ever that is there shall be no more kingdomes after it but it shall continue as long as the world shall endure Three of these Monarchies were past when our Saviour spake and the fourth was well entred If then by Saints there are meant the Jewes which we know are called the holy people in that sense their country is called the holy Land and their City in the Scripture the holy City viz. relatively then is it plaine enough what Daniels and our Saviours words import namely a glorious revocation and kingdome of the Iewes when the time of the fourth Monarchy which then remained should bee expired and accomplished But if here by the Saints of the most High are in generall meant the Church yet by co-incident of time the same will fall out on the Iewes behalfe because St. Paul saith that at the time when the fulness of the Gentiles shal come in the Iew shall be againe restored For a conclusion the last limbe of the fourth Monarchy is in Daniel The horne with eyes which spake proud things against the most High which should continue a time times and halfe a time
and for Christ that he hath appointed to them a kingdome yea HIS kingdom ver 29 30 with which let the studious reader diligently compare Revel 11.18 Rev. 20.4 which tribulations or temptations all Converts that live on earth to any maturity of age to professe their godlinesse in life and conversation doe more or lesse undergoe on earth Act. 14.22 And therefore it is here promised that they shall be rewarded on earth as we have and shall abundantly demonstrate But if there be no such estate to be fulfilled upon earth but only a state of glory in the supreamest Heaven then all the Elect dying in their infancy to whom also the Kingdom of Heaven belongs Mark 10.14 who never indured any temptations c. shall have as much priviledge viz. the fulnesse of ultimate glory as those that have indured most and longest in temptations which seems contrary to the Text which holds forth a peculiar eminent prerogative to them that indure temptation with and for Christ compare Rev. 20.4 ¶ 2. Christ appoints unto them a kingdome as his father appointed unto him a kingdome But the father appointed unto Christ no kingdome in ultimate glory in the supreamest heavens which as on all hands t is agreed followes the ultimate judgement for then and there Christ layes downe all his Kingdomship Kingship or reigning 1 Cor. 15.24 28. And it is most improper to say the Saints the Members reigne when and where the head Christ himselfe a◠Christ doth not reigne Besides reigning in and over a Kingdome implies by an inference from relations that some are subjects to them in that Kingdome being brought under subjection to them but in the highest heaven there is nothing made subject to them If the Angels ministration be not at an end when the Church is perfected in glory yet they are said only to be servants for the Church but not subject under the Church at their command being subject under Christ alone Heb. 1.6.13 14. But if Christ according to that fore-quoted place 1 Cor. 15.24.28 doth then lay downe all his power and authority we cannot understand how the service of Angels should be thence-forward continued but in the glorious estate on earth the Saints have all the Creatures and men that truly beleeve not subject to them according to the many Prophesies afore alleadged and opened As for the Spirituall Kingdome of Christ beleevers were in that in all ages by past and therefore that could not be the meaning of this Promise and Prophesie given forth by our Saviour in this text Besides the Spirituall kingdome of Christ is the kingdome of patience as Saint John often intimates where the Saints indure those temptations Christ mentions and so cannot signifie the kingdome of reward which Christ promiseth to that induring ¶ 3. Eating and drinking are unsuitable expressions to signifie supernall eternall ultimate glory but very suitable to expresse Christs glorious Kingdome ou earth yet to come as we have before opened * Book 2. ch 2. sect 5. p. 91. ¶ 4. By the order of the words the Saints must first be in the Kingdome and then sit on Thrones and judge the Tribes of Israel But in the Spirituall kingdome of Christ they had not so done nor doth Christs speech relate to past but future and in the supreamest ultimate glory there is nothing to be judged neither persons nor things ¶ 5. Christ promising emphatically that the Saints should sit on Thrones in HIS Kingdome cannot be applied to the supreamest ultimate glory in which Christ hath no Kingdome but layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.24 25. Therefore this Kingdome here meant is yet to come before the ultimate Judgement and the state of glory is to succeed that SECT V. The fifth place in the New Testament is Acts 1.6 7. When they were come together they asked of him saying Lord wilt thou at this time restore againe the Kingdome to Israel And he said unto them it is not for you to know or as it is in the Greek it is not of you to know the times or the seasons which the Father hath put in his owne power § 1 WHat formerly hath been spoken on this text by others see before in Page 33. § 3. where they assert that the Kingdome here enquired after signifies a Kingdome to be on earth after Christs resurrection afore the ultimate Judgement § 2 And see it plainly in the text that though Christs Spirituall kingdome in the height of it by John and Christs ministry in a New Testament exaltation had been now in being these four yeares past before the putting of the question in the text and the Apostles were fully informed of the state of ultimate glory by the tenor of all the Scriptures yet they expect another kingdome viz. one to be restored to ISRAEL yea to the TWELVE Tribes of Israel for as much as at present only the two Tribes were at and about Jerusalem and they under the power of the Romans the other ten being in captivity in forreigne Nations § 3 Note further that Christ doth not deny the thing but only the manifesting of it and at this time even as he speakes in the present tence IS not not it SHALL not § 4 And therefore the Apostles then present were not by this beaten off from expecting it but rather went on preaching it Acts 3.21 largely opened afore pag. 96. Sect. 7. pag. 165. ¶ 3. and 2 Pet. 3. discussed Book 3. chap. 2. sect 51. § 2. § 5 Yea in processe of time after Christs ascension Christ did fully reveale to John the Apostle in severall Visions the thing and the time thereof Revel 1.1 the particulars whereof wee have abundantly discussed upon several Chapters of that revelation * See before on Revel 20. in 1 Booke 3 chap. Sect. 1 2 3. 4th on Rev. 1. p. 80 c. on Rev. 5. p. 73 c on Rev. 7. p. 204. on Rev. 9. p. 49. 87. on Rev. 10. p. 67. 96. on chap. 11. p. 58. 72 91. on chap. 12. p. 94. on chap. 13. p. 87. on chap. 14. p. 67 73 74. on chap. 16. p. 309. on chap. 17. p. 88 c. on chap. 18. See Book 3. c. 2. S. 45. S. 3. P. 4. on chap. 19. See p. 62. 74. 89. 56. 58. on chap. 20. See again p. 116 c. p. 55 56. 66 c. 226. on chap. 21. See p. 116. on chap. 22. see p. 94. and see after in this third Book Chap. 4. Sect. 12. and shal more hereafter ** Lastly if Christ had here meant either his Spirituall kingdome or the kingdome of ultimate glory he would not have been shye to declare those unto them having been alwayes free to preach and manifest them from time to time to all his Disciples See John 14. c. to the end of the seventeenth Chapter and often elsewhere SECT VI. The sixth place in the New Testament is Rom. 11.25 26 27. vers
the terme and end of the world In the Talmud wee read 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. The world shall endure six thousand yeers in one it shall be destroyed upon which many comment thus The ELEMENTARY and TERRESTRIAL world shall endure six thousand yeers and in the seventh thousand all shall return to their ancient chaos of which they were made And after that a New world shall exist And that likewise after it hath stood six thousand yeers shall also relapse to its former Chaos And then the revolution of the world shall endure for nine and forty thousand yeers And after that the heavens and the earth shall be annihilated * It seems by this that what the doctrine of Mahomet said of 1000 yeers and 49000 was learned of these Rabbins All this they thinke to be shadowed forth partly by the six dayes of the Creation because according to the Psalmist Psal 90.4 A thousand yeers in the sight of the Lord are but as yesterday Partly by the Law and the Commandement That six yeers the land should be tilled in the seventh it should rest and in the fiftieth the Jubile should be celebrated As for my opinion saith R. Menasse I thinke That after six thousand yeers the world shall be destroyed upon one certaine day or in one houre that the orbs of heaven shall make a stand as unmoveable that there shall be no more generation or corruption and all things by the resurrection shall be renovated and return to a better condition And this saith he out of doubt is the opinion of the most learned Aben Ezra who commenting on that place of Isaiah Chapter 65.17 Behold I create new heavens and a new earth c. saith thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. Rather we are to say that the Heavens are expansed and that God will make new the aire to be singular good c. and then also shall there bee added to the earth a fresh vigor whereby it shall bee made New According to which verdict of Aben-Ezra saith Menasse There is a total and universal reforming or new-framing of the world And although the Text hath it New Heavens yet there is no necessity nor doth the sense require it that we should understand New Heavens to be meant of other Heavens diverse from these now in being but onely that there shall be a certain Instauration and Reformation of them into better And whereas afore the Ancients said that after six thousand yeers the world shall be destroyed in one the meaning is not that after six thousand yeers should be nothing how can it be measured by ONE Againe the word Destroy doth not signifie a total annihilation but onely a ruine or lapsing of things Therefore from those words cannot be concluded that the world shall be reduced to nothing but as R. Hasday thinketh 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. Nothing else can be gathered from the aforesaid speeches but that there is a CERTAIN NECESSARY ETERNITY OF THE WORLD IN SPECIE or KIND that is that the world be not plainly consumed and turned out into nothing but still bee turned into a better world Accordingly R. Huna saith concerning R. Joseph Galilean even those heavens of which it is written I create new Heavens are already created in six dayes in Genesis And suteably in that 65. of Isa 17. speaking of creating a new earth he doth not say meerly 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 new but with an additional of an emphatical article 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 this same earth New So that as Psal 102.25 26. The heavens and the earth waxing old as a garment are CHANGED as a new drest garment And to the same purpose the Ancients speak * Par. 30. Noah say they saw the New world yet at that time the world was not altogether destroyed but renewed according to Psal 102.26 The summe is That the world shall not be destroyed for a thousand yeers but in one day or punctum of an houre the earth shall suffer a mighty change and upon that change immediately shall follow the resurrection of the dead and a new world Even as it is in Zoar * Parasah Toldoth Ishac 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From the hour of the resurrection of the dead the world shall remain stable And Lactantius Firmianus intimates that he had received it from a Cabalist that the terme of six thousand yeers being consummated the state of all humane affairs shall be formed into a better condition ¶ 5 In the fifth chapter is held forth by the Rabbins what kind of ruine there shall be of the world before the great restauration of it yet to come And concerning the Jews war with GOG and MAGOG All the Rabbins saith Menasse Ben Israel agree in this That theISRAELITES after their return into their own Country at the time of their redemption are not to injoy a full and perfect tranquillity and peace until the last war with Gog and Magog shal be finished For it shall come to passe saith he that after the Israelites shall returne into Palestine that Nation of Gog and Magog shall come to invade and possesse that Country and that with an huge multitude of men and infinite forces of souldiers with the same hope and mind to recover the Kingdome and Empire to themselves as the Goths and Vandals accompanied with a multitude of vile persons subjected unto themselves most puissant Kingdomes and triumphed over them And although perhaps they may be perswaded that Monarchy of the Jewes to bee erected not without the singular divine providence of God yet haply they may thinke that it shall continue but for a time and so may conclude that it will bee as possible for them to subvert and subdue it as it was for Nebuchadnezzar and Titus Vespasian formerly to overthrow and enslave it With this hope and confidence those Nations of Gog and Magog shall with an armed power invade the Holy Land and having againe expulsed thence the Israelites they shall endeavour to subjugate them under their power All which may be confirmed by divers places of Scripture 1 By Ezekiel Chap. 37. where the Prophet treating of the gathering together and restititution of the Ten Tribes and of the other Two signified by the Two sticks in which the names of Judah and Ephraim were written and declaring that all those Tribes shall be conjoyned and shall have David to be their King for ever c. he by and by subjoyns in the 38. Chapter that this people shall be broken and exceedingly troubled by Gog and Magog Therefore he begins the 38. Chapter thus Son of man Set thy face against Gog the land of Magog c. And prosecutes the reason Vers 14. Therefore Sonne of man prophesie and say unto Gog Thus saith the Lord God In that day when my people dwelleth safely shalt thou not know it And thou shalt come from thy place out of the North parts thou and many people with thee all
whiles the said darke troubles are extant and incumbent upon the Church even therein is a continued tendency towards the glory thereof these refining the Church for that state Malac. 3. verses 2 3. and thereupon Christ is neerer and readier for their full deliverance and acceptance verses 4.5.17 § 4 For after the night is over the day dawns unto the appearance of the day-star the Sunne So at the end of these dark troubles yea for the ending of them Christ the Sonne of Righteousnesse shall appeare Malach. 4.2 mark the method of that Prophet after that Chapter 3. v. 2 3. compared with 2 Pet. 1.19 all which places are largely discussed afore So that when the said troubles are at the highest then Christ will appear most gloriously for the destruction of the causers of all those troubles even all the enemies of the Church of which appearance of Christ and destruction of the enemy see Dan. 7.13 14. c. 2 Thess 2.8 Rev. 19. verse 11. c. to the end of the Chapter where they are lively characterized most worthy the Readers perusall Upon which destruction on the enemies by the presence of Christ the glorious time of the thousand yeers begins and that with the resurrection of all the Elect as most methodically it follows after that in Daniel as a close of all the troubles mentioned in the whole Prophesie Chap. 12. the two last verses and doth methodically follow that in the Revelation as the blessed Catastrophe of all the confusions in that whole Prophesie in Chapter 20. the first six verses So that next in an immediate order of nature followes the New Creation Chapter 21.1 of which in the next Section CHAP. II. Touching the New Creation THe Chaos being made the Creation of all particulars follow which New-creation is mentioned both in the Old and New Testament Rev. 21.1 John sees a New Heaven and a New Earth How so unlesse created new For the alteration is such that the old heaven and earth seem as it were to passe away So that this New Heaven and Earth is that which Peter and the rest that beleeved with him 2 Pet. 3.11 12 13. did expect that all the former being dissolved there should be New Heavens and a New Earth according to Gods PROMISE Now where is that promise but in Isa 65.17 Behold I create New Heavens and a New Earth so that the former shall not be remembred or come into minde In all which places the expression of earth demonstrates that it is a state on earth besides many circumstances annexed in all the said places before discussed in our third Book the word Heaven being no opposition to it which from Gen. 1. to the end of the Revelation is oft used to signifie those Heavens of the Ayre clouds c. which are appurtenances of the Earth which Paul calls by intimation the first Heaven 2 Cor. 12.2 § 2 With the Creation of this New World are created therein the appurtenances of it viz. ¶ 1. New Jerusalem Immediately after the Creation of a New Heaven and a New Earth St. John sees Rev. 21.2 the holy City NEW JERUSALEM comming DOWN FROM GOD out of HEAVEN and therefore signifies a state on earth And the Prophet Isa in that 65. Chapter verse 18. having mentioned the creation of the New Heaven and the New Earth immediately addes that the Lord saith Lo I create Jerusalem viz. into a happy condition of which by and by ¶ 2. The Inhabitants of this New World and New Jerusalem are no lesse then created First If there were no more then the conversion of the Jewes as the preparation to this new state especially they having been so long opposite to Christ this were no lesse then a Creation A Miracle is a kinde of Creation And the School-men say That though Conversion be not a Miracle properly yet it is more then a miracle Let mee give my vote in this reason because Conversion is out of resistances of mans stubborne minde and heart Miracles are wrought on non-resistances And in this is Conversion more then Creation because Creation is out of matter that hath a disposition of submission to the will of the Creator But mans unregenerate will whiles such is obstinately opposite But no man will doubt but that a Resurrection is a Creation Now the Scripture compares the conversion of the Jewes to a Resurrection Ezek. 37.5 c. Dan. 12.2 Rom. 11.15 In all which places the Call of the Jews is metaphorically called a Resurrection For it is a raising from spiritual death to spiritual life from sinne to grace and from Civil bondage to Civil liberty as the Scripture oft mentions But secondly The Inhabitants are further multiplyed and perfected by a Physical Resurrection of all the deceased Saints Rev. 20.4 and a Physical mutation of the living Saints 1 Cor. 15.51 52. So that as the Apostle saith in that Chapter verse 44. and Phil. 3.21 They shall have spiritual bodies needing nor meat nor drinke c. and made like to Christs glorious body as we have several times discussed afore Now a real Physical Resurrection of bodies and such a reall physicall change of them are no lesse then a Creation Is it not fully a Creation to make men of dust Is it not a creation to change flesh and blood into a likenesse to the radiating Sunne Just so is it inthese things ¶ 3 The Qualifications of places and persons are created As first Righteousnesse being one of the qualifications is also created In 2 Pet. 3.13 in that New Heaven and New Earth made New by creation as the quotation of it out of Isa 65.17 demonstrates there dwels Righteousnesse by vertue of that Creation Grace being nothing else but divine created qualities even as in that 65. of Isa it is expresse that God will create in Jerusalem other excellent qualifications which we shall presently name Sutably Peter in that 2 Epist 3. Chap. v. 13. having mentioned the New Heaven and Earth addes as an appurtenance to it wherein dwels righteousnesse and all by vertue of a Creation as the Apostles referring to Isa 65.18 plainly speaks And from both places John hath this in his vision Rev. 21. verse 1 2 and 27. That into this New Heaven and Earth and holy Jerusalem all new as we shâ—wed by Creation there shall in no wise enter any thing that defileth as in the first creation all that God made was good yea exceeding good Gen. 1.31 Secondly There shall be created in this New state the qualification of peace Isa 57.19 I CREATE the fruit of the lips PEACE â—EAâ—E to him that is afar off by captivity or otherwise and to him that is neer saith the Lord and I will heal him Peace peace doubled signifies very great absolute perfect peace as that time shall be a time of an universal perfection Thirdly Of this New state there shall bee another qualification viz. joy or rejoycing and that by the means of the New creation for it
spirit shall be removed farre away from the Church Zach. 13 2. Thirdly For the rest of the dayes works of Creation as in them were created the dry-land the Plants the Fishes and Fowls and Animals c. So in this New creation there shall be a perfection of all those then in being for of a resurrection of irrationals I know nothing and they shall be freed and set at liberty from all danger and hardship Isa 11.6 7 8 9. Rom. 8.19 20 21 22. I speak now short to these things because I am not yet come to the qualifications of this future glorious estate into which this Head would sometimes faine draw me but I will not be anticipated ¶ 4 This future glorious estate on earth is a creation in regard of the end viz. that as man was created last of all most perfect in soule and body as the subordinate end next under God for which God made it viz. that man might have the possession and use of all and dominion over all Gen. 1.26 So in this New creation Christ restores all things to their perfection and every beleever to his to that end that all beleevers being raised or changed as afore described may joyntly and co-ordinately rule over the whole world and all things therein next under Christ their Head I say All and not apart onely as some unwarily publish And I say joyntly not one part of the Saints to usurp authority over the rest as many dream And co-ordinately All upon equall tearms not some Saints to rule by Deputies made of the rest of the Saints as the practise of men seem to interpret And all to be true Saints not seeming Thus we read in Dan. 7. verse 14. and 27. And Rev. 20.4 And Chap. 21. verse 24.26 Study the places well and you will easily picke it out CHAP. III. Measuring out the DIMENSIONS of this glorious estate to be on Earth afore the ultimate universal Judgement § 1 HAving done with the Creation of it we come next to the Dimensions Quantity or Extent of the glorious Kingdome of Christ on Earth yet expected viz. That as the other foure Monarchies did over spread all the inhabited world as it is said of Nebuchadnezzars Assyrto-Chaldean Monarchy Dan. 2.37 that he was King of Kings and that WHERESOEVER THE CHILDREN OF MEN DWEâ—T the Beasts of the field and fowles of the Heaven GOD HAD GIVEN INTO HIS HAND and had made him RULER OVER ALL and of Caesars Roman Monarchy Luke 2.1 That there went out a decree from him that ALL THE WORLD should bee taxed So this fifth Monarchy of the Saints reigning on earth under Christ must be as large as those Monarchies as large as the whole world for ample Dominion though not for sincere conversion That is the generality of men in the time of this Kingdome being converted into true Saints they shall rule over all the whole world of men swallowing up the other former Monarchies So that if there be remaining a secret seed of hypocrisie in â—ome which shall at last God so foretelling Rev. 20.8 breake out in the Gogican War at the end of our THOUSAND yeers shall yet mean while all men all the time of the thousand yeers shall be demurely subject to the Dominion of the Saints Touching the latitude and largenesse of this Holy-Kingdome read Dan. 2.34 35. The stone cut out without hands smote the Image on his feet that were of iron and of clay and brake them to peeces Then was the iron the clay the brasse the silver and the gold broken in peeces together and became like the chasse of the Summerthershing floore and the wind carried them away so that NO PLACE WAS FOUND FOR THEM and the stone that smote the Image became a great Mountaine and FILLED THE WHOLE EARTH Dan. 7.26 27 And the judgement shall sit and they shall take away his the preceding Monarchies Dominion c. And the Kingdome and Dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome UNDER THE WHOLE HEAVEN shall be given to the people of the Saints c. And Rev. 10.7 St. John having said In the dayes of the voyce of the seventh Angel when he shall BEGIN to sound the mystery of God shall be finished he goes on in the 11. Chapter verse 15. saying The seventh Angel sounded and there were great voyces in Heaven saying The KINGDOMES of this WORLD are become the Kingdomes of our Lord and of his Christ and he shall reigne for ever That is no Monarchy shall ever be on earth after his Adde Isa 2. In the second verse c. whereof yee have the propagation of the Gospel of Christs Kingdome and mens obedience to it In the 11 verse repeated againe verse 17. yee have the Lord Christ exalted and his overthrowing all worldly powers prostrate before him in these words The lofty lookes of man shall be humbled and the haughtinesse of men shall be bowed downe and the LORD ALONE shall be exalted Which words though covertly for feare of provoking worldly Monarchs are alleadged by the Jewes to the same end as you have heard afore at large To the same effect of the largenesse of Christs Kingdome is that notable place in Isa 24. verse 21 22 23. In that day it shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the Host of the high ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth UPON EARTH and they shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison and after many dayes they shall be visited Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sunne ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall REIGNE IN MOUNT SION and in Jerusalem before his Ancients gloriously His Ancients are his ancient people the Jews And as the material Sunne and Moon shall be then nothing in comparison of the light of Gods presence as afore-shewed so the metaphorical Sunne and Moon for the same Scripture may have two subordinate senses Rev. 17.9 10. I say the metaphorical Sunne and Moon of higher and lower humane Majesties shall be confounded with shame So Jacob a Prince in those times and his wife are called by the name and interpreted to be the meaning of that name of the Sunne and Moon in Josephs dream Gen. 37.9 even as we had but now in that 24 of Isa both name and thing metaphor meaning expressed And by the same rule and proportion we may admit of others annexing a metaphorical sense to that Revelation 21. verse 23 24. that in Christs Kingdome to come upon earth there shall be no need of the Sunne or Moon i. e. of Emperial Royal or Princely Potentates to keep the peace as we have expounded it also in a litteral sense of the obscuring of the glory of all the Stars by the paramount glory of Gods presence For God and the Lambs presence shall be in stead of and more then the Sunne and Moon in both senses One both learned and godly doth likewise to the
same purpose apply Hag. 2.21 22. By shaking heaven and earth once more saith he the Prophet seems to mean in part that there shall be a change not onely of the customes of the people which are the Earth but also of Kingly powers and humane Majesties which are the Heavens Which place of Haggai the Apostle applies to the Kingdome of Christ Heb. 12.26 27.28 29. of which application though part may comport with the Kingdome of Christ as spiritual which hath ever been yet the rest seems to â—ooke as farre as Christs Kingdome to come on Earth For since Haggais or Pauls time God never so shook the material heavens of Orbs and Stars or the metaphorical of Royalties and Majesties that the Kingdome succeeding as the Text plainly intends could not be moved Even as the close exhorting to serve God acceptably because he is a consuming fire is most like to Peters exhortation 2 Pet. 3. to bee holy in conversation because after the destruction of the world by fire we shall have new heavens and a new Earth The place seems to allude to and to Prophesie from Gods shaking of Mount Sinai that as at that time God shook his people out of Egypt and separated them by divine Lawes from all the Nations of the earth to be a Royall Church by themselves so he will shake all the world of high and low ones when he sets up his last kingdom viz. Christs visible kingdom on earth and therewith makes all new For saith my Author that same Once more signifies the removing of all former old things in Earth and Heaven viz. of Customes of People and Crownes of Kinglyhoods and makes all new with sanctity and spirituality in the quality though men and creatures shall be in substance extant upon the earth according to their species or kinde and his Sovereignty in paramount glory ruling all Just as Zachary hath it Chap. 14. verse 9. And the LORD shall be KING over ALL the EARTH In that day shall there be ONE LORD and his name one That is as some learned expound There shall be no more Lords but the Lord Christ and his Dominion shall be greater then ever any was Which the Prophet Malachy doth notably surveigh Chap. 1. verse 11. in these words From the rising of the Sunne even to the going downe of the same my name shall bee great among the Gentiles c. CHAP. IV. Concerning the Qualifications or Qualities of this Kingdome of Christ Viz. Negatively it is a State that is Sinless Sorrowless Deathless Superiorless c. Temptationless Timeless Positively it is the Restauration of the Creation Perfection of all Qualities Confluence of all Comforts Preface to Eternity With several other Qualifications by a natural and necessary consequence flowing from these SECT I. It is Sinlesse § 1 ANd no wonder For it is not imaginable that the deceased Saints should be raised and the living changed to injoy this glorious state on earth in Christs Kingdome with the least tincture of sinne either of their owne or others This were to bring the deceased Saints to their losse And the changed state of the living would not be freed from sinne which would bee their greatest sorrow which as the next Section demonstrateth cannot consist with this glorious state It would be a misery not a felicity for the soules of the deceased to come out of supernal glory into a body of sinne or for them or the changed to be mixed with the society of gracelesse men A meer regenerate estate not yet perfect lamented that condition so long since as Lot and David 2 Pet. 2.7 Psal 120.5 yea the latter complained of society with men of faire outsides flattering with their lips and eating bread at his Table but were not right at heart And our Saviour warns his Disciples as of a danger that they should bee among men that outwardly seem to be sheep but inwardly were Wolves which this glorious state will not admit So then the huge augmentation of this Kingdome or fifth Monarchy shall not as in worldly Monarchies cause pollution and corruption This shall bee Status optimus maximus the biggest and best state that ever was or shall be on earth all suitable to a resurrection The places of Scripture asserting the sinlesseness of this time are very many and very cleer so that I need but repeat them to convince the ingenuous Reader ¶ 1 Adam we know was created sinlesse according to the Image and likenesse of God to have Dominion over all and to rest on the Sabbath now this state of Adam is applied by David Ps 8. to a future state of man which the Apostle Paul accommodates to our estate and rest in the inhabited world to come Heb. 2.5 and Chap. 4. verse 9. as wee have afore demonstratively expounded those places If there be any difference it is in this as the Apostle sets it forth 1 Cor. 15. that our estate shall be better then his ¶ 2 Num. 30.5 6 8. The Lord thy God wil bring thee into thine owne land and the Lord thy God will circumcise thine heart and the heart of thy seed to love the Lord thy God with all thy heart and all thy soul and thou shalt returne and obey the voyce of the Lord and do AL HIS COMMANDEMENTS Which was spoken of and to the Jews long since deceased being never yet so fulfilled to them or any of that Nation succeeding them and therefore according to the truth of God must be fulfilled to all the elect of them and of their posterity ¶ 3 Isa 11.6 The Wolfe shall dwell with the Lamb c. and they shall not hurt c. For the earth shall bee FULL OF THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE LORD AS THE WATERS COVER THE SEA which whether we understand of men or beasts it argues a restauration to an estate like that of innocent Adam And the reason adds the glory of the cause as the thing is a most glorious effect That this innocent time shall follow upon an ocean of divine knowledge ¶ 4. Isa 59.21 This is my Covenant my WORD AND MY SPIRIT SHALL NEVER DEPART from thee for ever ¶ 5. Isa 35.8 There shall be an high-way and it shall be called the way of holinesse THE UNCLEAN SHAL NOT PASSE OVER IT ¶ 6. Isa 60.21 Thy people shall be ALL RIGHTEOUS ¶ 7. Jer. 32.40 41. I will make an everlasting Covenant with them that I will not turne away from them to doe them good But I will put my feare into their heart that they shall not depart from me Yea I will rejoyce over them to doe them good and will plant them in this Land assuredly WITH MY WHOLE HEART and WHOLE SOUL See this great promise must be fulfilled when the Jewes are settled in their owne land ¶ 8. Ezech. 36.23 to verse 30. I will gather you from all Countries and bring you into your owne land and I will sprinkle cleane water upon you and you shall be cleane from ALL
YOUR FILTHINESSE c. and I will save you from ALL YOUR UNCLEANNES 9. Ezekiel Chap. 44.9 speaking of the glorious state of the Church in the last dayes addes Thus saith the Lord no stranger uncircumcised in HEART shall enter into my Sanctuary ¶ 10 Dan. 12.3 At the time that Michael shall stand up and deliver his people they that be wise shall shine as the BRIGHTNES OF THE FIRMAMENT and they that turne many to righteousness AS THE STARS FOR EVER AND EVER Which is to come to passe before the last universal resurrection and ultimate judgement as we have before demonstrated ¶ 11. Zeph. 3.13 The remnant of Israel SHAL NOT DO INIQUITY nor SPEAK LYES neither shall a DECEITFUL TONGUE be found in their mouthes which words relate as the context afore shews to a state of the Church in the last dayes on earth as the thing demonstrates that it was never yet fulfilled ¶ 12. Zach. 14.20.21 Upon all shall be holinesse to the Lord. ¶ 13 Malach. 4.1 c. The day commeth that shall burne as an oven And all that are proud and doe wickedly shall be as stubble and the day commeth that shall burne them up saith the Lord that it shal leave them neither root nor branch All these places and others have been demonstratively cleared to relate to the time following upon the Call of the Jewes and their settlement All which laid together make up a sinlesse condition § 2 Which will be more cleare and more clearly settled on our spirits by adding some places of the New Testament ¶ 1 In 1 Cor. 15.52 54 55 56. it is said When this corruption shall put on incorruption at the sound of the last Trumpet then O death where is thy sting The sting of death is sinne But thanks be to God that gives us victory through our Lord Jesus Christ Now as wee have before proved there is a vast space viz. of a thousand yeers of the whole terme of the last Trumpet afore the universal ultimate Resurrection ¶ 2 In 2 Cor. 3.18 it is said When the Jewes shall have both vayles taken away as wee have before opened viz. that on Moses namely his forme of worship and that on their hearts viz. their unbeleef instead of the remainders of sinne they shall with open face behold the glory of the Lord being transformed into the same image from glory to glory ¶ 3 St. Peter likewise asserts 2 Pet. 3.13 That after the dissolution of this present vaine sinfull world there shall not onely be New Heavens but also a NEW EARTH wherein dwels RIGHTEOUSNESSE Proving it out of Isa 65.17 for those words be repeats This is spoken to the Jewes and concerning their share in the future happinesse on earth And that dwelling of righteousnesse there must signifie an eminent and absolute degree or else it will not surmount the present state of the Chuch in which as such dwels much righteousnesse But I need not struggle about this with most knowing men who incline to understand this place of a perfection as absolute as that in the supreamest Empyrean heaven ¶ 4 Let us adde but one place more viz. That in Rev. 21. v. 1. c. and verse last of that Chapter in a continued description of the glorious state of the Saints on earth yet to come And saith St. John I saw a new heaven and a new EARTH and I saw the holy City New Jerusalem comming down FROM GOD OUT OF HEAVEN Behold the Tabernacle of God is WITH MEN c. and there shall in no wise enter into it any thing that DEFILETH c. but they that are written in the Lambs Book Every verse of this Chapter as before we gave a particular account hath something in it incompatible and incompetible with the supreamest heavenly estate § 3 But then the question will bee where shall abide all those thousand yeers all those hypocrites called Gog and Magog that shall at last break out and go about to oppose the Church though in vain their opposition and subversion concluding in the same moment Rev. 20.8 Wee answer according to that light wee have attained that most probably they shall not be in but without the Church Rev. 22.15 Without shall be dogs evill men and such as make and love a lye The Heathens as appears by Homer * Iliad 8. did use to call the place of out-cast men 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tartaros alluding likely to some dismal remote place of the earth as Tartary is from us and from Jerusalem The Apostle takes up that word in 2 Pet. 2.4 and makes a verb out of it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tartaroâ— to signifie the putting of men into an Hellish solitary place So that most likely the unregenerate shall be as remote from the Church as Tartary is from Jerusalem and the Christian Church as far as it were from Hell to Heaven The Church now being as in an Heaven on earth the false-hearted spawn of future Gog and Magog shall bee remote on earth neer their future Hell To which that place of Gog and Magog Rev. 20.8 doth contribute some proof in that it saith that Gog and Magog shall bee fetched up against the Church by the Devil from the FOURE QUARTERS OF THE EARTH § 4 But if these Hypocrites were permitted neerer the Church they might perhaps be converted VVee answer no. For it is if we may use that word the Fate of this Millenary period I meane Gods righteous peremptory sentence that as all that time there shall be no degenerating of any beleevers so no more regenerating of any unbeleevers There is a judiciary sentence peremptorily passed to this purpose Rev. 22.11 He that is unjust let him be unjust still and be which is filthy let him be filthy still and he that is righteous let him be righteous still and he that is holy let him be holy still That is They shall be so still In order to which it follows WITHOUT are Dogs c. that love and make a lye And I come quickly and my reward is with mee The appearance of Christ at the preface to thiâ— thousand yeers will be as it is represented in the Preface to the Revelation Chap. 1. among the Churches viz. that then are or have been Chuâ—ches Therefore it behooves Churches and all Professors to beware they bee not sound as the Foolish Virgins that never had the oyle of regenerating grace in the vessels of their hearts and the oyle of sound principles in their heads by which they made the blaze of Profession is spent i. e. they have lost their principles and so being unready at Christs comming they come when as Ierome saith well the doors are shut SECT II. It is Sorrowlesse § 1 HAving shewed that this future glorious state of the Kingdome of Christ on earth yet to come shall be sinlesse next with good dependence we assert it is a sorrowlesse condition For sorrow came into the world by sinne therefore sorrow shall
in these comparisons As the Summer Sunne rising ascending and setting differs from the heavens continued into one whole Sunne whereby it would be alwayes day and alwayes glorious Summer And as a River differs from a Sea of sweet waters the River exists by succession the Sea is still the same fixed So in this state we speake of Every injoyment and injoyer shall bee as full at first in perfection and joy as at last CHAP. V. THus of Qualities now wee come to Priviledges sc That which Saints had afore either in common with others or in an ordinary degree they shall now have in a way of special Priviledge and preheminence SECT I. First Priviledge The fulfilling of most things that before were but foretold § 1 THe Mysteries and Prophesies which before they had but in the Word now they shall have in the thing ¶ 1 For Mysteries See Rev. 11.19 The Temple of God was opened and there was seen in his Temple the Arke of his Testament This cleerly relates to the time we speake of as it is evident in verse 15. The seventh Angel sounded c. And the Temple of God was opened in Heaven By comparing this with Rev. 21. verse 22 the thing is plainer And I saw no Temple therein but the Lord God Almighty and the Lamb was the Temple And this also relates to the same time See verse 1. I saw New Heaven and New Earth Verse 2. And I saw New Jerusalem This Prophesie plainly foretels of a kinde of Temple in those dayes of which we speak In Ezek. wee have much of the measures of the Temple So Ezek. Chapter 41. and 42. c. cleerly relating to a New Testament time by St. Johns exposition Rev 21. And Malachy tels us Chap. 3. verse 1. The Lord will suddenly come to his Temple And John saith Rev. 7.15 The Saints serve God day and night in his Temple Chap. 11.1 The Temple is measured Chap. 14 15 17. Angels come out of the Temple Chap. 15.5 The Temple of the Tabernacle of the Testimony in heaven was opened Chap. 16.1.17 Voyces come out of the Temple And in the Text wee alleadged Chap. 11. v. 19. The Temple of God was open and the Arke was seen Now what is the meaning of all Surely a Temple equivalently they shall have But no Temple properly as it is said Rev. 21. v. 22. I saw no Temple But God and the Lamb was that equivalent Temple yea that super-eminent Temple And the presence of God in Christ shall bee such with them that as Rev. 11.19 that spiritual Arke shall not be hid as was the material Ark in the Old Testament Temple but shall be seen In the Ark was the Table of the Law and the Pot of Manna Christ the end of the Law Rom. 10.4 And Christ and his word is the Manna Rev. 2. The Arke was in the holiest of Holies which was seldome seen and onely when the High Priest went in But now this spiritual Arke in this glorious time is commonly seen Observe That the Arke typified Christ and his Word As the Temple was a pledge of Gods presence as before that the Tabernacle was So that the meaning is That now Gods presence shall be such in and through Christ to his Church that the glory of Christ and the mystery of his word shall be far more plain unto them There shall be no material Temple but there shall be the equivalent Temple the Antitype Gods presence in Christ gloriously manifest And his Word more open and plaine then ever since the New Testament All mysteries relating to this time foretold shall be revealed Now shall bee fulfilled that Dan. 12. Knowledge shall be increased And that Isa 11. The earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the Sea All that men had before in the ear now they shall have in the eye their science shall be turned to experience ¶ 2 All Prophesies relating to the best of Times of the Saints welfare shall now be fulfilled The Saints shall not have these things onely in types visions or knowledge but in possession and happy injoyment The Revelation is the summe of all the Prophets This is declared to John by Christ Rev. 1. sc in a representation And therefore it is said Rev. 22.6 The Lord God of the holy Prophets sent his Angel to shew unto his servants the sayings of the Prophesie of this Booke The intent and meaning is That the Lord God that spake by the Prophets and spake of these things by the Prophets sent by his Angel to explain those things delivered by the Prophets concerning these times of which we speak Now this Book of the Revelation though it be far plainer then the Prophets yet it is not fully and wholly plain to us therefore called A sealed Booke that Christ must open Rev. 5. This opening is by the events Rev. 6. c. which will be compleatly done in this visible glorious time of the Church as we may perceive by the light now at the dawning afore the Sunne of righteousnesse doth arise Christ is the Yea and Amen of all the promises 2 Cor. 1.20 therefore when he appears again all will appear fulfilled As the woman of Samaria said Joh. 4. so it shall be sc when the Messiah commeth which is called the Christ he shall tell us all things yea restore all things Act. 3. Therefore is Christ called the WORD of GOD and the Heire of all things because he will declare and perform all things § 2 What Mr. Bolton saith of everlasting glory in the highest Heaven shall be proportionably true now in this thousand yeers We shall perfectly understand all Physical or natural and spiritual things what is the number of the Heavens The essences of the creaures How we shall know and behold God in Christ c And then shall bee fulfilled all the prayers of Saints put up for the welfare of Church and Saints from the beginning of the world Then shall Sem and Japhet dwell together Then those prayers that gave God no rest till he made Jerusalem a praise shall be answered and all the glorious things that have been spoken of the Church the City of God shall appear in their colours and be given in in great glory As it is said she is the Lords portion Deut. 32.9 His pleasant portion Jer. 12.10 His inheritance Isa 19.25 All people are the worke of his hands but his Church is his Inheritance Again the Church is called the Dearly beloved of his soule Jer. 12.7 His love his dove his undefiled all faire c. Cant. oft His Treasure and peculiar treasure Ex. 19 5. The Lords house of glory Isa 60.7 Yea His glory Isa 46.13 and THE glory of God Jer. 3.17 Nay the Throne of his glory Jer. 14.21 Nay the Crowne of his glory Isa 62.3 Nay the Royal Diadem Ibid. Againe the Church is called The ornament of God the beauty of his ornaments the beauty of his ornament in
Position Sect. 1 Of the Saints living that thousand yeers Sect. 2 Of their reigning that 1000 years Sect. 3 Or their reigning with Christ Sect. 4 Of the thousand yeers BOOK II. 1 Chap. The general Position taken asunder into two parts 1 How Christ shall be with his Saints 2 How the Saints shall reign under him 2 Chap. Ten several Scriptures out of the New-Testament in relation to the first part to prove the visible appearance of Christ personally to the Church on earth at the time of her Restauration alleadged and explained Sect. 1. Joh. 19.37 They shall look on him whom they have pierced collated with that in Zach. 12 10. c. whence it is quoted Sect. 2. Rev. 1.7 Behold he commeth with clouds and every eye shall see him c. Sect. 3. Matth. 24.30 And then shall appear the signe of the Son of man in heaven c. Sect. 4. The 2 Thess 2.1 c. Now I beseech you brethren by the comming of our Lord Jesus Christ c. Sect. 5. Mat. 26.29 I will not drinke henceforth of this fruit of the vine untill that day when I drinke it new with you in my Fathers Kingdome Sect. 6. The 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus c. Sect. 7. Act. 3.19 20 21. Repent yee therefore and be converted that c. Sect. 8. Mat. 23.38 Your house is left unto you desolate c. Sect. 9. Mat. 24. When shall these things be c. Sect. 10. Luke 19.11 to 28. He added and spake a Parable c. 3 Chap. Five Scriptures out of the Old Testament to prove the visible appearance of Christ to the Church on earth at the time of her restauration Sect. 1. Dan. 7.11 c. to the end of the Chapter I beheld then because c. Sect. 2. Jer. 25.5 Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that I will raise unto c. Sect. 3. Zach. 2.10 11 12. collated with Zach. 14.4 5 6 c. Sing and rejoyce O daughter of Jerusalem for lo I come and I will dwell in the midst of thee c. Sect. 4. Mich. 4. v. 1. to 8. In the last dayes it shall come to passe that the mountaine of the house of the Lord shall be established in the top of the mountains and many Nations shall come c. Sect. 5. Zephan 3.14 c. Sing O daughter of Zion the Lord hath cast out c. 4 Chap. A briefe Discourse upon Christs visible appearance to the Elect on earth BOOK III. 1 Chap. The partition of the ensuing discourse shewing that two things are to be done in relation to the second branch of the Position afore How the saints shall reigne under Christ viz. 1 To prove in general That there is such a Kingdome yet to bee on earth as aforesaid in the general Position 2 What this Kingdome shall be in the particulars The first is managed by four means viz. 1 By Texts of Scripture 2 By Arguments 3 By The common consent of all sorts of men as if a law of nature 4 By Solution of objections 2 Chap. Containing many Scriptures proving that there shall be yet on earth before the last judgement such a Reigning of the Saints such a visible Kingdom of Christ and a glorious state of all things as is before propounded Sect. 1. Largâ—ly discussing the 20 and 21. Chapters of the Revelation Sect. 3. falsely so printed for Sect. 2. and sutably the rest to the end of the third Book the usefulnes of the Old Testament for the point in hand wherein many considerable things for proof are produced Sect. 4. Gods promise to Adam Gen. 1. 26 27 28. paralleld with Psal 8. and that with Heb. 2.5 largely opened Sect. 5. Gods promise to Abraham Gen. 12. Gen. 17. Gen. 18. Gen. 22. paralleld with other promises to his posterity Gen. 26. Gen. 48. And those with the Apostles explications and applications Rom. 4 Gal. 3. Heb. 11. largely opened Sect. 6. Balaams Prophesie Num. 24. explained Sect. 7 Deut. 3.1 to 10. Sect. 8 Deut. 32.15 c. Sect. 9 Nehem. 1.8 c. Sect. 10 The Booke of Psalmes in three heads Sect. 11 Isa 2.1 c. Sect. 12 Isa 9.6 c. Sect. 13 Isa 11. totum Sect. 14 Isa 14.1 c. Sect. 15 Isa 24 23. Sect. 16 Isa 25. totum Sect. 17 Isa 33.20 21. Sect. 18 Isa 34.1 c. Sect. 19 Isa 45.14 c. Sect. 20 Isa 49. totum Sect. 21 Isa 54.11 c. Sect. 22 Isa 59. Sect. 23 Isa 60. tot Sect. 24 Isa 63.1 c. Sect. 25 Isa 65.17 c. Sect. 26 Isa 66.5 c. Sect. 27 Jer. 16.14.15 collated with chap. 23. v. 3 c. Sect. 28 Jer. 30 31 chap Sect. 29 Jer. 32.37 c. Sect. 30 Jer. 50.17 c. Sect. 31 Ez. 28.24 25 26 Sect. 32 corruptly printed 33. Ez 34.11 c. Sect. 33 Ezek 36. totum Sect. 34 Ezek. 37. tot Sect. 35 Dan. 2.31 c. Sect. 36 Dan. 7. All the ch Sect. 37 Dan. 11. 12 ch Sect. 38 Hos 1.10 11. Sect. 39 Hos 3.4 5. Sect. 40 Joel 2.28 c. Sect. 41 Joel 3.1 c. Sect. 42 Amos 9.11 c col with Ob. v. 17. c Sect. 43 Mich. 4. All. Sect. 44 Zeph. 3.9 c. Sect. 45 Zach. 2.6 c. Sect. 46 Zach. 6.12 c. Sect. 47 Zach. 8.20 c. Sect. 48 Zach. 10 3. c. Sect. 49 Zach. 12. All. Sect. 50 Zach. 14.3 c. Sect. 51 Mal. 4. All. All which places of the O.T. from Sect. 6. to the end of Sect. 51. are paralleld with several places of the New Testament 3 Chap. The inconsiderablenesse and inconsideratenesse of some ancient Authors verbal glancings against some of the prooss afore alledged Sect. 1. A general survey of the Authority of mens words and writings Sect. 2. Jeroms jerkings at the precedent proofs discussed Sect. 3. The words of Gaius seconded by Dionysius Alexandrinus both falsely fathering our opinion upon Cerinthus and weakly credited by Eusebius examined and confuted and our opinion of the thousand yeers is vindicated from voluptuous Chiliasme 4 Chap. Places produced out of the New Testament to prove the general Thesis or Position Sect. 1. Mat. 24.13 Sect. 2 Luke 1.31 32. Sect. 3 Luke 21.24 Sect. 4 Luke 22.28 c. Sect. 5 Act. 1.6 Sect. 6 Rom. 11.25 c.. Sect. 7 The 1 Cor. 15 21 c. Sect 8 The 2 Cor. 3. 15. c. Sect 9 Phil. 2.9 10. c. Sect 10 Rev. 2.25 c. Sect 11 Rev. 3.21 c. Sect 12 Revel 18 19 Chap. 5 Chap. Containing five Arguments in five distinct Sections to provethe future glorious state on earth BOOK IV. 1 Chap. Containing a Preface to the subject of this Book which is to shew the judgement of all sorts of men in favour of our main Position touching the future glorious state on earth viz. in 2 Chap. Of Heathens 3 Chap. Of Mabumetans 4 Chap. Of Jewish Rabbins
shall be subject unto him viz. so as the same Jerusalem Targum expoundeth on the 11. verse of that 49. of Gen. that those Kings and Princes that will not be subject unto him he shall kill making the Universe red with the blood of their slain and the hils white with the fat of their mighty men c. But these things were not fulfilled at Christs being on the earth in the flesh It was above three hundred yeares after ere one King or Nation was subject unto Christ viz. in the time of Constantine the Great except some sprinklings of Converts here and there called Churches the Nations and Kings of the earth either taking no cognizance of his interest or else persecuted it even as to this day they doe even ten parts of the world for one that ownes him Neither hath Christ yet taken that material and sensible vengeance on them by killing the disobedient in order to a bringing in of the rest into a visible subjection to him § 4 Lastly Paraphrast Jonathan in his Chalde Paraphrase of Hos 14.8 hath these words They speaking of the Jewes shall bee gathered together from out of the midst of their CAPTIVITY they shall DWELL under the shadow of their CHRIST and the DEAD shall LIVE and good shall grow in the EARTH and there shall bee a memoriall of their goodnesse FRUCTIFYING and never fayling as the remembrance of the sound of the Trumpets over the old wine which was wont to be offered in the Sanctuary which things were never yet fulfilled on earth We forbear to quote more out of their TARGUM or Chalde Paraphrase now because we shall afterwards oft cast an eye upon it in our discusse of severall Scriptures that tend to the PROOF of the point in hand § 5 To this let mee adde a touch out of the CAPITULA of RABBI ELIEZAR the GREAT because neare of the same Antiquity with the former his words are these As I live saith Jehovah I will raise YOU speaking of the Jewes up in the TIME to come in the RESURRECTION of the dead and I will GATHER you will ALL ISRAEL § 6 You see both doe harmonise to the same tune the effect of their words the same which is not yet fulfilled in as much as to this day the generality of the Jewes have not owned any MESSIA to be come in the flesh but refused The MESSIA Joh. 1.11 according as it was fore-prophesied Esa 53.3 He is despised and rejected of men And the remnant of beleeving Jewes never since as yet saw that particular RESURRECTION of the dead or that their gathering together out of the midst of their CAPTIVITY or that generall GOOD in the EARTH And therefor according to the Scriptures of which by and by these things are yet to come afore the last and generall Resurrection § 7 Of Hebrew Antiquities SINCE the Incarnation of Christ namely their Two TALMUDS their SEDAR OLAM is of the same age near upon with the Babylonish something of which TALMUDS was extant neare the Apostles time if not ancienter and of other Rabbins we shall give you an account in divers particulars In Gemara Sanhedrin R. Ketina hath said in the last of the Thousands of yeares of the worlds continuance the world shall be destroyed of which it is said Esa 2.11.17 THE LORD ONELY SHALL BE EXALTED IN THAT DAY And TRADITION agrees with R. Ketina even as every seventh yeare of seven yeares is a years of release so of the seven thousand yeares of the world the seventh thousand yeares shall bee the thousand of Release as it is said AND THE LORD ALONE SHAL BE EXALTED IN THAT DAY Likewise That Psalme namely the 92. is said to bee a PSALME OR SONG FOR THE SABBATH DAY THAT IS THE DAY THAT IS NOTHING ELSE BUT REST. As also it is said viz. Psal 90. A THOUSAND YEERS IN THY SIGHT ARE BUT AS YESTERDAY By which it is plaine to acute observers that the ancient Rabbinicall Jews did clearly understand the Prophesie of Isaiah in Chap. 2. of the EXALTATION of the LORD twice there repeated as meant of the GREAT DAY which some Rabbins call the Day of JUDGEMENT others the Day of MESSIA others the Day of the RENOVATION of the WORLD and of the REIGNING of CHRIST which is elegantly and emphatically there limbed in its colours to the life as it will more shine forth when we come to an accurate discusse of that Chapter In Midâ—asch Tehillim upon the 90. Psal v. 15. Wee thus read MAKE US GLAD ACCORDING TO THE DAYES WHEREIN THOU HAST AFFLICTED VS That is by the Babylonians the Grecians and the Romans AND THAT IN THE DAYES OF THE MESSIAH And how many are the dayes of the MESSIAH R. JEHOSUAS said that they are Two THOUSAND yeares and it is said ACCORDING TO THE DAYES WHEREIN THOU HAST HUMBLED US that is according to two dayes for one day of the holy and blessed God are a thousand yeares according to that BECAUSE A THOUSAND YEERS IN THY SIGHT ARE BUT AS YESTERDAY The Rabbins also have said That according to the TIME to come the DAY of the MESSIAH shall bee one For God which is holy and blessed in the FUTURE that is AGE shall make one day to himselfe of which wee read Zech. 14. And there shall bee ONE DAY which shall bee knowne to the Lord not day nor night and it shall bee at the EVENING-TIME Light This Day is the AGE or WORLD TO COME and the QUICKNING OF THE DEAD § 9 In their Booke called Berachoth wee finde this Benzuma saith It shall come to passe that Israel shall not remember their departure out of the Land of Aegypt IN THE WORLD TO COME and IN THE DAYES OF THE MESSIAH marke diligently how by World to come they understand a time on earth as Paul hath it twice viz Heb 1.6 Heb. 2.5 THE INHABITED WORLD TO COME So the Greeke so the sense For no man could imagine that heaven above should bee put in subjection to the Angels so as to need the Apostles Apology there to prevent such an imagination And how say the Rabbins in that Berachoth doth this appeare By that which is written in Jâ—rem 23. BEHOLD THE DAYES COME THAT THEY SHALL SAY NO MORE THE LORD LIVETH WHICH BROVGHT THE CHILDREN OF ISRAEL VP OVT OF THE LAND OF EGYPT Which wise men interpret thus not as if the name of Egypt should be blotted out but because the WONDERS which shall bee effected in the DAYES OF THE KINGDOME OF MESSIA shall principally be remembred and their departure out of Egypt lesse § 10 Note by the way that it is not agreed among the Rabbins in what THOVSAND yeares of the world the said DAY of JUDGEMENT or of MESSIAH or RENOVATION of the WORLD shall bee Some say further off in the seventh others nearer in the sixt but others about the fifth § 11 But to goe on The TRADITION of the house of Elijah is Those Just ones whom God shall raise
great things And that this day of ours which is bounded with the rising and setting of the sun doth bear the image of the GREAT DAY which a certain circuit of yeers doth determine After the same manner the forming of the earthly man did carry before it the formation in future of an heavenly people For as when all things were finished God made man last upon the sixth day and brought him into this world as into an house well furnished So now in the GREAT SIXTH DAY the TRUE MAN is formed by the Word of God that is the holy people is figured unto righteousnesse by the doctrine and precepts of God And as then he was made of the earth mortall and imperfect that he might live a thousand yeers in this world He alludes to the Fathers before the flood who lived each of them neer a thousand yeers So now the perfect man is framed of this terrestrial world that being made alive by God he may reigne in this same world for the space of a thousand yeers And saith Lactantius in the fifteenth Chapter of the said seventh Booke As it is in the Scriptures how and for what necessity Israel went down into Egypt there exceedingly multiplyed but oppressed with an intolerable yoke of Bondage God smote Egypt led his people through the red Sea but there drowned the Egyptians endeavouring to pursue the flying Israelites so this famous exploit was a figure of a greater thing to bee which God will bring to passe in the last consummation of times namely that God will deliver his people from the grievous servitude of the world But though God then smote onely Egypt because his people was but one Nation yet now because Gods people are over all the world and every where oppressed by the world God will smite all Nations even all the whole world and deliver his righteous people that worship him And as then there were certaine foresignes by which the the future ruine of the Egyptians was foreshewn So at the last shall bee prodigious wonders by all the elements of the world whereby may bee understood that ruine to all Nations is at hand For so then shall righteousnesse become rate and impiety so multiply that if there bee any good men then extant they shall bee as a prey to the wicked c. Then shall ruine over-run the world The cause of which devastation and confusion shall bee because the Roman authority by which now the world is over ruled MY SOULE saith Lactantius FEARES TO SPEAKE IT BUT I WILL SPEAKE IT BECAUSE IT SHALL COME TO PASSE shall bee taken away from the earth and the EMPIRE shall returne into ASIA and the EAST shall have againe the DOMINION and the WEST shall bee made servile Nor may it be a wonder that so huge and massie an Empire so long continuing and strongly confirmed should fall seeing there is no thing made by man but may bee destroyed by man even as the Emperialty was brought downe from the Assyrians to the Persians from them to the Grecians and from them to the Romans Seneca did not ineptly distribute the times of the CITY of Rome into Ages The first he said was her Infancy under Romulus c. And her first old age was when torne with civil warres she turned to be twy-child c. And if these things be so what remaines but death should follow old age And that this shall shortly come to passe the Sermons of the Prophets under the covert of other names that all might not easily understand doe denounce But the Sibyls doe speak it openly that Rome shall bee destroyed because shee hated the name of God and opposed righteousnesse And Hydospis a most ancient King of the Medes even afore the Trojan race was set up prophesied the same Saith Lactantius Chap. 16. how that shall bee lest any one should thinke it incredible I will declare first the Regality and chiefe power shall bee multiplied into many and cut and minced into crummes Then perpetual civil discords shall bee sowne and never shall bee any quier TEN KINGS shall stand up together who shall not suffer the world to bee ruled but to be ruined Then upon a sudden shall rise up against them a most potent Enemy from the utmost bounds of the North who by meanes of three of that number possessing Asia extinguished shall bee taken into the society of the rest and by them shall bee made chiefe Of them all This man shall domineer vex mingle divine and humane things subvert Lawes establish his owne and shall waste destroy and kill The name and seat of the Empire being changed there shall follow the confusion and vexation of all mankinde And that nothing may bee wanting to the misery of men a Trumpet shall sound from heaven according to that the Sibyl hath denounced giving a manifold lamenting sound whereupon all shall tremble Then from the wrath of God against unrighteous men shall rage sword and fire and famine c. Then according to the Sibyls verses The world shall bee unworlded c. scarce the tenth part of men shall bee left c. But saith Lactantius Chap. 17. I will yet plainlier explain how it shall come to passe The conclusion of times being at hand a great Prophet shall bee sent of God who shall convert men unto the knowledge of God c. And the wicked shall bee destroyed c. which hee shews in many and sundry particulars Then Lactantius in the eighteenth Chapter of the same Booke quotes divers Authors to that purpose As Hydaspes and Hermes and the Sibyls out of which two latter hee doth not onely minde the maine point hee hath in hand but also alleadge out of them that Christ is the Sonne of God And saith Lactantius Chapter 19. of the aforesaid seventh Booke The circle of the whole earth being oppressed at which time humane strength shall bee unable to destroy the tyranny of immense power God moved with the doubtfull power of his people and with their miserable lamentations shall forthwith send the Deliverer Then shall the midst of heaven bee opened in a quiet blacke night so that the light of God descending shall appear over all the world as lightning which the Sibyls expresse thus When as he shall come darknesse in a blacke midnight shall bee as fire c. Of which there is a double reason In the night he was borne and in the night hee suffered death And so after these in the night hee shall receive the * Kingdome of the earth This * is the Deliverer and Judge * the Revenger and King and * GOD which wee call Christ And hee shall descend his Angels accompanying him c. After this saith Lactantius Chap. 20. The places of the dead shall bee opened and the dead shall rise againe and the GREAT JUDGEMENT * shall bee performed by God * Christ concerning them of which Judgement and Kingdome the Erythrean Silyl thus speakes When that DAY shall receive its fatal
END and the judgement of the immortal God shall come to mortals then shall come upon men the GREAT JUDGEMENT and the BEGINNING c. as 't is in that Sibyl But saith Lactantius speaking to this of the Sibyl Neverthelesse all universally shall not bee then judged of God but those onely which are verst in the Religion of God The Poets saith Lactantius in the 22. Chap. of the aforesaid Book by Poetical licentiousnesse corrupted that which they had received for in that they fang That men having finished a thousand yeers among the dead they should be restored to life again as Virgil saith When all these soules have turned the wheele at the forgetfull RIVER of death by the space of a thousand yeers God cals forth these unmindfull in a great Troup that they may see againe these places that are upon the convex face of the earth and shall againe begin willingly to return to their bodies Herein their understanding deceived them saith Lactantius That the dead shall rise againe not after a thousand yeers of their death but that being restored to life againe they may REIGNE A THOUSAND YEERS WITH GOD. By God Lactantius meanes Christ as he openly explained himselfe but a little afore Of which Resurrection saith Lactant. Chap. 23. the Philosophers also endeavoured to say something as corruptly as the Poets For Pythagoras disputed that the soules of the deceased did passe into new bodies but foolishly as hee said himselfe was made up of Euphorbus his soule Chrysippus spake better who as Cicero saith established the Porch of the Stoicks he in his books which hee wrote concerning PROVIDENCE speaking of the renovation of the World brings in this Seeing * things are so it appears it is not impossible that we also when we have finished this present life after certain wheelings about of times should bee restored again into this very estate in which we now are And the Sibyl saith thus It is hard indeed to beleeve but when the judgement of the world and of Mortals shall come hee shall send the wicked into darknesse c. but those that imbrace godlinesse SHALL AGAINE LIVE UPON EARTH GOD GIVING THEM BOTH SPIRIT HONOUR and LIFE Chap. 24. Lactantius faith I will adde the rest Therefore saith he the SONNE of the Highest and Greatest God shall come that hee may judge both quicke and dead according to that of the Sibyl Then shall there bee confusion of all mortals of the whole earth and the OMNIPOTENT himselfe shall come upon his Tribunal to judge the soules of quicke and dead and all the world But when hee shall doe that saith Lactantius and shall restore the just that have beene from the beginning unto life hee shall * converse among men a thousand * yeeres and shall rule them with * a most righteous Government Which somewhere the Sibyl proclaimes Hear me O yee men the eternal King doth reigne c. Then saith Lactantius They that shall bee alive in their bodies shall not dye but by the space of those THOUSAND yeeres shall generate an infinite multitude and their off-spring shall bee holy c. And they * that shall bee raised from the * dead shall bee OVER THE DEAD AS JUDGES But the Gentile Nations shall not bee utterly extinguished but some shall bee left for the victory of God that they may bee triumphed over by the just and brought under the yoake of perpetual servitude A little afore that the Prince of Devils the forger of all evil shall bee * bound with chaines and shall * bee in hold all the THOUSAND * yeer es of THECELESTIAL EMPIRE under which righteousnesse shall reign over the world After whose coming the just shall bee gathered together from all parts of the earth c. and the holy Câ—â—IE shall bee placed in the * midst of the earth in which the BUILDER thereof GOD together with his just ones ruling shall ABIDE Which City the * Sibyl thus points out And the City which God made the same hee made brighter then the Sunne Moone or Starres Then all darknesse shall bee taken away c. The Moone shall bee as bright as the Sunne and the Sunne sevenfold brighter then it is c. The earth shall abound with fruitfulnesse c. The whole nature of all things shall joy in freedome from dominion of evill All beasts and birds not preying on one another shall bee at peace one with another c. quoting the Poets touching the golden Age shewing their error in this that mistaking the Prophets who for the certainty of things spake of them as past though minded them as to come they thought they were all past Alleadging also the Sibyls that in divers places affirme that men shall live a most quiet and plentiful life and shall reigne together with God and the Kings of the Nations shall come from the bounds of the earth with their gifts and shall adore and honour the great King c. These things saith Lactantius Chap. 25. are those which are spoken by the Prophets that they shall come to passe whose ☞ testimonies and words I deemed not needfullto set downe because it would bee an infinite worke If any aske when those things shall come to passe I but now said above that that * change must needs bee when * SIX THOUSAND YEERS * shall bee compleated and that chiefe day of the last con ☞ clusion of them doth now draw neer Touching the signes you may know them by the Prophets c. when this summe of six thousand yeeres shall bee compleat they teach who have wrote of the quantity of the number of yeers since the Creation according as they have gathered it out of the holy Scriptures and divers Histories which Writers although they vary and the summe of their number differs yet every mans expectation seems to bee not beyond two hundred yeers hence Yea the thing it selfe shews that the fall and ruine of things will bee in a short time * onely the CITY of ROME being now in safety there seems no cause of feare in any such thing But when that head of * the World shall fall and bee * a RUINE instead of ROME * as the Sibylls foretell who * doubts but the end to humane affaires and the whole World is now come Wee said saith Lactantius Chap. 26. a little afore that in the beginning of the holy Kingdome it shall bee that the Prince of Devils shall be bound by God But that same Prince when the one thousand yeers that * is when the 7000 yeers shall * begin to determine hee shall bee loosed againe c. and shall stir up all Nations under the dominion of the just to warre against the holy City whereupon innumerable people shall bee gathered together who shall besiege it Then shall the last wrath of God come upon the Nations and overthrow them unto one man with many terrible shakings c. of the earth and other wonderfull signes c. and infinite
primum quem legi appellat REDEMPTIONEM ISRAELIS seu PROPHETICAM HISTORIAM DE SALVATORIS NOSTRI REGNO IN TERRIS c. Secundum a me nondum perlectum nominat REDEMPTIONEM ISRAELIS REDEMPTAM sive JUDAEORUM GENERALEM MIRACULOSAM CONVERSIONEM AD FIDEM EVANGELII Eorundemque in suam patriam reditum nostrique salvatoris imperium in terris personaliter ministratum c. In quibus multos recenset authores ut pote Alstedium in Chronolog cap. 32. cap. 35. Fran. Johannem de comb is in compendio totius Theologiae lib. 7. cap. 13 14. It. lib. 7. cap. 7. Foxum in Martyrolog Anglic. * Wendelinum Contemplat Natural cap. 9. sect 2. cap. 21. * sect 2. Johan Acostam De Temporalib Noviss lib. 3. cap. 11. Down in 17. Johan Cum multis aliis c. quorum verba hic describere nec mihi otium est nec animus ne lector taedio affligeretur §. 11. Mr. Archer also an Englishman hath waded farther into the point then wee have in some particulars which are not so cleer to us having written as we are informed two Treatises of it The first is expresse under his name entituled THE PERSONALL REIGNE OF CHRIST UPON EARTH The other is called ZIONS JOY IN HER KING COMING IN HIS GLORY But doubtfull whether his being subscribed with this darke name BY FINIENS CANUS VOVE Nostras etiam Archerius altiùs paulò in nonnullis nobis minus innotescentibus urinatus librum scripsit cujus titulus est REGIMEN CHRISTI PERSONALE IN TERRIS Nec non ut aiunt alium cujus inscriptio est GAUDIUM ZIONIS IN REGE SUO CUM GLORIA VENIENTE §. 12. Learned Mr. Meade our Country-man his Clavis Apocalyptica Commentarius both in Latine and English is famously known to most that read books § a. Learned Doctor Twisse his PREFACE doth shew the METHOD and excellency of Mr. MEDES interpretation of the Revelation It will not bee amisse to give an account of that Preface in the summe of it that by occasion hereof other Nations that understand not English may have it in Latine wherein at once is seen much of Mr. Mede and of the judgement of Dr. Twisse in our Position Many Interpreters saith Dr. Twisse alluding to Prov. 31.29 have done excellently but Mr. Mede surmounteth them all A Daearse set upon a Giants shoulders may see further and a Wren carried up upon an Eagle till this great bird bee wearied may with her little wings spin up a little higher But Mr. Mede hath many notions of so rare a nature that I doe not finde hee is beholding to any other for them but onely to his owne studiousnesse under Gods blessing § b. Observe Gods direction of him in the course that hee hath taken As first in his Clavis Apolyptica wherein he hath drawne together the homogeneal parts of it dispersed here and there yet belonging to the same time 2. The Author gave himselfe to write Specimina Essayes wherein he goes over every part of this book excepting the three first Chapters taking a generall view of each as he goes 3. He proceeds to a more full Commentary from the fourth Chapter to the fourteenth That which follows thence to the end containes onely his former Specimina § c. Whereas in performances of this nature two things are necessary 1. A righ discerning of the meaning of the words and phrase and tropes and figures 2. A right accomodation of things to times For the first Mr. Mede excels viz. in observing the Genius of all those As in opening the Mystery of the battel in heaven Rev. 12. and the casting downe of Satan unto the earth hee shews that States and Kingdomes in the Political world much answer to the condition of the Natural and so represented in Scripture For as the Natural consists of Heaven and Earth so the Political of Nobility and Laity And as in the Heavens there are Sunne Moon and Stars of lesser and greater magnitude So in Kingdomes King Queene and Nobles of severall degrees And as in the Earth there is great variety of Trees Herbs Flowers c. So in the people of any Commonwealth is found great variety of differences And by this way Mr. Mede doth not onely wittily please as others have done but solidly convince his Reader of the true sense even to admiration For the second viz. Accommodation of the Prophesies to their proper times a point of great skill in history I have found that Mr. Medes friends acquainted with his studies would give him the Bell for this as herein out-stripping others § d. 3. I have observed some notable distinctions in this Commentary of Mr. Mede giving great light As first That betweene the Sealed Book with seven seales which hee calls the greater the contents being very large viz. Comprising the History from the beginning of the preaching of the Gospel to the end of the world Which hee saith containes Fata imperii i. e. the destinies of the Empire and the little book mentioned Chap. 10. which he saith contains Fata Ecclesiae the destinies of the Church The first containes the seven Seales and Trumpets for the seventh seale produceth the seven Trumpets The six first Seales containe the story of the Empires continuance unto the dayes of Constantine included in whose dayes there being a strange Metamorphosis of the Empire from Heathen to Christian it is represented as it were the ending of the world and beginning of a new which Mr. Mede delivers very judiciously Then the seven Trumpets which are the contents of the seventh Seale represent the judgements of God upon the world for standing out against the Gospel and shedding the blood of the Saints First by the Heathen Emperours for which cause ruine was gradually brought upon the Empire till it was torne into ten Kingdomes The graduall was fourefold which make up the contents of the foure first Trumpets 2. By the Antichristian world the degenerated states of Christendome For which the three Woe Trumpets following containe the three degrees of divine vengeance on them 1. By the Saracens in the first Woe Trumpet 2. By the Turkes in the second Chap. 9. 3. By the end of the World Rev. 11.15 § e. Second distinction of great light and use for the clearing of the STATE OF CHRISTS GLORIOUS KINGDOME HERE ON EARTH is that Mr. Mede gives upon Revel 21.24 Between the NATIONS THAT ARE SAVED c. and the NEW HIERUSALEM where clearly hee makes it appeare that NEW HIERUSALEM is one thing and THE NATIONS THAT ARE SAVED are another The Nations that are saved are those that escape the fire are saved from the fire at Christs coming wherewith the Earth and all the works thereof shall bee burnt in the day of Christs coming 2 Pet. 3. 2 Thess 1. And the NEW HIERUSALEM saith Mr. Mede is CHRIST and his RAISED SAINTS who are called 1 Thes 4. The SAINTS WHOM CHRIST SHALL BRING WITH HIM who shall shine with a glorious light In
Prophet is to point out that Dominion and that Glory c. which the other foure Monarchs had And ALL PEOPLES and NATIONS and LANGUAGES should SERVE him whose dominion is for ever c. that is as long as the world below lasts all which manifestly relate to a Kingdome of Christ on earth compare v. 23 and v. 27. Thus far the Kingdome is given to Christ as if in comparison hee had none afore The vers 17. c. it is said to be the Saints Kingdome in these words These great Beasts which are foure are foure Kings that is foure Emperial Monarchies under foure races of mighty persecuting Monarchical Emperours of foure several sorts namely First Assyrio-Chaldean Secondly Medo-Persian Thirdly Grecian Fourthly Roman which shall arise out of the EARTH that is by violence succeed one another in that inheritance of the world But the Saints of the most High shall take the Kingdome that is that very Kingdome of the world that the other foure former Monarchs had and possesse the Kingdome for ever and for ever and ever that is in all ages as long as time shall bee as the original signifies adding v. 23. c. to the end of the Chapter The fourth Beast shall bee the fourth Kingdome upon earth that is the Emperour of the Roman Empire which shall bee divers from al the Kingdomes namely in Rule in Conquest and Cruelty and shall devoure the whole earth and shall tread it down and breake it in peeces meaning that the Romans shall conquer the whole world utterly defacing all Kingly dominion in the same And the ten Hornes out of this Kingdome are ten Kings that shall arise to wit the Roman Empire at last is divided into ten Kingdomes as John hath it severall times in the Revelation as a tendency to the ruine of that Empire for it follows here And another shall rise after them and he shall bee divers from the first and he shall subdue three Kings That is the Easterne Saracen-Arabian Turkish power ascending to a monstrous height of strength differing from the former in Nation Religion and Tyranny shall take away three of the said tenne Kingdomes And he shall speake great words against the most High see the Turkish Alcoran and shall weare out the Saints of the most High that is in a great measure slaying so many Christians at one battel as the tippes of their right eares filled nine sackes and thinke to change Times and Lawes that is those of divine institution as appeares also in his Alcoran and they shall bee given into his hand untill a time and times and dividing of times meaning that the Saint◠shall by divine permission fall under the Turkish power three hundred and fifty yeers from his first invading the Jewish Countries to his full and finall fall But saith the 26. v. c. to the end of the Chapter The judgement shall sit and they shall take away his dominion to consume and to destroy it to the end that is to say The Ancient of dayes as fitting in judgement judgeth to vindicate the Saints and so gives them opportunity and virility to deprive the Turke of his Kingdome and utterly to consume his power and strength And so in the 27. verse The Kingdome and Dominion UNDER the whole HEAVEN shall bee given to the people of the Saints of the most High c. That is the same Dominions of the whole world below that the former tyrannicall Monarches usurped shall now be given into the hands of the converted Jewes and holy Gentiles adhering to them to reigne on earth with Christ to whom these Dominions were delivered in the former part of this Chapter This place of the seventh of Daniel hath beene so large touching the Saints reigning with Christ on earth that we shall adde but one or two places more and that very briefly Revel 11.15 c. The seventh Angel sounded and there were great voices in heaven saying the Kingdomes of the WORLD are become the Kingdomes of our LORD and of his CHRIST or of him as CHRIST and hee shall REIGNE for ever and ever that is throughout all AGES from hence forward over the Kingdomes of the WORLD as if hitherto he had not in comparison reigned over them And the foure and twenty Elders c. fell upon their faces c. Saying we give thee thanks O Lord c. because thou hast TAKEN TO THEE THY GREAT POWER and hast REIGNED and the Nations were ANGRY which shewes this was not at the ultimate day of judgement and the time of the dead that they should bee judged is come that is the Saints should bee vindicated for so it presently followes that thou shouldest give rewards to thy servants the Prophets and to the Saints and them that feare thy name which what should it bee but to reigne on earth as it is both before expressed in the Preface Rev. 5.10 and after in the Catastrophe Revel 20.4 in regard of which reigning on earth they may bee said to bee the FIRST-FRUITS to God Rev. 14.4 because this is but the beginning of Gods worke of glorifying his Saints Let us close this Paragraph with Heb. 2.5 c. to 10. The world to come the Greek is the INHABITED world to come must be put under man though not under Angels according to Psalme 8. quoted there by the Apostle which Psalme relates to Gen. 1.26 where God gives Adam dominion over all the Creation But saith the Apostle in his time Wee see not yet all things put under him onely Jesus as the pledge is crowned with glory Therefore say I there is such a thing yet to come Let not the Reader if I may intreat so much despise the allegation of these Texts for the present purpose which are little more then barely alleadged onely to hint the Saints reigning with Christ on earth I desire to ingage him upon this request but for a time till I come to critically scan if I may assume so much confidence to my selfe these and many other places of Scripture And then upon his serious joynt view of all all together if he can bee of another minde different from mee let him for mee abound in his owne sense § 4 But to wheele about from this digression to our owne post and businesse in hand viz. the Reigning of the Saints WITH CHRIST at this time and in this place aforesaid Before they reigned but sometimes over their corruptions and Satans temptations but never over men but now totally and finally over Sinne MEN and Divels as wee shall demonstrate afterwards Their living must be after a RESURRECTION as the word is twice mentioned in this 20. of Revelation Though they bee made but spiritual Kings and Priests as the Objecters will have it in those words Rev. 5.10 Hee hath made us Kings and Priests to God yet how shall the next words be figured off from their proper sense where the Crowne of Dignity is put upon the head of REIGNING UPON EARTH Hee
hath made us Kings and Priests unto God AND besides Wee shall REIGN UPON EARTH And as through abundance of confidence begetting abundance of joy the Saints are brought in expressing it in a triumphing song And againe they praise for the same thing in substance in a song Rev. 14.3 And againe the same matter in the same manner in effect Rev. 19. first six verses And the reason given is because the Lord God Omnipotent reigneth and hath avenged the blood of his servants and the Saints are then extant to praise for it and all this must bee yeelded to bee on earth by whomsoever the rest of the Chapter shall be read out curiously for whiles the Saints are all in Heaven properly so called Christ needs not as it is v. 15. rule the NATIONS with a ROD OF IRON or as it is v. 18. c. Call the fowles to eat the flesh of Kings Captaines c. and of horses whiles he slayes men with the sword But I transgresse in anticipating if not prejudicing my selfe in spending so much time in touches hints and intimations afore I come to the elaborate scanning of these and other Scriptures SECT III. Analecta de Sanctis in illo MILLENARIO CUM CHRISTO regnantibus SAnctos cum CHRISTO regnare his mille annis tam Canorâ profertur emphasi ut nemo facile surdeat incurius In praefatione Apocalypsis cap. 5. praefatam aliquatenus in libro cap. 20. liberè habemus prenunciatam In 5. cap. ovantes canunt Dignus es Agne qui accipias librum aperias c. quoniam mactatus es fecisti nos DEO NOSTRO reges sacerdotes ET observetur illud 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 praeterea REGNABIMUS in TERRA Mirum si regnaverint in terrâ Christiani Christo ibidem non regnante Verùm non ita ab effectu sejungatur causa Sed vivent inquit vicesimum Caput regnabunt CUM CHRISTO mille annos 2. Ut verò Christus dicitur hoc Milleno ita in terris regnare quasi illum comparativè non anteà ibidem regnâsse dici videatur Apocal. 11.15.17 Ita Sancti pari analogiâ dicuntur tunc CUM ILLO illic regnaturi tanquam non regnantes ante haec videbantur 3. Videamus jam utriusque mappam Discutiamus postea Dan. 7. v. 9. ad v. 15. Videbam donec solia posita sunt ita Textus originalis it a vetus interpres ANTIQUUS DIERUM sedit coram quo myrias myriadum stabant Judicio considente libri aperti sunt Videbam tunc ex quo caepit vox verborum grandium quae cornu illud parvum nempe illud ultimum grandiloquum v. 8. loquebatur Videbam usque dum occisa est bestia illa scilicet decemcornupeta cum ultimo succrescenti cornu eradicanti tria v. 7 8. occisa est perditurque corpus ejus traditum incendio Residui etiam bestiarum ablatus est dominatus spacium tamen in vita datur iis us que ad tempus constitutum Visionibus videbam nocturnis quò◠ecce cum nubibus Caeli SIMILIS FILIO HOMINIS Christus nempe Veniebat deinde usque ad ANTQUUM DIERUM nempe DEUM PATREM pervenit ut sisteretur ante eum ETHUIC Christo scilicet datur dominatus gloriaque ac Regnum ILLUD Sic Graecè habetur emphaticè ad mentem Prophetae eundem domìnatum illam ipsam gloriam idemque regnum penes olim quatuor Monarchas jam Christo dari ut patet ex sequentibus ut omnes populi nationes linguae ei serviant cujus dominatus est perpetuus c. id est nulla post Christi dominatum Regnum sequitur in terris dominatio Vel perpetuum dicitur hoc Christi Regnum quod omni durante seculo est duraturum ut sonat origo 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Quae omnia cunctis ni captis oculis apertissimè referuntur ad visibile Christi REGNUM in TERRA expressiùs v. 23.27 collatis singulis quatuor Monarchiis quae praecesserunt ruentibus HOC Regnum hucusque Christo datum quasi nullum illi fuisset antea jam sanctis datur utpote cum Christo regnantibus v. 17. c. ad finem Hae bestiae magnae inquit unus ex astantibus juxta Danielem interpres quae sunt quatuor quatuor sunt reges e terrâ surrecturi id est quatuor Imperia Monarchica sanctos persequentia in terrarum haereditate invicem succedentia nempe Assyrio-Chaldaicum Medo-persicum Graecum Romanum Sed Sancti accipient Regnum HOC ut Junius dat emphasin qui possessuri Regnum IPSUM ut iterum dat Junius usque in seculum inque seculum seculorum Id est interpretanti Ephraimo Huito Sancti Judaei privabunt eas bestias suo dominatu eundem possessuri ad extremum mundi finem His visis Danieli optanti veritatem cognoscere de bestiâ quartâ ab omnibus diversâ dentibus ferreis conculcante caeteras deque cornibus decem in ejus capite deque ultimo succrescente cornu a cujus conspectu ceciderunt tria ore ejus loquente grandia gerenteque bellum cum sanctis eisque praevalente usque ad ANTIQUI DIERUM adventum judicium sanctis daturum ità responsum est Bestia illa quarta regnum quartum erit in terrâ quod diversum erit ab omnibus illis regnis consumet enim totam terram c. Id est Imperium Romanum diversum regimine victoriis crudelitate a caeteris eorundent dominatus regalia delebit Et cornua deâ—â—m ex illo regno sunt decem reges qui exsurgent post quos exsurget postremus qui erit a prioribus diversus tres reges deprimet Id est ex quarto imperio nempe Roma no surrexerunt decem status inferiores â—yrannici in quos hoc dividitur impeâ—â—um hâc praeparatione divinitùs factâ in ruinam ejus ut opportunè jam cornu Turcicum tres illorum domat dominaturque absolutissimè â—ejectis legibus imperialibus Romanis quâ ratione a decem omnino distinguitur Et loquetur postremus ille verba adversus excelsum excelsique sanctos deteret adeò ut cogitet se mutaturum tempora jus Id est quà m maximas inventas blasphemias contra Deum promulgabit crudelique tyrannide sanctorum debilitabit potentiam consulet de mutandis temporibus legibusque divinitùs institutis Tradenturque in manum ejus usque ad tempus tempora divisumque tempus Nempe Turca ita dicto conamine praevalebit ut Sancti ejus dominio trecentos quinquaginta annos subjicientur Sed judicium considebit dominatus ejus auferetur profligando perdendoque usque in finem Hoc est judicante Jehovâ sancti eripiunt illi regâ—um vim râ—bur potestatem ejus devastantes Regnum autem dominatusque amplitudo regnorum SUB TOTO CAELO dabitur POPULO sanctorum exceâ—sissimi Cujus regnum erit in seculum omnes dominatores ei servient auscultabunt Quibus
distinct as that the Apostle makes them opposite 2 Cor. 5.7 Heb. 11. oft Therefore every eye seeing him cannot signifie a sight of faith onely There needed not any expression of EYE or of his being in the Clouds to signifie a sight by faith Wee can now see him in Heaven by faith It is a question whether every eye that is said here to see him shall at first sight see him by faith For EVERY EYE must see him and ALL KINDREDS of the EARTH shall mourne Sure his Antichristian enemies generally shall not see him by faith whom he destroyes at his coming Rev. 19. last 2 Thess 2. to make way for the reigning of the Saints Rev. 20. EVEN SO AMEN John did believe saw Christ by faith but for that sight of him in the Clouds to be visible to him and all the Kindreds of the earth he prayes and raiseth up his faith with an hearty Amen that so it shall bee So that by all these things it is most evident that of a time and state following Christs Ascention John speakes here Nor on the other side can this Revel 1.7 bee understood of the ultimate day of judgement 1. Because it is the same with Zech. 1.10 and so for the same reasons cannot bee meant of that day of judgement 2. Because this is set here as the maine and generall Proposition to the Book of the Revelation in which the Master-peece is to set forth Christ to come and set up his Church into a most glorious estate on earth before the day of judgement as wee shall see abundantly afterwards and to make her reigne with him on earth 3. It were very incongruous for John in the last clause of verse 6. to applaud Christs DOMINION as to continue FOR EVER that is while times and ages last as the Greek imports and in the next breath in the first clause of the seventh verse to say he cometh to make an end of his Dominion For the ultimate day of judgement is the last act of Christs Dominion which done Christ layes downe all his Dominion that God may bee all in all 1 Cor. 15.24.28 Wee may not imagine such incoherencies in Johns expression now most eminently filled with the Spirit Therefore I must needs conclude that there is no such likely time of such an eminent coming of Christ and appearing to his Church as this at the time of Restitution of all things Something of this place will be more plain by that in the next Section § 4 But before wee come to that let us collate and lay together the two precedent places of Zech. 12.10 and Revel 17. and out of both containing the same sense and in the same words let us draw this argument as the summe of both Zechary the Prophet and John the Apostle both prophesie in the aforesaid places of one and the same personall appearance of Christ visibly to the eyes of men on earth after his Ascention But this cannot bee understood of his appearance at the ultimate generall judgement because they speake of his pouring out of grace and giving repentance to the families of the Jewes and of his Dominion thence to continue for many ages to the ultimate end of the world Therefore the said visible appearance of Christ is yet to bee before the ultimate day of judgement Which when should it bee but at the conversion of the Jewes and the throwing downe of his apparent obstinate Antichristian enemies as the circumstances of the said places before hinted doe cleerly evince SECT III. OF THE third PLACE OF SCRIPTURE for Christs Personall Appearance at the great Restauration of the Church viz. Matth. 24. v. 30. And then shall appeare the signe of the Sonne of man in Heaven and then shall all the Tribes of the earth mourne and they shall see the Sonne of man coming in the Clouds of Heaven with power and great glory § 1 OBserve distinctly every clause and word 1. Then shall appeare the signe of the Sonne of man that is the Sonne of man shall appeare for a signe that great things are at hand as it followes in this verse they shall see the sonne of man and mourne 2. The signe of the Sonne of man in Heaven He was before in the highest third Heaven but now in the lowest first Heaven namely of the Clouds as it follows also in this verse 3. And then shall all the TRIBES of the EARTH intimating Jewes as well as Gentiles mourne Why They shall see the Sonne of man that is as man How mourne Doubtlesse Christ meanes as Zechary meant and John meant namely the Jewes with godly repentance and his obstinate open enemies with desperation for the ruine that is coming upon them 4. Coming IN the Clouds or UPON the Clouds See now what was Johns meaning Rev. 1.7 when he said Christ should come WITH the Clouds To this matter with and in is all one And which is considerable our New Translators concur with us as by quotation in the Margin to make this and Rev. 1.7 to be parallel places tending to the same thing § 2 Now Christ spake this before his Ascention and going away above the clouds Therefore it must needs be that this must bee fulfilled after he hath attended above the Clouds Then and not till then will it be rightly said and properly fulfilled that he comes in the Clouds So the Angels at Christs Ascention Act. 1. After that in v. 9.10 He was taken up and a Cloud received him out of their sight the Disciples looking stedfastly towards heaven as he went up they say unto them This same Jesus which is TAKEN up from you into heaven shall SO COME It must needs be improper to say he shall COME IN the Clouds before hee be gone above the Clouds Before hee came at incarnation in the Virgins wombe and in a Manger But now after his Ascention above the Clouds hee shall come in the Clouds § 3 Nor can this his coming and appearance in the Clouds be here understood of his coming at the ultimate day of judgement because of that but foure verses after namely v. 34. which Christ affirmeth with grand asseveration namely Verily I say unto you THIS GENERATION shall not passe till ALL THESE things bee fulfilled And then hee seales it and binds it up in the next verse viz. v. 35. Heaven and earth shall passe away but my words and particularly those words aforegoing shall not passe away A seale doth sometimes represent the Writer as well as the words of the writing This doth something also explaine the former passages of this Chapter That heaven and earth shall passe at Christs coming that is in quality not in substance saith Oecumenius on the 21 of Revel there shall bee a new heaven and a new earth the old passing away as Isa 65.2 Pet. 3. Rev. 21. but Christs word for his Personal appearance to his people before the ultimate day of judgement shall not passe For this appearance of Christ in the
he that shall endure to the END the same shall be saved Of the other signes he said they did not signifie that the END was immediately at hand vers 6. These signs shall be saith Christ BUT the END is not YET But now hee comes to speake of the signe of the End of the world viz. that this Gospel of the KINGDOME shall be preached in all the world 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 published as by an Herauld And THIS Gospel of THE KINGDOME as pointing at this particular of the good newes of the Gospel that Christ should after all these darke clouds of the reigne of wickednesse have a Kingdome on earth And then saith Christ shall the END come which must of necessity import one of these ENDS and one of these wayes must be signified by the publishing of the Gospel in all the world That either the Gospel should be published in all the world to Jews and Gentiles as a signe immediately before the End of THIS present world that is before the thousand yeers of the great Restauration Or that the full and effectuall manifestation of the Gospel should be in the time of that Restauration in those thousand yeers which Paul calls Heb. 2.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That inhabited world that is to come of which place much after as a fore-running signe of the ultimate generall end of the whole world Let the Reader take which he pleaseth For either of them concludes for us that after this signe according as we interpret the sequel shall be the beginning or ending of Christs visible appearance to us on earth As it follows vers 29. Then shall appear the signe of the Sonne of man not for a meer short sentence of judgement but to gather his elect from the foure quarters of the earth Of which place much in Sect. 3. of this 2 Book § 4 To gather all into an apparent argument the summe and signes of all is this If Christ in shewing the signes of his coming the second time doth clearly distinguish between his next coming and visible appearing and the end of the world and for that end gives distinct signes of both then Christ must come before the end of the world and visibly appeare But so doth Christ clearly distinguish and distinctly signifie those two as we have shewed Therefore there is yet a time wherein Christ will come and visibly appeare before the end of the world At first we know by the Gospels he came in a state of humility for salvation to sinners that should believe The next time he comes in glory to reigne visibly to the comfort of them that doe beleeve Rev. 20. first six verses Third and last time for terrour to the wicked vers 12. Of that second coming the thing now under consideration Christ having given signes as hath been shewed he concludes in verse 30. They shall see the Sonne of man in the Clouds of heaven with great power and glory which cannot be meant of the finall sentence of the ultimate judgement because of that in the 34 verse bound with an asseveration and attestation before and behinde Verily I say unto you this generation shall not passe till all these things be fulfilled Heaven and earth shall passe away but my words shall not passe away Of which 34. vers much afterward SECT X. Of the tenth Scripture for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Luke 19. ver 11. to 28. He added and spake a Parable because he was nigh to Jerusalem and because they thought that the KINGDOME OF GOD should immediately APPEARE A certaine noble-man went into a farre Country to RECEIVE FOR HIMSELFE A KINGDOME and TO RETURNE and he called his ten Servants and delivered to them ten pounds and said unto them occupy till I come But his Citizens hated him and sent a Message after him saying we will not have this man to reigne over us And it came to passe when he was returned HAVING RECEIVED THE KINGDOME then he commanded these servants to be called unto him to whom he gave the mony c. Then came the first saying Lord thy pound hath gained ten pounds And he said unto him well thou good servant because thou hast been faithfull in a little have thou authority over ten Cities and so proportionable to the rest But those mine enemies that would not have me reigne over them bring them hither and slay them before me § 1 THis Parable was spoken a little before Christs suffering as appeares by the order of the Story here and in Mat. 25. It is pend by Luke who wrote the Acts where he carefully reports Christs coming againe just as they saw him ascend in relation to the restoring of the Kingdome of which Christ spake and the Disciples enquired after Act. 1.3 4 5 6 c. to 12. only saith Luke Acts 3.21 The heavens must receive him for a time and then he shall come from heaven and cause the restitution of all things as hath been opened § 2 The Preface to this Parable is a golden key to open the curious Cabinet of the meaning of this Parable that we may not relye upon a meere Allegory Christ spake this Parable because he was night to Jerusalem and because they thought that the Kingdome of God should IMMEDIATELY APPEARE It doth not deny the appearing of the Kingdom Christ is for it only he is against the immediate 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the suddaine appearance of it he must afore that as is the maine sence of the Parable goe away into a farre country viz. to Heaven and leave talents in trust with his servants giving them time to imploy them and to be so long absent that his enemies grow so bold as to send after him with this high affront they would not have him to reigne over them that is according to the direct sence Some seemingly professours by his long absence should grow quite carelesse of improving the talents or gifts of endowments to his honour and others by his delay as they counted it should become professed enemies against him § 3 But whatever these mistakers dreamed the truth was that as the diligent Talenters expected and accordingly acted Christ went away to Heaven not to returne no more but went thither to take to himselfe a Kingdome which phrase viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 must signifie a Kingdome peculiar to himselfe as he is Christ else how doth he take it or receive it to himselfe And being installed into it he is to returne He had his Kingdome of grace before he went away as he oft mentioneth it in his Parables and Sermons adding that that his Kingdome was not of this world And he had the Kingdome of glory as his triumph over his Kingdome of grace having finished his conquest on the Crosse So hee needed not to returne to receive either of these Kingdomes It remains therefore that it is the Kingdome we speak of that he returnes to receive He went to Heaven
to the last place afore handled out of the New Testament this vision much enlightening that Parable in ver 26 27. the close expounding that Parable as the Preface ver 11 12. explaines that it concernes the time following upon the ruine of the foure Monarchies § 2 In the eleventh and twelfth verses the foure Beasts that is the foure Monarchies are slaine as it is expounded after verse 17. The foure great Beasts are foure Kings instead of them Daniel sees in a vision ver 13 14. One like the Sonne of Man come WITH THE CLOVDES of Heaven and came to the Ancient of dayes and they brought him neere before him which notably agrees with that place last spoken of Luke 19.11 c. where it is said Christ went into a farre Country to receive to himselfe a Kingdome and returne And that visibly saith this of Daniel with the Clouds or in the Clouds as Rev. 1.7 in way of Preface to this his Kingdome Rev. 11. Rev. 20. And saith Daniel ver 14. There was given to him that was like the Son of Man DOMINION and glory and a KINGDOME that all People Nations and Languages should serve him Just as Luke 19.15 according to the Greek he returned receiving the kingdom When he visibly returned he received a Kingdome here below else why did he returne Adde that here below he exercised visible destruction upon his enemies for it is not said as of the unworthy Talenter he cast them into utter darknesse but he caused them to be slaine afore his face SECT II. Of the second place of Scripture out of the Old Testament for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Jer. 25.5.6 Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that I will raise unto David a righteous branch and a King shall reigne and PROSPER and shall execute JUDGEMENT AND JUSTICE in THE EARTH In his dayes Judah shal be saved and ISRAEL SHALL DWELL safely and this is his name whereby hee shal bee called THE LORD OVR RIGHTEOVSNESSE § 1 FIrst it is evident by the last clause that the Lord Christ is the person here meant it being his incommunicable name Act. 4.12 2 Cor 5. last § 2 Nextly It is as apparent by the whole Series of Jeremiahs Prophesie that this relateth to the times after Judahs Captivity in Babilon Israel having been carried away captive long afore § 3 Lastly It is beyond all objection that Christ did yet never so reigne upon earth as this Text holds forth as may be made appeare with few words in these particulars 1. Christ must reigne and prosper That is must be every way glorious and successefull so that Judah and Israel shall owne him for their King and call him the Lord their righteousnesse 2 He shall execute justice and judgement in the earth it is not said he shall preach justice or judgement or execute it in heavenly places but he shall execute it upon or in the earth 3. In his dayes JUDAH shal be saved and ISRAEL shal dwell safely viz. being gathered out of all Countries ver 3. But the Lord Christ did yet never thus reigne Instead of reigning and prospering in the eyes of Israel and Iudah he was as a branch blasted a thing accursed Isa 53. ver 3 4 c. so that the Iewes for the generall dis-owned him proceeding against him as a Malefactor guilty of many of the highest Crimes and for matters of Iustice and Iudgement in the earth he refused to meddle with the smallest matters as to give his opinion touching the Adulteresse or to divide the inheritance Nor then nor yet ever did Israel returne from Captivity and dwell safely if wee might say Iudah did at Christs first coming in the flesh as we may not because they were then under the Heathen Roman power as conquered and tributaries Luke 3.1 § 4 Nor may any put this off with Christs Spirituall reigning for so he did alwayes from the Creation but this is in the future tense hee shal reigne to signifie his reigning so as never before SECT III. Of the third Scripture â—â—t of the Old Testament for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Zach. 2.10 11 12. compared with Zach. 14. ver 4 5 6 7 8 9. Sing and rejoyce O daughter of Jerusalem for loe I come and will DWELL in the midst of thee saith the Lord. And many NATIONS shall be joyned to the Lord in that day and shall be my people and I will DWELL in the midst of thee and the Lord shall INHERIT Judah his portion in the holy Land and shall CHOOSE JERVSALEM AGAINE And his feet shall stand in that day upon the Mount of Olives and the Lord shall bee King over ALL THE EARTH In that day there shall be one LORD and his name one ZEchary Prophesied after their returne out of Captivity in Babilon see Zech. 1.1 compared with 2 Chron. 36.22 Ezra chap. 1. ver 1. c. to the end Therefore this was not fulfilled in their return for it is spoken of a future time to come And Spiritually God did alwayes dwell among his people and therefore nor can that be the full meaning of this place And when Christ came and was incarnated this Text was not fulfilled for then many Nations were not joyned to the Lord to be his people nor so much as the generality of any one Nation the Heathen Romans then inherited the portion of Judah and filled all Countries with their persons or powers and instead of Christ then choosing Jerusalem againe he pronounced woe against it and gave it up to desolation which accordingly about forty yeares after Christs Passion was fulfilled Mat. 23. three last and Matth. 24.1 2 c. Nor was the Lord King over all the earth more then he had been before Christs Incarnation Instead of one Lord over all there were many SECT IIII. The fourth place in the Old Testament for Christs personall appearance Micha 4. vers 1 c. to 8. In the last dayes it shall come to passe that the Mountaine of the House of the Lord shall be established in the top of the Mountaine and MANY NATIONS SHALL COME AND SAY Come let us goe up to the Mountaine of the LORD and HEE shall JUDGE AMONG MANY PEOPLE and rebuke the NATIONS afarre off and they shall BEAT THEIR SWORDS INTO PLOW-SHARES NATION SHALL NOT LIFT UP A SWORD AGAINST NATION neither shall they learne warre any more but they shall sit every man under his Vine and under his Fig-tree and NONE SHALL MAKE THEM AFRAID In that day I will assemble her that halteth and will gather her that was driven out and her that I have afflicted and I will make her that was cast off a STRONG NATION and the Lord shal REIGN OVER THEM IN MOVNT ZION FROM HENCE-FORTH and FOR EVER NOw when was ever this since the Creation much lesse was it performed at Christs Incarnation when the Jewes were under the Roman power obstinate
against Christ and scattered to this day SECT V. The fifth place for Christs Personall appearance Zephan 3.14 to end of the Chapter Sing O Daughter of Zion shout O JSRAEL the Lord hath taken away thy judgement he hath cast out thine enemy the KING OF ISRAEL even the LORD is in the MIDST OF THEE In that day it shal be said to Jerusalem feare thou not the LORD THY GOD IN THE MIDST OF THEE IS MIGHTY he will save he will rejoyce over thee with joy I will gather them that are sorrowfull Behold at that time I will undoe all that afflict thee I will gather her that was driven out and I will get them praise and fame in every Land where they have been put to shame c. NOw when was Christ ever so in the midst of Judah and Israel as to doe thus therefore this is yet to be fulfilled CHAP. VI. The close of the second Booke in a generall briefe Discourse of Christs visible appearance to the Saints on earth afore the ultimate Day of Judgement § 1 I Have spoken but briefly to the last Scriptures and shall no longer insist distinctly upon this Head of proving by peculiar places of Scripture the Personall visible appearance of Christ at the setting up of his Kingdome before the end of the World because we shall have many sprinklings of this in the prosecution of the whole of the point yet remaining about the Kingdome it selfe § 2 Only meane while I would have the Reader observe from the Scriptures that have been alleadged That Christ must be a King visibly it must visibly appeare he is a King or else men that are only sensible will never be convinced which is the maine intent of Christs visible appearance so that the Kings of the earth that of all men are drowned in sensuality shall come and submit to his Kingdome Rev. 21. and elsewhere as we have heard afore § 2 And is there not all reason that the King of Kings the Sonne of Man should be as compleatly and apparently King as the Kings that are under him They have not onely Authority by Writs Warrants Proclamations c. to punish or encourage by their Officers but they visibly are crowned sit in the Throne beare the Scepter and attended upon all just occasions with a visible power Then it is all equity that Christ also should not onely have sovereigne Authority but also a visible power so as he may visibly appeare to his very enemies to be King over all the earth § 3 Yea earthly Kings have as a providentiall care over all their subjects even to the punishing of the rebellious so also have they their secret way of insinuation and ingratiating towards their favourites and their manifest glorious presence at Court in the Metropolitan and most magnificent place of the Kingdome Therefore at least no lesse must be allowed to Christ viz. a providentiall power over all the world A spirituall efficacie over his Kingdome of grace or visible Church and a visible glorious reigning over all his true Saints § 4 Now Christ is not King in glory in the highest heavens with and over all his Saints for all shall not be there according to the common Tenet till the Lord Christ hath resigned all his power according to 1 Cor. 15.28 or at least when he hath brought all the elect soules to their bodies by a resurrection and changed them whom he findes alive at his coming and so brought them all to ultimate glory just then he layes downe all his authority So that he doth not reign with and over all his Saints in ultimate glory at all § 5 But he must be a visible King of visible glory over the Church made very glorious upon earth at his next appearance afore the ultimate judgement according to the Scriptures aforegoing A great comfort to the bodies in the grave that they shall not there lye so long as to the ultimate judgement when all the wicked shall bee raised as is evident by comparing vers 2. c. of Rev. 20. with vers 8. c. And a great comfort to them alive at his coming that have waited for him faithfully to the last and worst of the Tragedie of evill times § 6 I need not speake to the first two Kinglinesses of Christ viz. Providential of power and spirituall of grace But a word will do well here to the last viz. his visible glorious appearance before the ultimate day of judgement making all the world sincere or altogether seeming Saints and reigning over them as the alone Monarch He must as visibly succeed in government he foure mettals Dan. 2. and the foure Beasts Dan. 7. both signifying the foure Monarchies viz. the Chalde-Babylonian the Medo-persian the Grecian and the Roman as these foure did visibly precede him in government Dan. 2.44.45 The God of Heaven shall set up a Kingdome which shall never be destroyed and the Kingdome shall not be left to other people but it shall breake in peeces and consume all these Kingdomes and it shall stand for ever And all this comes to passe in that the stone Christ Jesus cut out of the mountaine without hands brake in peeces the iron the brasse the clay the silver and the gold Dan. 7.13 14. The rest of the Beasts had their Dominion taken away The Sonne of Man comes with the Clouds and the Ancient of dayes gave him dominion and glory and a Kingdome that all people and Nations and languages should serve him So that Christ at his next appearance is the fifth Monarchy § 7 When the Lord spake but little to Eve of his dominion over the seed of the Serpent and consequently his succour of the seed of the woman how did he anon and after and all along the New Testament begin to act in Types this visible Monarchy He appears to Moses in a burning bush to give a visible signe of his presence to deliver Israel out of Egypt And appeares to Israel in a pillar of a Cloud and of fire sensibly to signifie he was their convoy They are a Royalty as Peter calls them but God onely their Monarch Moses and after Samuel were onely Interpreters between them and their Monarch And therefore when they rebelled against Moses it is reckoned as a rebellion against God And when they refused Samuel it is charged upon them that they refused God to be their Governour The Arke is placed amidst the Camp Numb 2. as the pledge of God to be their Generall Accordingly they carried the Arke in battell with them 1 Sam. 4. as having that opinion of it So verse 4. The people sent for the Arke of the Covenant of the Lord of HOSTS which DWELLETH between the Cherubims And so the Philistims conceived For when the Israelites shouted at the coming of the Arke into the Camp of Israel the Philistims vers 7. are afraid and they said God is come into the Camp This Arke led them through Jordan as it did as it is
ungodly of all their ungodly deeds and of all their HARD SPEECHES Something is in that that he is numbred a seventh from Adam a type at least in that that Christ should come in the seventh Millenary or thousandth of the whole Age of the world at furthest Which seven thousandth is farre nearer then generally we account as after God assisting shall be demonstrated at which time according to the common consent of the Jewish Talmud and Rabbins viz. R. Ketina R. Schelomo R. Kimchi c. He shal bring a destruction upon sinne so as the world shal be refined from the curse as Gold from the drosse 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the Lord alone shal be exalted Isa 3. And he shal shake the earth as at a day of Iudgement as Hag. 2.6 7. and the Lord shall be for a King or instead of a King to or over all the earth Then according to Psal 90. shal be a Sabbath of rest for a thousand yeares I give you their owne very words phrases and quotations a sufficient Commentary on Enoch who saith the Lord shall come with Myriads of his Saints Now after his Ascention Iude alledgeth Enoch that the Lord shall come he doth not say he shall goe away to Heaven but he shal come from Heaven And how As a Iudge to convince and punish all that have persisted to utter hard speeches against Christ viz. against him himself or against him in his Saints and this must be before the ultimate Day of Judgement or else what priviledge is it to the Saints or how is Christs power vindicated afore hee lay downe his power § 3 So that you may perceive that this matter in hand is an ancient Tenet no new thing as many ignorant of the Prophets make it and wonder and talke against it But we in obedience to Christ do search into the Prophets and as we are enlightned and led as overcome with the truth so we have and shall follow § 4 There is a second reason leading us into the enquiry of the Prophets viz. that thereby we may search out the grounds upon which the Iewes build their expectation of the coming of the Messiah and in what manner they expect his coming that so we may joyne issue with them in knowledge hope and prayer or otherwise within our spheare to help them forward and the businesse it selfe against all the opposers thereof We all both Jewes and Gentiles that have been candid enquirers into the Scriptures have from the beginning looked for his further coming Heb. 11. oft By faith they saw the promise afar off and saluted them so the Greek And by faith they saw him that was invisible c. when he came in the flesh the generality of the Iewes saw him corporally but not spiritually viz. as a man not as the Messiah But the generality of the beleeving Gentiles saw him spiritually nor corporally The Jewes therefore still expect his coming that they may see him both corporally and spiritually And it will be no griefe for the Gentiles that have seen him spiritually to see him also corporally And though he will not come againe to the Jewes to be made flesh yet hee will come againe to them in the flesh And this later will be more glorious then the former the greater containing the lesser radiating more effectually upon the Jewes to a greater effusion of teares from them and infusion of the spirit of Christs grace into them Zech. 12. which John prefixeth to his Revelation Chap. 1. v. 7. as the end Catastrophe and upshot in a great part of that Revelation as the fitting of them to entertaine Christs appearance and to enter into the New Jerusalem But this is not all There is a third reason why we should looke into the Prophets of the Old Testament there being the maine and most Types and Visions used in this Booke of the Revelation I will at present give but one instance but a most apt one to our businesse in hand viz. that in Revel 20.4 And I saw Thrones and they that sate upon them and judgement was given to them c. and they lived and reigned with Christ c. which cleerly is taken out of Dan. 7.9 c. I beheld till the Thrones were set so it should bee translated * Our last Translat have mistaken in translating it The Thrones were cast downe I suppose they therein tooke Thrones tropically or figuratively for powers and so they would make this sense of it the powers viz Monarchicall and their appendices were cast down But they were not al down till after the Judiciary sitting v. 11. v. 21 22. Besides 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as some Chalde copies write it signifies material Thrones whereon the Potentates do sit whether we make the noune to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to be Hemantick signifying As it were for the Talmud useth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to signifie a material Throne or whether we make the noune to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 taking 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for a radical so it signifies sometimes a material place wherein to exercise or act a gift faculty or power And 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as other Chalde copies write it also signifies material Thrones as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies a materiall Throne So that every way materiall Thrones to sir in are signified by the words in the Text even as the next word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 plainly signifies were lifted up advanced or set up so plainly that I cannot in the least imagine nor conjecture what shew of reason our last Translators had to render it The thrones wore cast down Our old Translation hath it The Thrones were set up And most justly For whether we suppose the root to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifies he lifâ—ed up he exalted or was made high or exalted to Schindler or whether we make the â—oot to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as Pagnin Arias Montanus and Hutter affirme which also signifies he elevated he exalted or he or it was high or elevated so Arias Montanus in Apparat. viz. Dict. Syro-chald still our old Translation is right The Thrones wer set up And so runs the stream of the most learned Translators in severall languages Pagnin and Arias Montanus Throni clati sunt The Latine called Hierâ—ms Throni positi sunt the Syriak subsâ—llia posita esse The Arab. ecce sides positae sunt So the Greek Sept. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tiâ—dal in his English Translation The seats were prepared The best French Translation Interpretee par Jean Diodati hath it les Thrones fuerent posés Protestant Bruccioli in his Ital. Translation Furono portate siede and in his Commentary makes his meaning more plain Throni suroâ—o essalâ—ati The best High-Dutch or German Translation by Luther is Stule gesekt wurden i. e. The stools or
by the Apostles so to signifie as hath been said that it is never used to signifie the supreamest Heaven even as it would have been most unapt for such a signification So that put all the Apostles first phrase in Heb. 2.5 together and the inhabited world to come can signifie no other but that the Monarchy on earth in the Apostles time under the Romans should be hereafter before the last Judgement the Monarchy of Christ or of the Saints under him Which the second phrase of our Apostle viz. of WHICH WEE SPEAKE doth more explaine and demonstrate For where did the Apostle speake afore of that world to come as he intimates in this relative speech but in Heb. 1. ver 6. which being read ingenuously and with an honest plainnesse of interpretation according to the Greek * Our Translators in putting AND after the word saith doe goe against common sense against the propriety of our English against the contexture of the Greek and against the Hebrew text whence it is quoted Is it not against common sense and the idiom of our English to speake thus in a recitall of anothers words He saith or he said AND so and so What more ridiculous then for us about to tell the words of another man then to make And the first word of the recitall In a History of the Old or New Testament it is a common thing to bring in a party with And he said but in a quotation it is not tollerable And t is against the contexture of the Greek wch plainly runs thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which as rendred afore runs smoothly but as our Translatours render and place the order of words of the whole verse they do with a vaine tautalogie as it were joyne to saith two ENDS for it runs thus AND againe he saith AND Lastly our Translatours intimate as if the latter AND were in the Hebrew whereas there is no such thing For the whole place in Psal 97.7 is to to a word thus Confounded he all they that serve graven Images that boast themselves of Idols WORSHIP HIM ALL YEE GODS runs thus But when AGAINE he bringeth in or shall bring in the first begotten sonne into the WORLD he saith Whence they that will grant us least will yeeld thus much that would in Heb. 2.5 must signifie the world on earth or else they utterly overthrow the Apostles reference there The world to come OF WHICH WE SPEAKE But we must by their favour inferre more viz. that in this Heb. 1.6 is mention of the same world to come on earth else how doth the Apostle chap. 2.5 speake all that For unto the Angels hath he not put in subjection the world to come in forme of a repetition of what he had said afore of the selfe-same matter which hee no where afore mentions unlesse in chap. 1. ver 6. viz. BUT when AGAINE he bringeth in the first begotten into the WORLD he saith ALSO or in LIKE MANNER or LIKEWISE Let all the Angels of God worship him For our Translators have very untowardly and incongruously put and placed AND between saith and let †as they have needlesly if not prejudiciously to the genuine sence of the verse put And at the beginning and altered the order of words of the Greek which if kept as we have followed it in our translating runs exceeding smoothly Some dictate to us that Againe must be referred to saith not to bringing in I would if possible they had also demonstrated it to have saved our labour of demonstrating the contrary The first AND seeing they translate it And would serve one would thinke to signifie againe he saith For more surety they have put two And 's but it is safest for us to keep close to the Originall having chap. 2. ver 5. with many other texts to hold analogie which fluently runs as we said But when againe he bringeth in the first begotten into the world he saith likewise Let all the Angels of God worship him As to signifie Christs coming againe into the world to come on earth after the ruine of Antichrist and all his adherents as we say the Old and New world which was distinguished by the Floud ruining the ungodly whiles the race of visible Saints still lived And if all that I have spoken in the Text and Margine doe sufficiently evince with ponderating unprejudicated men that so as aforesaid the Text is rightlier read then the Quere will be when did God ever to this day bring his first begotten Sonne into the world Againe when the ninety seventh Psalm was pend Christ had not been brought in at all in the flesh into the world even as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies as led by the hand And when the Epistle to the Hebrewes was pend Christ had been brought into the world but once never since againe And for the heavenly Angels of God they did worship him at his first coming attending serving and admiring his Incarnation Luke 2. Temptation Mark 1.13 Resurrection Mat. 28. Dispensation of the Gospel 1 Pet. 1.12 and Ascention Acts 1. Christ said he could have twelve Legions of Angels at his command but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Angel in the Revelation signifies also Men-Angles that is Magistrates as well as Ministers so viz. the Angelicall Potentates Kings Emperours Judges and Powers over men as the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Elohim Psal 97.7 quoted by the Apostle †See more Sect. 10. §. 2. signifies the same Psal 82.1 so that according to the latitude of the words and the designe of God all human Principalities Powers and Dominions must submit to Christ and his Saints under his conduct command or government as well as the Angels then shall give him a more visible and fuller honour the Saints being made 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 are made able to see it But that we may returne to Heb. 2. this was never yet since Adams fall performed viz. man so to be over all visibly on earth as Adam was over all which is Davids application in Psal 8. of Gen. 1.26 c. and Pauls explication in this second of Hebrewes of Psalme 8. * Some weekes after I had pend these things upon Heb. 2.5 compared with Heb. 1 6. c. I met with Master Modes Opuscula newly set forth concurring with me in the Grammer and sense sense of those places with his learned reasons which I have therefore here inserted in the Margin 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 â—nim inquit Terra est non caelum At ubi inquies de hac 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in praecedentibus locutus est Apostolus ut dicat 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Aio ab istis verbis v. 6 cap. 1. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. id est cum verò ITERUM introduxerit primogenitum suum in orbem terrae dicit c. Quae enim ex inde ex libro Psalmorum â—d finem usque capitis citantur de adora tione Angelorum de sceptro
Nations before him or like him as it is in the Margin whom he beleeved even God who quickneth the dead and calleth those things which be not as though they were ver 18. Who against hope beleeved in hope that he might become the Father of many Nations according to that which was spoken so shal thy seed be c. ver 22. And therefore it was imputed to him for righteousnesse Galat. 3. ver 5. He that ministreth to you the Spirit c. doth he it by the workes of the Law or by the hearing of faith ver 6. Even as Abraham beleeved God and it was accounted to him for righteousnesse ver 7. Know yee therefore that they which are of faith the same are the children of Abraham ver 8. And the Scripture fore-seeing that God would justifie the HEATHEN through faith preached before the GOSPELL unto Abraham saying In thee all Nations shal be blessed ver 9. So then they which be of faith are blessed with faithfull Abraham ver 13. Christ hath redeemed us from the curse of the Law ver 14. That the blessing of Abraham might come upon the GENTILES ver 15. Brethren I speake after the manner of men though it be but a mans covenant yet if it be confirmed no man disanulleth or addeth thereunto ver 16. Now to Abraham and his seed were the Promises made He saith not and to SEEDS as of many but as of one and to thy SEED which is Christ Heb. 11. ver 8. By faith Abraham when he was called to goe out into a place which he should after receive for an inheritance obeyed and he went out not knowing whither he went ver 9 By faith hee sojourned in the Land of Promise as in a strange Country dwelling in Tabernacles with Isaac and Jacob the Heires with him of the same Promise ver 10 For he looked for a City which hath foundations whose Builder and Maker is God ver 11 Through faith also Sarah her selfe received strength to conceive seed and was delivered of a childe c. ver 12 Therefore sprange there even of one and him as good as dead so many as the stars of the skie in multitude and the sand which is by the sea shore innumerable ver 13. These all dyed in faith not having received the Promises but having seen them afarre off and were perswaded of them and embraced them and confessed that they were strangers and pilgrims on earth 14 For they that say such things declare plainly that they seek a COVNTRY * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Their fathers Country a country on earth ver 15 And truly if they had been mindfull of that Country viz. Mesopotamia from whence they came out they might have had opportunity to have returned ver 16 But now they desire a better Country that is an HE AVENLY wherefore God is not ashamed to be called their God for he hath prepared for them a CITY NOte first in the generall That that treasure of Promises of the Old Testament afore recited how narrow soever they may look to short-sighted men as if their eye were intent only upon Jewes Canaan and men under the Law the Divine Apostles the absolute interpretors of the Old Testament doe in the places of the New Testament annext extend their intent sense and meaning unto all Nations of the world in all Countries on earth and under the Gospel and so as that they were not in their judgement then compleatly fulfilled when they wrote nor yet are according to their sense as the experience of all Generations since doth beare witnesse The quick-sighted eye by bare reading over all the places afore collated will soon yeeld this first assertion without any more words of debate on our part § 2 More particularly we may evidently see before our eyes the said Old Testament places extended and intended according to the sense aforesaid by those of the New as Gen. 12.1 2 3 c. by Gal. 3.8 Heb. 11.8 c. Gen. 15.4 by Rom. 4. ver 3. ver 9. ver 18. ver 22. Gen. 17.1 2 c. by Rom. 4. ver 11 c. § 3 And with great justice doth the Apostle so explaine and apply the fore-quoted places to an Evangelicall state under the New Testament in that those Old-Testament Scriptures have in them so many Evangelicall straines all harmoniously agreeing to that glorious state we yet expect under the New Testament viz. 1 ¶ Spirituall yet visible salvation delivered in the expresse terme forme and tenor of a Covenant and of the Covenant of Grace that God will establish his Covenant with Abraham between himself and him and his seed after him in their generations for an everlasting Covenant to be A GOD UNTO HIM AND TO HIS SEED AFTER HIM often above repeated and illustrated and amplified with the plaine expression of Faith and of righteousnesse of faith and of Gods accounting faith to the believer for righteousnesse and of blessing and with such a blessing as comes only through the one and onely one of the seed of Abraham 2 ¶ An happy and blessed possession upon the sace of the whole earth in spight of all their enemies yea to the ruine of them that should rise up against them saying that Abraham in his seed should be Heire of the whole world And that he would give them Countries and Nations and blesse those that blessed them and curse those that cursed them 3 ¶ A numerous multiplication of the seed of Abraham both of Jewes and Gentiles who through that salvation should attaine to that possession A multiplication of them as the sands of the Sea that washeth through all the quarters and Countries of the world a multiplication of them as the stars of heaven that surround the whole universe both of them being innumerable A multiplication of them into a multitude of Nations c. Accordingly of Abraham by Hagar came Ishmael of whom came the Ishmaelites Agarens Hagarens or Hagarites Itureans and Nabeans c. Ps 83.6 1 Chro. 5.19 * See Iunius upon that 1 Chron. 5.19 There came of Ishmael in all twelve PRINCES according to their NATIONS And they dwelt from Havilah to Shur that is before Egypt Gen. 25.16.19 Of Abraham by Sarah first came Esau who is also called Edom and dwelt in mount Seir from whom came the Edomites Idumeans inhabitants of mount Seir. The fourteen Dukes that came of Esau by his severall wives are particularly named by Moses Gen. 36.15 to 20. Secondly From Abraham by Sarah came Jacob of whom came the twelve Patriarchs of whom came the twelve Tribes ten as we usually number making the Kingdome of Israel the other the Kingdome of Judah Of Abraham by Keturah came Gen. 25.1 2 3.4 First Zimran who gave the name to Zamrans in the Region of Cinedocolpites in Arabia Felix Secondly Jokshan of whom was named Camasa in Syria Palmyrina alias Palmerene Jun. ex Ptolom Geograph Thridly Medan of whom was named the Town Madiana in Arabia
Nations of the earth shal be blessed is that they that bee of faith shal be blessed with faithful Abraham That the blessing of Abraham shal come upon the Gentiles That the promise to Abraham that he should be THE HEIRE OF THE WORLD was not to Abraham and his seed through the Law but through the righteousnesse of faith that it might be by Grace to the end the Promise might be sure TO ALL THE SEED not to that only which is of the Law but to that also which is of the faith of Abraham WHO IS THE FATHER OF US ALL. ¶ 4. For the sealing of all these three likewise in the New Testament Christ as incarnated is called the Mystery or Sacrament as some Translate of godlinesse 1 Tim. 3.16 because in his flesh is the glorious representation of God Heb. 1.2 and the effectual communication of the excellencies of God to us by union with him and us Joh. 17.2 Joh. 1.16 Christ as testified unto from Heaven Mat. 3.17 Mat. 17.5 is the sealed one or the sealing to us Ioh. 6 27. viz. That he is the only name under Heaven whereby we must be saved Acts 4.12 and he as the meaning of all types Joh. 1.17 is the impletion or fulfilling of all the Promises to us take him and take all 2 Cor. 1.20 And to the end that we might be more sure of all these he hath change of names as a seale interpreted to that sence Matth. 1. Immanuel that is God with us which the Apostle notably applyes to our Salvation Rom. 8.31 and Jesus ibid. Mat. 1. for he shal save his people from their sins And thus Christ is a seale of our Salvation 2 ¶ Againe as Christ the true or Antitypicall Abraham or Isaac is the everlasting Father of all to be saved Isa 9.6 tooke our nature on him Heb. 2. suffered and ascended Mat. Chap. 27. Chap. 28. so he is a seale interest or assurance that there shall be a multiplication of them that shall be saved by him 1. By his FATHER-HOOD PATERNITY or Father-ship Isa 53. ver 10. He shal see his SEED ver 11. he shall see the TRAVELL of his soule He shal justifie many Heb. 2.11 c. He that sanctifieth and they that are sanctified are ALL ONE Behold I and the CHILDREN which God hath given me the Children partaking of flesh and bloud he partook of the same that through death he might destroy him that had the power of death that is the Devil ver 16. For he took not upon him the nature of Angels but the seed of Abraham for it behooved him in all things to be made like unto his brethren that he might be a mercifull and faithfull High-priest to make reconciliation for the sinnes of the people verse 10. For it became him FOR WHOM ARE ALL THINGS and BY WHOM ARE ALL THINGS in bringing MANY SONNES unto glory to make the Captaine of their salvation perfect through SUFFERING And that we might know that Christ is the seale or interest by his taking our nature not onely to save the Jews as in this second to the Hebrews but also the Gentiles the Apostle discusseth that his taking our nature in another root universall to all mankinde viz. Adam called the second Adam 1 Cor. 15. and mightily extends it as wide as the ruine that came by Adam Rom. 5. v. 15. If through the offence of one MANY be dead much more the grace of God and the gift by grace by one man Jesus Christ hath abounded to MANY verse 18. As by the offence of ONE judgement came upon ALL MEN to condemnation even so by the righteousnesse of ONE the free gift came upon ALL MEN unto justification of life 2 He is a seale or interest of the multiplication of beleevers by his suffering Heo 2.9 We see Jesus made a little lower then Angels for or by as it is in the margine the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour that he by the grace of God should taste death FOR EVERY MAN And Joh. 12.32 33. And I if I be lifted up from the earth will draw ALL MEN unto me this he said signifying what death he should dye 3 By his ascention Act. 1.11 compared with Act. 3 21. This same Jesus which is taken up from you into Heaven shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him goe into Heaven whom the Heavens must receive UNTILL the TIMES of restitution of ALL THINGS c. 3 ¶ Christ by reason of relation and union is the seale or assurance of the possession Rom. 8. Coheires with him Eph. 2.6 Set in heavenly places with him 4 ¶ As Christ is the seale or sealed one of all those three so also the Holy Spirit Baptisme and the Lords Supper are seals of all those The Spirit Eph. 1.13 14. first in generall is a seale of all the promises therefore called there the Spirit of promise saying ye were sealed with the Spirit of promise For as the promise promiseth the Spirit so the Spirit dictated to the Penmen of the Scriptures to leave us those promises and the Spirit brings home and applyes those promises to every mans particular heart 2 Cor. 3.3 1 Thess 1.5 Secondly In particular 1 The Spirit is a seale of salvation in the same Ephes 1.13 14. After ye heard the word of truth the Gospel of your SALVATION after ye beleeved ye were sealed with the holy Spirit of promise 2 A seale of multiplication of Believers For in that respect it is also there called as we hinted but now the Spirit of promise in that it is promised And how Thus that it shall be Joel 2.28 poured upon all flesh A large promise of innumerable effusions 3 A seale of the possession So in the same Ephes 1.13 14. ye were sealed with the holy spirit of promise which is the earnest of your INHERITANCE untill the redemption of the purchased possession The redemption of the soules of the Ephesians was past already therefore the redemption of the body of which the Apostle speaks Rom. 8.22 23. saying That all the creation as well as all beleevers groan after it must be meant The Apostle calls it in the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The redemption of much businesse which more sounds of a state on earth then in the highest Heavens And that our Coheirship with Christ Rom. 8. the Apostle Paul there saith verse 21 22 23. it must begin on earth And the Apostle John saith We must reigne with Christ on earth Rev. 5.10 a thousand yeers Rev. 20.4 Till Satan be there let loose and Gog and Magog thereupon make opposition verse 7.8 9. Next Baptisme is a seale as of salvation as all know so of the possession which that innumerable company of Jewes and Gentiles Exod. 12.37 38. passing through the Red sea Exod. 14. should have if there baptized beleeved 1 Cor. 10.1 c. wherein God sealed to them among other things that his power should be Omnipotent and his mercy
did put to death Christ and persecute the Apostles the Apostles thereupon convert the second Psalme with a part of the eighth Psalme for I suppose there is recorded but the summe into a prayer and doe turne the bent of that their prayer both upon Jews and Gentiles They lift up their voyce to God with one accord and said Lord thou art God which hast made Heaven and Earth and the Sea and all that in them is c. as it is Ps 8. who by the mouth of thy servant David hast said Psal 2. v. 1. c. why did the HEATHEN rage and the PEOPLE imagine vaine things The Kings of the earth stood up and the Rulers were gathered together against the Lord and against his Christ For of a truth against thy holy childe Jesus both HEROD and PONTIUS PILATE with the GENTILES and people of ISRAEL were gathered together for to do c. And now Lord behold their threatnings c. Both which Psalmes are prophetical of our point The eighth Psalme we opened afore and now we shall the second out of both which Psalmes though Luke records the story but briefly onely giving a touch upon the beginning of both the Apostles no doubt urged in their prayer whatsoever was in them pertinent to their desire of the advancing Christ there being farre apter pertinences to that in the sequel of those Psalmes then in the beginnings The summe of their desire is that God according to his promise in Psal 2. Psal 8. would set up the power and glory of Christ unto a predominancy over Jews and Gentiles notwithstanding all their fierce opposition at present And for a testimony that God did allow their application of those Psalms as right and did accept of their prayer grounded thereon hee fils them with the Spirit and shakes the place where they prayed Now this second Psalme is not yet fulfilled not the Apostles prayer upon it fully answered It is true that about forty yeers after Christs death came to passe that great destruction upon the Jewes their Temple City and Country too prophesied by Christ Matth. 24.1 c. And within fewer yeers Herod came to a miserable untimely end Act. 12. as also did Pilate and after him successively two and thirty Roman Emperours as the Ecclesiastical story shews us * M. Fox in his Martyr And about three hundred yeers after the incarnation of Christ Constantine the Great and many of his souldiers being converted unto Christianisme overthrew in battel his Antichristian Colleagues and their Armies that opposed it But Prophesies and Prayers as streams run on in a current still growing greater and greater in accomplishment till they rest in the maine Ocean the fulfilling of the full design of God according to the entire Plat-form God drew forth in the expresse termes of his Promises This Psalm therefore according to that rule was not fully accomplished when the Apostles turned it into a Prayer notwithstanding all the great things that Christ and his Apostles did towards the convincing of Jewes and Romans and converting many For what needed the Apostles to pray for a further fulfilling of that second Psalme if then it had been fulfilled No nor is that Psalme in any full measure fulfilled to this day the Heathen unregenerate Gentiles and the obstinate Jewish people are of the same temper still and tamper the same oppositions against Christ And God hath not hitherto so spoken to them in his wrath and vext them in his sore displeasure as to make them know that he hath set HIS KING upon his holy hill of Sion nor hath he given unto Christ the HEATHEN for his inheritance and the UTMOST PARTS OF THE EARTH for his possession to breake them that are incorrigible with a rod of Iron and to dash them in peeces like a Potters vessell to the making of the Kings and Judges of the earth wise to serve the Lord in feare c. Most Kingdomes are yet meere Heathens and the most of Kingdomes named Christians are Hereticall or disobedient unto Christ and Sion it selfe where Christ will mainly manifest his Kinglinesse is under the Turkish Mahometan Blasphemers as it was under the bloudy Heathen Romans all the time of Christ and his Apostles and the Jewes that are a maine part of his Kingdom are to this day unconverted There must yet come a time when Christs anger must be but kindled and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but as a little and yet then must ALL they be happy that trust in Christ Marke accurately There must be a time when Christs anger must be but kindled in comparison of the last Judgement and but as a little time * So the Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is oft applied to time is for degree â—is in kindle in respect of the speedy event of making All them that trust in Christ to be happy Now if you apply this to the time past since the Apostles made their prayer upon this Psalme it is neare one thousand six hundred and twenty years which you cannot call a little time much lesse can you call it a little time from Davids penning of it to this time And if you look forward to the ultimate Iudgement then Christs anger is not only kindled but it is totally on a flame and for ever the fire never goes out So that the fulfilling of this Psalme must be in a time between our present Age and the last Iudgement It must be at a time when Christs anger hath but a little time to be kindled and anon the Trusters in Christ to be blessed which must be when the generation or succession of the wicked opposers of Christ are perished who perishing are not said to be at their journies end at the ultimate end of the world but in the way in some notable way or race they ran in their Generation in opposing Christ as Revel 19. the three last verses These wicked ones must perish and the trusters in Christ be blessed at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ as he is Christ and King of Sion which must be before his laying downe of his Mediatorship and power at the end of all I say at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ For this phrase in this Psalme THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE is alwayes applied to such eminent manifestations of Christ the latter still being greater then the former As first in this second Psalme at the declaring the decree and proclaiming Christ to be King conversively of his Church and coercively over all the world of enemies Secondly at Christs resurrection Acts 13.23 and 33. Thirdly in relation to Christs appearance ere long to all the world to set up his visible Kingdome on earth of which we speake 2 ¶ For saith the Apostle Hebr. 1.5 6. unto which of the Angels said he at any time Thou art my SONNE THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE And againe I will be to him a Father
and he shall be to me a SONNE But when AGAINE to give it you as afore in termes and order of words close to the Originall * Thus Arias doth order them When the Apostle would say And againe he saÃd in verse 5. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but in this sixth verse he saith 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which last word is in the second Aâ—rist in the subj mood which sounds future and so the Syriack 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 But againe He SHALL bring his first begotten Sonne into the INHABITED world he saith let all the Angels worship him The sense is obvious That God never owned any one of the Angels to be his only first begotten Sonne but when againe he shall bring his first begotten Sonne into the world he hath given command that all the Angels shall worship him as his only begotten Sonne That this text speakes of Gods bringing his first begotten Sonne againe into the inhabited world now after Christs ascention when the Apostles wrote that we have afore largely discussed Book 3. chap. 2. Sect. 4. § id est sectiuncula 4. I only adde be heedfully mindfull of the Apostles expression in the future now after Christs coming in the flesh and that after the generall Iudgement Christ as Christ shall lay downe all his dominion over Angels and men and therefore it must be of some middle time between our present generation that these 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 rendered here Angels must give Christ whiles he is Mediator a more ample and apparent homage then ever they have done according to the glorious state of Christ and of things at that time on earth 3 ¶ For this place of the Hebrewes Let all the Angels of God worship him is quoted by the Apostle out of Psal 97.7 which word for word according to the Hebrew * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is Bow downe to him all yee Gods which as we said afore comprehends as all Angels so all Kings Potentates and Magistrates called by God himselfe Gods Psal 82. ver 1. ver 6. and so applied by Christ Joh. 10.34 Jesus answered them Is it not written in your Law I said YEE ARE GODS 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 if he called them gods to whom the Word of God came c. And indeed they can properly bow or crouch downe as the Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 precisely signifie as the Angels can doe it only vertually And on the other side 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Angel is oft used in Scripture to signifie eminent men in Office Mal. 4.1 Rev. chap. 2.1 chap. 2. chap. 3. But granting that the Apostles designe being to prove Christ to be above Angels doth render the Hebrew Text according to the Septuagint Greek then a common Translation in frequent use throughout the world since the late Greek Monarchy over all 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 worship him all yee his Angels yet this is as true that as the Apostle closeth that his discourse in that first of Hebrews with a touch of Christs future dominion over all Angels and men on earth saying To which of the Angels said he at any time quoted out of Psal 110. sit thou on my right hand till I make thine enemies thy footstoole so that 97. Psalm doth really include and intend our position in hand viz. Christs visible glorious Kingdome over all the world yet to come For in the first verse of that 97. Psalm it is said The Lord reigneth let the earth rejoyce let the multitude of the Isles be glad thereof Or the Lord reigning the earth SHALL rejoyce and the many Islands SHALL * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 be glad ** 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This LORD is Christ as the Apostle applyes it Heb. 1.8 9. Now Christ had reigned in his ordinary providence and power from the creation to the Psalmists time c. as appeared in overthrowing his and his peoples enemies and preserving his people in the flood in the fire on Sodome in his miracles in Egypt Wildernesse and the Red-sea in his victories over the several Nations in Canaan c. And after the last judgement it is improper to say Christ reignes in glory 1 Cor. 15.28 And Christ never yet so reigned as is described in this first verse of this 97 Psalm That ALL the EARTH without limitation shall rejoyce at that his reigning and the multitude of Isles shall be glad By Isles according to an ancient usuall Hebraisme and Jewish phrase is meant all the Nations of the GENTILES Isa 41. v. 1. Keep silence before me O ISLANDS and let the PEOPLES or NATIONS renew their strength * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 And v. 5. The Isles saw it and feared and the ENDS OF THE EARTH were afraid Chap. 42. v. 4. The ISLES shall wait for his Law and so nine times in this Prophet three times in Jer. 9. times in Ezek. in Zeph. once viz. Chap. 2. v. 11. The Isles of the Heathen or Gentiles * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In Gen. once Gen. 10.5 The Isles of the Gentiles The reason of the phrase is because the Jews dwelling in the continent of Asia they counted all the world Islanders that were divided from them by the Mediterranean Sea Whence is that phrase of Isles of the Sea Ester 10.1 Ahasuerus laid a taxe or tribute upon the land and upon the ISLES OF THE SEA And Isa 24.15 Glorifie the name of the Lord God of Israel in the ISLES OF THE SEA And Ezek. 26.18 Now shall the Isles tremble in the day of thy fall yea the ISLES THAT ARE IN THE SEA shall be troubled yea to make all yet plainer it is twice said viz. Jer. 2.10 Ezek. 27.6 The Isles of Chittim By which Chittim is oft understood the Roman Monarchy as Dan. 11.30 for one instance So that according to this sense of this 97 Psame vers 1 All the world of Jewes and Gentiles must be glad and rejoyce at the reigning of Christ as it follows in the sixth verse The Heavens declare his righteousnesse and ALL the people see his glory ALL without exception which two clauses cannot be aptlier applyed and expounded then by that Rev. 1.7 Rev. 20.1 Rev. 21.1 Christ comes in the clouds and every eye shall see him Christ as the great Angel descending from heaven binding Satan and causing his Saints to reigne on earth New Jerusalem a New Heaven and a New Earth being brought downe from Heaven wherein as Pet. 2 Ep. 3. chap. enlargeth dwelleth righteousnesse But ALL PEOPLE yet never saw that his righteousnesse and glory ALL the gods as in v. 7. all Kings and Princes Potentates Magistrates and Powers never yet worshipped him as Christ but generally in all ages from the Creation to this day have opposed him as such both of Jewes and Gentiles 4 ¶ But all must ere the last judgement either sincerely or seemingly worship him Psal 22.27 28 29. which Psalme is concerning
the whole of Christs passion as it is plaine First by the Title which is of the Canonical Hebrew Text. A Psalme * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 concerning A jieleth Shahar that is the hind of the morning Christ being shut in the grave escaped away in the morning rising from death Secondly by the application of severall passages to Christs passion by the Evangelist Matth. 27. As that of the DESERTION My God My God why hast thou forsaken me v. 1. That of DERISION ' He trusted in the Lord that he would deliver him let him deliver him v. 8. That of PIERCING They pierced my hands and my feet v. 16. That of division of his garments They parted my garments among them and upon my vesture cast lots v. 18. Now this Psalme touching Christ though in the first Scene sets forth Christs humiliation yet in the second holds forth his exaltation vers 22. I will declare thy name unto my brethren which the Apostle applies Heb. 2.9 10 11 12. to Christs manifestation of his samenesse of nature with the sonnes of men even as in that nature he tasted death for every man and at last would declare that salvation to all the world which clearly tends to our point And v. 27 28 29. we have the effect of his declaring Gods name to the world viz. ALL THE ENDS OF THE WORLD shall remember and turne unto the Lord and ALL THE KINDREDS OF THE Nations or GENTILES * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall worship before him For the Kingdome is the Lords and he is the Governour among the Nations or GENTILES All they that be fat upon the earth shall eat and worship In all which we see the effect effectuall conversion The Generality and Universality in many ALL 's The time in generall viz. It is to be after Christs suffering upon the crosse The characters eat and worship which cannot be understood of the highest heavens And it hath not been fulfilled on earth according to that effect universality and character from Christs passion to this day Therefore it is yet to be fulfilled on earth 5 ¶ According to Psalme 86.9 ALL NATIONS whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and glorifie thy name A place mightily considerable So that so great a promise and prophesie as this by so great a Prophet as this with such a shrill emphasis in the ALL and in the Act worship and in the degree of the effect to glorifie his name must not bee ended with flams of humane glosses but must be really and truly and fully accomplished though as yet it was never compleatly fulfilled as it will be too late to think of those things at the ultimate judgement when Christ comes not for conversion but destruction Therefore yet before that finall Day of Doome this ALL must bee brought to ALL THAT of Worshipping and Glorifying Gods Name 6 ¶ Just as we have it in that little Psalme the 117. but greatly Prophetical Praise yee the Lord ALL NATIONS praise him ALL YEE PEOPLES * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 How shall all these do this unlesse Christ convert all them but those refractory ones whom he confounds Surely therfore this is a Prophesie that God will in time before the ultimate day of judgement convert generally all Nations as Paul extends it Rom. 11.10 11 c. to the coming in of the fulnesse of Jewes and Gentiles rejoycing together as one Church Therefore according to Paul David had a most comprehensive and extensive sense when he spake these things and therefore shall be fulfilled according to its true latitude and elevation without the mincing distinctions of mens braine For a seale of assurance whereof the close of the Psalme hath three weighty clauses First That the MERCIFULL KINDNESSE of Jehovah to the sonnes of men is great Secondly The TRUTH of the same Jehovah is for ever 3 That by faith and hope in that mercy and truth to see these things fulfilled we should PRAISE that JEHOVAH with Hallelujah which is the word of praise all along the Revelation § 2 Having done with the first head contained in the Psalmes touching the universal power Christ shall have over the whole world afore the last judgement though most yet rebell against him Next wee come to the second head viz. The just time when Christ shall attaine this 1 ¶ That place Psal 97.7 Worship him all yee gods the Apostle tells us Heb. 1.6 shall be fulfilled When God shall bring again his Son Christ into the world which place though our Translators render it And again when he bringeth c. as if it were meerly a new proof of Christs superiority above Angels is most truly rendred according to our reading afore set downe againe and againe with reasons to justifie it so that in words and sense it is an Antithesis and Auxesis to the fifth verse thus He saith not to any Angel thou art my Sonne this day I have begotten theee but instead thereof he speakes a thing that doth much lessen the dignity of Angels and more dignifie Christ above them Let all the Angels of God worship him so that the first And must be turned into But proper to the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as there placed and that same Againe is not to signifie another proofe of Christs superiority above Angels but to signifie the time when that of ALL the Elohim Angels and Potentates whether of the Spirits in Heaven or men on earth both Angels and Elohim signifying both worshipping of Christ shall be fulfilled For this hath not yet beene fulfilled as to the ALL of the Magnificents and Great-ones of the earth who contrariwise for the generall have despised if not opposed Christ even as it will bee too late and an unseasonable time for them to do it at the ultimate judgement when no adoration or worship is then received from Christs enemies but sentence is given by him upon and against them The time therefore when this shall bee fulfilled is saith the Apostle in this first to Heb. penned after Christs ascension When God shall bring his first-begotten Sonne AGAINE into the INHABITED WORLD When he brought him into the world the first time by incarnation ALL the Potentates and Angels of men The Scribes and Pharisees Herod and Pontius Pilate the Roman Emperours and Senate of Rome did not worship him but refused him and persecuted him and his members most bloodily for neer three hundred yeers after whom the Arians and next to them the Papacy took their turnes to maintaine that stream of blood running downe to our times But when he shall bring his first-begotten Sonne againe into the world in his visible royal exaltation then they all shall worship him I say as the Text sayes ALL but they that are ruined for their refractorinesse The phrase When he bringeth againe if the Greek word were not of a future sense imports a future thing as the Hebrew imperative Psal 97.7 Worship ye
Antichristian enemies in the day of his Army raised up to that end and whether we understand it specially of the Jewes by speciall emphasis his people first chosen to be a Church and after of his blood kindred or generally of all sorts of Nations when saw we or our forefathers since the Incarnation that day of power wherein the generality of either sort in either of the said senses were a willing people But on the contrary in all ages ten for one are obstinate against Christ and more especially the Jewes And therefore that God may be true this must bee fulfilled before that ultimate day of judgement which doth not mend but end the incurable enemies of Christ Verse 4. The Lord hath sworne and will not repent thou art a Priest for ever after the order of Melchisedech The Apostle hence infers Heb. 7. the exceeding eminency of Christs Priesthood above that of Aaron First In that Christ was made so by an oath not so the order of Aaron which obligation by the oath of God the Apostle Heb. 6. urgeth upon the Jewes as a great ground of faith and that they should not doubt as he will not repent Secondly In that as Melchisedech so Christ must be above the order of Aaron a Kingly Priest a most righteous and peace-bringing King and that at Salem Now seeing Christ by the oath of God was made King of Salem the contract of Jerusalem we must expect that infallibly to be fulfilled according to Psal 2. and v. 2. of this 110 Psal Hee hath indeed been at Salem alias Jerusalem and there acted in his offering up himselfe visibly as well as spiritually the Priest-hood But he hath not since the Apostles writing of that Epistle acted any visibility of his Royalty or Kingly-hood there which is cleer by that in Verse 5. The Lord at thy right hand shall strike through Kings in the day of his wrath So that when this Psalme is fulfilled to exalt Christ according to the tenor thereof then the Kings of the earth that submit not to Christ must be stricken through by the wrath of God But since Christs Incarnation generally all the Kings of the earth of all men have been least subdued to Christ their Nobles siding with them and have acted most opposition against him drawing all their peoples into confederacy with them But saith this Psalme there must be a day of Gods wrath wherein he wil strike through Kings that stand out against his Sonne And this stroke must be a corporall stroke as it follows Verse 6. He shall judge among the Heathen and fill the places with dead bodies He shall wound the HEAD * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for it is in the Heb. in the singular number and therefore ill rendred in our English Bibles plurally Heads over many Countries The words are plaine for a bringing in of Jewes and Gentiles into a submission unto Christ or they must be slaine on heaps Now hitherto the generality of Jewes and Gentiles both Kings and peoples doe not yet submit to Christ nor are they strucken through or slain in heaps And at the ultimate day of doome the judgement is by fire not by sword and unto eternall death not temporall And therefore this yet to come before that day In fulfilling whereof the Lord shall wound that same HEAD over many Countries that is as Dr. Alsteds and Mr. Ainsworths opinion pleaseth me wel he shal wound the head of Antichrist that pretends to be Head over many Countries or if we say the wicked Rulers of the world who unite under an Antichristian head it comes to one effect This head the Lord must wound or to render it nearer the Hebrew * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 transfixit sic Arias Pagn pierce through So that the Lord will not onely wound a part of the Head-ship as if it should bee healed againe as Rev. 13. But he will utterly destroy as Jael did Sisera when shee pierced his head through Judg. 4. the last and greatest headship of that head as in Rev. 19. three last verses And then Verse 7. Christ shall lift up his head That is his power shall bee visibly exalted above his Capital enemy as visibly as his enemies were exalted against him Thus of two of the Heads touching Christs Kingdome yet to come deduced out of the Psalmes Viz. 1 The Universality of Christs power 2 The time when to be fulfilled 3 Now follows viz. The Sabbatisme the Saints shall then enjoy § 3 For this third Head out of the Psalmes viz. the Sabbatisme which the Saints shall enjoy in the time of Christs future visible Kingdom on earth we have in the 95. Psal from vers the seventh to the end v. 7. To day if ye will hear his voice v. 8. Harden not your hearts as in the provocation and as in the day of temptation in the wildernesse v. 9. When your fathers tempted me proved me and saw my works 10. Forty yeers long was I grieved with this generation and said it is a people that doe erre in their heart and they have not knowne my wales 11. Unto whom I sware in my wrath that they should not enter into my rest 1 ¶ This Psalme was penned more immediately for the Jews as it was penned by the Psalmist a Jew and is first urged upon them by Paul a Jew Heb. 3.7 c. to the end of the Chapter by way of exhortation to heare Christs voice whereby they may not miscarry as their forefathers did in the wildernesse and so misse of entring into Gods rest Secondly propounded by the same Jewish Apostle to the said Jewes now scattered Heb. 4. v. 1. c. to v. 12. by way of consolation that in these words is a cleer intimation and concession that some of the Jewes though they in the wildernesse did not shall enter into Christs rest which the Apostle collects by a strong consequence thus The severall premises of the argument from that 95 Psalme he layes downe in the 5 6 7 and 8 verses viz. 1. For God saith IF THEY shall enter into my rest Seeing therefore it remaineth that SOME must enter therein and THEY to whom it was first preached entered not in because of unbeleef He limiteth a CERTAINE day saying so LONG A TIME as it is said to day if ye will heare his voyce harden not your hearts that is long after the Israelites were entered into Canaan under the conduct of Joshua the Psalmist in his time saith to day if ye will heare his voyce c. For if Jesus that is Josuah being so written in Greek viz. Jesus and Jesus and Josuah are of the same signification had given them rest he would not afterward have spoken of another day These two premises being laid downe the Apostle inferres a generall conclusion serving to both v. 9. viz. There remaineth therefore even to the Apostles time and by equall reason downe to this time a rest to the people of God Observe
beleeve Nor can this be meant of ultimate glory for this reason because we cannot be said there in any tolerable sence to injoy a Sabbatism that is as the Apostles proofe clearly drives at a rest upon or in a Seventh viz. in the seventh Trumpet in the seventh Viol in the seventh thousand yeares of the world for if this Sabbatisme or Seventh be eternity then it is there swallowed up in an infinite that cannot be numbred But if this Sabbatisme be a distinct determinate time bounded with two Resurrections the one at the beginning the other at the end then it will clearly stand numerable for a seventh but not otherwise We usually number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. over things of some semblance in quantity and quality to make a Septenarie If a streame flowes into six Rivers and then falls into the mainest Ocean it is not proper to say the Ocean is the seventh River but the continent or conteiner swallowing up all We must have seven Ages compleat and ended as we say in Leases of Lands made according to Law or else we cannot number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. Free-hold or Fee-simple hath no number and therefore as the former great Ages of the world were distinct on earth by some eminent notes as they shall easily finde that consult Chronologers so shall this be as distinct likewise The rest of the Sabbath began with Gods rest after the finishing of his workes the rest in Canaan began with the conduct and Wonders done under Joshua c. so this Sabbatisme of the last thousand yeares is begun and bounded with notable Land-markes it begins with the binding of Satan the fall of the Beast and with the first Resurrection and terminated with the loosing of Satan the rising of Gog and Magog in armes and the second Resurrection so that great things are acted between the end of the Sabbatisme and the beginning of ultimate glory All this is plain in Rev. 20. to them that will read and understand Yea further unlesse this be understood of a pure rest on earth how shall we be said to Sabbatise as is intimated in a Sabbatisme It is true in a Sabbath is signified and enjoyed a rest But so we may rest on another day And every day a beleever hath several rests But we must have according to the Apostle a Sabbatismaticall rest a rare word is used by the Apostle to signifie a rare rest we must Sabbatise that is imitate or in some proportion answer to other typical Sabbaths Imitation and correspondency relate to known things foregone not to after-things never seen And we rest voluntarily as in the day of Christs power whiles he is in power from our own workes as God did from his not necessitatedly when all other occasions are removed and an immutable eternity stamped upon our condition swallowing up all and transforming it into ultimate glory We must sabbatise our restfull injoyment in time and place according to former Sabbatical Rests Therefore it must be on earth and a timeing not an eternizing And thus for the Book of Psalmes with parallels out of the New Testament SECT XI Next we come to the Prophet Isaiah wherein none will doubt that are truly acquainted with his most Evangelicall Prophesies but that we shall finde many clear places for the point in hand § 1 THe first place is in Chapter 2. Verse 1. The word c. concerning Judah and Jerusalem Vers 2. It shall come to passe in the last dayes * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the last daies that the mountaine of the house of the Lord shall be established in the top ** 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is In or upon the HEAD of the Mountains of the mountaines and ALL Nations shall FLOW unto it Verse 3. And many people shall goe and say Come ye and let us goe up to the mountaine of the Lord to the house of the God of Jacob and he will teach us of his wayes and we will walke in his paths For out of Zion shall goe forth the Law and the word of the Lord from Ierusalem Verse 4. And he shall judge among the Nations and shall rebuke many people *âŽ* Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is Many peoples and they shall beat their swords into plow-shares and their spears into pruning hooks Nation shall not lift up a sword against Nation neither shall they learne warre any more Verse II. The lofty looks of man shall be humbled and the haughtinesse of men shall be bowed downe and the Lord alone shall be exalted in that day all which Verse is repeated againe Verse 17. Then it follows Verse 18. And the Idols he shall utterly abolish Verse 19. And they shall goe into the holes of the rocks and into the caves of the earth for feare of the Lord and for the glory of his Majesty when he ariseth to shake terribly the earth This whole Verse is againe repeated Verse 21. § 2 The first verse plainly shews what ever the Analytical conceits of men may assert that this Prophesie is ultimately and plainly concerning yea for or in the behalfe or favour of Judah and Jerusalem as the * Heb. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 su per propter juxta secundum Sept. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Symm ut refert Nobilius Drusius pro. citat Eus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 lib. 2. p. 43. in Hier. pro Juda Ierusalem Hebrew beares and Greeks and Latines affirme Though by and by Verse 6. the Iewes are shewed the reason why they should goe into afflictions afore they have the deliverance mentioned in this Chapter Yet when it is said verse 2 and 3 It shall come to passe in the last dayes that many peoples shall say come let us goe up to the Mountaine of the Lord to the house of the God of Iacob c. for out of Zion shall goe forth the Law there can be no lesse intended then that this Prophesie doth ultimately concerne the Jewes welfare when they and the Gentiles converted shall make one glorious Christian Church on earth To this our late Annotationists on the Bible doe well consent and in some termes fairely hint part of our Thesis Here say they in this second Chapter of Isa begins a Sermon contained in the three Chapters following concerning the RESTITVTION of the Church principally UNDER CHRIST which he both beginneth Chapter 2 and after the denunciation of many heavy judgements inserted to be inflicted upon the maine body of the Jewish people for their manifold grosse and grievous sinnes at length concludes with Chap. 4. § 3 The Learned grant * Iunius Piscator Alapide Grotius Engl. Annot. that those promises in the words afore-quoted out of this Chapter do relate to the time of Christs coming and do confesse the generall that the Iews in a sublimer sense do understand them of the times of the Messiah And one of them steps a little higher and bids us for that
Christ but anon Arianisme arose then Papisme mounted up then the Beast did arise The Church is put into a Wildernesse-condition the witnesses prophesie in sackcloth one thousand two hundred and sixty yeares which are not yet expired for they have not yet laine dead in the Grave three dayes and an halfe 5 ¶ Nor is that in the 18 19 20. verses yet fulfilled That all Idols are abolished that God hath so shaken the earth that he hath made the inhabitants thereof to cast away all their Idols and to hide themselves for feare The Territories of the Papacie extending over France Spaine Italy part of the Low Countries part of upper Germany part of Polonia part of the Indies c. are full of Idols and doe openly worship them as they say in the sight of the Sunne The great shake of these is not till the Witnesses have laine dead in the Grave three dayes and an halfe Revel 11. and then is the great fall ibid. ver 11. and when those things are shaken downe then the things that cannot be shaken viz. pure worship purely Spirituall and pure Saints shall remaine unmoved Heb. 12.27 § 6 Nor can it be rationally imagined that these things shall not be done till the ultimate day of the generall Judgement for then there is no time of establishing of the mountaine of the Lords house upon the top of the mountaine no proceeding of the word out of Zion no running and hiding from the presence of the Lord for the Sea and Grave c. shall give up their dead And all good shall be turned into an eternity of absolute glory Therefore the time of fulfilling of the Prophesies and Promises of this second of Isaiah is yet to come afore the ultimate day of the last generall Judgement * The Diatribae pars 4. of Mr. Mede lately coming forth and come to my hands since I penned this eleventh Section I thought it convenient to insert into the Margine at least his judgement of this second of Isaiah ver 2 3 4. which I will give you in his owne words HILS or MOUNTAINES saith he are States Kingdomes or Societies of men which consisting of degrees rising unto an height one above another are compared unto Mountaines raised above the ordinary plaine and levell of the earth The MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE is that State and Society of men which is called the Church and People of God REGNUM CAELORUM the Kingdome of Heaven i. e. a Kingdome whose both King and Kings Throne have their place and residence in the Heavens These words therefore are a Prophesie or Propheticall promise of the GLORIOUS EXALTATION WONDERFULL ENLARGMENT and UNHEARD-OF-PROSPERITY of this Society of men called the CHURCH above all States and Societies of men whatsoever The glory and EXALTATION is expressed in the word THE MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE SHAL BE ONE DAY EXALTED yee mounted not only above the lesser hill but above the highest mountaine though at this time it were depressed and trampled under foot by the proud enemies thereof The ENLARGMENT is in the word ALL NATIONS SHALL FLOW INTO IT i. e. though at the time of this Prophesie it were reduced to a small remnant yet the time was to come when it should not only consist of one Nation of the Jewes as then it did but of all Nations under the whole Heaven The PROSPERITY thereof begins to be described from these words ver 4. THEY SHAL BEAT THEIR SWORDS INTO PLOW-SHARES c. i. e though the greatest part of JACOB were already captive and Judah and Jerusalem in a continuall feare and no lesse danger of the Armies and invasion of the King of Babel yet the time should one day come that the People or Church of God should not only be the most exalted state upon the earth and the most ample and universall Dominion that ever was in the world but the most peaceable quiet and flourishing State that ever was since man was FIRST CREATED This is the Prophesie But now comes the Question Whether this as we have described it be and hath already been fulfilled or whether if already any wayes fulfilled whether it be not in part only performed and the full accomplishment reserved for time to come c. For here the Church is to be established on the tops of Mountaines c. so that no other State shal over-top or over-looke it much lesse trample it under feet Now whether there was ever such a time when this was compleatly fulfilled c. I leave it to any mans indifferent judgement who can compare the description of the Prophet with the stories of fore past and present times In the times immediatly after Christs PASSION I think any man will grant the Church then was neither VISIBLE nor GLORIOUS In the time of the PERSECUTING EMPEROURS when the Church had taken foot among the Gentiles and the Nations began to flow unto it it was a Society indeed VISIBLE but not GLORIOUS I am sure it was not in the TOPS of the MOUNTAINES but the Imperial Mountaine of ROME not only over-topped it but over trampled it under their feet In the time of CONSTANTINE and thereabouts after three hundred yeares cruell persecution the Sunne seemed as it were to breake forth of a Cloud but presently that glory was eclipsed and even the visibility of the Church in a manner covered with the thick and a Universally overspreading cloud of ARYANISME This ARIAN cloud was no sooner blown over but another great cloud of that fore-prophesied APOSTASIE of the Church begun to arise whereby the Churches glory was not onely eclipsed but at length againe the visibility thereof wholly overshaddowed with the thick darknesse of Idolatrous ANTICHRISTIANISME untill after a long day of darknesse it pleased God of late somewhat to dispel the cloud c. and we hope when the cloud shall be wholly consumed by the beams of the Sun of the Gospel the Church shall become not more visible then yet it is but far more glorious then ever hitherto it hath been WHEN THE FULNESSE OF THE GENTILES as St. Paul speaks SHALL COME IN. For we shall finde in the Prophesies of the Scriptures that there are two sorts and times of the CALLING OF THE GENTILES First that which should be in the REJECTION OF THE IEWS as St. Paul saith to PROVOKE THEM TO IEALOUSIE Such a calling as should be in a manner occasionall that God might not want a Church the time the Iewes were to be cast out So Rom. 11.15 The CASTING AWAY OF THE IEWS is the RECONCILING OF THE WORLD i.e. The CALLING OF THE GENTILES Whence we may see that the Apostles were not to preach Christ to the Gentiles untill being first offered to the Iewes they refused him And this is that calling of the Gentiles which hitherto hath been many yeares But there is a second and more glorious calling of the Gentiles to be found in the Prophesies of Scripture not a calling as this is
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. as it is the Hebrew of purpose to multiply his Princedome and for peace without end The Jewes observe that the close-shut 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 mem in the middle of a word as here in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 properly is a finall letter signifies the stability of the thing spoken of as open 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the end of a word as in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Nehem. 2.13 which 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 properly is a middle letter signifies the brokennesse of the walls there spoken of which observation I mention not as a foundation strong enough for me to build upon but as a sufficient Narrative to declare the opinion of the Ancient Jewish Rabbins concerning the stability of the Messiahs Kingdome Thirdly That the words Princedome Government and for peace and spoken in a way of Prophesie of what should be added to the Church above that they injoyed already cannot but signifie more then Spirituals Fourthly That this is yet more apparent by that which followes both here and Luke 1.32 of the Messiahs sitting upon the Throne of DAVID and upon his Kingdome and to establish it with Justice and Judgement speaking in the phrase of an excellent politick Government It needs not that Christ should sit on Davids Throne and Kingdome to Spiritually governe and keep in peace his universall Church Nor needed there a Promise that Christs Spirituall Kingdome shall be established with Justice and Judgement which are low things to faith hope love joy in the Holy Ghost and the rest of the Graces of the holy Spirit Nor was there need to assert the perpetuity of Christs Spirituall Kingdome that it should be for ever the Jewes having now been a Church so many hundreds of yeares Fifthly The close in a way of Gods great engagement the zeale of the Lord of Hoast will performe this must of necessity signifie something more then the ordinary thing of Christs having a Spirituall Kingdome on earth What need such high words solemne protests and most serious pawning of the zeale of God which is love in a flame to signifie the performance of that which had been long since done and as an ordinary thing was to continue viz. Christs having a Spirituall Kingdome on earth Sixthly Both this of Isaiah and that of Luke 1.31 doth import That after there should be an interruption of the sitting of Davids race upon Davids Throne it should sensibly appeare that Christ should possesse that Throne else why is it here Prophesied that the Messiah shall sit upon Davids Throne and that the Lord God shall give to the Messiah the throne of his father David and promiseth there he shall sit for ever The whole Earth long before Gen. 1.26 c. compare Psal 8. Heb. 2. ver 7 8. being given up to the rule of Christ to be governed by his invisible providence was never interrupted but in all Ages Christ hath continually powred downe his Judgements upon the wicked as Peter proves in his second Epistle Chap. 2. And the Church was also given to him from the beginning Gen. 3.15 compare Rom. 16.20 which without any possible impediment he hath ever preserved on earth in all Ages ever since by his Spirituall power and grace But the Line of Davids race hath been broken off from his Throne as we shall see presently Nor hath Christ been upon it at all in any visible manifestation therefore this last must be a great part of the meaning of Isaiah and Saint Luke as Piscator expresseth it In solio Davidis tanquam haeres regni filius Davidis sedebit Christus confer 2 Sam. 7.12 c. so he And that to be performed for ever that is so as no visible power must reigne after him Seventhly Isaiah Prophesies in the time of the division of the Kingdome of the Jewes into Judah and Israel see chap. 1. ver 1. c. And Saint Luke tells us chap. 1. ver 33. that this must be fulfilled by Christs reigning over the whole house of Jacob which containes all the twelve Tribes made up of Israel and Judah even as according to Isaiah Christ must sit upon the Throne of David who ruled over both Judah and Israel Eighthly That all these must be so fulfilled that Christ must appeare to be wonderfull and mighty and to increase in his Government as Isaiah speaks and to be Great as Luke speakes § 6 Having thus digged into the meaning of the Text let us next lift up our eyes and take a view of all the Transactions of Christ since this Prophesie and see what of this text hath been really fulfilled Surely this text was not fulfilled in the Jewes returne from Babylon for the ten Tribes did not then returne to make up the house of Jacob or the Kingdome of David And besides of that prosperity there was soone an end in the miseries of the Maccabean Warres and the Roman Conquest was over them afore Christ was borne § 7 Nor was it ever fulfilled since Christs coming in the Flesh for he never yet sate upon the Throne of David nor any other deputatively for him of that Tribe the Scepter being then and thence to this day departed from Judah The visible Government as the text imports was not all this time upon Christs shoulders the time was not come as Christ tells us Act. 1.6 7. Act. 3.21 The visible Government since Christs coming in the Flesh hath been upon the shoulders of the Roman Emperour or the Pope or the Turke When the time comes that the Government shall be on Christs shoulders he shall reigne as David as Isaiah speakes and over the house of Jacob as Luke speakes that is over all the twelve Tribes and that for ever that is none visibly ruling them after him But at Christs Incarnation only two Tribes were about Jerusalem and Judea but under the Romans visible Government and for the generall refused Christs spirituall Government Act. 13.46 8 Nor can this be imagined rationally to be fulfilled in Christs Spirituall § 8 government for this Spiritual government if we may so call Christs giving of Ordinances and grace into the heart extending it self equally to Gentiles as wel as to Jewes if not more for these one thousand six hundred and fifty years past to the Gentiles what priviledge or preheminence is given in this to Jacobs House or Davids Throne more then to the houses or thrones of Constantine the Great or Charles the Great or of Edw. the sixth or of Q. Elizabeth or of the Indian Sagamores or of the Turkish Emperours or Grand-Signiours or of the great Chams of Tartar or c. when they or their Nations are converted at the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles Besides who of Beleevers at the time of this Prophesie did not know that Christs Spirituall Kingdome of Grace should be for ever and full of more then Justice and Judgement viz. of all the graces of the
in the channell of the Heathen Roman Empire for three hundred yeares anon the black streame of Arian Heresie and Persecution by it after that Popish and Turkish Persecutions with successive Monsters of Massacres Bonfires Inquisitions Suspensions Imprisonments and deadly feudes and enmities of the vast generality against the handfull of Saints throughout all Nations So that the small gleaning sprinklings or first-fruits that were reconciled to God and to one another upon Christs first coming are drowned as i◠were in the Ocean and sea of enmity that from thence forward untill now remaines with great animosity And therefore we beleeve another sence of these words viz. That at Christs next appearance there shal be a generall peace between men and between the Creatures and between both as it followes in the next Argument For it followes in the ninth verse They shall not HURT Arg. 3 NOR DESTROY observe the words nor destroy nor so much as hurt in all my HOLY MOVNTAINE observe that also And lastly observe the confirmation of all viz. That the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the sea Now though there was an increase of knowledge at Christs first coming as a fountaine and spring streame which the further it ran the larger it was sutable to Ezekiels Prophesie of the waters that arose from under the Sanctuary the Gospel of Christ began in Zion and so grew deeper and deeper yet from that time untill now the knowledge of the Lord hath not increased to a sea to cover all the earth so as to drowne all iniquity or opposition against Christ or Christians so as to work men unto that peace that there shall be neither destroying nor hurting in all the holy mountaine Sure enough it appeares by the sacred Story in the Gospel Acts and the Revelation and by experience both leading us downe from Christs Incarnation to these times that at least three parts of foure of the whole world hath not been filled with the knowledge of the Lord but have made opposition against it hurting and destroying and that too in the holy Mountaine whether we take it strictly for Zion or largely for the Church wheresoever seated Christ was condemned and Crucified and the Disciples persecuted unto a scattering at Hierusalem Jerusalem both City and Temple are laid wast by the Roman Emperours the Ten bloudy Persecutions by the Heathen Romans are continued for three hundred yeares the Arian Persecution followes that the Papall Persecution followes that the Turkish overtakes that and both continue to this day the Jewes joyning with them in opposition against the truth of Christ both at Jerusalem and where ever the Church is Beside that vast part of the world in the East and West Indies yet know not the Lord. Further it followes in the tenth verse Arg. 4 And in that day there shal be a root of Jesse which shal stand for an ensigne of the peoples so the Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 To it shal the GENTILES seek and his REST shall be glorious In which words the Prophet mainly lookes at the great call of the Gentiles as the Apostles the best Expositors have since to that purpose alledged them Rom. 15.8 9 10 11 12. Now I say that Christ was a minister of the Circumcision for the truth of God to confirme the Promises made unto the Fathers and that the GENTILES might glorifie God for this mercy as it is written For this cause I will confesse thee among the Gentiles quoted out of Psal 18.49 And againe he saith Rejoyce yee GENTILES with his people quoted out of Psal 117.1 And againe Isaiah saith viz. in the eleventh of Isa ver 10. There shall be a root of Jesse and he that shall rise to reigne over the GENTILES in him shall the Gentiles trust c. Now as there were few of the Gentiles that were brought into the faith when the Apostle quoted and applied these words to this sence we heard but now in the former argument how generally the Gentiles have and doe oppose the Gospel to this day throughout the world so the Prophets close in this eleventh of Isaiah ver 10. HIS REST SHAL BE GLORIOUS * Which the Hebrew hightens being in the Abstract viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 glory pure glory doth more evidently demonstrate that this place of Scripture as to the maine intent is not yet fulfilled For if we will understand inward rest the beleeving Saints afore Christs incarnation had it Psal 116.7 and often elsewhere Yea the Apostles in their troublesome times 2 Cor. 6.10 so that there needed not a Prophesie to fore-tell that which had been in past time and was at the present And if we would understand here eternall glory yet we cannot for two reasons 1. Because in this tenth verse it is said Unto the ensigne Christ the Gentiles shal SEEK which cannot consist with eternall glory no seeking then 2. Because of that in the eleventh verse immediatly following And it shall come to passe in THAT DAY that the Lord shal set his hand againe the second time to recover the remnant of his people c. from Assyria Aegypt Pathros c. things inconsistent with the state of eternall glory which last words bring us downe to the fifth Argument The fifth Argument Arg. 5 Why this place of Isaiah is not yet in the maine intent of the Prophet fulfilled is because of those words in the eleventh verse of this eleventh of Isaiah viz. And it shal come to passe in THAT DAY that the Lord shal set his hand AGAINE the SECOND TIME to recover the remnant of his people which shal be left from ASSYRIA and from AEGYPT and from PATHROS and from CUSH and from ELAM and from SHINAR and from HAMATH and from the ISLANDS OF THE SEA Observe diligently the Lord must set his hand againe the second time to recover the remnant of his people from the fore-mentioned places which clearly infer as relatives that God must doe it the first time and then next the second time Now when the Prophet Isaiah Prophesied this eleventh Chapter the Lord had not recovered his people from captivity in Assyria the first time for the two Tribes of Judah and Benjamin had not yet been there captivated the first time nor the ten Tribes for ought we can finde For Isaiah Prophesied forty yeares afore the captivity of the ten Tribes and above seventy yeares afore the captivity of the two Tribes as Bulcholcerus states the account You see before your eyes by the length of his Prophesie viz. consisting of sixty six Chapters and by the many Kings under whose reigne he Prophesied viz. Uzziah Jotham Ahaz Hezekiah the last of them that Isaiah prophesied along time and we are now but upon the eleventh of those sixty six Chapters The Two Tribes were not carried away captive till a long time after Hezekiah viz. in the time of Zedekiah King of Judah 2 Chron. 36. between which Zedekiah
Lord for servants and handmaids and they shall take them CAPTIVE whose CAPTIVES they were and they shall rule over their OPPRESSOURS Vers 3 And it shall come to passe in THE DAY that the Lord shall give thee REST-FROM THY SORROW and from the FEARE and from thy hard BONDAGE wherein thou wast made to serve That thou shalt Vers 4. take up this Proverb against the King of BABYLON and say HOW HATH THE OPPRESSOUR ceased the GOLDEN CITY CEASED The Lord Vers 5. hath broken the staffe of the WICKED and the Scepter of the RULERS Hee Verse 6. who smote the people in wrath with a continuall stroke he that ruled the Nations an anger is persecuted and none hindereth The WHOLE EARTH Verse 7. is at REST and is QUIET they breake forth into singing c. The rest of the Chapter being appurtenances illustrations c. of this here presented § 2 It is worth noting that our New Translators even in those Episcopall times which were so adverse to this our point do concur with us so far as to give us the Contents of the Chapter in these words Gods mercifull RESTAURATION of ISRAEL And they speake well and are not alone in their opinion the stream of Interpreters generally concurring that this Chapter intends Gods joyning of Iews and Gentiles into one Church which is something to the point in hand in the generall § 3 But let us weigh the words more particularly and exactly for a discovery whether yet to this day they have been fulfilled It may be that some may be apt to imagine that this making of Iewes and Gentiles into one Church one sheepfold as it is called Iohn 10. was fulfilled when the substituted or subrogated Gentiles were brought in in the Apostles time beginning in Act. 10. But they utterly mistake if they so thinke For those Gentiles and downwards were and are but substitutions and subrogations of them whiles the Iews fall off till the fulnesse of the said Iews should be brought in and then and not till then is the fulness of the Gentiles brought in with the Jews into one Church So that the FULNES of the Gentiles is not yet brought in much lesse the fulnesse of the Iews For as in Iohn the first Christ coming to his owne his owne received him not So after they crucified him and persecuted his Apostles Whiles in the Old Testament Christ called the Iewes the Gentiles hung off And whiles he called many Gentiles in the New Testament the Iewes generally fell off And although there were some sprinklings of Iewes and Gentiles converted in the Apostles time and after that many Gentiles yet what is all that to the fulfilling of this Text of Isa 14. I will yet choose ISRAEL and bring them into their owne Land and the STRANGERS shall be JOYNED to them and they shall cleave to the HOUSE OF JACOB For neither in the Apostles time nor downward to this day have the GENTILES called here Strangers joyned to Israel or cleaved to the house of Iacob Israel and the house of Iacob signifying the ten Tribes nor to the generality of the two Tribes because neither two Tribes nor ten Tribes have joyned and cleaved to the Lord Jesus To make plaine and prove all this that we have said we will scan first the Apostles discourse Rom. 11. and secondly the particular expressions of this Text of Isa 14. ¶ 1. The Apostle Paul giving us an account of his time and downward Rom. 11. tells us in the 30 vers As yee Gentiles in times past have not beleeved God yet now have obtained mercy through the Iews unbeleef even so also have the Iews now not beleeved that through your mercy they also may obtaine mercy That is that the Church of Christ as needs must whiles he is head being continued at least by vicissitudes of Iews and Gentiles the Gentiles now upon the present falling off of the Iews being in possession of the Gospel may continue the same throughout the successions of the Church till the time of the vocation of the Iewes that the said Jewes may be called thereby through the Ministery prayers and examples of the Gentiles So that the Jews and Gentiles for the generality have been since the first mention in the Old Testament of this distinction of Jewes and Gentiles to this day as two buckets to a Well if one were full the other was empty thus continually keeping their vicissitudes and turnes in imbracing or non-imbracing of the word of Christ which the Apostle further shews us in that 11. to Rom. in the distinct graduals thereof giving two to each of them the two of the Iews thus 1 There was their root or first-fruits or initiation 2 Their branches or lump or fulnesse vers 12.16 and 18. The two graduals of the Gentiles thus 1 SOME wilde branches 2 Their fulnesse v. 11. and 25. Then mark the close of the Apostle concerning both vers 25. and 26. When the FULNESSE of the GENTILS shall come in then ALL ISRAEL shall bee saved quoting severall Prophesies of the Old Testament to prove the same Whence wee must necessarily infer these two conclusions That the conversion of the Iewes and Gentiles heretofore and downward untill now are still but the root first-fruits and beginnings the most persons of the Jews and most Nations of the Gentiles to this day not knowing the Lord Christ 2. That Jews and Gentiles are not to this day one Church according to the Prophesie of this 14 of Isa viz. That the Strangers of the Gentile Nations shall be joyned to the Jews and shall cleave to the house of Jacob and according to the stating of the question by Saint Paul in this 11 of Rom. viz. That when the fulnesse of the Gentiles shall come in ALL ISRAEL shall be saved For let us but aske experience whether ever these were yet fulfilled to the full of these places ¶ 2 This will be far more plain by a punctuall scanning of all the passages in this 14. of Isa First that in the first verse I will saith the Lord yet choose ISRAEL and have mercy on JACOB must needs be extended beyond the return of the Captivity of the two Tribes from Babylon and beyond the conversion of a few of them in the Apostles time For Jacob and Israel must of necessity comprehend the ten Tribes the Prophet Isaiah prophesying long after the division of the whole twelve into two Kingdomes two into the one and ten into the other And therefore the Prophet Isaiah well knew the distinction between Judah and Israel Chap. 1. v. 1. and useth it in relation to our point Chap. 11. v. 12. afore opened And therefore he mindes here well enough what he distinctly means when he saith Jacob and Israel as comprehensive at least of the ten Tribes to bee delivered as well as the Two For secondly when he saith in this same first verse Strangers shall be joyned with them that is with Jacob and Israel he could not
intend to leave out the most of the Jewes viz. ten for two to whom those Strangers were to joyne Nor was this done at the return of the two Tribes from Babylon Then Strangers of the Gentiles joyned not with them Nor was it done at the joyning of the two handfuls the one of Jews the other of Gentiles in the history of the Acts of the Apostles For they could no way answer to Jacob and Israel and Strangers indefinitly spoken without limitation ☜ I have often admonished that the grand prophesied promises touching Christs Kingdome have their gradual successive progressive impletions Redux Juda Juda returning from Babylon was a Type The conversion of an handfull of them in the Apostles time was but the first-fruits Rom. 11. But the fulnesse of Gentiles and Jews is yet behind Thirdly we never yet saw that in the second vers fulfilled That Christians have been servants and handmaids to the Jews in a right religious harmony and complyance For that must be the sense and good news of this promise or else Christians shall have losse and that in things concerning salvation Fourthly nor did we ever see that also in the second verse fulfilled that the Captive Jewes shall take them captive whose Captives they were and rule over their oppressours For neither in their return from Babylon did the Jewes take captive their Captivators but returned by voluntary consent of King Cyrus nor at Christs coming did they take any captive but rather were captives under Augustus and Tyberius Emperours of Rome and of Babylon too as subdued by those Romans the universal Monarchs then of the whole world If any should be of so ayery a phantasie as to evaporate this into a figure that at Christs coming the Jews took their Captivators captive in a spirituall sense of conversion let such remember themselves that Converts are the greatest Free-men Joh. 8.32 And that for the Jews then alas for them the vaile was on them 2 Cor. 3. So that they were generally in a spirituall Captivity themselves like Sampson when his eyes were put out And that Dan. c. 12. intimates that the Iews Conquest over their enemies should be corporall Neither of which Conquests do we yet see that the Jews either corporally or spiritually have subdued them that captivated them Fifthly neither was that in the second verse ever yet fulfilled That the PEOPLES or Gentiles should take the Iewes and bring them to their place c. Calvin on this place grants thus much That this was not done after the Iewes coming out of Babylon giving this reason That the Gentiles were so far from being the conduct and assistance to the Iews in their returne and settlement and to contribute their service to them therein that they did not only trouble the Iews but destroyed them from off the earth quoting Ezra 4.4 Adding that therefore this must be fulfilled in through and by Christ Thus far Calvin But when was this yet ever done by Christ Surely those seeds in Christ and the Apostles time could not be the Harvest here meant whole Iacob and Israel were not then in the land of the Lord. Nor are they to this day But are for the generall under the dominion of Turks Romans Indians and Countries in every Nation almost under heaven rather serving the Gentiles then being served of the Gentiles And therefore this cannot be done till as Dan. 2. that the little stone Christ cut out of the mountain without hands breaks to peeces the fourfold-mettaled image of all the foure Monarchies of the earth Whereas yet the Roman Monarchy in great part stands to this day Sixtly The twelve Tribes of Iacob and Israel are not yet as it is v. 3. delivered from their sorrow and fear and bondage They are in bondage being scattered amongst all Nations They are in sorrow for that scattering from their own Country And are there in fear being forced to pay tribute for their own freedome Nor were they freed from that bondage in Christs time being then Captives under the Romans Nor from their fear but for fear of the Romans if they should owne Christ they crucified him and put him to death Therefore when this deliverance is fulfilled to purpose it is done as it follows in the seventh clause and consideration v. 4 5 6 7 That the Jews shall take up this Proverb How hath the OPPRESSOUR ceased The Lord hath broken the SCEPTER of the RULERS and the staffe of the WICKED so that the WHOLE EARTH is at REST and QUIET that they break forth into SINGING But nor Scripture nor Histories nor Experience shew us that ever these things were fulfilled to this day And at the ultimate day of judgement will be no meet time for such work as every mans own reason will easily prompt Therefore it is yet to be done afore the ultimate day of judgement SECT XV. THe fifth place in Isaiah is Chapter 24. verse 23. Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sun ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall reigne in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem and before his Ancients gloriously * R. Kimchi upon this Chapter hath these words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This parasha or Section is to be fulfilled hereafter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In the destruction of Edom 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Afterward he shall remember the salvation of ISRAEL To understand what he means by Edome he bids us upon v. 16. Look 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 upon the destruction of ROME mentioned in the who le book of God To these few words I shall need to speak but few THEN relating to that afore in verse 22 23. fetcheth its sense from thence In that day say the 22 and 23. verses It shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the host of the High ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth upon the earth meaning plainly as the last clause evidenceth the Gentile-Potentates and powers And they those Gentiles shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison And after many dayes THEY the Jews saith Calvin giving a strong reason * Quum igitur haec ad sustinendos FIDELES pertinerent non dubium quin IUDAEIS dicerentur apud quos potissimum fides crat aut potius nusquam apud alios apparebat shall be visited To which sense touching the Iews the subsequent words also in the next verse the Text wee are now upon do mightily concur The Moon shall be confounded c. when the Lord shall reigne before his Ancients The originall and rise of which then you now see That upon the great destruction of the impenitent Gentile-Potentates and Powers the Iewes and if you will include the penitent Gentiles it shall not grieve us shall be visited in mercy And the Moon shall be confounded c. that is the glory of the Church shall be such as the light of the Moon and
wall v. 5. Thou shalt bring downe the noise of the strangers as the heat in a dry place even the heat with the shadow of a cloud the branch of the terrible ones shall be brought low v. 6. And in this Mount shall the Lord make to all people a feast of fat things c. v. 7. And the Lord will destroy in this mount the face of the covering cast over all people and the vail that is spread over all nations v. 8. He will swallow up death in victory and the Lord God will wipe away all tears from off all faces and the rebuke of his people he shal take away from off all the earth c. v. 9. And it shall be said in that day Lo this is the Lord we have waited for him c. v. 10. In this Mount shall the hand of the Lord rest and Moab shall be trodden down under him as straw to the dunghill v. 11 And he shal spread forth his hands in the midst of them as he that swimmeth c. and shall bring down their pride together with the spoyles of their hands vers 12. and last And the fortresse of the high fort of thy wals shall he bring down and lay low and bring to the ground even to the dust Chap. 26. vers 14. They are dead they shal not live they are deceased they shall not rise c. vers 19. Thy dead men shall live together with my dead body shal they rise awake and sing ye that dwel in the dust c. § 2 This Chapter you see by the connexion with the former is to the same purpose as that former Chapter and its sense is extended to the state of the Church of the New Testament that is yet to come by Apostolical Expositions and applications in all the maine parts of it which are three Viâ—â— 1 The Destruction of the enemâ—â—â— â—f the Church v. 2. amplified more afterwards 2 The Deliverance of the Church v. 4. enlarged more in the rest of the Chapter 3 The joyful state of the Church upon that their deliverance and their joy in it v. 6 7 8 and elsewhere in the Chapter All which three parts are I say by the Apostles carried downe to the state of the New Testament Church never yet fulfilled I will give three Instances The first Instance St. Ioh. in Rev. 7. makes these three parts a state yet to come v. 1 2 3. you have the Destruction of the enemy There were four Angels that had power in their hands to hurt the four quarters of the earth both by sea and land as soon as the servants of God should be sealed Those that were to be hurt were those that had held the servants of God under tribulation v. 14. And those enemies were to be hurt by a storme viz. by the blowing of the four winds upon the sea the earth and the trees v. 2 3. even as the Prophet Isa in that 25 Chap. v. 4. calls the state of the wicked a storme and compares it in their opposition against the godly to a blast of a storme dashed against the wall whose fury the wall stops breaks and scatters so that they are sheltered that stand under it So that plainly here is the destruction of the enemies of the Church prophesied by Iohn in like phrase and formes of speech as were used by the Prophet Isa in that 25. Chapter Next for the deliverance of the Church St. Iohn likewise prophesies of it in that seventh of Rev. in the same figurative speeches as the Prophet had used viz. That the Lord shall be among his people in manner of dwelling v. 15. And his people shall hunger no more nor thirst any more nor shall the same light on them or as it is in the Greek fall upon them that is a way of smiting blasting or scorching or any heat v. 16. For the Lamb which is amidst them shal feed them c. and shal wipe away all tears from their eyes v. 17. To which St. Paul speaking of the resurrection of the Saints which is before the ultimate day of judgement in 1 Cor. 15. as we have and shall demonstrate annexeth this Then shal be brought to passe that saying Death is swallowed up in victory And again the same Apostle Paul speaking of the conversion of the Jewes 2 Cor. 3. as of a thing to come after his time but yet not fulfilled but shal bee fulfilled at the great Restitution of which we speak he useth this expression and gives forth this Prophesie in the 15 and 16 verses of that 2 Cor. 3. But even to this day when Moses is read the vail is upon their hearts Neverthelesse when they shal turn to the Lord the vaile shal be taken away viz. By the presence of the Lord. All which expressions of Iohn and Paul in relation to the Churches deliverance are full to the sense and words of the Prophet in that 25 of Isaiah viz. This is the Lord we have waited for him for in this mountain shall the hand of the Lord rest v. 9 10. whereby to signifie Gods presence amongst his people And shall be a succour to his people from the fury of their enemies as the heat is sheltered off with the shadow of a cloud v. 3 and 4. And he will feed them with a feast of fat things v. 6. And he will destroy the covering cast over all people and the vail that is spread over all Nations v. 7. therefore among the rest that is upon the Jews And v. 8. he will swallow up death in victory according to the words of Paul 1 Cor. 15.54 And chap. 26. of this Prophet v. 19. compared with v. 14. They shall not rise but thy dead men shall rise * Upon this place of Isa 26.14.19 heare what the Hebrew Rabbins the Septuagint the ancient Jews and the ancient Greek and Latine Fathers say and hold R. Solomon saith They shall live that dyed for thy sake bringing in the Prophet as speaking to God 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. that is The Royal Regal or Kingly decree went forth from thy face or presence saying MY DEAD BODIES SHAL RISE AGAIN The dead bodies of my people whose bones fell for my sake to them there shall be a resurrection This by way of an Antithesis answers to that v. 14. above written The 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 REPHAIM expresse in the Hebrew Text though obmitted I know not why in the English which the Chalde and Jerom render GYANTS SHALL NOT RISE AGAIN but these shall rise againe Thus R. Solomon The REPHAIM be interprets of the WICKED 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that are remisse namely 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Who remit or slack their hands from the Law The Septuagint render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Hieron vivent mortui tui interfecti mei resurgent And that the ancient Iewes did interpret this place of Isaiah touching the resurrection of the dead appears by that Gemara Sanhedrim
yet the threats are expresse in v. 1 2. against ALL Nations Secondly Moab and Ammon and the Ishmaelites or Hagarens being knit to the line of the Jewes Gen. 18. Gen. 16. as was Idumea the Country of Esau they are most fitly held forth as types of the Antichristian enemies of the Church of the New Testament Psal 83. 6 7 c. they all being mothers children as Cant. 1. but not acting as brethren even as St. John makes the destruction of those enemies Types and Prophesies of the destruction of Antichrist as we heard but now SECT XIX THe ninth place in Isaiah is Chapter 43. and Chapter 44. being one entire discourse of the same matter notwithstanding the division of Chapters In the main and principall designe they treat of the conversion and salvation spirituall and temporall of the Jewes which are yet unfulfilled We need but touch upon some passages It is said Chapter 43. v. 1 2 3. Thus saith the Lord that created thee O JACOB and he that formed thee O ISRAEL fear not I have redeemed thee I have called thee by name thou art mine when thou passest through the waters and fires thou shalt not be destroyed for I am the Lord thy God the holy one of ISRAEL thy Saviour I gave Egypt for thy ransome Ethiopia and Saba for thee Which place if we look upon as an history of things done then it will be justly queried that though God destroyed Egypt in the book of Exodus for Israels sake yet when dealt he so with Ethiopia and Saba Therefore generally and most safely it is referred as a Prophesie to future things answerable to verse 2. Thou art mine and I will be with thee in all difficulties And to v. 4. I have loved thee and therefore I will give MEN mark the comprehensivenesse of the terme for thee And answerable to verse 5 6. I am with thee I will bring thy seed from the East and gather thee from the West I will say to the North give up and to the South keep not back bring my sonnes from far and my daughters from the ends of the earth And verse 18 19 20 21. Remember not the former things behold I will doe a new thing c. I will even make a way in the wildernesse and rivers in the desart the Beasts of the field shall honour me because I give waters in the wildernesse c. to give drinke to my people my chosen This people have I formed for my selfe they shall shew forth my praise For this giving Ethiopia and Saba for the Jews cannot be understood as Calvin and the Geneva Notes hint of the coming up of Perkaka King of Ethiopia against Assyria whiles Sennacherib King of Assyria was coming up against Jerusalem Isa 27. for these reasons First the Angel of the Lord going forth into the Army of Sennacherib and slaying one hundred eighty five thousand of them Isa 37.36 was the giving of the Assyrians not the Ethiopians for a ransome for the Jewes Secondly If that slaughter of the Assyrians was a ransome for the two Tribes yet is it nothing for Israel the ten Tribes so often mentioned in this Chapter Thirdly As we have no sacred history for it so no humane probability that Sennacheribs Army thus weakned by the Angel was in a fit condition to war against and to worst that Army of the Ethiopians then gathered against Sennacheribs Kingdome of Assyria or to overthrow Seba. As it is alike improbable that Sennacherib could recruit the old or raise a new Army speedily enough to encounter with Perkaka who was then fully ready for fight The story concludes Sennacheribs retreat from Jerusalem otherwise viz. That he returned and dwelt in Nineveh and worshipping in the house of his Idol gods was slaine there by his two sonnes Isa 37. And in this our New Annotationists concur with us saying That though most understand this of Gods turning Sennacheribs forces against Egypt and Ethiopia upon the tidings brought unto him of Tirkakas coming against him when he was making towards Jerusalem to besiege it Isa 37. yet wee cannot conceive say they that to be the meaning of the place For though it be true that the rumour startled him and made him thinke of returning yet was it not that but the fright he tooke upon the unexpected blow given in his Camp that enforced him to flight not to invade Egypt or Ethiopia which he was in a sorry case then to doe but to get him home with as much speed as hee could into his owne Country Chap. 31.8 9. And 37.36 37. So the Annotationists very well But to that they adde I cannot well consent when they say That this of giving Ethiopia and Saba for a ransome for Israel may well have reference to that remarkable defeat of that vast Army the greatest upon record in Scripture given to the Cushites under Asa c. For this Chapter is a Prophesie of things to come speaking both first and last in the Chapter in the future tense If in a touch it speaks in the past tense in the middle of the Chapter it is but usuall in Prophesies to shew their certainty to expresse what shall bee as if done already And it is spoken of Jacob and Israel comprehending all the twelve Tribes at least the ten and not the two onely called Juda over whom Asa was King and mentions the ruine of Saba for Israels sake that they might bee delivered of which wee have nothing in past stories And if this Chapter bee a Prophesie the story of Asa his victory abovesaid over the Chushites will not comport with the meaning thereof Asa dying many yeers Bucholcerus saith above a hundred and fifty afore Isaiah prophesied § 3 Now these things afore prophesied throughout this Chapter further amplified in the following Chapter were never yet since Isaiahs time fulfilled At their returne from Babylon none were slaine for Israels sake Nor at the time of Christs being on earth nor since the Turk possessed Judea for they returned by the voluntary consent of the King of Babylon And from the time of Christs being on earth and downward till the Turk took Judea the Romans severall times as we have shewed afore slew them instead of being slain for them as did the Turks after the Romans deal with them likewise Nor was the seed of Israel brought from the East West North and South and from the ends of the earth to this day Where still they are dispersed c. as it follows in these two Chapters Nor can these things suit with the ultimate day of doom § 4 Therefore there remaines yet a time to come when the Prophesies of these Chapters must be fulfilled afore the ultimate day of judgement There must be a distinct time on earth when Egypt Ethiopia and Saba shall be destroyed for the deliverance and freedome of Jacob and Israel and not onely these but all foure quarters of the world and the utmost ends of the earth as it is
Pagans Papists Atheists Hereticks and prophane persons And without multiplying words the very phrases will not admit of a referring these to the ultimate day of Doome And therefore must yet bee fulfilled on earth before that day SECT XX. § 1 THe eleventh place in Isaiah is Chap. 49. wholly But I shall need to touch only upon three or four places of the Chapter which will give light to all the rest In generall the chapter is of the bringing in of Jews and Gentiles into the Church The Jews are here named by the generall termes that comprehend at least the ten Tribes if not the whole twelve viz. by the names of Israel ver 3 5 6 7. and of Jacob ver 5. and of the Tribes of Jacob v. 6. and the preserved of Israel ibid. In way of distinction from whom the two Tribes are called Zion v. 14. So that all the twelve Tribes that came of Jacob are intended in this Chapter in the close whereof as a seal the Lord stiles himself Their Saviour their Redeemer the Mighty one of JACOB The Gentiles likewise are expressely named in v. 6. viz I will also give thee for a light to the Gentiles that thou mayest bee my salvation unto the ends of the earth quoted by the Apostle Act. 13.47 to prove the propagation of the Gospel for salvation to the Gentiles The concurrence of both Jews and Gentiles in coming in to Christ is expressed to the life ver 22 23. Thus saith the Lord God behold I will lift up my hand to the Gentiles and set up my standard to the people and they shall bring THY sons in their armes and thy daughters shall be carryed upon THEIR shoulders and KINGS shall be thy nursing Fathers and THEIR Queens shall be THY nursing Mothers c. Adde that the engagement of God that thus hee will call home both Jews and Gentiles v. 13.15 19 18 26. is great Sing O Heavens and be joyfull O Earth and break forth into singing O Mountains for God hath comforted his people and WILL have mercy on his afflicted Can a woman forget her sucking child that shee should not have compassion on the son of her womb c. Yet VVILL NOT I FORGET THEE Behold I have GRAVEN THEE upon the palmes of mine hands As I LIVE saith the Lord thou shalt surely cloathe thee with them all that oppose thee as with an ornament c. And ALL FLESH shall know that I the Lord am the Mighty one of Jacob. § 2 These being premised let us but only put the question upon some Verses whether ever they were yet fully fulfilled and that will be sufficient to ingenuous reason to confesse they must yet be fulfilled and that on earth § 3 VVhen was the seventeenth verse ever fulfilled viz. Thy children shall make hasle thy destroyers and they that made thee waste shall goe out of thee VVe read no such thing at their return from Babylon but that there were the crew of Sanballat Tobiah c. that opposed them Anon Alexander the Great the Grecian Monarch enters Jerusalem After him Antiochus Epiphanes alias Epimanes King of Syria wasteth it After these the Romans conquer it And now the Turks ever since possesse it § 4 And when ever yet was the nineteenth verse fulfilled viz. Thy waste and desolate places and the land of thy destruction shall even now be too narrow by reason of the Inhabitants and they that swallowed thee up shall be far away Surely since the carrying away captive of the ten Tribes the Kingdomes of Israel and Judah were never full of their owne Inhabitants We never read that ever the Assyrians Babylonians Cutheans c. which the King of Assyria sent into the Kingdome of Israel 2 Kings 17.24 were sent for home againe Nor that ever those CALDEANS that were sent to governe Judea intimated in 2 King 25. were recalled And for after times as we have hinted afore when the Greek went out the Syrian came in when the Syrian went out the Roman came in when the Roman went the Turke came in and there he is to this day These expulsing one another there hath been a constant succession of them that swallowed up the twelve Tribes Their wasters and destroyers have been changed but have not been sent forth far away from Israel and Judah § 5 Againe did the Gentiles and Peoples ever yet as v. 22. bring the sonnes and daughters of the Jewes in their armes and upon their shoulders If we should wave the litterall sense of setling the Jews in their owne Land and condescend to a spirituall sense of the generality of the Gentiles compliance with the generality of the Jewes in matters of Religion and union into the universall Church wee cannot tell when ever this was done to this day § 6 Nor can we say that ever the Kings of the Gentiles as it is v. 23. and their Queens have been nursing fathers and mothers to the Jewes and bowing downe to them Alas poore Jewes they have ever since the beginning of the Grecian Monarchy long before Christ downe to this very day been under the awing power of the Gentiles and mostly used hardly and in most places of the world instead of reverence have been and are much villified Therefore John in Revelation tels us that this is yet to come and to be fulfilled upon earth afore the ultimate day of judgement as the circumstances of things and the phrases of the Prophesie necessarily require Rev. 21. v. 24.26 And the Kings of the EARTH doe bring their glory and honour into New Jerusalem And they shall bring the glory and honour of the NATIONS into it And yet so as there shall in no wise enter into it any thing that defileth c. § 7 Wee are likewise utterly to seek when ever yet the 25. and 26. verses were fulfilled viz. The captives of the mighty shall be taken away and the prey of the terrible shall be delivered for I will contend with him that contendeth with thee and I will save thy children and will feed them that oppresse thee with their owne flesh and they shall be drunken with their owne blood Wee know not of any such thing since the captivity of the Jewes in Babylon in all Histories divine and humane that thus the Jewes were saved by such destruction of their enemies The Jews indeed soon after their captivity made some attempts 2 King 25. v. 25. After that they made some attempts in 1 Book of Macchab And after that they made severall attempts in the time of Titus and Adrian Roman Emperours And since that the Turk hath dominered over them the Kings of the Gentiles especially of England have made some attempts of warre on their enemies managed by the stocke counsell and aide of severall religious orders for that end as of the Templars Knights of the Rhodes or of John of Jerusalem and of the Knights of Malta alias Melita But all these attempts have not amounted to Isaiahs phrase
to a full saving of the Jews by the destruction of their enemies destroying their flesh and pouring out of their blood But in all these attempts in the end the Jewes party had the worst even as Israel and Juda are still dispersed and those in Judea are still under the power of their enemy the Turk Therefore these things are yet to be fulfilled viz. at the fall of Antichrist Rev. 16.5.6 and Rev. 19. v. 19.20 21. Thou art righteous O Lord c. because thou hast judged thus For they have shed the blood of Saints and Prophets and thou hast given them blood to drinke And the Kings of the earth and their armies were gathered together to make warre against him that sate on the white horse and against his army and the beast was taken and with him the false Prophet and cast into the lake of fire c. and the rest were slaine with the sword c. SECT XXI THe twelfth place in Isaiah is in Chapter 54. v. 11. c. to the end of the Chapter Verse 11. O thou afflicted tossed with tempest and not comforted behold I will lay thy stones with faire colours and lay thy foundations with Saphires 12 And will make thy windows of Agates and thy gates of Carbuncles and all thy borders of pleasant stones 13 And all thy children shall be taught of the Lord and great shall bee the peace of thy children 14 In righteousnesse shalt thou bee established thou shalt be far from oppression for thou shalt not seare and from terrour for it shall not come neer thee 15 Whosoever shall gather together against thee shall fall for thy sake 16 Behold I have created the Smith that bringeth forth an instrument and I have created the waster to destroy 17 No weapon that is formed against thee shall prosper and every tongue that shall rise against thee in judgement shalt thou condemne This is the heritage of the servants of the Lord. § 1 If wee keep all these together in their twisted dependance here set downe and in their joynt relation and intent to the glorious estate of Jews and Gentiles conjunctively as is intimated v. 3. c. Thy seed shall inherit the Gentiles c. when were these ever fulfilled unto Christ and the Apostles dayes And therefore they doe cleerly carry downe these things far beyond the age wherein they lived upon earth Saint John prophesies that v. 11 12. of laying the Churches foundations with precious stones that it shall bee fulfilled at the great restauration of the Church yet after one thousand six hundred fifty and two to be fulfilled Rev. 21. v. 18. c. The building of the wall or New Jerusalem is of a Jasper and the City pure gold the first foundation a Jasper the second a Saphir the third a Chalcedony the fourth an Emerald c. proportionably all the twelve foundations So Christ carries downe that in the former part of the 13. verse All thy children shall be taught of God beyond his time unto after times Joh. 6.44 45. That whereas the Jews then murmured against him yet the time should come that they should be ALL TAUGHT OF GOD quoting this of Isaiah Which must the rather relate to future times after Christs time in regard of that annexed in that 13. verse of the 54 of Isaiah so closely as that with the former it makes but one period viz. ALL THY CHILDREN shall be taught of God And GREAT shall be THE PEACE OF THY CHILDREN which being not fulfilled unto Johns time he refers it to the time of the glorious state of New Jerusalem on earth Rev. 21.4 And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more death neither sorrow nor crying neither shall there be any more paine c. so that the time must come that the Jews must not have onely pure inward peace being taught of God but GREAT outward peace also which is further confirmed by that which follows in the next verses viz. v. 14 15 16 17 of this 54 of Isaiah That in righteousnesse they shall be established and they shall be far from oppression and from feare and from terrour that all opposing them shall fall and no weapon shall prosper against them c. as you have it above written before your eyes in the first Paragraph of this one and twentieth Section which Peter 2 Pet. 3. and John in Rev. Chap. 21. apply as things not fulfilled to their time unto the glorious state of the New earth that therein shall dwell righteousnesse and no uncleannesse or abomination shall enter but all tears sorrow paine crying shall be removed as we have oft repeated afore All which wee cannot but expect yet to come being never yet fulfilled but the contrary alwayes extant and to be fulfilled before the ultimate day of judgement there being nor time nor place for foundations windows precious stones teachings from God c. as above described SECT XXII THe thirteenth place in Isaiah is Chapter 59. Verse 19 20 21. When the enemy viz of the Jewes shall come in like a flood the Spirit of the Lord shall lift up a standard against him and the Redeemer shall come to Zion or out of Zion as the Apostle renders it Rom. 11.26 For if the deliverer come out of Zion hee comes first to Zion the preposition 7 having great variety of significations as in at according to or for the sake c. And unto them that turne from transgression in Jacob or as the Apostle renders it Rom. 11.26 shall turne away transgression from Jacoh * The Heb◠is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which may for ought I know beare to be rendred To the end to turn men from For 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 with the infinitive mood is in value a future And 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the root sometimes is used transively to turne a thing away or to turn it from viz. a termino a quo ad terminum ad quem Schindl or to convert from Pagn And 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is oft paragogicall and sometimes put for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as the Masora gives instances Surely the Apostle would not pervert the Text nor could he erre The Chaldee renders it neer as the Apostle 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 To convert the transgressors of the house of Jacob. The Septuagint likewise of the best Edition in Bib. complut in Bib. Reg. Gallicanis 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Arab. likewise There shall come a Redeemer for Zion who shall turne away wickednesse from Jacob. As for mee this is my Covenant with them saith the Lord my spirit that is upon thee and my words which I have put into thy mouth shall not depart out of thy mouth nor out of the mouth of thy seed c. from henceforth and for ever § 1 The Prophet having in the next verses before shewed how God would recompence the enemies of the Jews according to their deeds hee presently follows
on with this that I have now presented before you So that temporall and spirituall deliverances are here conjoyned in one and the same Prophesie to which in the first verse of the next Chapter he annexeth the glory of the Church of Jewes and Gentiles conjuctively of which in the next Section Now this present place the Apostle Rom. 11.25 26 27 referres unto the great call of the Jews upon the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles both making one glorious Church which the Apostle speaks of as a thing to come to passe after his time His words are that ye may see how fully they answer to those of the Prophet Blindnesse in part is happened to Israel untill the fulnesse of the Gentiles come in and so ALL ISRAEL shall be saved as it is written THERE SHALL COME OUT OF SION THE DELIVERER and SHALL TURNE AWAY UNGODLINESSE FROM JACOB FOR THIS IS MY COVENANT UNTO THEM VVHEN I SHALL TAKE AVVAY THEIR SINNES § 2 Now this was never yet fulfilled as we plainly see by the forlorne state of the Jewes both temporall and spirituall to this day And therefore this Scripture is yet to be fulfilled and that afore the ultimate judgement which is utterly inconsistent with this Prophesie SECT XXIII THe fourteenth place in Isaiah is in Chapter 60 the very next Chapter the summe wherof our last Translators have meetly given us in saying that the Chapter is concerning the glory of the Church of the Jews converted to Christ in the accession and addition of the Gentiles The passages of most concernment to our point are § 1 Vers 1. Arise shine for thy light is come and the Lord is upon THEE v. 2. Darknesse shall cover the EARTH and grosse darknesse the PEOPLE but the Lord shall arise unto THEE and his glory shall bee seen upon THEE vers 3. And the GENTILES shall come to thy light and Kings to the brightnesse of thy rising v. 4. Thy sonnes shall come from farre and thy daughters shall be nursed at thy side v. 5. And thine heart shall be inlarged because the abundance of the Sea shall be converted unto thee and the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee v. 6. They of Midian and Sheba shall come they shall bring gold and incense and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord. v. 7. All the flocks of Kedar shall be gathered together unto thee the Rammes of Nebaioth shall minister unto thee c. and I will glorifie the house of my glory v. 8.9 Who are these that flye as a cloud and as doves to their windows Surely the ISLES that wait for thee v. 10. The sonnes of the strangers shall build up thy wals and THEIR KINGS shall minister UNTO THEE v. 11.12 Thy gates SHALL BEE OPEN DAY and NIGHT that men may bring unto thee the forces of the Gentiles and that THEIR KINGS may be brought For the NATION and KINGDOME that will not serve thee SHALL PERISH v. 14. The sonnes of them that afflicted thee shal come BENDING unto thee and all that despised thee shal BOW THEMSELVES DOWN at the soles of thy feet and they shall call thee THE CITY OF THE LORD the ZION OF THE HOLY ONE OF ISRAEL v. 15. Whereas thou hast been forsaken and hated I will make thee an ETERNAL EXCELLENCY a JOY OF MANY NATIONS v. 16. Thou shalt also suck the milke of the GENTILES and the breasts of KINGS v. 17. For brasse I will bring gold for iron silver c. and I wil make thy OFFICERS PEACE and thy EXACTORS RIGHTEOUSNESSE v. 18. Violence shal be NO MORE heard in thy Land but thou shalt call thy wals SALVATION c. v. 19. THE SUNNE shal be no more THY LIGHT by day neither for brightnesse shal the MOON GIVE LIGHT unto thee BUT THE LORD SHALL BE THY EVERLASTING LIGHT and thy God thy glory v. 20. Thy Sunne shal no more go down neither shal thy Moon withdraw it selfe for THE LORD shal be thy EVERLASTING LIGHT and the daies of thy MOURNING SHALL BE ENDED v. 21. Thy PEOPLE also shal be RIGHTEOUS and they shal inherit the Land FOR EVER i. e. none after them v. 22. the close of all I the Lord wil hasten it IN HIS TIME § 2 Now I put the question to all the Learned and Libraries in the world when was ever any such estate of the Church since the Jewes going into captivity in Babylon If any are so heavy headed as falling fast asleep shall dream that all these passages concerne not a visible glorious estate of the Church on earth or that these all are already spiritually fulfilled let such know that they would be hard put to it so to expound this Chap. congruously and to tell us the time and manner and make all handsomely hang together And therefore St. John a surer Commentator having prophesied in Rev. 20. v. 4. compared with Rev. 5.10 of the Saints reigning with Christ on earth and in the 21 Ch. having given us his vision of a New EARTH and of New Jerusalem coming downe FROM heaven with many more passages of the future glory of the Church on earth of which abundantly afore severall times he goes on in that 21 Chapter to apply many of the passages of this sixtieth of Isa to that future glorious estate of the Church on earth yet to come after the fall of Antichrist which is not as wee see yet performed For example The third verse of this sixtieth of Isaiah but now presented afore your eyes is exactly so applyed Rev. 21. v. 24. And the Nations of them that are saved shal walk in the light of it that is the light of the glory of God and the Lamb as it is in the former verse and the Kings of the earth doe bring their glory and honour into it So that in the 11. and 12. verses of this sixtieth of Isaiah as you see it afore is likewise applied to that future glorious state of the Church on earth afore the ultimate judgement Rev. 21. v. 25 26. And the gates of it shall not be shut at all by day for there shal be no night there And they shal bring the glory and honour of the Nations into it So the 19. v. of this sixtieth of Isaiah is in like manner applyed in Rev. 21. v. 23. And the City had no need of the Sun neither of the MOON TO SHINE IN IT Mark to shine in it intimating that though those Planets continue in being yet there shall be no need of their shining for the glory of God doth lighten it and the Lamb is the light thereof The same is to be seen in the application of the 20 v. of this sixtieth of Isaiah in Rev. 21. v. 3 4. Behold the Tabernacle of God is with men and he wil dwel with them c. and God himselfe shal be with them c. And shal wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shal be no more death neither sorrow nor
them again into their folds and they shall he fruitful and increase vers 4. And I will set up shepherds that shall feed them And they shall FEARE NO MORE nor be DISMAYED neither shall they be LACKING saith the Lord. verse 5. Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that I will raise unto David a RIGHTEOUS BRANCH and a KING shall reign and prosper and shall execute justice and judgement upon the earth In his dayes JUDAH shall be saved and ISRAEL shall dwel safely And this is his name whereby be shall be called THE LORD OUR RIGHTEOUSNESSE verse 7. Therefore behold the dayes come saith the Lord that they shall no more say the Lord liveth which brought up the children of Israel out of the land of Egypt verse 8. But the Lord liveth which brought up and which led the seed of the house of ISRAEL out of the NORTH COUNTRY and from ALL COUNTRIES whither I had driven them and they shall dwell in THEIR OWN LAND § 3 Mark now what the Hebrew Doctors and Jewish Rabbins as opposite as they be to Christ in their writings since the returne of the two Tribes from Babylon It is written in the book Berochoth Benzuma saith It shall come to passe that ISRAEL shall not remember their departure out of the land of Egypt in the WORLD TO COME speaking just as the Apostle Heb. 2.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the dayes of MESSIAH by which last clause you may see what the Rab. means by the world to come And saith the Rabbin how doth this appear That which is written in Jer. 23. saith he will prove it Behold the dayes come and they shall say no more the Lord liveth which c. which saith this Rabb wise men interpret thus not as if the name of Egypt should be blotted out but because the wonders which shall be effected in the dayes of the KINGDOME OF THE MESSIAH shall be principal and the Egyptian lesse § 4 Observe next the phrases and circumstances of the place As first That here is mention not onely of Judahs reversion and conversion but of Israels too And secondly that they shall returne not onely from the land of the NORTH but from all Countries whither they were driven which Countries are mentioned Act. 2.9 10.11 and 1 Pet. 1.1 And being compared with ancient and moderne Histories and experience doe shew that they are now scattered into all parts of the world and are so acknowledged to bee by the learned Jew R.M. Ben Israel in his SPES ISRAELIS And thirdly that at the time the Prophet intends there must be a sweet compliance between Jews and Gentiles in matters of Religion And lastly that these things must be when Christ the RIGHTEOUS BRANCH springing from David shall be KING and reign and PROSPER and execute justice and judgement in the EARTH § 5 All which duely weighed doe cleerly demonstrate without multiplying of words that they were never yet fulfilled nor can the transaction of them consist with the ultimate day of judgement And therefore are yet according to the truth of God to be fulfilled afore that day SECT XXVIII § 1 THe second place in Jeremiah is Chapter 30. and Chapter 31. * This 31 Chap. hath been alleadged before Jeroms time for the glorious state of all things in the thousand yeers of which we speak Omnes hujusmodi repromissiones juxâ—a Judaeâ—s nostros Judaizantes in mille annorum regno putanâ—â—â— esse complendae c. Hieâ— on Jer. 31. v. 27. v. 38. both being one continued discourse of one and the same thing as the connexion in verse 1. of Chapter 31. plainly shewes In which are many things which of themselves upon bare reading of them without all glosses shew themselves never to have been fulfilled to this day since the time of that Prophesie For example marke the words well § 2 That in Chapter 30. was never yet fulfilled viz. verse 3. Lo the dayes come saith the Lord that I will bring again the CAPTIVITY of my people ISRAEL and JUDAH naming distinctly both Kingdomes containing all the twelve Tribes and cause them to returne to their own land Nor was that ever yet fulfilled in verse 8. In that day saith the Lord of Hosts I will break his yoke from off thy neck and will burst thy bonds and strangers SHALL NO MORE SERVE THEMSELVES of him but they shall serve the Lord their God and DAVID THEIR KING †The Chaldee is very remarkable 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That is They shall obey the Messiah or Christ the Son of David their King whom I will raise up unto them Nor was that ever fulfilled in verse 10. Fear thou not O my servant JACOB saith the Lord nor be dismayed O ISRAEL for lo I will save thee from a far and thy seed from the land of their captivity and JACOB shall return and shall be in REST and QUIET and NONE shal make him AFRAID repeated again Jer. 46. v. 27. So many things in the 31. Chapter were never yet fulfilled as all that from v. 1. to 15. concerning their corporal restitution into their own Country and their visible peace and glory there Nor can these things of both Chapters be referred to the ultimate day of judgement as the nature of the things speake loud enough And therefore they are yet to be fulfilled afore that time SECT XXIX § 1 THe third place in Jeremiah is in Chapter 32. verse 37. to the end of the Chapter Verse 37. Behold I will gather them out of ALL COUNTRIES whither I have driven them in mine anger c. And I will bring them again into this PLACE and I will cause them to dwell SAFELY verse 38. And they shall be my people and I will be their God verse 39. And I will give them one heart and ONE WAY that they may fear me for EVER c. verse 40. And I will make an everlasting Covenant with them that I will not TURNE AWAY FROM THEM to do them GOOD c. verse 41. Yea I will rejoyce over them to do them good and will plant them in this LAND assuredly with my whole heart and with my whole soul verse 42. For thus saith the Lord like as I have brought all this great evil upon this people so will I bring upon them all the good that I have promised them c. § 2 Now these things thus spoken were never yet fulfilled since the captivity of the ten Tribes carried away afore this Prophesie or of the two Tribes carried away after this Prophesie they have not been gathered from all Countries into their own land they have not dwelt there safely they have not had one way c. But since the returne but of two Tribes the ten never yet returning Antiochus of Syria and the Grecians and Romans and Turks have by a continuall succession molested them And the generality of all the twelve Tribes are scattered in all Countries to this day The fulfilling of
shall become the Lords and his Christs Rev. 11.15.18 ¶ 3. Further what prerogative and advancement had it been for the Kingdome of Christ SPIRITUAL to have broken down ☞ the Selcucidae and other Horns of the Greeke Empire as long as another Kingdome the Kingdom of the Romans succeeded in their place to beate downe the Church by the Heathen Emperors and Antichrist for longer space of time and with greater and more terrible persecution then ever before § 7 Contrarily I affirme that the legges feet and toes of the iron doe signifie the Roman Kingdome 1. Because it is represented by a distinct mettall coming after the Brazen belly and thighes which is the Grecian For no other distinct Monarchy came after the Grecian but this as History doth shew 2. Because t is stronger then all the rest and breaketh them in peeces Dan. 2.40 3. The Iron legs and feet are parallell with the Iron teeth of the fourth Beast which signifies the Roman Kingdome Dan. 7.7 4. The ten toes representing the ten Kings are accordingly a character of the Roman Kingdome Revel 12.3 and 13.1 and 17.12 5. T is such a Kingdome as must stand to be destroyed by the Kingdome of the Saints in the end of time and therefore can be no other ☜ then the Roman Kingdome yet continuing under Antichrist § 8 The Stone is the Kingdome of the Saints as it is interpreted Dan. 2.44.45 with chap. 7.26 27. ☜ And that is the Kingdome to be set up at the fall of Antichrist as it appeareth by these reasons 1. Because it shal be set up to destroy all adverse Kingdoms in the world which cannot be expected til about the time of the fal of Antichrist ☜ 2. It shall not rise till about the sounding of the seventh Trumpet which is the time of the fall of Antichrist Revel 11.15 16 17. 3. Then and not before it shall fill all the earth ver 34 35.44 45. that is all Kingdoms shall be subject unto it chap. 7.26 27. compare Rev. 11.15 Thus Mr. Parker to whom in the maine and generall of his matter I assent § 9 In the last place let us hear Mr. Archer speak in his fore-cited book p. 7. 8. And then I shall take my turne The fourth Monarchy saith he was that of the Romans which because it began farre lower then the rest viz. more Westward and yet rose as high Eastward as the highest of the former therefore it became a mightier Monarchy then all the three former This is expressed in this second of Daniel by legges of Iron because it was the strongest of all and subdued all under it But in processe of time the body of the world which it bore up being so great to which it was a leg it divided it selfe into two legges viz. the Easterne and Westerne Monarchy Which yet though divided was as strong as Iron and held all Nations under them But in processe of time fell into feet and toes The Eastern Monarchy was swallowed up by the Turke the Westerne fell into divers Kingdomes But among these sub-divided Kingdomes was strength and weaknesse the feet being part of iron and part of clay And much mingling there shall be amongst them to re-joyne the Kingdomes into one body some whereof are weak and some strong as iron and clay but never shall be as Iron cannot be mixed with clay The Spaniards and Austrians of Spaine and Germany and other Nations of Europe some of which are strong and some weake have sought by marriages and other covenants to mingle and re-joyne themselves into one Monarchy but it shall never bee as we cannot mingle iron and clay But in the period and up-shot of their Soveraignty and Monarchy they shall remaine distinct Kingdomes as Feete and Toes of Iron and Clay partly weake and partly strong § 10 Now in the dayes of this Roman Monarchy this fourth Western Monarchy there shall be a stone cut out without hands which shall ruine these Kingdomes smiting the Image on the feet of iron and clay and so swallow up the whole image all the fore-going Monarchies being brought under it and by it to nothing And it becomes a Monarchy over the whole earth where ever the former Monarchies had ruled ver 35. That is as it is explained ver 44 45. a Kingdome which that stone shall obtaine set up by the hand of the God of Heaven Whereas the other Kingdomes or Monarchies were erected by men on earth though permitted and ordered by God This Kingdome or Monarchy shall swallow up in it all fore-going Monarchies And this is a FIFT Monarchy which shall arise in the world after the former foure which is meant of a state of Christs Kingdome as appeares by severall reasons ¶ 1. Marke it is called a Stone as Christ is the cheife corner stone which the builders refused 1 Pet. 2. v. 3. c. to 8. ¶ 2. Againe it is a stone not in hand or cut out without hands Because God shall reare up this Kingdome As touching Mr. Archers words of Gods rearing up this Kingdome without hands of humane helpe I cannot insert or assent to while I stick at that place in Daniel chap. 12. ver 1. c. that when Michael shall stand up to deliver his people meaning the great and generall deliverance of the Jewes from temporall and spirituall captivity there shall be a great time of trouble such as there never was since it was a Nation even to that same time Insomuch that many of the Jewes afore as it were a sleep in the dust or as dead men in their forlorne hopelesse and helplesse condition shall now at Christs appearance awake and stand up for the cause of their deliverance yet some of them shall fall off to their everlasting shame According to which there is a double period of time relating to their deliverance mentioned in the eleventh and twelfth verses of that chapter as if it should begin at one thousand two hundred and ninety yeares after the ceasing of the daily sacrifice but they onely should be blessed that wait and come to the one thousand three hundred thirty and fifth year which is forty five years after But of the full meaning of this place to this sence and the demonstration thereof we shal hear after in our last place of Daniel This I confesse and I can freely conceive that whereas the Church of Christ is that stone that Kingdome of Christ as Mr. Mede Mr. Huet and Mr. Parker have afore well expressed or hinted so Christs call of the residue of the Church into the state of grace at the great and last bringing in of the Jewes shall be so immediately and suddenly done by Christ himselfe by his appearing in the clouds and such like extraordinary wayes as in the birth of a Nation at once as the Prophet describes their call that there shall not be used for ought I know the Ministry of mens preaching to that end ¶ 3. It s
And that in Luk. 19. vers 11. c. to 15. He spake a parable because he was nigh to Jerusalem and because they thought that the Kingdom of God should immediately appeare c. And that in Luk. 21. ver 31. When you see these things come to passe know that the Kingdom of God is at hand See what went afore viz. The Sonne of Mans coming in a cloud with power and great glory borrowed from Daniel And that in 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quicke and dead at his appearing and his Kingdom must signifie the same Kingdome that Daniel saw should be at the destruction of Antichrist and consequently the Kingdome of a thousand years which the Apocalyps includes between the beginning and the consummation of the great Judgement By these we may understand the rest Taking this for a sure ground That this expression of the Sonne of Mans coming in the cloudes of Heaven so often inculcated in the New Testament is taken from and hath referrence to the prophesie of Daniel being no where else found in the Old Testament As our Saviour also cals himselfe so frequently The Son of Man because Daniel so called him in that Vision of the great Judgement and that we might look for the accomplishment of what is there prophesied of in him It was not in vaine that when our Saviour quoted the prophesie of Daniel hee added He that readeth let him understand * Matth. 24. ver 15. Certainly the great Mystery of Christ is cheifly and most distinctly revealed in that Booke § 1 Thus out of my great respect to Mr. Medes learning having given him the precedency to speak first I shall limp after and stammer forth my own Notions such as they are § 2 In the second verse out of the strivings of the blustering spirits of ## the inhabitants of the foure quarters of the World in a Sea of Warres there ariseth a succession of foure Monarchies each in his turn ruling the greatest part of the whole earth This order or series of the foure Monarchies began with Nimrod about the year of the world one thousand seven hundred and eighty eight and afore Christ two thousand one hundred and eighty three and hath continued to this day This succession order or series of the foure Monarchies the Prophet according to his vision sets forth in the third verse under the name and notion of foure Beasts Which he explaines in the seventeenth verse to signifie four Kings or Monarches that should arise out of the earth that is by earthly means domineer over the greatest part of the earth § 3 The first Beast ver 4. is like a Lyon that had Eagles wings wherewith he was wont to lift up himselfe from the earth till they were plucked and then he was made to stand upon his feet as a man resting upon the earth and a mans heart was given unto him By all which is meant the Babylonian Monarchy which was strong like a Lyon and had wings of celerity and victory becoming the Assyrio-Chaidean Monarchy whereby it was lifted up to an Imperiall eminency above the generality of all the earth Obadiah ver 4. Jer. chap. 4. ver 13. Those his wings are plucked by Darius the Mede and Cyrus the Persian and so made to stand as a man upon his feet that is was brought down to the common rank of men And hath a mans heart given unto him that is the spirit of an ordinary man an ordinary low boates peasants plebeian spirit not an Heroick and Imperiall § 4 The second Beast vers 5. is like a Beare that raised up it selfe on one side and had three ribs in its mouth between its teeth and they said thus unto it Arise and devoure much flesh By all which is meant the Persian Monarchy which was ravenously cruell like a Bear raising up one dominion induring no Mate or Corrivall but subdued first the Medes then the Babylonians uniting all into one Monarchy Between the teeth of his mouth of his desires and power demanding and snatching more dominion he hath the three ribs of the Easterne Westerne and Southerne parts of the world by conquest compare Dan. 8.4 He ariseth and eateth much flesh in his cruell slaughterings and spoilings in pursuance of his Victories § 5 The third Beast ver 6. is like a Leopard which had upon the back of it foure wings of a fowle and had also foure heads and dominion was given to it By which is signified the Grecian Monarchy which was like a Leopard in subtilty celerity and rapacity Jer. 5.6 Hab. 1.8 Dan. 8.5 The Subtilty appeared in the policy of Philip the Father and Alexander the Sonne in laying the plot for this Monarchy slyly occasioning a quarrell to fall out with the neighbour Nations And in the cunning of Alexander in battell that would alwayes fight his supernumerous Enemy in straites where his said enemy might not have roome to bring up more of his men in fight then Alexander on his part could display in battell The swift celerity appeared in that the Grecians under the said Alexander did so suddenly within about twelve years over-run the greatest part of the world as if this Conquerour had flowne upon wings of whom the proverb was He came he saw he overcame And is therefore described in Dan. 8. by an Hee-Goate which skips as if he touched not the ground The rapacity or ravenousnesse to devoure appeared especially against the Jewes the foure heads of this Leopard and their Successors exercising matchlesse cruelty against them and every where as naturally ravenous more tearing and destroying then taking prey For Alexander and the Empire under him being the Body his four Captaines that immediately succeeded him in the Empire were the foure Heads or Rulers Dan. 8.8 and 11.4 Cassander head of Macedonia Antigonus of Asia Seleucus of Syria and Ptolomy of Egypt all possessing Imperiall dignity at once By which this Monarchy became a Monster and monstrous in devouring § 6 The fourth Beast verse 7. is so variously monstrous and strangely different that no naturall Beast nor Name is found meet to describe him onely he is said to have ten hornes and iron teeth to devour and feet to stamp the residue of the beasts under it A strange beast different from all Beasts and all the Beasts but compounded as John shewes Rev. 13. of all foure By this description of Daniel is set forth the Roman Monarchy which according to Daniels words was dreadfull and terrible to all Nations being exceeding strong to annoy them all having such teeth of warre as Scipio Pompey Caesar c. iron victors That addition of nailes of brasse ver 19. signifies their Imperiall Senate and Provinciall Magistrates who held fast whatsoever the iron teeth conquered The ten Hornes are explained by Saint John Rev. 17. to be the character of the Roman Empire and to signifie the ten Kingdomes into which at last it
sate upon the throne to receive the Booke And he is also said to be brought before the ancient of dayes which words saith Mr. Parker untill better light may shine I cannot but conjecture saith he that they doe signifie the Saints who bring Christ neare to the ancient of dayes BY IMPORTVNITY OF PRAYERS for the obtaining of the Kingdome and removall of it from the Beast Whereupon the Kingdome with all the dominion and glory thereof following in ver 14. to the end of the chapter is given to him that is to Christ and his Saints as afore cleared The beginning whereof saith Mr. Parker is at the fall of Antichrist and the setting up of the Throne of Judgement as appeareth vers 21 22 23.25 26. and is absolved in heavenly perfection at the Resurrection immediatly ensuing So he The greatnesse of it is in those words that All People Nations and Languages should serve him signifying that it is the very same Kingdome or Monarchy in place and substance only the quality shall be better and the quantity bigger these words holding forth saith Mr. Parker the universall conversion of the remnant of the earth who at the fall of Antichrist shall be subject to Christ and his Ordinances in the hand of his holy people the witnesses of truth for which cause they are also said to be subject to them v. 26 27. Isa 60.10 12. All that shall withdraw their â—ecks from such subjection shall be destroyed ☞ And this is the first state or rising of New Jerusalem the space of five and forty yeares before its compleating in the resurrection which state is specially described by all the Prophets The description of the continuance of this Kingdom of Christ is that it shall be for ever as hath been afore largely opened § 15 From the whole visionall representation and propheticall Nartative in this chapter Mr. Archers short argument I may call it in matter is considerable especially if put into forme thus Christ the Son of Man must have a Monarchy on earth delivered to him by God the Ancient of daies at the ruine of the fourth Monarchy to bee in his occupation at his second appearance and from thence to the end of the world But this cannot be meant of his spirituall and providentiall Kingdome which he had before the foure Monarchies 1 Cor. 10.1 c. as after the end of this world at the period of the thousand yeares he hath no Kingdom but resignes up all to the Father 1 Cor. 15.24 28. Therefore this is yet to come the fourth Monarchy being not yet destroyed nor Antichrist the main and most part of that fourth Monarchy § 16 Adde for a close of all we shall say upon this seventh of Daniel the resolution and reasons of learned Master Huet upon the scope thereof This Kingdome saith he * Huet on Daniel chap. 7. ver 14. is ascribed to the person of the Messiah which in ver 22.27 is given to and possessed by the Saints It is Christs authoritatively it is the Saints by delegation and ministry And such as rule for God and according to God are said to rule with God Hos 11 12. Rev. 2.26 27. which Kingdome of our Lord is either meerly spirituall and inward whereof he maketh no VICAR saving his holy Spirit and this Regency he reserveth with himselfe as a peculiar Royalty or else outward and mixt partly spirituall in the Ordinances of Worship and partly civill in Equity and Justice according to righteous lawes c. This admits of Deputation And the exercise of it may be ascribed either to God or Man the first and second causes never jarring This is that dominion here mentioned whereof the Iews are deprived by the tyranny of the Roman Monarchy Yet now through the glorious appearance of the Deliverer it is restored to them againe never more to be wrested from them This interpretation the circumstances of the Text confirme 1. It is such a regiment as was resisted by that very People Languages and Nations that after were brought in to serve and obey it upon the violent breaking to peeces of all that perseveringly resisted it But thus the spiritual Kingdome of Christ is not set up Ergo. 2. This Kingdom is such as may admit of humane deputation viz. that may be exercised by the Saints on earth ver 22. Judgement was given to the Saints of the most high and the Saints possessed the Kingdom But Christs spiritual Kingdom admits of no deputation seeing none among men can give the Spirit command the Conscience or move the Will but Christ alone So he I will adde a word and I have done with this Scripture and that may be a third Argument The dominion here prophesied and promised is that which was taken from the Jewes 1. By the Babylonian captivity wherein Daniel and the Jewes now were and in a way of comforting him and them against this their present desolate condition these visions and predictions are given to him and upon his sadnesse at first dark sight of them frequently mentioned in this booke they are further explained to him See more in an exact consideration of the whole ninth chapter of this prophesie 2. By the desolations of Jerusalem And accordingly Daniel sadly complaines in prayer to God in chap. 9. ver 12. That under the whole Heaven hath not been done as hath been done unto Jerusalem And for his comfort it is answered vers 24. That there were but seventy weekes to be determined upon the holy City which now hee understood ver 1.2 that they were neare expiration 3. By the ceasing of the daily sacrifice which is expresly mentioned chap. 12.11 as from thence to begin the account of one thousand two hundred and ninety yeares at the expiration whereof their full deliverance should commence Now observe That therefore the dominion passing away from the Jewes 1. passed away by Temporall calamities as in the captivity and the desolations of Jerusalem 2. By the interruption of outward publicke worship But the spirituall Kingdome of Christ he ruling their hearts by his Spirit and they worshipping him in secret with spirituall worship cannot passe away from a people by those two things But contrariwise as the Jewes were a religious people and the onely Church of Christ many years after the captivity yea and some hundreds of years after their returne till the Apostles times so the Christian Church was most flourishing spiritually when outwardly most persecuted under the ten persecutions and were faine to serve God in secret at dead midnight Compare the story of the Acts with Rev. 11.1 c. and Rev. 12.1 c. Fox Martyrolog Volum 1. all which relate to those times as Mr. Fox in his Book of Martyrs gives us a particular account SECT XXXVII Wherein Daniel chap. 11. and chap. 12. are collated so far as they assert our maine Thesis touching the GENERALL AND GLORIOUS RESTAURATION OF THE CHURCH AND RESTITUTION OF ALL THINGS § 1 THat I may
14. Multitudes multitudes in the valley of decision for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision 15. The Sun and the Moon shall be darkned and the Stars shall withdraw their shining 16. The Lord shall roar out of Zion and utter his voice from Jerusalem and the Heavens and the Earth shall shake but the Lord will be the hope of his people and the strength of the children of Israel 17. So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion my holy Mountain then shall Jerusalem be holy and here shall no stranger pass thorough her any more 18. And it shall come â—o pass in that day that the mountains shall drop down new wine and the hills shall flow with milk and all the rivers of Judah shall flow with waters and a fountain shall come forth of the house of the Lord and shall water the valley of Shittim 19. Egypt shall be a desolation and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness for the violence against the children of Judah because they have shed innocent blood in their Land 20. But Judah shall dwell for ever and Jerusalem from generation to generation 21. For I will cleanse their blood that I have not cleansed for the Lord dwelleth in Zion This as it follows close at the heels of the former place so notwithstanding mens chapter-divisions hath it a great coherence with it Calvin upon this third Chapter verse 1 2. tell us in the general Confirmat his verb is Propheta quod prius docuit de Ecclesiae RESTITUTIONE i. e. The Prophet in these words confirms what before he had taught concerning the RESTITUTION of the Church More particularly let me tell you That the most if not the all of the former place in the second Chapter is again mentioned in this third Chapter and with four great emphases of connexion both sounding of confirmation and explanation of what had been said before 1. FOR Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 As if the Lord should say I bring this for a proof that I will do as I have said 2. BEHOLD Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 As much as to say There shall be some notable thing done some grand event as an eminent sign that I will be as good as my word 3. IN THOSE DAYES and AT THAT TIME with great emphasis of Pronouns and Articles both in Hebrew Chalde and Septuagint Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septuagint 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which sound to this effect That methodically and in a just order when I do the former things I will do these following also so that the plurality and magnificence of exploits shall force the eyes of men to see my truth and true performance of all that I have spoken 4. I will in pursuance of that deliverance of my people mentioned in the former Chapter Gather all Nations to the valley of Jehoshaphat and will plead with them there for my people which amounts justly to thus much for our present observation That the famous remarkable circumstances as before of time so here of place shall be undeniable witnesses of the substance of my true performance For as the great Philosopher saith Many common accidents concurring may amount to a proprium quarto modo to an infallible property and so to a demonstration And we know that circumstances of time and place c. beget in us great credence to a report That such a thing was done Thus for the coherence of this place with the former § 2 Next for the substance of this place in order to our point take notice in the entrance That the people that shall according to this prophesie be delivered are named in the first verse Judah and the Inhabitants of Jerusalem signifying the Two Tribes In the second verse and verse sixteen they are called his heritage Israel and the scattered among all Nations which most aptly set forth the Ten Tribes who of the Kingdome of Israel became the greatest dispersion among all Nations far beyond those of Iudah And the deliverance of both is so expressed in the Hebrew Chalde and Septuagint that the words may well be extended to a spiritual conversion of their souls from infidelity beside the corporal deliverance of their persons from captivity as many Translaters render it And for confirmation observe That whereas in Hosea chap. 1. the Lord calls them speaking of both the said Kingdoms of the Iews Lo-ammi NOT MY PEOPLE and Lo-ruhamah I WILL NOT HAVE MERCY viz. Whiles they are to be in captivity where for the general they lost their piety as well as their liberty in not receiving Christ and his Gospel from thence to this day Behold here in this Text of Joel the Lord speaking of their deliverance expresseth it in relation and to the effect of receiving them at their return as his people and to be his heritage v. 2. For surely if God did justly for their great wickedness carry them away captive he had little reason to receive them from thence if they were no better then when they went Put now all together and all plainly spells that this first clause of the deliverance of Judah and Israel hath not been fulfilled to this day according to the sence before demonstrated which will clearly appear by the rest that follows § 3 For in the next place we are to observe that this must not bee a meer still and tacit deliverance of the Jewes but withall a tumultuous destruction of their Enemies that formerly caused their bondage and with-held their deliverance ver 2. I will gather all Nations and being them down into the Valley of Jehosaphat and plead with them there or my people c. Which last clause the Chalde renders 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. And I will take vengeance on them there for my people which is much further amplified in ver 9 10 11 12. c. The valley of Jehosaphat is particularly named here as the place where God will avenge his people 1. Because there Jehosaphat overthrew the Ammonites and Moabites and their Confederates that rose up against the Jewes 2 Chron. 20.22 c. 2. Jehosaphat signifies pleading or judging viz. the thing that God will doe upon the incorrigible enemies that yet remaine ver 12. 3. Because this is also called the valley of Beracha that is the valley of blessing Because there Jehosaphat blessed and praised God first in hope of the said Victory Secondly for helpe in the said Victory 2 Chron. 20.22 compare ver 16. 4. Because this is called the valley of decision or threshing twice in this fourteenth verse of this third of Joel because there God threshed his Enemies as the chaffe from the wheat according to Isai 25.10 and thereby decided the controversie between the Jewes and their Enemies viz. that the Jewes should
have the mastery not their enemies But though the valley of Jehosaphat be here named by these names yet they are to be understood in intent and meaning appellatively in a larger sence as is most safe to signifie and typifie any eminent place or places where the Lord shall overthrow the incurable enemies of the beleeving Jewes For first Let any reasonable Hebrician looke into the original and he shall plainly perceive that the holy Ghost useth the name Jehosaphat onely as a Paranomasia I will bring them into the valley 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. As if we should say in English I will bring them down to the valley of Jehosaphat and there I will Jehosaphatize them that is overthrow them as Jehosaphat did his enemies Secondly Let any rational man judge whether Jehosaphat as a proper name of a place in Judea doth signifie that there and there onely God will judge the enemies of the beleeving Jewes when as their enemies are scated in every place where the Jews are scattered and those enemies shall oppose them and the beleeving Gentiles that shall help in their returne where-ever they stirre to that end Yet I contend not but that that very place may be one where of some notable overthrow of some cheife enemies of the Jewes as of the Arabians Saracens and Turkes that shall enter into the Holy Land to hinder the Jewes sitting downe and settling there Now this clause of the Prophet Joel in this third chapter was never yet fulfilled since the first Assyrio-Chaldean captivity of Israel or Iudah For the Prophet gives us a sign that this is to be done after the Jewes are sold to the Grecians The Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in its first originall sence and use signifies to yeeld up and deliver up And so the Septuagint renders it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which most commonly as the composition of the word requires signifies to yeeld up or to deliver up into another mans jurisdiction and power And this transmitting of the Jews from their Native Country to Graecia seems to be charged upon several Nations who handed them from one to another vers 2 3 4 5. But the Greeks came not to any considerable repute power and jurisdiction till above two hundred years after the beginning of the Second viz. The Medo-Persian Monarchy Since which time the Jews were never delivered according to the character of the Text viz. By a destruction of their enemies and to such an effect and degrees as that no stranger should pass through Jerusalem any more verse 12 13 14 15 16 17. For we know the contrary by History Experience and sight of our own eyes in our travells § 4 The opening of this destruction of the Jews enemies at their deliverance and the collation of their happy condition when delivered will yet further demonstrate that this prophesie of Joel in this third Chapter is not yet in the main to this very day fulfilled ¶ 1. The destruction of their enemy must be very formidable v. 14 15 16 19. Multitudes multitudes in the valley of decision for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision the Sun and the Moon shall be darkned and the Stars shall withdraw their shining The Lord also shall roar out of Zion and utter his voice from Jerusalem and the Heavens and the Earth shall shake Egypt shall be a desolation and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness c. ¶ 2. On the otherside the happy condition of the Jews shall be as glorious as their enemies destruction shall be miserable which is interchangably enterwoven within the same verses the better to minde us that they both concur to the same time and in that method that the ruines of the enemy is the rise of the Jews Vers 16. But the Lord will be the hope of his people and the strength of the children of ISRAEL V. 17. So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion my holy Mountain then shall Jerusalem be HOLY and there SHALL NO STRANGERS PASS THROUGH HER ANY MORE V. 18. And it shall come to pass in that day that the Mountains shall drop down new Wine and the Hills shall flow with milk c. V. 20. Judah shall dwell FOR EVER and Jerusalem from GENERATION to GENERATION You see here in this Chapter a corporal destruction of all the Nations that irreconcileably oppose the Jews You see the happy condition of the Jews following thereupon to be expresly both temporal and spiritual and you see it set forth with most ample extension both for latitude and length Need I now upon things so plain spend six sentences to declare this was never yet fulfilled to the Jews since their first captivity in Babylon to this day Surely if the succeeding Monarchy punished the preceding they did withal keep the Jews under their subjection and so from Assyrians to Medes and Persians from them to the Grecians and thence to the Romans and so to the Saracens and Turks to this time the Jews have been more or less under forreign power and not a free people much less so happy or their enemies so miserable as hath been described Lastly If we mark some references of this third of Joel made § 5 by the Apostles themselves in the New Testament we shall beyond all dispute of them that believe the New Testament clear it That the prophesies of this Chapter are not yet fulfilled ¶ 1. Consider how exactly the thirteenth verse c. of this Chapter of Ioel is repeated and applied Rev. 14.15 16 17 18 19 20. to the ruine of Antichrist Put ye in saith Ioel in this third Chapter v. 13. the sickle for the Harvest is ripe come get you down for the press is full the fats overflow for their wickedness is great And then follows expresly the destruction of the enemies of the Jews as we before repeated Sutably Saint Iohn saith in the said place of the Revelation An Angel came out of the Temple crying with a loud voice to him that sate on the cloud thrust in thy sickle and reap for the time is come for thee to reap for the Harvest of the Earth is ripe And he that sate on the cloud thrust in his sickle on the Earth and the Earth was reaped And another Angel came out of the Temple which is in Heaven he also having a sharp sickle And another Angel came out from the Altar which had power over fire and cryed with a loud voice Cry to him that had the sharp sickle saying Thrust in thy sickle and gather the clusters of the Vine of the Earth for her grapes are fully ripe And the Angel thrust in his sickle into the Earth and gathered the Vine of the Earth and cast it into the great Wine-press of the wrath of God and the Wine-press was troden without the City and blood came out of the Wine-press even unto to the horse-bridles by the space
of one thousand six hundred furlongs In which parallel of Iohn and Ioel you see how accurately Iohn extends that of Ioel to the ruine of the Antichristian enemy and the raising of the Christian Church consisting of Iews and Gentiles yet to come as it will easily appear to him that will carefully read this fourteenth Chapter of the Revelation ¶ 2. Compare this prophesie of Ioel touching the valley of Iehoshaphat and Gods judging there with Isa 66.24 Matth. 5.22 Rev. 16.16 It seems by that place of Isaiah that there shall be a slaughter of the enemy of the Church at his great fall in a more conspicuous place above others perhaps not the remotest from Ierusalem whither the Church made up of Jews and Gentiles shall to keep Isaiah his words go forth and look upn the carcases of the men that had transgressed against God for which they had been slain For saith Isaiah their worm shall not die neither shal their fire be quenched and they shall be an abhoring to all flesh Upon which words our new Annotations say well that apparent enough it is that the execution of Gods wrath on the wicked either on the Mountaines near unto Jerusalem as some of the Rabbins affirme or in the valley of Jehosaphat according to Joel 3. or in Tophet in the vale of Gehinnom Isa 30.33 Ierem. 7.31.33 is here described by a resemblance taken from dead bodies that after great slaughter made of them lie a long time above ground unburyed either as deemed unworthy to be at all interred or because in regard of the multitude of them it cannot suddenly be effected The WORM hath reference to such Vermine as is wont to breed in and feed on dead corpses on such carcasses especially as lie so long above ground until they rot and become as dung The FIRE to the burning of such bodies not sit now to be stirred or removed but to be consumed by fire in the place where they lie And because the putrifying carcasses long time crawle with worms and magots ere the flesh be consumed and it would be a long time of burning to consume the remainder with fire therefore it is said their worm never dyes and their fire is never quenched but a long time are an abhorring to all flesh viz. that shall behold them The Lord Christ as St. Matthew chap. 5.22 gives it us speaks of such a place of common execution of malefactors Whosoever shall say to his brother thou foole shall be in danger of hell fire 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 here as Broughton learnedly disputes doth not of it selfe signifie Hell And I adde that it cannot possibly signifie here an eternall punishment in the Hell of the damned for then it would follow from this Text that some sins are veniall and only some are mortall or damnable because our Saviour saith he that is ANGRY with his brother without a cause shall he in danger of the JUDGEMENT and whosoever shall say to his brother RACHA shall be in danger of the COUNCIL and he only that shall say THOU FOOLE shall be in danger of HELL FIRE But this distinction is crosse to all the Scripture and therefore eternall hell fire or the place of the damned cannot be here meant But to keep to the order and nature of the Greeke words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is the Gehinnom of fire that is the valley of Hinnom or the valley of the son of Hinnom taking its name from the first possessor Of the name and situation of this place see Iosh 15.8 where it is described to be in the borders of the lot of the Tribe of Judah and therefore not far from Ierusalem even near the East-gate Ier. 19.2 And the sacred history tels us further in the 2 Kings 23.10 and 2 Chron. chap. 28. v. 3. and chap. 33. ver 6. Ier. 32.35 That in this valley of Hinnom was Tophet And that there they burnt their children in the fire as a sacrifice to the Idoll Moloch after the manner of the Heathens Tophet signifies a drum because they beat a drum to drown the noise of the cry of their children when they were cast into the fire And further in Ier. 7.33 we have it set forth as a place of the execution of Gods vengeances Behold the daies come saith the Lord that it shall be no more called TOPHET nor the VALLEY OF THE SON OF HINNOM butthe VALLEY OF SLAUGHTER For they shall burie in Tophet till there be no place Rabby David Kimchi on Psal 27. v. 13. on these words The land of the living saith thus Even as the judgement of the wicked is called GEHENNA which was a valley near Jerusalem whereinto they did cast forth every uncleannesse and dead carkases and there the fire did perpetually burn them even into bones c. And unto this saith Beza will some have it that Christ alludes in that Matth. 5.22 afore quoted This name Geennua or Gehenna is a compound Hebrew word compounded of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Gi which signifies a valley and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Hinnom the name of the ancient possessor of the place as we touched afore and suitably as Tremelius notes and pronounceth the Syriacke writes and speakes it Gihanna Doubtlesse as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 JUDGEMENT signified a lesser civill punishment viz. that inflicted by the JUDGES and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the COUNCIL signified a greater viz. that which the SANHEDRIM or great Council inflicted so this Gehinnom of fire must signifie the greatest Not but that our Saviour by way of parallel may intend and leaves the learned Pharisees so to apply it that if men did thus gradually punish such faults according to their degrees how much more will the most righteous holy God But this by the way Our businesse now is to explain by way of parallel the meaning of this third of Ioel touching the corporall ruining of the Churches enemies more especially in some such eminent place as the valley of Iehosaphat yet to come For which purpose we must touch one place more afore quoted viz. Rev. 16.12 c. And the sixt Angel poured out his viall upon the great river Euphrates and the waters thereof were dryed up that the way of the Kings of the East might be prepared And I saw three unclean spirits like Frogs come out of the mouth of the Dragon and out of the mouth of the Beast and out of the mouth of the false Prophet For they are the spirits of devils working miracles which goe forth unto the KINGS OF THE EARTH and of he WHOLE WORLD to gather them to the battle of that great day of God Almighty Behold I come as a theefe in the night c. And he gathered them into a place called in the Hebrew tongue ARMAGEDDON This touching the River Euphrates and the Kings of the Earth would be a little explained and then wee shall the better understand this Armageddon and the suitablenesse of it to our purpose The sixt
holinesse and the HOUSE OF JACOB shal possess their possessions And the HOUSE OF JACOB shall be a fire and the house of JOSEPH a flame and the house of Esau for stubble and they shall kindle in them and devoure them And they of the South shall possesse the mount of Esau and they of the plaine the Philistims and they shall possess the fields of Ephraim and the fields of SAMARIA and Benjamin shall possess Gilead And the Captivity of this Host of the children of ISRAEL shall possess that of the Canaanites even unto Zarephath and the captivity of JERUSALEM which is in Sepharad shall possess the Cities of the South And Saviours shall come upon mount Zion to judge the mount of Esau and the Kingdomes shall be the Lords In which words we have such a character of the future happy state of the Church on earth harmoniously and beautifully wreathed and inter-woven of Jewes and Gentiles converted unto Christ as yet never was but still lies upon the engagement of Gods infallible truth to be fulfilled For on the Gentiles part here expressed under so many names they are not all to be destroyed but possessed with a mixed cohabitation of Jews according to the aforesaid place of Amos with which is our present collation this of Obadiah that there shall bee a REMNANT of Edom and a REMNANT for so the grammer of the word carries it of all the Heathen among whom and by whom the name of God shall be called upon And on the Jewes part both the Kingdome of Judah now as Judah and Benjamin are called 1 King 11.13 and ch 12.20 because of the mixture of their territories as the Geneva notes well give the reason and also the Kingdome of Israel must bee here understood as sharers in the spirituall salvation and outward happinesse here so laboriously inculcated else why doth the Prophet use one while such comprehensions in words as the house of Jacob and that twise and the house of Joseph Another while such distinctions and discriminations in terms as the captivity of the host of the CHILDREN OF ISRAEL and the captivity of JERUSALEM plainly enough setting forth the two Tribes the ten Tribes and generally the learned agree that both are here understood though severally they fix the footing of their interpretations Oecolampadius saith on ver 20. Duplices facit captivitates c. that is the Prophet makes two captivities For he gives to Israel the space towards the North and then he gives to them that were of Jerusalem that is to the Tribe of Judah and Benjamin that tract which is towards Egypt Mercer hath it over and over that in the 19. verse of this Obadiah is touched the State of Judah and in the 20 verse the State of Israel Hierom saith the house of Jacob signifies Judah and the house of Joseph the ten Tribes And Ephraim the son of Joseph out of which Tribe was the Regality of Samaria intimates that the two Kingdoms were to be again coupled or re-united for the devastation of the Edomites that is as t is generally agreed among the learned both Jewes and Christians those that are incorrigible Antichristian enemies of the Kingdom of the Lord Jesus And then that which is added in the close as the corenis of this glorious internal and externall salvation of all these to be saved that Saviours in the plurall shall come upon mount Zion to judge the enemies and the Kingdome shall be the Lords is of that strength and torrent that it bears downe afore it all limitations of the meaning to their return from Babylon or the incarnation of THE SAVIOUR CHRIST whose then was the Kingdome in kind no otherwise then it was formerly when he ruled the world by his power and his Church by his Word and Spirit whereas this close THE Kingdome shall be the Lords must intend that it shall be answerable to the description from the seventeenth verse downward viz. a most holy Kingdome and withall a most visible outwardly large and glorious Kingdome and that on earth all corporall incurable Antichristian enemies sensibly falling before it Which is not only my opinion and sence of these words Mercer presents to us Ex Lyr. commenting on this Prophet thus much Odium Esau in Jacob in semine perseveravit c. that is the hatred of Esau against Iacob continued in the very seed therefore the overthrow of them is foretold Isa 21.34 Ier. 49. Ezek. 35. Amos 1. Mal. 1. This Prophet doth excellently handle and is wholly in this That as Christ is the Son of Abraham and of Israel and that after the flesh and therefore all indued with the spirit are his Brethren and belong to the seed of Abraham and of Israel so all false brethren that is ANTICHRISTS and Hypocrites belong to the seed of Esau Unto these agrees and suites whatsoever thou here readest against the Edomites Obadiahs Prophecy is smal in bulk great in sence comprehending many things in a few words He prophesieth in the behalfe of Israel against Edom prophesying the subversion of the Edomites and the GLORY of the true Israel the Church of Christ and that he alone shall reigne He saith that on mount Sion shall be deliverance and salvation which are more perfectly fulfilled according to the letter in the Church collected of all the faithfull then in mount Zion because the state of mount Zion continued but for a time but the Church abides for ever which shall be wee are confident more eminently famous in the very land of Israel when Israel in the LAST TIME SHAL RECEIVE CHRIST And their possessing their possessions or that they shall possess those that possessed them as he renders it shall he saith come to passe with illustrious glory after the LAST CONVERSION OF ISRAEL It is some-how fulfilled daily in the Elect overcoming their enemies with invincible patience But it is to be fulfilled more sublimely and gloriously in the judgement when the wicked shal openly before all be judged of the Elect. In speciall the house of Joseph is named albeit it is contained under the house of Iacob least for their worshipping of Calves and their long captivity it should be deemed as rejected Ioseph and Ephraim of which Tribe was Ieroboam are the ten Tribes whose captivity say the Hebrewes is not yet discharged But as it is said in the end of the Prophet Amos in the LAST TIME ISRAEL SHALL BE CONVERTED There are they which by Esau understand the Gentiles and by Israel the faithfull whom I contradict not There were of the Tribe of Iudah and Benjamin among the Apostles But who of the Tribe of Ephraim and Ioseph were among them is uncertaine But they on whom this Prophesie must be fulfilled must be of all Israel converted and the house of Iacob shall be a fire Who can deny this yet to bee fulfilled hereafter Apparently it shall be fulfilled when the world shall be judged For t is impossible that this should be fulfilled seeing as
it is here said For the Lord hath spoken it ZAREPHA which others write Sarephta and SEPARAD R. Sel. interprets to bee France and Spaine But out of all such speeches as the Prophet here useth this may safely be collected that because those Nations are here named which most infested the Israelites namely the Canaanites Philistims and Edomites that all enemies of the faithfull are here to be understood which haply is to be fulfilled according to the letter ISRAEL being converted in the last times so that ALL ISRAEL being converted in ALL LANDS they all are to be accounted for the Inheritance of Israel Thus far he Oecolampadius likewise In Monte Sion erit evasio id est salus c. That is on mount Sion shall be deliverance that is salvation or safety T is certain the Apostles by the sending of the spirit upon mount Sion and others conjoyned to the Church were delivered by Christ at his first coming and so we beleeve that at this day every Congregation of the faithfull is delivered But we expect a more ample felicity when the Lord shal come again c. In the last times we expect perfecter sanctity and these of the house of Jacob shall be Lords of those who before oppressed them We find not in History that many of the Jews did bear rule in those Countries save only that the Maccabees seized upon certaine Towns BUT THOSE THINGS DO NOT SEEM TO SATISFIE THE PROPHETICAL MAJESTIE * Majestati ropheticae In the last times that is when Christ shall come we shall see the Apostles and those that have imitated them to be Iudges of the whole Earth albeit at this day the Elect are divers waies afflicted by the Antichristian party yet it shall come to passe that they shall be LORDS OVER OTHERS c. I am not ignorant that some agreeing with the Jewes doe thinke that before the day of Christ this KINGDOM SHALL BE ON EARTH Christ did not tell his Disciples this therefore let not us be solicitous of this thing No farther shone the the dimme light of Oecolampadius touching this truth in those ancient darker times Yet hear him presently almost in the next words how hee doth in the generall grant this truth as a truth worthy to be known on those words And the house of Jacob shall be a fire c. he saith By the people of Esau we saith Oecolampadius understand the enemies of the truth who shall be before it as stubble to the fire which began in the preaching of the Apostles overthrowing idolatry c. But in the day of judgement when hereafter they shall with Christ pronounce sentence and condemne them they shall perish by the word of God c. However the Jewes expound it either of times afore or after the returne from Bâ—hell yet still they have been adversaries all eit they speak of an HAPPY AGE FOR A THOUSAND YEARS Some doe thinke that the just or righteous Jewes shall rise and dwell upon the earth but I leave that as uncertaine But MOST CERTAINE IT IS that this Prophet doth promise to the people of God in these words A MOST PERFECT FELICITY Among the Edomites shall be no felicity c. In these verses therefore he teacheth that the KINGDOME OF CHRIST SHAL BE MOST AMPLE AND LARGE and not concluded in so strait a corner as formerly c. And upon the twentieth and one and twentieth ver Oecolampadius concludes thus The Jews say that Canaan signifies all Germanie unto France and that Sepharat signifies Spaine which things are uncertaine by this description of places But certainly ALL ISRAEL shall be saved ' All which things I plainly referre to the last day Now compare Oecolampadius with Oecolampadius and see whether he doth not in the generall grant the point in hand and grant it as a thing certaine and to be hoped for Thus for the parallel with Obadiah § 6 The next thing to be considered on this place of Amos now under our hands is the time when this must bee mainly fulfilled viz. At that day saith our Prophet ver 11. that is at some notable day namely when as in ver 9. God hath sifted the house of ISRAEL in all Nations like as corne is sifted with a sieve yet not the least graine fals on the earth that is the wheat of converted Israel for the generall shall be gathered from the chaffe of the obstinate in all nations But alas Judah and Israel all of them for the generality are yet in their chaffe of non-conversion and in the straw of all Nations § 7 The last thing to be considered on this nineth of Amos is the manner of their state when delivered viz. All ruines must bere-built and all breaches closed up they must call upon God as God may own them for callers upon his name There must be as all spirituall so all outward prosperity for the sanctified use of the Church in a goodly succession of seasons for that end expressed under the notions of the Plowmans overtaking the reaper the mountaines dropping sweet wine c. All their injoyments must be perpetuated so as they must never bee pulled up out of their own Land § 8 Now laying all particulars of this Text together let all the men and bookes in the world shew us when Judah and Israel were ever thus delivered since their captivity and put into this spirituall and temporall happy condition in a religious conjunction with the Gentiles to the worlds end and this must be before the ultimate generall Judgement as the circumstances of the place importune and necessitate us to expect Therefore this Prophesie of Amos is yet to be fulfilled Thus of Amos. SECT XLIII § 1 NExt we come to the Prophet MICAH wherein we shall consider onely one place viz. chap. 4. throughout Of which note this in generall 1. That this prophesie of Michaiah is as well concerning Samaria the Metropolis of the ten Tribes as concerning Jerusalem the metropolis of the two Tribes chap. 1. ver 1. Secondly That this place was urged for our opinion before Jeroms time which was three hundred ninety yeares after Christ which Jerom confesseth in these words in Micheam 4. Sciendum quoque c. i.e. we must know saith he that this Chapter also and that like it out of Isaiah meaning Chap. 2. Ver. 2. c. is referred by the Jewes and the heires of their mistake to the Kingdom of Christ and his Saints for a thousand years Thus Jerom for whose jircking our opinion you shall see him anon jirck himself § 2 For particulars note in the first place the time of fulfilling this prophesie that we here alleadge Our last English Translation saith In the last daies The Hebrew speaks higher 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which words differing in Gender and Number and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 properly signifying last cannot be closely construed to the Grammer of them but thus In the last of daies And so also Jerom renders it in
Sect and was of any Tribe as the Jewes themselves intimate There were two sorts â— Laic 1. Such as taught to write which we call Scribes or Writing Masters 2 Such as drew Deeds and Writings of bargaines and sale which we call Sâ—riveners To both these Psal 45. ver 1. alludes Then thirdly out of these that were most expert there was 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Kings Scribes which we call Secretaries 2 King 12 10. and chap. 22. ver 1. And 2 Sam. 20.25.4 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Scribes of the people which were much like to our Clerkes of Assizes for these Scribes were to attend the publicke Courts and Consistories 1 Maccab. 5.42 The second sort of Scribes were Clericks learned men called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is Scribes of the Law Ezra 7.6 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Lawyers Matth. 22.35 Luk. 7.30 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Doctors or Teachers of the Law Luk 5.17 Elias must first come he answers Elias truly shall first come and restore all things but I say unto you that Elias is come already and THEY the Iewes led by those Scribes knew him not but have done unto him whatsoever they listed Likewise shall also the Son of Man suffer of THEM Then the Disciples understood that he spake to them of John Baptist And by Christs speech that generation in which he was borne should bee called to an account for all the blood of the Saints shed by the Jewes persecution from Abel down to the Apostles which must needs include the murther of Iohn Baptist Matth. 23.35 Luk. 11.51 And further the sacred Text doth intimate that these Herodians had held some dangerous leaven of doctrine though t is not there expressed Mar. 8.15 The Assideans were of two sorts the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tsadikim and the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chasidim The Isadikim kept close to the letter of the Scriptures and studyed that The Chasidim commonly translated Assidael Assideans studyed how to adde to the Scriptures The Tsadikim conformed outwardly at least to what the law required But the Chasidim would be holy above the Law D. Kimch Psal 103.17 Pirke Aboth cap. 5. The Essenes first Of the Essenes Held many of the Pythagoreans evill opinions as a communitie of goods Aul. Gel. l. 1. c. 10. Laert. in Pythag. Ioseph l. 18. c. 2. They allowed not lawfull pleasures Iustin l. 20. Ioseph de bello l. 2. c. 12. they ascribed all things to fate and destiny Suid. Ioseph Antiqu. l. 13. c. 9.2 They worshipped towards the sun rising Philo. Ioseph 3. bound themselves by oath to preserve the names of Angels the phrase implying a kind of worshipping of Angels Ioseph de bel l. 2. c. 12. c. The Gaulonites Of the Gaulonites who had their name from one Iudas sometimes called Iudas Gaulonites sometime Iudas Galilaeus Ios Antiq. l. 18. c. 1 2. mentioned Act. 5.37 Held first That tribute was not to be paid to Princes as being a badge of servitude Secondly that they ought to call none Lord but the Lord of Lords the God of Heaven Thirdly They forbad sacrifices to bee offered for the welfare of the Roman Empire and Emperour which is conceived to be the reason why Pilat mingled their blood with their sacrifices Luk. 13.1 Oecumen in Act. 5.37 Theophyl in Luk. 13.1 For Pilat was not over the Nation or province of the Galileans and therefore it must be this Sect that Pilat so punished And thus you have had an account of the Iewes corrupting of Religion in Christs time as Iewish And as for Christian religion they did for the generality refuse both it and him Ioh. 1.11 He came unto his own and his own received him not And so they did after in the Apostles ministrations rejecting their Doctrine and persecuting their persons Act. 13. Act. 4. and so saith St. Paul Rom. 11. they are to continue in blindnesse till the fulnesse of the Gentiles shal be come in that then ALL ISRAEL may be saved ¶ 3. For the Jewes victory prophesied in this fourth of Micha it is set forth in the eighth verse c. to the end of the chapter v. 8. And thou O Tower of the flock the strong hold of the daughter of ZION unto thee shall it come even the FIRST DOMINION the Kingdome shall come to the daughter of Jerusalem That is thou must have a flourishing estate at least as glorious as at first in David and Solomons time ver 10. Thou shalt be delivered from Babylon there the Lord shall redeem thee from the hand of thine enemies They shall not onely be dèlivered as by a common providènce but shall be redeemed as relating to the fruit of a Saviour Luk. 3. ver 30 31 32. and v. 38. Ver. 13. Arise and thresh O daughter of Zion for I will make thine horne Iron and I wil make thine hoofs brasse and thou shalt beat in peeces MANY PEOPLES And I will consecrate their gaine unto the Lord and their substance to the Lord of the earth So that the Jewes must not onely be delivered from their enemies but must be the destroyers of their enemies that continue enemies and that not of a few but of many peoples Now when ever had the Jewes since their first captivity such prosperity such victory such a Kingdom and such a conquest Ten Tribes for two are still by the Jewes confession in captivity And the two Tribes ever since their first return have been notwithstanding under the power of one Monarch or another by an immediate and concatenaâ—ed succession 1. The Persian 2 The Grecian 3. The Roman 4. The Saracen 5. The Turke So that this Scripture is not yet come to passe and cannot be deferred to the ultimate general resurrection as being inconsistent with that time in most of the branches Therefore it is yet to bee fulfilled afore that time Thus of Micha SECT XLIV Next we come to the Prophet Zephany where we shall insist but upon one place and that is an Eminent one viz. chap. 3. ver 9 c. To the end of the Chapter § 1 IN this place three things are prophesied which orderly laid together doe compleatly make up the maine of our point that yet before the ultimate judgement at the universall resurrection there shall be a most glorious visible Church on earth beautifully woven and integrated of Iewes and Gentiles 1 Here is prophesied the RESTITUTION of the Iewes both in a way of conversion unto God and of reversion into their owne Country unto a glorious Church State 2 The VOCATION of the Gentiles both unto an effectual conversion unto God and a most harmonious union with the rest of the Church 3 The SUBVERSION of the enemies of the Jewes and of the Church of Christ § 2 The first the RESTITUTION of the Iewes as to the first part thereof viz. their conversion wee have it in the 10 11 12 and 13 verses Ver. 10. From beyond the river of Ethiopia
And almost all things are by the law purged with blood and without shedding of blood no remission It was necessary therefore that the patterns of things in the Heavens should be purified with these but the HEAVENLY THINGS THEMSELVES with BETTER SACRIFICES then THESE Heb. 13.19 But to doe good and to communicate forget not for with such SACRIFICES God is well pleased Phil. 2.17 If I be offered upon the SACRIFICE and service of your faith I joy Rev. 8.3 And another Angel came and stood at the ALTAR having a golden CENSER and there was given to him much INCENSE that hee should OFFER IT with the prayers of all Saints upon the golden ALTAR which was before the Throne Thus you see how the tenth verse sets forth the conversion of the Iews which is further amplified in the eleventh verse thus In that day shalt thou not be ashamed for all thy doings wherein thou hast transgressed against me For then will I take away out of the midst of thee them that rejoyce in thy pride and thou shalt be no more haughty because of my holy mount Which is also most evidently spoken of the Jews and their conversion in that the Lord promiseth to take away their sins and in particular their pride of the Temple of which they had been formerly very sinfully proud Jer. 7.4 and that swelling was not quite down in our Saviours time Mat. 24.1 And therefore then this text was not fulfilled But when their sins shall be taken away then the judgement viz. their shame shall be taken away neither shall they be only negatively good but also positively I will saith the next verse leave in the midst of thee an afflicted and poore people and they shall trust in the name of the Lord. This last clause of trusting in the name of the Lord containes the very life and power of godlinesse As for the first clause whoever can well weigh the Hebrew * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and will duly consider the precedent verse and propheticall purpose of this place touching the conversion of the Jewes cannot but confesse that these words may as well and in some respect better be rendered I will cause to remaine in thee a people that is humble and meeke or poore in spirit as Arias the Septuagint and the Syriack and Arabick render it this and the rest of this verse aptly answers and stands over against as a contrary to their pride in the former verse and is the ready way to that which followes in the thirteenth verse The remnant of Israel that is all the converted as well of the ten Tribes as of the two shall not doe iniquity nor speake lyes nor shall a deceitfull tongue be found in their mouth for they shall feed and lye downe and none shall make them afraid That is they shall there abide because there shall be no danger and they shall be so holy because they shall have grace within and no temptation from without For the second part of the Jewes restitution namely their reversion into their owne Country in a glorious Church-state wee have it in the sixteen seventeen eighteen and twentieth verses thus ver 16. In that day it shall be said to Jerusalem feare thou not and to Zion let not thy hands be slack or faint Ver. 17. The Lord thy God in the midst of thee is mighty he will save he will rejoyce over thee with joy he will REST IN HIS LOVE an high and glorious expression he will joy over thee with singing Ver. 18. I will GATHER them that are sorrowfull for THE SOLEMNE ASSEMBLY who are of thee to whom the reproach of it was a burthen Ver. 20. At that time I will BRING YOV AGAINE even in the time that I GATHER YOV For I will make you a name and apraise among all people of the earth when I TVRNE BACKE YOVR CAPTIVITY before your eyes saith the Lord. In which words you have the expression of their reversion into their owne Country in capitall letters as well in sence as writing And the Lords being amidst them more then in his generall presence over the earth and his rejoycing over them with joy yea with great joy as in singing and resting in his LOVE and gathering them into the solemne assembly and to make them a name and a praise among all people of the earth can signifie no lesse then a glorious visible Church-state making them a LOVE or SPOVSE unto their LORD CHRIST For the second generall head the vocation of the Gentiles both unto an effectuall conversion unto God and a most harmonious union with the rest of the Church we have it all and in full in verse the ninth For then will I turne to the people a pure Language that they may call upon the name of the Lord to serve him with one consent Close to the Hebrew thus I will convert in the peoples a pure lip that they may call upon the name of the Lord to serve him with one shoulder I stand not to dispute it from terme to terme because they that know well the Originall and well minde the sence of the place will ease me of that labour * Junius Mutab◠in populis labium ut purum sit quo invocent omnes nomen Jehova colendo cum humero uno Hieron old Latin Reddam populis labium electum ut invocent omnes nomen Domini serviant ei humero une The Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. I will so convert in all nations one choyse speech that all may pray in the name of the Lord that they may serve him with one shoulder The Syriack Then will I restore unto the Gentiles an elect or choyse lippe that all may call upon the name of the Lord and worship him in an equall yoke but rather I will speake a word to the opening It is expresse that the Peoples Nations or Gentiles are here spoken of who upon their conversion should be exempted from the ruine on Nations in the eighth verse and should returne with the dispersed Jewes in the tenth verse and their prophane lips should be purified and their Idolatrous and blasphemous words before their false gods should be turned into holy prayers to Jehovah and they should serve him not only with one consent of minde but with one way of practise as when many lift as with one shoulder to move a thing the same way or draw equally in the same yokes fastened to the same chaine or traces § 5 The third generall the destruction of the enemies of the Church and so of the Jewes converted you have in the fourteenth fifteenth and nineteenth verses very fully You your selves who heed what you read doe perceive these three heads interchangeably interwoven to signifie that the whole of all this visible glory comes together Vers 14. Sing O Daughter of ZION shout O ISRAEL be glad and rejoyce with all thy heart O daughter of JERUSALEM Vers 15. The Lord hath
did at first when he overthrew Amalech and Og c. as the Iews approached near Canaan Surely we have had a sad account to the contrary in the very next preceding Section § 4. in a short but full Chronology from Zecharie to this very day And a meer spirituall notion will not help us out seeing the Text expounds it selfe That the Lord will goe out and fight against the Nations that spoile Jerusalem how or in what manner As he fought at first when the Iewes approached Canaan or to keep to our common translation as when he fought in the day of battle Which exposition needed not to be added if a spirituall sence had been mainly intended Which if it were yet that is not to this day fulfilled that the enemies of Jerusalem are either converted by grace or confounded in hell § 3 T is true that as not any Prophesie hardly so nor is this likely without some allegory But to convert all into a spirituall sence seemes to me impossible without selfe-contradiction or contradicting the Text. For how can we presume upon a spirituall sence when it is said ver 4. HIS FEET shal stand upon the MOUNT of Olives which is before Jerusalem on the East c. which shall cleave in the midst And ver 5. Yee shall flee to the VALLEY OF THE MOUNTAINS which shall reach to Azal c. as yee fled from the EARTHQUAKE in the daies of Uzziah and the Lord shall come and ALL HIS SAINTS with him Or how can that be taken in a spirituall sence in ver 7. That there shall be a distinct ONE day and knowne to the Lord that shall not be day nor night but the evening shall be light Surely if the light of the time of the Gospell must bemeant as some will it is no distinct time nor one measured day of a round number of years be it of few or many for it hath been now above one thousand six hundred and twenty years since the first preaching of Christ continued to this day which hath been as well known to us as to the Lord And how should that in ver 9. be comelily and compleatly cloathed and covered with a meer spirituall notion That the Lord SHALL be King OVER ALL the earth And at THAT day he must be the one and onely Lord and his name one For the Lord from the beginning hath been King of power and King of grace secretly ordering and sanctifying whom and wheresoever he listed over the face of the earth Therefore this same shal must import his yet future visible Monarchy before which all must so fall down that they cast away all their Idols seeming Deities and different formes of worship and adore him alone with one uniforme way of worship according to his will which thing to this day is desired being never yet injoyed And as difficult it is if not impossible with cleare reason to fasten a spirituall sence upon the rest of the chapter That all the Land shall be turned or compassed AS A plaine pervious and profitable for habitation FROM GEBA TO RIMMON SOUTH OF JERUSALEM So that it shall be lifted up or exalted in the opinion of men and inhabited in her place FROM BENJAMINS GATE unto the place of the FIRST GATE unto the CORNER GATE and from the Tower of HANANIEL unto the KINGS WINE PRESSES And men shall dwel in it and there shall be NO MORE utter destruction but Jerusalem shal be SAFELY inhabited And this shall be the plague wherewith the Lord will smite all the people that fight against Jerusalem THEIR FLESH SHALL CONSUME AWAY WHILE THEY STAND UPON THEIR FEET and their EYES SHALL CONSUME AWAY IN THEIR HOLES c. And so shall be the plague of the HORSE of the MULE of the CAMEL of the ASSE and of all the BEASTS that shall be in these Tents as THIS PLAGUE â—oo wonderfull and industrious a circumstantiating of all places plague things c. to signifie meer spirituals § 4 Men may phantasie to themselves a satisfaction that spirituals are here meant because of the next verse that the residue of the Nations that came up against Ierusalem that is left shall go up from year to year to worship the Lord to keep the feast of Tabernacles But we did before give a rule and proved it that even in the Old Testament as wel as in the New the most Gospel Truths are sometimes cloathed with Jewish language and Leviticall phrases * Lib. 3. Cha. 2. Sect 44. §. 2. P. 330. See also Just Martyrs excellent Note in this third Book Chap. 3. Sect. 2. S. 3. and P. 2. Nor indeed is there any Gospell expression scarcely in all the New Testament that is not dressed forth with one or more Tropes and figures As Come to me all yee that are weary and heavy laden c. Matth. 11. And a bruised reed he shall not breake c. Matth. 12. Christ being no Porter nor Christians reeds in a literall sence Beside for the words of Zecharie themselves there is no more exprest but goe up and once a year and at the feast of Tabernacles as to signifie our deliverance from the Egypt of the world as Israel going out of Topal Egypt first pitched in Succoth that is Boothes And in memorial of that deliverance praised God yearly in the feast of Boothes As we hereafter shall often congratulate our LORD with HALELUJAHS for our deliverance from the Egyptian world frequently prophesied in the Revelation To this day we pray in hope but then when the great restauration of the Church and Restitution of all things is come we shall praise with joy And whoever will not shall be plagued with temporall plagues ver 17 c. For all that then will exist in peace must be holinesse to the Lord they and their imjoyments ver 20. § 5 If all those aforesaid Material expressions and corporal circumstances will not awaken some men but they will fall asleep and dream pleasant dreams of all figurative meanings and will not sensibly see the visible glory here prophesied then I would entreat them to tell us their dreams from point to point upon every Verse when all Nations obstinately at enmity with the Jews were spiritually destroyed when the rest that came in to close with them did joyntly with them own the LORD as King over all the Earth in one way of worship when was Jerusalem safely inhabited as free from spiritual evils And how could the Horse and the Mule and the Camel and the Ass and all Beasts be spiritually plagued § 6 There is but one thing more that I will adde and that is this That those of the Learned that have gone about to squeeze out of this Text a spiritual meaning have I know not how been forced to let fall from them many considerable passages for a literal sence A Lapide applauds Jerom for his spiritual interpretation of this prophesie Quocirca verè S. Hieron hic ad vers 11.
haec inquit c. that is Therefore Jerom saith truly upon the eleventh verse the Jews and our Chiliasts dream these things shall be literally performed but let us interpret Jerusalem to be the Church which walking in the flesh yet doth not live according to the flesh whose freedom is in Heaven c. So he and yet within a very few lines after the same A Lapide hath these words Dico ergo c. that is I say therefore according to the Letter it is here signified that Jerusalem is to be taken by Antiochus Epiphanes and to be restored by the Maccabees Which how untruly it is asserted we have afore demonstrated onely we alleage this to instance how A Lapide falls from his spiritual to a litteral sence Mr. Calvin whiles mighty much for a spiritual sence of this prophesie hath to this effect on those words in the third verse The Lord shall go forth and fight against those Nations as he fought in the day of battel Zechary saith he tells the Jews Certamen saepe vobis fuit c. i.e. You have often fought with the strongest enemies they have been conquered and that when you have been by far unequal in number and power Seeing therefore the Lord hath so often and so many ways cast down your enemies why shall ye not hope for the same thing from him So he Our new Annotations have many touches of a spiritual sence but many also for a literal expresly or implicitly On the second verse this Here the last destruction of Jerusalem seems more plainly described then afore On the third verse this As when he fought in the day of battel that is not slightly but earnestly as he did for Gideon and divers others Judg. 7.22 On ver the fourth Gods coming to defend his Church shal be conspicuous and glorious On ver the fift the very Jews themselves shall be afraid at the presence of Gods appearance It were needlesly tedious to recite the many passages more they have to the same effect though they are very considerable to our purpose seeing the Reader knows where to finde them SECT LI. § 1 FRom Zechary we come to Malachi where we will consider but one place viz. Chapter 4. but that throughout verse 1. For behold the day cometh that shall burn as an oven and all the proud yea and all that do wickedly shall be stubble and the day that cometh shall burn them up saith the Lord of Hosts that it shall leave them neither root nor branch Vers 2. But unto you that fear my name shall the Sun of Righteousness arise with healing in his wings and ye shall go forth and grow up as calves of the stall Vers 3. And ye shall tread down the wicked for they shall be ashes under the soles of your feet in the day I shall do this saith the Lord of Hosts Vers 4. Remember the Law of Moses my servant which I commanded unto him in Horeb for all Israel with the statutes and judgements Vers 5. Behold I will send you Elijah the Prophet before the coming of the great and dreadful day of the Lord Vers 6. And be shall turn the heart of the Fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers least I come and smite the Earth with a curse § 2 There are so many famous Authors both Ancient and Modern that understand this Chapter of the second coming of Christ as you may see in the Margent * Paties Graeci Latini Cyril Theodor. Remig. Haymo Albert. Hugo Lyra. Chrysostom Euthym. Beda Anselm Hippol lib. de Consum sâ—culi Cyprâ— tract de Sina Sion Ephrem tract de Antich Prosper in dimidio temp c. 13. Tertul. lib. de anima c. 35. Justin Mart. Dialog contr Tryph. Nyssen lib. Testim contr Judaeos Augustinus 20. Civit. Dei Greg. 11. Moral Andreas Ambros Rupert Arethas in Apocalyp c. 11. Scholastici Thomas in Matth. 17. A Lapid in hoc cap. Malach. c. Translatores Septuag in Anâ—iq exempl Arab. quorum utrique vertunt Elijam Thesbiten Neoterici Oecolamp M. Mede D. Mayer Sibyllae Tum quoque caelesti curru devectus inibit Terras de caelo Thesbites signaque trina Ostendettoti mundo vitae pereuntis Omnes Judaei communi eorum sententia to the number if we should name all as amounts as Calvin confesseth to the major part that we shall go free from wonder novelty or singularity in holding the same Especially if the Reader will take notice that those that incline to the other interpretation of Christs first coming as Calvin our New Annotations c. do ingenuously confess that the things of this Chapter shall not be compleatly fulfilled till the second coming of Christ Jerom our great adversary though on this Chapter he inveighs against the Jews and Judaizers for their expecting Elijah to come in person yet as A Lapide also hath noted upon Matthew chap. 11. vers 14. chap. 17. ver 11. he clearly teacheth that Elijah must come in person which A Lapide endeavors to reconcile thus Because the Jews do yet expect the first coming of the Messiah and that Elijah in person shall be the fore-runner of that his first coming Therefore Jerom on this Text reproves them but Jerom yeelds that Elijah in person shall be the fore-runner of the Messiahs second coming ** Sunt qui propterea Johannem Heliam votari quod quodam modo IN SECUNDO SALVATORIS ADVENIU JUXTA MALACHIAM PRAECESSURUS EST HELIAS venturum Judicem nunciaturus Sic Iohannes in primo adventu fecerit ET UTERQUE FIT NUNCIUS VEL PRIMI ADVENTUS DOMINI VEL SECUNDI Ierom in Matth. 11.14 Ecce apparuit illis Moyses Elias cum co loquentes Scribis Pharisaeis tentantibus se de caelo signa poscentibus dare noluit sed pravam postulationem conâ—utavit responsione pindenti Hic vero ut Apostolorum AUGEAT FIDEM DAT SIGNUM DE CAELO Elia inde DESCENDENTE quo conscenderat Moyse ab inferis resurgente â—erom on Matth. 17.11 Thus Jerom. For my part I shall endeavor rather to demonstrate then as the manner of most is to dictate what I assert in the matters of this prophesie That this Chapter is of a state of the Church under the New Testament I need not labor much to prove Malachy being the last Prophet of the Old Testament And that V. 2. of this Chapter of the rising of the Sun c. is applyed to Christ John 1.9 Calling him the true light that lightneth every one c. As that V. 5. of this Chapter touching Elijah is applied by Christ Matth. 17.13 in part to signifie John Baptist his harbenger § 3 But the great question is How far into the times of the New Testament this prophesie doth run To answer which lay this for a ground work That the time to which this prophesie doth reach is called the GREAT AND DREADFUL DAY OF THE LORD And it is as
adequatly and answerably to that name described in the first verse to be a day that shall BURN AS AN OVEN which shall burn up the proud and wicked as stubble leaving them neither root nor branch Now observe ¶ 1. This cannot be extended to the ultimate day of judgment at the universal resurrection of all the wicked then cast into the lake of fire Revel 20.12 c. to the end of the Chapter for these Reasons First Because at this day if not according to the order of the prophesie after this dreadful and burning day in this first verse of the fourth of Malachi Christ the Sun of Righteousness shall arise with healing in his wings to them that fear his name and they shall GO FORTH and shall GROW UP AS CALVES OF THE STALL Ver. 2. Now this cannot be at that universal resurrection and ultimate judgement at which time Christ hath done healing hath finished his mediatorship and resigned up all his power to God the Father 1 Cor. 15.24 25 26 27 28. and the elect have done growing Secondly Because ver 5. an Elijah must be sent BEFORE THE COMING of the GREAT and DREADFUL day of the Lord who shall turn the heart of the fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers Which is not a work to be done at or near-upon that ultimate judgement but then he that is unjust let him be unjust still and he that is filthy let him be filthy still then is a time of destruction not of conversion Thirdly Because it is added in the last verse of Malachi That Elijah must come and shall turn the heart of the fathers to the children LEAST the Lord come and SMITE THE EARTH WITH A CURSE Now at the ultimate judgement there is no other smiting and cursing of the Earth but with that judgement it self it swallowing up all other evils And whether all parents or children be converted or not converted that ultimate judgement will be â—ure to come for the elects sake As concerning who this Elijahs is we shall dispute it particularly by and by ¶ 2. On the other side this prophesie cannot be cut so short as to terminate in Christs first coming For then was no dreadful day of the Lord so burning as a fiery oven to burn up the proud and wicked doers root and branch Christs coming is set forth in Matth. 21.5 according to Isa 62.11 Zech. 9.9 compared with Matth. 11.29 Phil. 2.7 c. in all meekness meanness lowliness and lowness And although there were wonderful days at his incarnation or birth Luke 2. Matth. 2. at his passion Matth. 27. his resurrection Matth. 28.1 2 3 4. at his ascension Acts 1. and at his mission of the Spirit Acts 2. Yet these were not THE great and dreadful day in the singular number they being many Or if we call them DREADFUL especially that of the resurrection and passion yet these days destroyed none For it is observable what Christ saith He came to heal or help not to destroy And therefore though he cursed the fig-tree to warn men yet with all his power and miracles he never killed or crippled any man being infinitely injured he revenged not but rather healed Malchus and his enemies wounds and maladies Yet see by this time how streightly and strongly we are butted and bounded with these two Paragraphs that we cannot fall so short as Christs first coming nor launch forth so far as to the universal resurrection of all the wicked at the ultimate judgement § 5 Now therefore to answer the question distinctly when this time is We assert That no time can shape and correspond to the circumstances and characters of this prophesie but the time abutting upon the beginning entrance or prelude of the whole day of judgement containing a thousand years as Peter speaks 2 Pet. 3. and bounded out exactly Revel 20. with two physical or corporal resurrections as we have before amply opened * Book 1. Cap. 2. Sect. 1 2 3 4. This we shall endeavor to demonstrate by these Arguments ¶ 1. That burning of all the proud and of all evil doers as stubble leaving them neither root nor branch Ver. 1. And that trampling them under the feet of the Saints as ashes Ver. 3. must rather be referred to such a time set down in the Scriptures as most aptly answer to those particulars then left at random to the imaginary times in mens brains of which we never read nor heard to agree to their character But these things do most harmoniously concord with the times of the last ruining of the Antichristian enemies of the Church before the raising of it to her great restauration and restitution of all things Rev. 18. wholly and Rev. 19.11 to the end of the chapter compared with Rev. 20.1 2 3 4 5. Therefore thither are these things to be referred I hope the very setting down of the words will convince the ingenuous Reader where after a large and particular description with all manner of corporal circumstances of the BURNING of Babylon Rev. 18. There follows alike iconism or corporal characterism of the ruine of the rest of the Churches enemies by fire and sword Chap. 19. I saw Heaven opened and behold a white horse and he that sate upon him was called Faithful and True in righteousness he doth judge and MAKE WAR His eyes were as a FLAME OF FIRE c. and he was clothed with a vesture DIPT IN BLOOD c. And the ARMIES which were in Heaven followed him upon white horses c. And out of his mouth goeth a sharp sword that with it he should smite the Nations And he shall RULE them with a ROD OF IRON and he treadeth the wine press of the fierceness of the WRATH OF ALMIGHTY GOD and he hath on his vesture and on his thigh a name written KING OF KINGS AND LORD OF LORDS And I saw another Angel standing in the Sun and he cryed with a loud voyce saying to all the FOWLS that flie in the midst of Heaven Come and gather your selves together unto the SUPPER of the Great God that ye may eat the FLESH of KINGS and the FLESH of CAPTAINS and the FLESH of MIGHTY MEN and the FLESH of HORSES and of them that sit on them and the FLESH of ALL MEN both free and bond both small and great And I saw the BEAST and the KINGS of the Earth and their ARMIES gathered together to make WAR against him that sate on the horse and against his ARMY And the BEAST was taken and with him the false Prophet c. these both were cast alive into the lake of fire burning with brimstone And the REMNANT were SLAIN and all the fouls were filled with their flesh And I saw an Angell come down from Heaven having the keyes of the bottomlesse pit and a great chain in his hand and he laid hold on the Dragon c. which is the Devil and bound him a THOUSAND YEARS And cast him
second coming as John Baptist was at his first For to the Jews alone is this Elias promised and not to the Gentiles and John Baptist wee know the Elias of his first coming preached to them alone It is well known that all the Fathers unlesse S. Hierome somewhat staggered were of this opinion and why we should so wholly reject it as we are wont to do I can see no sufficient reason For if the Fathers erred concerning the person and other circumstances of this Elias yet it follows not but the substance of their opinion might bee true As we know also they erred concerning the person quality and reign of Antichrist and yet for the substance the thing was true Our Saviour rejected not the tradition of the Scribes concerning the coming of this Elias when the Apostles objected it though it were mingled with some falshood but corrected it onely for they looked for Elias the Thisbite but our Saviour admits it only of Elias in Spirit not of Elias in person so yeelding it true for the substance though erring in circumstance so should we doe in the like case For hee that throwes away what he findes because t is foule and dirty may perchance sometimes cast away a Jewell or a peece of gold or silver so hee that wholly rejects an ancient Tenet because it hath some errour annexed to it may unawares cast away a Truth as this seemes to be of an Elias to be the Harbinger of Christs second comming And that for these reasons First Though the prophecy of Esaias The voice of one crying in the wildernesse prepare yee the way of the Lord make his paths straight alledged by all the four Evangelists and by John himselfe seems appliable onely to the first coming of Christ yet the other out of Malachi expresly quoted by St. Marke and by our Saviour Mat. 11 though elsewhere alluded unto seemes by Malachi himself to be applyed not onely to the first coming of Christ but also to his second coming to judgement For in his last chapter speaking of the coming of that day which shall burne like an oven wherein all the pround yea and all that doe wickedly shall be as stubble and it shall burne them up leaving neither root nor branch c. he addeth Behold saith the Lord I will send you Elijah the Prophet before the coming of that great and terrible day of the Lord and he shall turn or restore the heart of the fathers to their children and the heart of the children to their fathers lest I come and smite the earth with a curse If you wil not admit the day here described to be the day of judgement I know scarce any description of that day in the old Testament but we may elude For the phrase of turning or as I had rather translate it restoring as the LXX 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the heart of the fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers the meaning is that this Elias should bring the refractary and unbeleeving posterity of the Jewish nation to have the same heart and mind their holy Fathers and Progenitors had who feared God and beleeved his promises that so their Fathers might as it were rejoyce in them and own them for their children that is he should convert them to the faith of that Christ whom their Fathers hoped in and looked for lest continuing obstinate in their unbeliefe till the great day of Christs second coming they might perish among the rest of the enemies of his kingdome Therefore the Son of Syrach in his praise of Elias the This bite paraphraseth this place after this manner who wa st ordained saith he an 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or type for so it may bee turned for the times to come to pacifie the wrath of the Lords judgement before it breake forth into fury and to turne the heart of the Father unto the Son and to restore the tribes of Israel Eccles 48.10 which explication also the Angel warranteth Luke 1.17 in his message to Zachary concerning his sonne He shall goe saith he before the Lord in the spirit and power of Elias to turne the hearts of the Fathers to the children and the disobedient to the wisdome of the just this is instead of reducing the hearts of the children to the Fathers to make ready a people prepared for the Lord. For the better understanding of this first reason we must know that the old Prophets for the most part spake of the coming of Christ indefinitely and in generall without that distinction of first and second coming which we have more clearly learned in the Gospel For this reason those Prophets except Daniel who distinguisheth those comings and the Gospel out of him that speake of the things which should be at the coming of Christ indefinitely and all together we who are now more fully informed by the revelation of his Gospel of this distinction of a two-fold coming must apply each of them to its proper time Those things which befit the state of his first coming unto it and such things as befit the state of his second coming unto his second And that which befits both alike as this of an Harbinger or Messenger may be applyed to both My second reason for the proofe hereof is from our Saviours own words in the Gospel Mat. 17.10 11. where his Disciples immediatly upon his transfiguration asking him saying Why then say the Scribes that Elias must first come Our Saviour answers Elias truly shall first come 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and shall restore all things These words our Saviour spake when John Baptist was now beheaded and yet speakes as of a thing future 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Elias shall come and shall restore all things How can this be spoken of John Baptist unlesse he be to come again Besides I cannot see how this restoring of all things can be verified of the ministery of John Baptist at the first coming of Christ which continued but a very short time and did no such thing as these words seeme to imply for the restoring of all things belongs not to the first but to the second coming of Christ if we will beleeve St. Peter in his first Sermon in the Temple after Christs ascension Acts 3.19 where he thus speakes unto the Jewes Repent saith he and bee converted for the blotting out of your sins that the times of refreshing may come from the presence of the Lord and that he may send Jesus Christ which before was preached unto you whom the heavens must receive untill the times of the restitution of all things which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy Prophets since the world began The word is the same 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 If the time of restoring all things be not til the second coming of Christ how could John Baptist restore all things as his first If the Master come not to restore all things at his first surely his harbinger
reserventur Quomodo autem vas fict le testâ—ceum si â—tactum â—uâ—â— it in actiquam speciem non potest reformari siâ— et populus Judaeorum Hierusalem subversa statum pristinum non habebune Hieronymus in Iâ—rem 19.10 This is evidently spoken not of the Babylonian but of the Roman captivity for after the Babylonians both the City is rebuilt and the people brought back to Judea are restored to their ancient abundance but after the Captivity that happened under Vespasian and Titus and after that under Hadrian the ruines of Jerusalem shall remaine unto the end of the world although the Jewes imagine that a golden and gemmed Hierusalem shall be restored unto them and that againe they shall have oblations and Sacrifices and the marriages of Saints and the Kingdome of our Lord and Saviour upon earth Which things though we follow not their opinion yet wee cannot condemn because many Ecclesiasticall men and Martyrs have said the same And let every one abound in his owne sence and all bee reserved to the judgement of the Lord. But looke how a Potters vessell of earth if broken cannot be againe formed into its former shape so the people of the Jewes and the City of Jerusalem being subverted they shall never have their ancient state Thus Jerom in which words observe 1. That all we asserted in the former § is here represented to a syllable before your eyes 2. That his argument he urgeth against the Jewes restauration after their Romish destruction is as weake as the earthen bottle whereof hee makes the foundation of it For he overstretcheth the Prophets comparison who therein intended onely a totall or universall dispersion of the Jewes but not a finall destruction this selfe-same Prophet else-where and of the rest the most in all the old Testament as we have largely discussed prophesying and describing to the life the glorious restauration of the Iewes yea and of the Israelites too And as Ierom formally urgeth the argument hee doth seem to ground himself upon the impossibility of that restauration as of re-forming a broken earthen bottle and so with a by-blow smites our hope of the resurrection because that may seem to men impossible But beleevers must not goe upon that ground in dispute It is a like easie for God to doe as to say witnesse his fiat let it be so in the creation Yea the comparison it selfe prompts a possibility and probability that as after a broken earthen bottle is mellowed and mouldered againe into clay may be new formed into a bottle so after the deep desolations of the Jewes they shall be restored againe as the Prophet Daniel chap. 12. v. 2. gives it us in a like comparison and the Apostle after him Rom. 11. v. 15. viz. of bodies turned to dust or clay reviving to life which metaphors are higher then the new-forming of an earthen broken bottle ¶ 2. Collate with Jeromes words the words of that most ancient pious and learned Justin Martyr in his very discusse of the future glorious restauration of the Jewes and of the universall Church and that in his Dialogue with Tryphon the Iew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Justin Mart. in Dialog cum Tryph. p. 340. Edâ—t Graec. Lat. Paâ—is A. D. 1636. and we shall find that Ierom did wrong in saying they expected again Iewish Oblations and Sacrifices Iustin Martyrs words are these For he is the excellent cheife Priest and eternal King CHRIST himself as the Sonne of God in whose coming again ye may not think that Isaiah or others of the Prophets did teach that the Sacrifices of blood or Oblations should be offered upon the Altar but true and spirituall praises with thanksgivings For indeed we doe not in vaine hope in him neither are we seduced from those that so teach Thus Justin In which words you see clearly the opinion of the religious learned Ancients Jewish Prophets c. of whom Justin speakes in the Plurall that their opinion yea and faith and hope was contrary to the sence that Jerom would put upon them ¶ 3. Jerom himselfe hath confest the same sence with us of divers places before alleadged for our opinion as on Hos 3.4 Book 3. chap. 2. Sect 39 on Mat. 11.14 on Mat. 17.14 c. Book 3. cha 2. Sect. 51. Margent and else-where ¶ 4. Hear Mr. Medes answer to all Ieroms speeches against us on those places of Scripture afore quoted § 1. Sed fidem tuam Hieronyme qui cum Dionysio tuo Alexandrino c. i. e. But O thy faithful dealing O Ierom who together with thy Dionysius Alex. doe fasten upon the opinion of the Millenaries that the injury of circumsicion the blood of Sacrifices and the rest of the legal Ceremonies are againe to be restored after their supposed death Indeed those things which Iewes or perhaps Hereticks out of Iudaisme dreamed concerning their Millenarie you odiously dash upon the Christians But hath this becommed your candor Yea thou Ierom no more but thy selfe being judge dost bewray thy crimination to be false For so thou writest on Jer. 19.5 Post captivitatem quae sub Vespasiano that is After the captivity which happened under Vespasian and Titus and after under Hadrian the ruins of Hierusalem are to continue to the end of the world albeit the Jews do thinke that there shall be restored unto them a golden and gemmed Hierusalem and that again ethere shall be oblations and sacrifices and the marriages of the Saints and the Kingdome of the LORD our SAVIOUR upon earth which although we follow not yet we cannot condemne because many Ecclesiasticall men and Martyrs have so said These are thy word O Jerome But prethee tell me did those Ecclesiasticall men and holy Martyrs say that circumcision and sacrifices should at the time of Christs Kingdom be restored take heed of saying so For certainly they taught the contrary as may be confirmed out of Justin Martyrs Dialogue with Trypho c. or if thou hadst certainly known they had so beleeved wouldst not thou have condemned them without any demur Thus Mr. Mede SECT III. Of the words of GAIUS seconded by DIONYSIUS ALEXANDRINUS both falsly fathering our opinion upon CERINTHUS and injuriously mingling therewith such impieties as our souls abhorre yet so far credited by EUSEBIUS PAMPHYLIUS therein too credulous as that they are alleadged by him for history without putting any check upon them * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. Euseb Pamphil. lib. 3. cap. juxta Graec. 26. 27. juxta laâ—motas in Irenaeo juxta Aug. cap. 24 25 In the discusse whereof our Opinion of the THOUSAND YEARS is VINDICATED from VOLUPTUOUS CHILIASME THE whole story is this About the same time viz. of the Sect of the Ebionites we learne that there was one Cerinthus an Author of another Heresie Gaius whose words we have aforealleadged in the controversie carryed about in his name writeth thus of him CERINTHUS also by revelations written as of a great Apostle brought
the best antiquity that Cerinthus held no wanton voluptuous chiliasme nor spake he any thing at all of the Millenaries though Tertullian and Irenaeus lived above an hundred yeares nearer to Cerinthus his time then did Eusebius And therefore wise men cannot but wonder that Eusebius should tel us such stories And wonder the more because Epiphanius on the other side that gave himselfe ten times more to inquire into opinions then Eusebius flourishing about 30 years after Eusebius his death ⸪ Euseb dyed about the year 339. and Epith. flourished about the year 365. doth neither himselfe finde any such opinion held by Cerinthus or his Sect nor doth he mention it as reported by Eusebius or his Gaius or Dionysius or any other And thus praise to Jehovah of the places in the Old Testament CHAP. IV. Of the places in the New Testament proving our generall Thesis viz. That there shall be yet afore the ultimate generall Judgement a most glorious visible state of the Church on earth for many years wherein the Saints shall reigne and triumph over all their enemies and there shall be a Restitution of all things like as a new Creation SECT I. Of our New-Testament proofes we have occasionally opened so many and so much to explaine the Prophets that we have greatly anticipated our selves and happily made our worke so short in this that hence there is no feare of tediousnesse to the reader § 1 THe first place we shall touch upon in the New Testament for the glorious visible state of the Church on earth before the ultimate generall Judgement is in Matth. 24.13 14. But he that shall endure to the end shall be saved And this Gospel of the Kingdome shall be preached in all the world for a witnesse unto all Nations and then shall the end come That antitheticall BUT points at a time immediatly following the universall transcendent impieties of the wicked world mentioned vers 10 11 12. which by the Apostles in their Epistles * is oft prognosticated to be as the night 2 Thes 2.3 2 Tim. 4.1 1 Tim. 3.1 Compare 2 Tim. 4.1 2 Pet. 2.1 Compare 2 Pet. 3. ver 3 ver 12. preceding the Sun-rising of that glory of which we speake The end here mentioned must needs be the end of the world not of Jerusalem as we have before analitically demonstrated on this twenty fourth of Matthew p. 102. Sect. 9. And this end must be of the wicked world that is of the world as wicked not of the world as a world or materiall substance else why doth our Saviour mention enduring and of preaching the Gospel for a witnesse to all Nations For when the time of the aforesaid glorious state of the Church throughout the whole earth is come called the restitution of all things Acts 3.21 there will be no putting of men to be saved upon enduring or suffering they now are saved and glory hath dispelled suffering And consequently there will be no need of making the Gospel a testimony against all Nations to which at this time all that survive shal altogether submit as to all appearance The end therefore here intended is the end of the world as a sinfull world then to be turned into a glorious Kingdome as well as the world formed by the Gospel preached in all the world to all Nations to which at which time Christ shall gloriously appeare and radiat upon it on earth as we have largely demonstrated on the thirtieth verse c. of this twenty fourth of Matthew p. 82. Sect. 3. c. The signe immediately antecedent to this end to be transformed into that glorious beginning I say the signe prognostick or causal signe is the preaching of the Gospel in all the world to all Nations which is a glorious prelude This radiant Sun softning all good generous plants to a flowing of sap into the flowers of Gods Garden or fruit-trees of his Fortward though it hardens the dead earth into stones to be trampled and broken by the prancings of victorious judgements upon them as other Scriptures before opened abundantly enlarge § 2 That these things thus briefly hinted may duly be illustrated according to the just extent of the words under consideration let us make three observations upon them ¶ 1. That such an end must be here meant as cannot be applied to the destruction of Jerusalem but to the time immediatly before the end of the world because there was little or no salvation temporall or spirituall to them surviving at the destruction of Jerusalem and therefore our Saviour adviseth the Jewes in the sixteenth verse c. at this time to flye not to endure to the end of those troubles even as many yeares afore the Gospel was fled from Jerusalem Acts 8.1 c. and generally from the Jewes Acts 13.46 Rom. 11.25 even as they witnessed the said departure in their continuance in their Jewish sacrificing from Titus his destruction to Adrian and from him to Constantine and from thence to Iulian his time as we have oft before recited Besides the evils here set as markes of the end are the same the Apostles make of the approaching of the end of the world for which compare the ninth tenth eleventh and twelfth verses of this twenty fourth of Matthew with 2 Tim. 3.1 2 3 4. ¶ 2. The Gospel must be preached in all the World so as to be a witnesse to all Nations Gr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Gospell shall be preached IN all the INHABITED world for a witnesse to all the GENTILES A thing may be said to be proclaimed TO a whole towne if declared but in the Market place or to a whole Province or County when it is done in the chiefe City But this preaching must be in the whole inhabited world where-ever men inhabite as Jonah preached in every street of Nineveh labouring three dayes in that worke in that one City and this preaching must be such and so much as will justly amount to a witnesse to them viz. a witnesse to convince them beyond all excuse that the Gospel was preached to them ¶ 3. That it is here said THIS Gospel of the Kingdom 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shal be preached in all the world so that by this emphaticall expression is given to us a cleare distinction betweene THIS Gospel and the THE Kingdom insomuch that Christs meer Spiritual Kingdome cannot be here understood The Gospel is the Law of the Kingdome the Saints are the Subjects or matter of that Kingdom the Gospell comes from Heaven the people of the Kingdome are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the inhabited world converted by that Gospell out of all Nations as our Text holds forth The preaching of the Gospel is the antecedent sign of the coming and approaching of that Kingdome But the antecedent cannot be the consequent or the signe bee the thing signified nor can the cause be the effect Besides Christ saying he that indures to the end shal be saved is antithetically put
changed into the same image from glory to glory even by the Spirit of the Lord. § 1 IN this Text three things are evidently asserted concerning the Jewes ¶ 1. What their present Spirituall condition was in Pauls time viz. That even to that day when Moses was read the vayle was upon their heart In vers 13. the Apostle had said Moses did put a vaile over his owne face that the children of Israel could not stedfastly look to the end of that which is abolished according to Exod. 33.32 c. to the end of the Chapter where you have the thing manner and the end thereof So that hereby are signified two vailes the one typifying the other one upon the thing beheld another upon the beholders so that through Moses representing the ministration of the Leviticall Law the Jewes could not looke unto Christ representing the ministration of the Gospel For saith the Apostle 1. There was a vaile of materiall types viz. of Bloud Sacrificing Washing c. covering and concealing the shining that is the Spirituall meaning and Gospel glory of Moses Law 2. The vaile of sence upon or over the hearts of the Jewes that whiles they made use only of their sences to discerne the things of Moses Law their apprehension was terminated at that which was only sensible not reaching to that which was spirituall and so the Divine Evangelicall meaning was kept from entering into their hearts and so they rested in the materiall grosse service and made no spirituall conclusions and applications concerning Christ And this saith Paul is the condition of the generality of the Jewes to this day Compare Rom. 11.25 especially Rom. 9.31 32. asserting there that the Jews attained not righteousnesse because they sought it not by faith viz. in Christ the sence and summe of the Leviticall Law but AS IT WERE he saith not really or altogether but as it were by the workes of the Law because in resting on the outside and acting of Leviticals they turned those Leviticals in their true intent and meaning Evangelicall into workes of the Law As if a man rest upon the opus operatum the labour and meere deed done of the Evangelicall duty of prayer praise c. he turnes that duty into legall ¶ 2. What their future spirituall condition shal be at the time of their call viz. when their heart is turned to the Lord the Pariphrasis of Conversion the vaile shal be taken away to wit both vailes 1. That vaile of Jewish worship that as de jure it was taken away in the authority of it upon rending of the vaile at Christs Passion and defacto in practise as to the sacrificall part at the destruction of the Temple by the Roman Titus and Adrian and fire from Heaven in the time of Julian so also it shall bee taken away as to the Jewes esteeme in the whole Mosaicall Liturgy thereof 2. The vaile of sence over their hearts shall be taken away so that by the Divine Illumination of the Spirit they shall looke through and beyond sence and carnall reason thence derived unto the spirituall minde and meaning of all the Law of Moses viz. unto the Gospel and Christ Jesus who is the spirit thereof which is plainly expressed in the following words now the Lord is that Spirit That is Christ as God is that Spirit Joh. 4.24 and Christ as Christ is the summe and marrow of the spirituality of the Gospel as the Gospel is of the Mosaicall Law and he hath the spirit above measure and sends the spirit to enlighten and enliven and allure them to the embracement of him For Lord in the New Testament phrase oft signifies Christ and Spirit often signifies spirituality and the spirituall sence and way of the Gospel and the communication of the efficacy of the Spirit as many instances might be given but for tediousnesse It is added Where the Spirit of the Lord is there is liberty That is when the Lord is spiritually in the heart there is spirituall liberty that the Jews shal neither look at nor relye upon the Letter Character or outward acts of Judaicall services to which sence and from thence carnall reason held them in a kinde of bondage as thinking the command bound them and the threat awed them mainly to that The Law indeed obliged them to an actuall performance of all the materiall Leviticall services whiles in force but even then it was their sensuality and carnality that held their apprehensions in bondage and within those stinted bounds that they could not look further so that for want of the addition of Gospel knowledge faith godlinesse c they could not see afarre off But were short sighted as Peters phrase is But where the spirit of the Lord is in the heart by grace there they wil finde a liberty of apprehension to looke to the spirituality of all worship a liberty of action to act more with the inward graces then with the laboursomnesse of the body and a liberty of confidence to relye upon the object the things viz. Christ held forth in the Gospel and not on the outward for me of worship ¶ 3. What their estate both corporall and spirituall shal bee from that time forward till ultimate glory comes when the vaile is taken away and that liberty restored in lieu thereof viz. it shall be very glorious when WEE ALL both Jewes and Gentiles with open face beholding as in a glasse the glory of the Lord are changed into the same image from glory to glory even as by the spirit of the Lord. The Verse is not to begin with But as an Antithesis or opposition to that afore but with an And as a Prosthesis or addition of a further degree of attainment so the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 well beares and so the sence requires for at present there was never an ALL of Jewes so beholding and so transformed Nor were the converted Gentiles yet so glorified with that divine Metamorphosis as the Greek signifies And the Jewes must not be excluded because the Apostle a Jew speakes in the first person plurall We including himselfe and the converted Gentiles must not be excluded because he writes these things to the converted Gentile Corinthians So that this verse is knit on the former rather as an exâ—gesis auxesis an illustration and amplification then as an antithesis or opposition to the former verse It is true that this last verse is part of an Antithesis to the Jewes blindnesse but not to their spirituall sight and liberty but then that Antithesis began higher a good deale viz. ver 16. Neverthelesse when it shall turne to the Lord the vaile shall be taken away c. and so the Apostle falls first upon the discourse of the Jewes future spirituall condition and then from thence ascends higher in the last verse to their and our future visible glorious condition which on earth is to follow that spirituall condition For the plaine sence of the whole is as
FACE of Christ but hereafter upon the appearance of Christ at the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles and the call of the Jewes into one universall visible Church God will shine forth most gloriously through the WHOLE PERSON of Christ upon OVR WHOLE PERSONS so that we shall be like him in glory Phil. 3. 21. and we shall know as we are known 1 Cor. 13.12 we shall put off all corporall imperfections and shall apprehend him as well perfectly by our sences as by our graces as will appeare more by that which followes For ¶ 4. We shall behold him with open face or unvailed countenance or uncovered or unmasked persons as the Greeke comprehends all and this being spoken indefinitely and unlimitedly either to the beholder or thing beheld it is safest to take in both answerably opposing the two vailes afore so that 1. All we Jewes and Gentiles that shall partake of this glorious state on earth shall behold with uncovered sences with uncovered reason with uncovered graces Our eyes and mindes shall not be held as Luk 24. that our Phantasie should peirce no further then sence or that sence should apprehend extraordinary things in an ordinary notion And our reason shall not be covered nor cumbred with errour and mistakes and sensible desires and our graces shall not be blind-fold with inordinate carnall affections 2. Christ shall be beheld as altogether uncovered he shall not be covered as to be seene only in Aenigmaticall expressions as the Apostles phrase is in the Greek 1 Cor. 13. 12. or in typicall seales as in receiving the elements of the Holy Supper we are said to shew his death till he comes 1 Cor. 11.26 or in the heavens as now he is or in a personall state of humiliation as when he was on earth in afflictions and sufferings but he shall be wholly uncovered to be seene as he is in his great glory in that time of the Churches restauration on earth at his appearance as it is here said in the next particular ¶ 5. Beholding the glory of the Lord. At his first coming we beheld his ingloriousnesse Phil. 2. Isa 53. After at his transfiguration some two or three saw a glimps of a prelude of his glory After that a few saw at his ascension his entrance into supreame glory Acts 1. But here WEE ALL Jewes and Gentiles in generall whosoever and how many soever converted unto Christ shall behold 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THAT SAME glory of the Lord. ¶ 6. And so behold as to be changed into the same image A wonderfull and efficacious beholding which shall transforme the Embryon of the new Creature conceived in the wombe of the Soule into the glorious Image of Christ by beholding him in his glory in this state on earth The divine Plants of God in this new Paradise on earth shall so see the Sun of righteousnesse that they shal blossome and flower and fructifie into like colours stripes an rayes as are in that Sun We must as the Greeke 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies be Metamorphosed from our corrupt and inglorious image into the glorious Image of Christ So this text So againe the same Apostle hath it 1 Cor. 15.51 52. The introductory both of the discourse and of the thing leading to this change in verse fifty one begins at vers 22. which we have laboriously opened afore but in the seventh Section immediatly preceding To which adde this memorandum that Paul expresly treates there only of the resurrection of Beleevers as that at Christs next coming When saith the Apostle we shall not ALL sleep but we shall ALL be changed The dead shall be raised incorruptible and we shall be changed This corruptible must put on incorruption and this mortall must put on immortality then death is swallowed up And this change is said to be glorious vers 49. As we have borne the image of the earthly so we shall beare the image of the heavenly Adam viz. Christ Which suite to our present text in this 2 Cor. 3.18 That we shall so behold the glory of Christ that we shall be Metamorphosed transformed into the same image By which parallel ye perceive what the Apostle meanes by this transformation into the same glorious Image viz. to our glorious state on earth at the first resurrection of the Saints at Christs next coming At our first conversion we have some spirituall inward change Of this our Apostle made mention afore in this 2 Cor. 3. viz. vers 16. in that phrase of turning to the Lord. And vers 17. in those words where the Spirit of the Lord is there is liberty But in that clause in the last verse of Metamorphosing into the same Image some greater thing must be intended For ¶ 8. It followes we must be changed into the same Image from glory to glory which sounds of a future For from glory to glory must signifie more then a processe from one degree of grace to another as it is intended in Psal 84. from strength to strength and Rom. 1.17 from faith to faith for though that be the beginning and touched vers 16. 17. of this 2 Cor. 3. yet here the Apostle drives at the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the exaltation of a Saint to his height and must import that the former glory is suitable to the latter glory which is true of personall glory on earth at Christs next appearance that it is like to the latter viz. ultimate glory both glorifying the whole man whereas the glory of our imperfect sanctification doth glorifie only the inward man and that too but in part There is also a difference in the cause as it is in the last clause viz. ¶ 9. By the Lord the Spirit as we touched the Translation afore whereby it is plainly held forth that whereas our inward glory of Sanctification in all the processe thereof is from the inward power of the Spirit of the Lord our personall glory of soule and body at the said coming of Christ is from his personall presence transcendently and efficaciously radiating on our persons to a change and filling the earth with the beames of his glory Now weigh all together and see whether the whole minde of this text can be terminated in our conversion and sanctification or can be wholly extended to ultimate and supreamest glory Or can be fixt upon that unsuitable time of converting Israel at the day of the ultimate Judgement And if not then it is yet to come before the ultimate generall day of Doome SECT IX The Ninth place in the New Testament for the glorious state of all things on earth at Christs next appearance is Phil. 2.9 10 11. God hath highly exalted him Christ and given him a name above every name that at the name of Jesus every knee shall bow of things in heaven and things in the earth and thing under the earth and that every tongue should confesse that Jesus Christ is the Lord to the glory of God the
Father § 1 VVHat hath been said afore of this place for opening the Prophet Esa 45.14 and it selfe See pag. 113 114. and p. 215. l. 1. § 2 This a glorious time on earth expresse in the Text when it shall be fulfilled but this is not yet fulfilled For ¶ 1. All things on earth doe not submit to Christ which is the sence of bowing the knee But on the contrary an hundred for one are openly against Christ so that as the Apostle saith Heb. 2.8 We see not yet all things under him And Heb. 10.13 the Apostle saith long after his Ascension that he still sits in heaven expecting till his enemies be made his footstoole ¶ 2. All things under the earth viz the infernall Spirits doe not universally and actually subject to him that is they are yet permitted of God to act against Christs Kingdome but they must be made universally and actually to forbeare opposing Christs Kingdome Revel 16.17 The seventh Vial is poured out upon the aire that is upon the Prince of the aire the Devil and on his retinue How Why Christ shall binde him for a thousand yeares c. Revel 20.1 2 c. ¶ 3. Much lesse to this day doth every tongue or the generality of all tongues confesse that Jesus Christ is the Lord TO THE GLORY OF GOD THE FATHER when as most either doe not name him or name him prophanely or blaspheme him ¶ 4. Paul tels us in another place viz Rom. 14.10 11. discussed also afore touching the meaning * See pag. 214. but by mistake printed p. 116. vix t is in lib. 3. cha 2. Sect. 19. S. 2. P. 1. That this bowing to Christ is not fulfilled till Christ shall sit in Judicature on his Seate of Judgement but this begins not till the first Resurrection Rev. 20.4 c. compare it with Revel 11.15 16 17 18. meane while Turk and Pope and Heathens extreamly domineer § 3 This truth hath not been discovered from these two places of Rom. 14. and Phil. 2. as yesterday but judicious Calvin long since did assert from the collation of both places together that this genuflexion and submission to Christ is not fully fulfilled till Christs next coming § 4 Now this cannot be deferred to the ultimate generall Judgement for then is no time for confession and submission to the glory of God the Father but a silent bearing of Judgement by them that despised Christ and so Christ resignes his kingdome SECT X. The Tenth place in the New Testament of the glorious state of the Church yet to be on earth is in Revel 2.25 26 27 28. ver 25. Hold fast till I come Ver. 26. And he that over-cometh and keepeth my workes unto the end to him will I give power over the Nations Vers 27. And he shal rule them with a rod of Iron as the vessels of a Potter they shall be broken to shivers even as I have received of my Father Vers 28. And I will give him the morning Star § 1 ALthough in our last English Translation the former part of the twenty seventh verse be read with a Parenthesis yet not so in Stephanus his best Greek edition in Folio nor in Bezaes Greek or Latin nor in our former English Translation The continued speech in the third person throughout the twenty fift and twenty sixt verses and former part of the twenty seventh verse and the distinguishing turne to the first person in the latter part of the twenty seventh verse makes it plaine enough that these Promises are made to the Beleever that keeps Christs workes to the end even as Christ goes on in the twenty eighth verse promising him the said Beleever that he will give him the morning starre So that it is the said Beleever that shall under Christ by the donation and assistance of Christ have power over the Nations and rule them with a rod of Iron till they be broken as a Potters vessels to whom he will give the morning starre That which perhaps made our last Translators put in the said Parenthesis was the agreement of the words they included with those Psal 2.9 quoted by them in the margin spoken of Christ But it is a sure rule Subordinata non sunt contraria subordinate things are not contrary and that other Qui facit per alium facit per se That he who causeth others to doe a thing doth it himselfe If Christ by his Saints over-power the Nations and rules them with a rod of Iron Christ himselfe over-powers the Nations and rules them with a rod of Iron That which the Carpenter worketh with his tooles the Carpenter is accounted to worke or doe In this respect it is said in Dan. 7. ver 13.4 That the Kingdome which is to succeed the foure Monarchies is given to Christ And vers 22. 27. it is said to be given to the Saints § 2 The sence of these words are obvious and plaine especially if we minde what hath been given in by way of explication afore on Psal 2. * Pag. 158. 159. and on 2 Pet. 1.19 ** P. 360. P. 2 c. Suitably our new Annotations confesse That hold fast TILL I COME ver 25. signifies till Christs second coming GENERALL or SPECIALL Power over the Nations signifies to JOYNE WITH CHRIST IN JVDGING THE NATIONS c. And that giving the morning starre signifies Christs giving the FULL FRVITION OF HIMSELFE We shall further give the explication of this Scripture in the application thereof Which application is That this Scripture is not yet fulfilled as may appeare in the distinct consideration of each particular thereof ¶ 1. It is expresse in the twenty fifth verse Hold fast TILL I COME spoken by Christ neare an hundred yeares after his Incarnation But Christ never came since that ¶ 2. It is said in ver 26 27. That to them that hold fast till hee comes he will give POWER OVER THE NATIONS to rule them with A ROD OF IRON and to BREAKE THEM IN PEECES as a Potters vessels Which words import a Corporall breaking not a Spirituall as the Iron Scepter of force is distinguished from the golden Scepter of the Word Now this was never yet fulfilled in the generall but rather contrariwise hitherto the Nations breake the Saints and Churches as we have often given a large account from History and experience ¶ 3. That of Christs giving the morning starre what can it bee but the appearance of Christ againe especially to the Jewes according to 2 Pet. 1.19 before expounded For as the converted Gentiles Spiritually considered are said to be not in the night but in the day 1 Thes 5.5 The unconverted Jews are in the night and in the darke Rom. 11.25 Therefore this morning Starre the Sunne-rising mentioned to this very particular Malac. 4.2 must of necessity signifie Christs personall appearance which Christ hath not yet fulfilled to this day Therefore yet to come And this text must be fulfilled before the ultimate
Magnificat and Te Deum that All Christendome was theirs excepting a few minute spots and obscure corners of a few peevish Protestants Now the Catastrophe of these must be according to the full Tenor of the Argument the stream of all Prophesies and the examples of the three former Monarchies a total ruine of them SECT II. § 1 AFter long and many tedious troubles and afflictions and persecutions the Lord hath in all ages given the Church a generall rest upon earth But the Church hath been long under affliction and troubles and persecutions in all Countries where it hath resided even since about forty yeers after Constantine the Great his Reigne Therefore God will yet again give the Church a general rest upon earth § 2 The minor or second Proposition is plaine by History Experience and that which hath been said in the former Argument and therefore there is no need of speaking more to that § 3 Of the major Proposition the Lord from the beginning hath given his Church severall typical first-fruits laying the foundation of all upon his own example in resting from the Creation the seventh day and thereupon gave them a seventh day every week the seventh year of every seven yeers and the Jubile being the last year of seven seven yeers wherein to rest from labours morgages and servitude as a type and taste of the rests he would give his Church from other troubles and afflictions upon earth notably argued by the Apostle upon those grounds Heb. 4. throughout that Chapter largely opened afore And according to these types so hath the Lord practised towards his Church from the beginning 1 After about One thousand six hundred and fifty years of afflictions upon the Church from the Creation by the murther of Abel Gen. 4. by the ungodlinesse of men and their hard speeches against God in the time of Enoch Jude v. 15. and the ungodlinesse of the world in the time of Noah before the Deluge 2 Pet. 2.5 God gave a rest to the Church in the Arke of Noah the name of that good man typifying and ordered by providence unto that end to signifie rest of viz. from toyl Gen. 2.29 2 After the flood new troubles to the Church began to spring up Nimrod assumed to himselfe to be a Monarchical Tyrant over men called therefore a Mighty Hunter that is as the Learned expound a Man-hunter The beginning of his Monarchy was Babel Gen. 10. 8 9 10. After this the building of the Tower to prevent Gods future judgements Gen. 11. brought confusion of Languages which proved a great affliction After that there was great trouble by the Wars taking Lot prisoner c. Gen. 14. and by the firing of Sodome Gen. 19. But at last God sent Isaack signifying Laughter and a type of Christ all the time of whole life there was a time of great Tranquillity This peace perioding many troubles arose in Jacobs time by Esau Laban Simeon and Levi and the selling of Joseph But Joseph being advanced in Aegypt the Country of Goshen there was provided as a Land of rest for the Church for many years Gen. 28. c. to the end of that Book Joseph being dead and forgotten of the Kings of Aegypt great afflictions are heaped upon the Church in hard labour with much rigor persecutingly putting to death their male Infants causing them to groan and cry to God in much anxiety of Spirit Exod. the three first Chapters But at length God brought them out from that place and persecution and gave them freedome forty yeers in the wilderness After this they had sore Wars with the Canaanites but at last rest in Canaan I should be too tedious to dilate upon their rest in returning to Judea after seventy years Captivity Upon the spirituall refreshing the Saints had for a time after the Maccabean and other troubles which wars and troubles lasted about foure hundred years from Malachi to the beginning of the New Testament Upon the rest the Church had after those persecutions Act. 8.1 which rest is emphatically mentioned Act. 9.31 And upon the rest they had afore the life time of Constantine after three hundred years in the ten Persecutions which distinction of ten was by pointing and distinguishing them by some lucida intervalla some rests and respites between each of them till Constantine gave them a greater rest lasting for about forty yeers § 4 Therefore we have reason yea divine reason to expect a great and notable rest for the Church after so long time of troubles for the general upon all the Church more or lesse since that time which is now above a thousand and three hundred years so the Apostle in part argues as we said Heb. 4. that God having given severall rests on earth to the Church after which ever and anon by turns fresh trouble sprang up therefore yet there remaineth another notable rest on earth to the people of God which rest mentioned in that of Heb. 4. is not meerly spirituall or totally supernall glory as we have laboriously argued afore upon that Chapter And there is also a Prophesie inferred upon their state in the Wildernesse touching the Churches rest upon earth Rev. 12. SECT III. § 1 THe Churches extremity is Gods opportunity as Philo Judaein in his Book 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and experience witnesse But the Church considered in generall in all countries hath been for many years past even till now under great extremities Therefore God will take an opportunity to deliver it The full confirmation of both premises may be sufficiently picked out of the two former arguments The conclusion follows of it selfe SECT IV. § 1 IOynt prayers never miscarry but ever receive gracious returns See the generall Experiment 2 Chron. 15.4 particulars see in the joynt prayers of the Church in Egypt Exod. 2.23 24. under the Judges Judg. 6.6 7. Judg. 10.10 to the end of the chapter under the pious Kings Asa 2 Chron 15.18 to the end Jehoshaephat 2 Chron. 20.12 to 31. Hezekiah 2 King 19.1 c. Josiah 2 King 22.19 § 2 But in many ages even ever since the Apostles prayer Act. 4.24 The Saints and Churches in their convenings have prayed for the fall of Antichrist and all opposers of the Church for the conversion of the Jews and the restauration of the Church to her glory on earth witnesse the severall prayers in the Scriptures and experiences of the prayers of Gods people in all their convenings as the antientest Saints alive have been eare witnesses § 3 Therefore there must be a returne of these prayers according as beside the former precedents God hath made severall promises and engagements as Psa 50.15 Mat. 7.7 Ioh. 14.13 14. Luk. 18.1 c. of hearing his peoples prayers For though God defer long as it is in that parable or comparison Luke 18.1 c. yet he will be sure to answer as he did that prayer Act. 4.24 though it were near three hundred years afore he eminently performed it to
wit in the conversion of Constantine the Great and of his followers SECT V. § 1 THat wil surely come to pass which God pre-impresseth on mens spirits according to his word presignifies in the wonders of nature and prepares for and makes way by the transactions of men â—ut so hath God from time to time done especially of later times towards the fall of Antichrist and all the intestine enemies of the Church and consequently towards the restauration of the Church Therefore these things will surely come to passe I might enlarge much upon the proofe of the premises of this Syllogisme but for brevity it being high time to shut up this third Book When the Lord intended Israel should conquer Canaan he put a valour into their heart and sent before among their enemies the Hornet of fear and the Moth of decay and weakness Ex. 23.27 28. Deut. 20.21 Josh 24.12 Isa 50.9 Isa 51.8 when the two witnesses are about to stand upon their feet to the terror of all their enemies there shall a breath of life of resolution and boldnesse for that end enter into them Rev. 11.11 Before the thirty yeares of the late German wars against that tract of Antichrist and the Churches enemies the Lord sent eminent signes appearing many daies over the Country as Christ prophesied there should be such prodigies and prognostick signs over Jerusalem which had been an arch-enemy to Christ before the destruction thereof Mat. 24. which accordingly came to passe as Josephus largely relates There is mention also in that 24. of Mat. of Earthquakes before the destruction of that Jewish Antichristian Jerusalem As before when the Prophet Amos prophesied the destruction of the enemies of the Church viz. of the Syrians Philistims Tyrians Edomites and Ammonites he emphatically sets down that that prophesie was committed to him two years before the Earthquake as if that Earthquake were a kind of seal to his prophesie that it should come to passe Amos 1.1 c. And it is prophesied that before the fal of the Antichristian enemies and of their nest the great City an Earthquake should precede Rev. 11.13 And we are assured by good information that of late yeares there have been divers terrible Earthquakes in the Popish Dominions How the Hornet and Moth have been among the enemies of Christ terrifying and weakening them both abroad and at home I leave the wise Reader to make up of his own observation As also what a spirit of resolution and action there is in all wise good men against real Antichrist and Antichristianisme I say real for I utterly disavow those whimsies of Phantasticks that call every thing Antichristian that soders not to their dreamed opinions nor centers with their interest Finis Libri tertii THE FOURTH BOOK Holding forth the judgements of all sorts of men almost of all Nations whether learned or unlearned viz. HEATHENS MAHUMETANS JEWS and CHRISTIANS confessing more or lesse our general THESIS CHAP. I. Containing a Preface to this Book § 1 THREE things I must necessarily here premise ## 1 What I mean by those four sorts afore named viz. I mean by Heathens all those that acknowledge not any part of the holy Scriptures that is eo nominâ— under that notion of the holy Scriptures or Word of God dictated by the holy Spirit and penned by holy men extraordinarily endowed with that Spirit By Mahumetans I minde all that adhere to the Doctrine of Mahomet viz. Turks Arabians Saracens who yet acknowledge some peeces of the Old Testament By Jews all know whom I understand who do acknowledge entirely all the Old Testament By Christians I here intend all that are so named whether they are so sincerely or but seemingly as Papists Protestants Lutherans Calvinists c. who acknowledge the totall of all the Books of holy Scripture both in the Old and New Testament 2 That I must bee briefe in my Collections in this large field â—ounded out in this fourth Book contrary to my intention and disposition § 2 who would most willingly have abounded in this thing But first the frequent fears of my friends so often mentioned in mine ears by that time we had Printed off the third Book have lured me off And secondly I am the more satisfiedly taken off partly by the great bulk of Antiquity and number of Modern Writers I presented to the Reader in the first Book And partly by the urgency of time our friends longing for it and this present gallopping age outrunning rule and reason needing it who boldly presume they have in part entred upon the possession afore indeed they doe in any measure know the thing much lesse the time which yet is many years off § 3 3 That the Reader is not to conceive that I approve of every particular clause which those foure sorts shall assert but he must mind my general intent viz. that directly or indirectly in whole or in part expresly or intimatedly such passages fall from their mouths as argue they had some light more or lesse by some means or other touching our general Thesis in the summary bulk and main matter thereof CHAP. II. Containing the passages in Heathens in favour of our opinion in our aforesaid Thesis § 1 THe Heathens in their Doctrine touching the Immortality of the soule reserved in the other world for happinesse in their description of the Elysian fields their state of blisse on earth in the next world in their discusse of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. The state of men in the World to come yet unseen and their professed expectation of the Platonick yeer however they mis-dream the computation wherein as they say all things shall returne to their primaeve perfection And their Tenet of Metempsychosis or Transmigration of souls passing from one body deceasing into another next living and so are cloathed with divers corporal shapes till they attaine the perfectest do speak in substance a glorious state of man on earth after the Resurrection It is wonderfull to read in History how earnestly some of them have sought death being ravished with the desire of enjoying the state of the immortality of souls upon their Philosophers description of the glory of it Their Elysium or Elysian fields they so named 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the dissolution of the soul from the body For say they it is the place which good mens souls inhabit after they are freed from the bonds of the body ful of happines feated in the Fortunate Islands c. And it was the great comfort saith Homer of which learned Broughton takes notice that the friends of the Greek Captains slain in the Trojan war gave to their surviving wives that the souls of their husbands were gone 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 subintellige 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to the house of Hades that is to the world unseen that is to the other world of bliss yet not visible to us Of the Platonick yeer restoring all things to their primitive perfection we had something
afore in our first Book in Lactantius his Quotation Rectification of the opinions of Heathens And if any be not contented with that and our necessitated brevity here but are restlesly further inquisitive I refer such to Plato himselfe and to the Platonists viz. Ficinus and other zealous Commentators and followers of him But that Metempsychosis added and joyned to all these did compleat them up being fairely interpreted with meet allowance to Heathens into a system or body in the maine sense of our opinion casting up as the high way leading thereunto a resurrection or reunion of soules with their bodies Pythagoras saith that the soule of Euphorbus a noble Trojan slaine in the Grecian wars against Troy transmigrated itselfe into his body Ovid * Ovid Metam l. 15. Fab. 3. juxta Bersmani editionem c. sets forth a briefe of all with great eloquence and learning after his way O Genus attonitum gelidae formidine mortis Quid stygia quid tenebras nomina vana timetis Materiam vatum falsique pericula mundi Corpora sive rogus flammâ sive tabe vetustas Abstulerit mala posse pati non ulla putetis Morte carent animae semper priore relictâ Sede novis domibus vivunt habitantque receptae Ipse ego nam memini Trojani tempore belli Panthoides Euphorbus eram cui pectore quondam Haesit in adverso gravis hasta minoris Atridae Cognovi clypeum laevae gestamina nostrae Nuper Abanteis Templo Junonis in Argis OMNIA MUTANTUR NIHIL INTERIT ERRAT ILLINC Huc venit hinc illuc quoslibet occupat artus Spiritus c. Which I shall give you in English O men whom horrors of cold death affright Why fear you Styx vain names and endlesse night The theam of Poets and fear'd miseries Of a false world If fun'ral flames surprise Or age doth pine your bodies they nor grieve Nor suffer pains Our souls for ever live Though evermore their ancient houses leave Yet live in new which them as guests receive In Trojan wars I I remember well Euphorbus was Phanthöus son and fell By Menelaus lance I knew my shield Born on my left arm in Mars his field Beleeve me you may for this againe At Argos late I saw in Junos Fane ALL ALTER NOTHING FINALLY DECAYES Hither and thither still the spirit strayes Guest to all bodies Out of beasts it flyes To men from men to beasts and never dyes Nihil est toto quod perstet in â—â—be-Cuncta fluunt omnisque Vagans formatur imago Corpora vertuntur nec quod fuimuâ—ve sumusve-cras erimus Id est inquit Commentator 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 As Pliant wax each new impression takes Fixt to no form but still the old forsakes Yet is the same So souls the same abide Nought in this circled world is fix'd we view Each fading form at last is form'd anew So change our bodies without rest or stay Nor what we yesterday nor what to day We were or are hereafter we shall be c. They that can read Heathen Poets Philosophers Orators Historians c. in their owne languages shall finde aboundings of this what hope they had of a glorious blisse on earth in the next world Or they that will read but Morneys truenesse of Religion translated into English shall receive satisfaction enough in these things The holy Scriptures themselves take some notice of the minds and meaning of the heathens in these things We will note but two places § 2 The first is Matth. 14.1 2. At that time Herod the Tetrarch heard of the fame of Jesus and said unto his servants This is John the Baptist he is risen from the dead and therefore mighty works doe shew forth themselves in him or as it is the Margent mighty works are wrought by him We might here againe take occasion to repeat the Gentiles Theologie viz. Pythagoras and Platoes and others doctrine of their 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The change of the state of souls passing into bodies the change of bodies into better forms and as the New-creation of both and might produce much out of * Plato in l. 10. Poli In Timaeo In Phaedro Cum concinnâ ut ait Chemnitius interpretatione cum amantium Plato †August de Civit. D. l. 22. c. 18. ex varronis libris Austin ** Lactant. l. 7. Ex Chrysippi Stoici libro de providentia Lactantius and *âŽ* Joseph de bello Judaico cap. 7 Josephus to that purpose But brevity puls me by the ear and therefore I shall onely note that which indeed is the main expressed in this Scripture with that great emphasis That John the Baptist being risen from the dead THEREFORE mighty works are wrought by him where plainly to me this Scripture with an intentive eye takes notice that Gentilisme or the doctrine of Heathens whence Herod had his opinion did hold that the soules of good men deceased after their returne to their bodies did put them into a far better condition on earth then they were in before For we read not that John Baptist did in his life time work any miracle or mighty worke at all But wee have a text to the contrary Joh. 10.41 But now that he is risen from the dead as Herod conceived hee judged that he was very able to worke miracles on earth This collection of mine by good providence I found seconded by Great Chemnitius that most pious and learned man and by our received New Annotations Chemnitius his words are Credidit insuper ipsum c. i.e. Furthermore Herod did beleeve that John Baptist that before his death wrought no miracle now as if made more divine and by reason of the sanctity of his former life he could do those works which did surpasse humane power Our New Annotations on the Bible say thus He is risen from the dead Syr. from among the dead Some note here Herods opinion of Johns sanctity as concurring with the Pharisees who thought that the Holy did easily returne to life againe See Josephus Antiq. l. 18. cap. 2. The meaning is as if Herod had said HE HATH MORE POWER NOW THEN EVER HEE HAD For John wrought no miracles John 10.41 Thus our New Annotations § 3 The second place of Scripture is in 1 Cor. 15.29 Else what shall they do which are baptised for the dead if the dead rise not at all why are they then baptized for the dead The Apostle here takes notice of the opinion of the Heathens that they had a dim hope of the Resurrection in that they washed the bodies of such as were deceased to lay them trimly and decently accommodated to that end among the dead For if the dead rise not saith the Apostle why will they doe it that wash over the dead or pour water over or upon the dead that is wash the dead as the Greek very wel bears For 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 both in the Text are
equally of the middle voice as of the passive both being in terms and syllables the same in the Greek And then if in the middle voice they may wel be rendred actively as before we have rendred them And so the Syriack renders them actively which Beza highly approves And for justification of our rendring baptizing by washing we have good warrant from Mar. 7.4 where the Greek word Baptisme is rendred washing viz. of cups and pots and brazen vessels and tables as the nature of the things there mentioned necessarily require it to be so rendred Yet if any will contend for a passive signification then saith learned Beza there will be a verball nown included in the verb it selfe as is common among the Hebrews and so this Text must thus be translated What shall they do that is What shall be done to them who are washed with a washing over the dead that is with a mortual as Plautus speaks or funerall washing or a sepulchral washing or a washing belonging to them that are dead It seems by that phrase of heathen Roman Platus and other passages of others of them as Tarquinii corpus bona faemina lavit unxit that is A good woman washed and anointed the body of Tarquin that the Heathen were wont to wash the bodies of their dead which they had learned of the Patriarchs and Jews mentioned in their Talmuds and practised in Act. 9.37 Now saith the Apostle to the Corinthians who formerly were heathens why do the heathen wash their dead if they expect no more of the welfare of such bodies in another world then of the bodies of beasts Others bring I confesse other Interpretations But I leave them to learned Beza and our New Annotations who have elaborately confuted them Onely I adde this word That baptizing with blood in suffering persecution an unknown phrase in Pauls Epistles cannot be here meant as some would because it will not have the force of an argument on them that doubted of the Resurrection For to such out of doubt suffering for Christianity newer then the doctrine of the Resurrection was as doubtful if not more doubtfull then the Resurrection it self Such would bee ready enough to say That it is their stubbornness and pride or at least their valour and honour c. as in Duels not to be mastered by their adversaries that makes men dye for that Religion else if they preferred life they would keep it whiles they had it and comply or conceale their Religion Indeed for Paul to satisfie himselfe and his fellow-beleevers that they were in jeopardy every day for the Gospels sake upon the ground of hoping for a Resurrection is something But to them flatly denyed the Resurrection with whom hee disputes hee must urge Extra scripturian or Scripturelesse arguments viz. customes of men c. in several Nations as touched afore to convince them For surely they that doubt of the Resurrection doubt of the Scriptures that so often as well in the Old Testament as in the New mention the same But of this in the fourth Chapter of this Booke Out of the Heathen Sybils for the glorious state on earth yet to come wee had many of Lactantius his quotations in our first Book And we had not need make repetitions when haste to prevent our friends fear of our tediousness will not permit me to insert all I would assert CHAP. III. Next wee come to the MAHUMETANS viz. the SARACENS TURKS and ARABIANS touching their opinions of the future glorious state on earth yet to come § 1 IN the generall they have this ancient Tradition received among themselves That they last of all shall be subdued by the children of ISAAC So Purchas in his Pilgrimage that large and laborious History informs us and pious and learned Mr. Huet on Daniel takes it up as credible § 2 In particular in their Alcoran according to the English Edition they say * Pref. to the Alcoran That Jesus Christ a great Prophet borne of the Virgin MARY a Virgin both before and after her delivery conceived by the divine inspiration without a Father shall come againe on earth at the end of the world to confirme the Law c. That * Chap. 2. of the Epitome of the Alcoran beleevers after the Resurrection shall enjoy the immense pleasures of PARADISE wherein flow many Rivers and shall there finde all sorts of fair and savoury fruits c. Which particular is there sometimes much illustrated and often repeated in all that mine eye in a cursory reading took notice of to the number of thirty times * To Chap. 3. twice 4. thrice In 5.10.13.14.15 16 18 19 20 21. 22.35.42.48 twice 52.56.64.69.76 78 81 83 88 99. That this happinesse then on earth is better then that now ** Chap. 4. That that happinesse on earth shall have communion with the happinesse in heaven *âŽ* Chap. 3.48 89. That there shall be no evill †Chap. 19.74 There the possessors shall praise God * Chap. 35. Shall enjoy the great grace of God ** Chap. 42. That when JAGOG and MAGOG shall come running from the eminent places of the earth then shall the day of judgement appear *âŽ* Chap. 32. Chap. 21. That all men shall one day be assembled before him to be judged a THOUSAND YEERS being BUT AS ONE DAY before him †Chap. 43. That the comming of JESUS the Sonne of MARY shall bee a signe of the certainty of the day of judgement †Epit. Alcor lat cap. Creatoris rerum ordo num in margin 8. § 3 In their Alcoran according to the Latine Edition for I finde more in that then in the English Edition not onely upon report but by the Epitome of the Alcoran in Latine translated out of the Arab. into Latine by Robert Ketenensis an English-man I say in the Latine Edition of the Alcoran I finde a discourse of the duration of the world to seven thousand yeers six of which much past Of the signes of the day of judgement * Ibid. num in Marg. 60. Of the returning of all mankind and creatures to God That God will raise the dead and make them to returne to him †Ibid num in Marg. 33 That good men shall be in Paradise as Co-heirs with God * Ibid. num in Marg. 60. § 4 In the Theology of Mahomet translated into Latine by Hermannus Nellingunnensis in Quarto and conjoyned in my Copy with the said Epitome of the Alcoran There is a large description of the Paradise which good men shall enjoy on earth after the Resurrection setting forth both the quality and continuance of it Touching the quality Paradise is there described by gold and precious stones not altogether different from some phrases in the Prophets Isa chap. 54. and Revel chap. 21. And by Trees and Rivers not utterly dissonant from Revel 22. The account of the continuance doth something differ The day thereof saith that Treatise is
tranquillous and most happy life because the earth then shall not be infested with any noyse of Arms. And all those wars which before were stoutly waged by reason of the difference of Religion shall then cease The cause ceasing the effect ceaseth After the Prophet had spoken of the time of the Messiah presently he proceeds to those things that are to follow viz. to the day of judgement and the resurrection of the dead For saith he the day of the Lord shal be on every one that is proud and lofty c. upon all the Cedars of Lebanon and upon all the oaks of Bashan and upon all the ships of Tarshish c. No doubt saith he but by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THE DAY OF THE LORD the Prophet signifies the day of judgement as we shall afterward demonstrate which otherwise is called the day of resurrection of the dead for then the dead are judged called also the day of the Lord because a day of admiration Nothing then that is ordinary shall be done but all above nature c. He alleadgeth likewise for the said head of this Chapter that in Isa 23.14 They shall lift up their voice they shal sing for the Majesty of the Lord c. And Isa 49.14 c. But Zion saith the Lord hath forsaken me c. Can a woman forget her sucking child Psal◠72.16 And they of the City so Menasse renders it shal flourish as the here out of the earth Thus far we have shewn by Scripture saith he that the resurrection of the dead shall be conjunctive to the coming of the Messiah next it remains to be proved that the Ancients were of the same opinion It is to be noted what reason they give why the Patriarchs so much desired to be buried in the Holy-land which was no other then this That they that are there buried shall FIRST RISE * So in Beresit Raba-Paras 74 66. Semot R. pur 32. From whence is inferred That the resurrection of the dead to the comming of the Messiah is annexed in time The same is found also elsewhere ** In the Jerusalmy de Kilaym And so Semuel in Gemarah de berahot 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. This world doth not differ from the dayes of the Messiah but in the subjecting of Kings In Zoar †Paras voyera Elar is manifestly and cleerly expressed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. The blessed God shal first build the Temple and order and dispose the Pallace and build the City and then the dead shall be raised out of the dust The Cabalists do sound their opinion on the words of the Psalmist Psal 147.2 3. The Lord buildeth up Jerusalem he gathereth together the out casts of Israel he healeth the broken in heart and bindeth up their wounds 3 In the next viz. the third Chapter of that third Book the Rabbin solves this Question Whether within the aforesaid times shal be the end of the world or after the resurrection of the dead This Question saith he may easily be resolved by that we have said in the former Chapter For when the sacred Scripture treats concerning the dayes of the Messiah it alwayes calls that time 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i.e. the end of dayes So Gen. 49.1 Gather your selves together saith Jacob to his sons and I will tell you that which shall befall you 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the end of dayes Upon which R. Moses Gerundensis commentating saith where ever there is speech concerning the end of dayes it is to be understood of the dayes of the Messia Jacob would have told his sons what should befall them in the dayes of the Messiah but God inhibited him The like phrase is in Balaams speech in Numb 24.14 c. Come I will advertise thee what this people shal do to thy people in the end of dayes I shal see him saith he speaking of the Messiah but not Now I shal behold him but not nigh There shal come a Star out of Jacob and a Scepter shal arise out of Israel he shal strike through the corners of Moab and destroy all the children of Seth. Note that the time is by him called the end of dayes Therefore he saith I see it but not nigh Againe when he saith he will destroy or demolish the children of Seth he means the inhabitants of the whole world From whence it doth appear that that is to be understood of the Messiah He the said Rabby alleadgeth many other places for that phrase the end of dayes to be taken for the dayes of the Messiah yet to come as Isa 2.2 Jer. 30.24 Chap. 31.1 Ezek. 38.16 Hos 3.5 Mich. 4.1 Dan. 10.14 And because saith R. Menasse our deliverance is deferred to so long a time hence and distant from us therefore David makes that vehement complaint Psal 89. v. 49. O Lord where are thy former loving kindnesses which thou swarest unto David in thy truth c. But I am not ignorant saith Menasse that they that dissent from us do make a double coming of the Messiah and so do expound those places far otherwise But I have no list saith he at this time to dispute with any concerning that thing but simply and candidly to hold forth the opinion which the Hebrews professe From what hath been said two things saith he doe necessarily follow One that the redemption of Israel shall be extended unto the end of the world The other that that same end shall come before the resurrection of the dead And because that end shall take its beginning in the dayes of Messiah therefore there is a necessity that a NEW WORLD SHALL BEGIN FROM THE RESVRRECTION OF THE DEAD therefore it is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The world to come Dan. 12. v. ult Go thy way unto the end and rest and awake in thy lot in the end of dayes The same is to bee collected out of the saying of the Ancients * In Gemara Abodae Zarae cap. 1. cap. 6. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. It is pronounced in the School of Elia not the Thesbit but of some Rabbin that the world shall continue six thousand yeers In two thousand is the void or empty time that is the time untill Abraham being void of Moses Law In two thousand is the time of the Law In two thousand are the dayes of the Messiah So that as it is read elsewhere * In Sebet Jeudah It is not said that the Messiah shal come in the end of four thousand yeers or in the beginning of five thousand yeers but onely that the dayes of the Messiah shall be two thousand yeers that is that within that space the Messiah shall come about the beginning middle or end Which last words say I are very considerable by us Christians For within that space Christ is come and will come ☜ again ¶ 4 In the fourth Chapter are declared the opinions of the ancient Rabbins concerning
of themriding upon horses a great company and a mighty Army And thou shalt come up against my people of Israel as a cloud to cover the land it shall be in the latter dayes and I will bring thee against my Land that the heathen may know me when I shal be sanctified in thee O Gog before their eyes Therefore saith Menasse this war being ended THERE SHALL BEE A GREAT CHANGE OF ALL THINGS For then saith he in my opinion shall bee THE END OF THE WORLD * Indeed then shall be an end of this world viz. the begining of the dayes of the Messiah but not the ultimate end of the world as that in the 21 22 23. 24. verses quoted by R. Menasse plainly shews viz. sword pestilence blood hailstones c. of which there is no use at the ultimate end of the world And in the next Chapter viz. the 39. of Ezekiel the Prophet describing the destruction of Gog saith v. 2. that he should not be totally destroyed but onely part viz. onely the sixth part as some will The other five parts shall be reserved as Vatablus expounds to be destroyed at the end of the thousand yeers of the Kingdome of the Messiah Rev. 20 7. Besides Ezekiel in the next Chapter viz. the 40 c. to the end of the Book describes a glorious state of the Jews on earth after the destruction of Gog and Magog And therefore the Prophets former description of their destruction cannot bee at the ultimate end of the world As the restoring of the Temple of the Jews described in that 40. Chapter of Ezek. c. to the end of Book following the destruction of Gog is a Type of New-Jerusalem As Mr. Mede asserts and Dr. Twisse approves Mede Diatr pars 4. page 546. as it is related in the 20. Vers c. The fishes of the sea and fowls of heaven and the beasts of the field and all creeping things c. shall shake at my presence and the mountaines shall be thrown down and the steep places shall fall and every wall shall fall to the ground c. verse 21 22 23 24. to the end of the Chapter Secondly It may be confirmed out of Joel Chapter 3.1 2. Thirdly out of Dan. Chapter 12.1 c. ☞ Who this Gog and Magog are it is not stated by the Jewish Rabbins Mr. Mede saith Diatr pars 4. p. 546. The Turk is Gog and Magog and Dr. Twisse highly approves it But the Jewish Rabbins deliver their minde uncertainly I know saith R. Menasse that others by the war of Gog and Magog doe understand the Antichristian age that shall be at the end of the world Hence Augustine saith l. 20 De Civit. Dei c. 1. Gog is the Devil and Magog the Army of Antichrist Ambrose thinks Gog to be the Goths who invaded and everted many of the Roman Provinces l. 20. De demonstr Evangel cap. 3. Eusebius saith he did thinke l. 5. c. 13. or 23. Gog to be the Roman Emperour and Magog his Kingdome and Empire Pliny asserteth l. 5. c. 23. That there is a City of Cava Syria which he calls Bombices or Bombice and Hierapolis that is called by the Syrians Magog The Hebrews saith he know indeed that Magog is of the posterity of Japhet but which is that Nation at this day they do not know ¶ 6. In the sixth Chapter we have the RESTAURATION or RESTITUTION of the world in the dayes of the New world punctually described as they say to the life by a parallel with the six dayes works of the first Creation viz. In the first day was created light which was saith R. Menasse according to the opinion of the Ancients a supernatural light ** Beresit Raba Paras 3. So in the Restauration of the World there shall be an extraordinary transcendent light according to Isaiah Chap. 60. v. 19. The Sun shall be no more thy light by day neither for brightnesse shall the moon give light unto thee but THE LORD SHALL BE UNTO THEE AN EVERLASTING LIGHT and thy God thy glory On which words Isaac Abravanel comments thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. Thou shalt have no need of solary light or light of the Sunne by reason of the divine light On the second day was created the Expanse as the Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 calls it or Firmament as we call it according to the Greek which saith R. Menasse according to the opinion of the learned signifies the Region of the ayre So this as we said afore in the New world shall be purged or refined from all noxious exhalations by which is signified saith Ahen Ezra the New heaven And all evill spirits and Devils whose seat was in the Ayre shall bee removed thence according to that in the Tract of Aboda * Aboda Zara. cap. 5. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. Hell shall not be in the new world But the blessed God at the day of judgement shall draw forth the Sunne out of its sheath and torment the wicked So Malach. 4.1 it is said Behold the day cometh that shall burne like an oven And Zach. 13.2 I will cause the unclean spirit to passe out of the land In the third dayes work the dry land appeared and the plants were created which after were cursed for Adams sinne Therefore in the New world the earth shall be amended and a better efficacie and vertue shall be instilled into it for germination according to Aben Ezra thence in Siphra it is said by the Ancients on Levit. 26.4 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. The earth shall give her increase not in the manner it doth now but as it did in the time of Adam Likewise we read in Semot * Semot Raba paras 15. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. It shall be that the trees shall yeeld their fruit every month according to Ezek. 47.12 In the fourth day was created the Sunne Moon and Stars These also shall be renewed For the light of the Sunne the fountain and originall of all celestial light shall in a marvellous manner be augmented as in Semot we read * Semo R. par 12. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. The blessed God will cause that the Sun shall shine forth nine and forty parts of more light as it is said ** Isa 30.26 The light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sun and the light of the Sun shal be sevenfold more as the light of seven dayes In the fifth day were created the Fishes and Fowls and the great Leviathan By which is understood saith Menasse according to the opinion of the Ancients it taken litterally That God will prepare in the world to come all curiosities for the just In the sixth day were created all Animals void of reason and last of all Adam of the dust of the ground yet most perfect in all respects and that without conjunction of male
and female The Rabbins further say that his body was full of light or lightsome and was of a goodly stature Therefore out of doubt when Adam shall rise again for he saith the Rabbi shall be raised first he shall rise according to his first form and stature Yea moreover his body shall then be far more lightsome diaphanous or transparent According to that of the Ancients * In Midras a-Nehelam in Paras Veycra Elau 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. R. Levi saith The soule whiles it is in its glorious estate sustaines it selfe with a superiour light and is cloathed with it when it shal returne to its body in the world to come it shal returne with the same light and then the body shal shine as the splendor of heaven accordinng to that of Dan. 12. They that understand or the intelligent shal shine as the brightnesse of heaven And because saith R. Menasse in that New world SINNE SHALL HAVE ☜ NO PLACE as we shall demonstrate in that which is to follow therefore by good consequence the body shall alwayes remaine in the same glory and splendor and so the whole world to bee restored into the same state wherein it was before sinne entred Mean time note that this renovation of the Lord shall in my judgement differ from the state of the first Creation 1 This world was made of nothing but that to come not of nothing but of the things already created being endowed with a new disposition and better quality 2 At first this world was made in seven dayes But the other shall be new-formed in one day 3 This world began with night the other shall begin with day according to that in Zechary Chapter 14.7 At evening it shall be light There are that wil have all that we have hitherto said to come to passe in the time of the Messiah and to that they think doth belong that saying of the Ancients 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. e. prepared to come But if any rightly weigh what the Ancients have said as was afore hinted * Viz. In cha 2. of the third Book of R. menasse is the whole matter at large especially that in Midras a-Nehelam he shall finde that these things are to be understood of the New world which begins with the resurrection from the dead The summe of which matter is this That unto the comming of the Messial say the Rabbins is knit on as immediately subsequent the resurrection from the dead Now it is worth the weighing what space there may be of the former to the beginning ☜ of the latter Observe this In the Sanhedrim Chap. 11. divers opinions are propounded R. Eliezer maketh the space to bee foure hundred yeers R. Elhazar Ben Hazaria maketh it to bee seventy yeers R. Elhazar forty yeers These all differ and yet were not altogether rash in their opinions For R. Eliezer computed according to the time of the Egyptian Captivity four hundred yeers R. Elhazar Ben Hazariah according to the Babylonian Captivity seventy yeers And R. Elhazar forty yeers according to the time of the Jews peregrination in the wildernesse And all three of them each to confirm his own opinion bring that of the 90. Psalm v. 15. Make us glad according to the dayes wherein thou hast afflicted us and the yeers wherein we have seen evil For the Rabbins affirmed afore that after the Jews shall be brought back by the Messiah to their owne land they shall be very much troubled by Gog and Magog of which space of time I conceive is the present dispute among these Rabbins but now quoted In Midras a-Nehelem wee finde it written 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i. e. THAT THE CONGREGATING or GATHERING TOGETHER OF THE ☞ CAPTIVE Jews shall ANTICIPATE or PRECEDE THE RESURRRECTION OF THE DEAD THE SPACE OF FORTY YEERS And saith R. Menasse if this last opinion bee received and delivered by the Ancients it may be soundly admitted because it implyes no contradiction nor doth it contain any difficulty * Thus R. Menasse out of the Rabbins But I think that it is neer the matter in the sacred compute of the holy Scripture Dan. 12. v. 11 12. if carefully computed and compared with v. 1. Touching the troubles at the time when Michael shall stand up to deliver his people together with v. ult touching the resurrection of the dead Thus wee hear why R. Menasse would refer the glory afore spoken rather to the New world then to the dayes of the Messiah Now hear him go on in this sixth Chapter and that in a way of condiscention of referring it if any will to the dayes of the Messiah If saith R. Menasse it so seem good to any he may refer the glorious things aforesaid in some sort unto the times of the Messiah because both times are connexed the one on to the end of the other as we shewed afore Again because the end of the resurrection is that the raised may enjoy the happinesse of that age therefore they may be taken for one and the same time Those admirable verses of the Kingly Prophet David Ps 104. do not a little serve to our purpose as they seem to me viz. v. 27 28 29 and 30. All wait or hope upon thee Thou givest them their meat in due season c. Thou hidest thy face they are troubled Thou takest away their breath they dye and return to their dust Thou sendest forth thy Spirit they are CREATED and thou RENEWEST THE face of the earth Where the Prophet saith that after death the soule the second time returns to the body and then the earth is renovated ¶ 7 In the 7 8 9 10 and 11. Chapters these questions are put and resolved chiefly 1 Whether then shall be the day of judgement To which the Rabbins answer is out of many Scriptures and allegations of Antiquity That after the world shal be made new and the dead raised then shal be a day of judgement In part God judged afore the living in the war of Gog and Magog EXCEPTING A THIRD PART OF THEM †☞ So that according to the Rabbins also a part of Gog and Magog as was said a little afore are reserved who in all probability are they that shall make head at the end of the thousand yeers Rev. 20. v. 7. And after he shall come to judge the dead 2 Whether then shall be the restauration of the place and parts of worship and a settlement of the fruition of the holy land To which it is answered yea 3 Whether there shall be the use of food and prolification to which Gerundensis answers that then shall be no other then a spiritual life though some other Rabbins are of another minde 4 Whether they that are raised shall dye any more To which the § 4 general answer of the Rabbins is negative Thus far you have heard the opinion of the Jews concerning the glorious state on earth yet to come
make drunk the inhabitants of the earth by his Vicar the Beast under the vizzard of devotion or Church I say to this beside what we have said already to anticipate this objection I adde that herein it seems to mee the Doctor hath forgotten some most evidently plaine Texts For all along the Revelation untill the very time of the utter ruine of Antichrist there is expresse mention of the Devils making the Nations drunke by his Vicar the Beast with the wine of spiritual fornication i.e. of departing from Christ to worship Idols or to imbrace false worship And with all it is expressed that this is the cause of the ruine of the Beast the Harlot the Vicar of Christ So expresly Rev. 14.8 verse Babylon is fallen is fallen because she hath made the Nations drunk with the wine of the wrath of her fornication Rev. 17.1 2 3. I will shew thee the judgement of the great Whore with whom the Kings of the earth have committed fornication and the inhabitants of the earth have been made drunk with the wine of her fornication Rev. 18.2 3. An Angel cryed mightily with a strong voice saying Babylon the Great is fallen is fallen and is become the habitation of devils For all Nations have drunk of the wine of the wrath of her fornication Rev. 19.1 2. Ye have the same thing more plainly without figures A voyce of much people saying Allelujah to the Lord for true and righteous are his judgements for he hath judged the great Whore which did corrupt the earth with her fornication And in the latter end of this same Chapter is a full end of the Beast and false Prophet viz. cast into the lake of fire Observe First That in one of these places viz. Rev. 17.2 There is mention onely of wine of fornication to signifie the sinne of spiritual adultery viz. Idolatry In opposition to this to signifie the judgement due to this sinne it is said the Wine of the wrath of God So Rev. 14.10 Rev. 16.19 For this cause in the other two places Rev. 17.2 Rev. 18.3 the phrases to signifie both sin and judgement are put together Wine of wrath of fornication to the end that wee might carry along with us in our minds that all the time of the Harlot shee made the Nations drunk therefore all that while wrath hung over her till it fell down upon her and brought her to unter ruine as we see the fulfilling set down Chapter 19. latter end Secondly observe that in opposition to this making the Nations drunke with the wine of spiritual fornication is added presently after the ruine of that drunken-making Harlot Chap. 19. ult That in Chap. 20.1 c. Satan is bound cast into the Pit and sealed that he may seduce or deceive the Nations no more till the thousand yeers bee finished Yee see then how cleerly this passage of the Doctor is answered and that that in Rev. 20. vers 3. must mean that Satan should be bound that hee should not by his Vicar make the Nations so much as drunk with the wine of her fornication of Idolatrous doctrines For as Pareus expounds As wine is pleasant to the eye and taste so Antichrist did make the Kings and Inhabitants of the earth take downe his doctrines of departing from Christ and imbracing of Idolatrous worship under pretence of Religion devotion and Church See Pareus on Rev. 14.17.18 afore quoted and so Pareus brings up the Reere full against the Doctor ¶ 3 To that clause wherein the Doctor doth undertake to give the sense of Satans not seducing the Nations to signifie That he shall not in an universal War by the open enemies of Christ with force and Armes compell men to Paganisme and to as it were abjured Idolatry and Superstition I say to this clause and this exposition therein besides what hath been said we adde First That by this opinion Satans binding must begin at Constantine the Great And that Satan should no more so seduce the Nations to an universall Warre with force of Arms to compell men to Paganisme till the time of the rising of Gog and Magog to Warre for so the Doctor doth after expresly declare his sense I say that by this opinion of the Doctor Satan is still bound ever since the time of Constantine 310 yeers since Christ which make above a thousand yeers viz. one thousand three hundred and forty and upwards So reckon but to this day and Satan is bound above three hundred and forty yeers above the thousand yeers so precisely limited by the Apostle John Revel 20. And yet still shall bee bound according to the Doctors opinion till the War of Gog and Magog which will bee a thousand yeers more and the last thousand afore the ultimate judgement So Satan shall by this account bee bound I know not how much above two thousand yeers contrary to St. John Note secondly That by the Dr. from Constantines time down-ward to this day Satan was not bound in his efficacy upon his instruments but only the shape and manner of the actings of his instruments were changed so the system and method of the Revelation expresly Rev. 13.1.12 in 1 verse hee ariseth out of the Sea and hath seven heads and ten horns and the Dragon gave him his power and verse 11. and 12. Hee comes up out of the earth and hath two hornes like a Lamb and spake as a DRAGON and he exerciseth all the power of the first Beast and causeth the earth and them that dwell therein to worship the first Beast So that yee see the devils power the same still the Dragon acts effectually onely the shape of his instruments is changed And therefore the continuance of the Beast in power is computed two and forty months i.e. One thousand two hundred sixty yeers And the Dragon is said to persecute the Woman the Church and indeavoured War after Constantine for the space of One thousand one hundred and sixty yeers Rev. 12. For so long she flyes and abides in the wildernesse Now if the Beast hath power One thousand two hundred and sixty yeers beginning presently after Constantines time within eighty yeers where then shall bee place found for the thousand yeers of binding Satan presently after Constantine For Satan is not bound as long as Antichrist is in power who is in power to this day § 5 But I need not pursue further The Doctor himselfe sees S. 2. afore great objections against this opinion of his of the thousand yeers next to Constantine and of his interpretation of Satans binding to be onely from open general War to all which hee indeavours to answer But he answers not satisfactorily to mee For first in generall we answer to that he objects of Arrianisme after Constantine Apostasies in Julian and Devastations by Goths Vandals and Saracens that these make not up the all that may be objected against the binding up of Satan from Constant M. and down-ward for a thousand yeers For mark
ten yeers after Christ which was a hundred yeers within the Drs. thousand yeers the Goths invaded Italy under Alarichus their Leader From whence to the crowning of Carolus Magnus which was about seven hundred seventy one after Christ are about three hundred and seventy yeers others say foure hundred all within the Doctors thousand yeers All which time Italy and the Churches there was never at rest sed humanorum malorum extrema omnia passa est Atque ecclesia Dei quae paulo ante constituta per Constantinum inde per annos centum in aliqua esse dignitate ac potentiâ caeperat maximam ex omni parte jacturam labemque contuaxit but suffered the extremest evils and defilements Anno foure hundred thirty and six still within the Drs. thousand yeers The Goths made fearful troubles taking holds c. in Gallia or France And secondly for the Saracens lo in Anno seven hundred and thirty yeers after Christ still part of the Doctors thousand yeers three hundred and eighty thousand Saracens in an hostile way had been in Gallia how long before I know not This was foure hundred and odde yeers within the Doctors thousand yeers Anno one thousand and nine yeers after Christ neer three hundred yeers afore the end of the Doctors thousand yeers the Saracens invaded Jerusalem destroyed the Temple c. Anno one thousand ninety six yeers which is above two hundred yeers afore the Doctors thousand yeers end begining at Constantine three hundred yeers after Christ as he computed the Saracens having as we said invaded the Holy land thence sprang the Holy war of many Christian Princes and innumerable of Christian people warring with the Saracens which as Pucherius Gul. Tyrius Blondus and the Writer of the French and German affairs and Bucholcerus shew cost an innumerable of Christians bloud And the Saracens continue there to this day and shall saith Daniel chap. 12. till a time and times and halfe a time be fulfilled Now if I had time to be tedious in all particulars to apply all to the Doctors assertion of the Goths Vandals and Saracens wherein would appeare any shew of the Doctors thousand yeers of binding Satan in this space sc from Constantines time c. ¶ 4 But the Doctor gives many distinctions in the close of his Argument viz See afore at S. 2. ¶ 4. To the first That the Church sighed or groaned under a correcting or afflicting calamity but not under an oppressing Majesty as before in the ten persecutions of the R. Emperours we thus answer First did not the Church suffer in Constantine M. his time in Persia under their King to the slaughter of sixteen thousand was not there an oppressing Majesty as we shewed at large afore and so continued there till the death of Constantine M. and after to Theodosius 2 Was not Constantius an oppressing Majesty when hee sent five thousand souldiers to kill Athanasius And Georgius an Arian Bishop was furnished with souldiers whereby to persecute with torments the Christians as wee shewed at large afore and under him Macedonius an Arian Bishop saith the Author of the ☞ Arian history used no lesse cruelty in compelling Christians to communicate with him then was used of old to compell Christians to sacrifice to the Idols of the Gentiles And is not Arianisme denying the God-head of Christ as bad or worse then Heathenisme being a Blasphemy and against the evident Scripture which the Heathens have not 3 Was not Julian an oppressing Majesty when the History of the Arian persecution saith hee gave no mandate for persecution because he would not honour the magnanimity of Christians But was not his punishment intended and acted by him upon Caesarea an act of a violent oppressing Majesty And further is not this a rule received of all for truth Hee that doth not forbid evill when hee may commands it See Julian permits all cruelties as aforesaid And when hee was petitioned for reliefe he scoffed at the petitioners and the Scriptures See more in the History of the Arian persecution By this we have said the Doctors second distinction of another manner of Persecution is also overthrown viz. That though the Church in this space was not free from forreigne enemies yet free from domesticke Princes trampling it And here with the former we may take in opportunely another distinction or limitation put in the head of these distinctions by the Doctor viz. As Goths and Vandals c. invaded so they alwayes either felt the power of some King or Emperour as Patrons and Nurses or else they imbraced their faith To both wee answer Were the Saracens and Turks to this day repelled or converted How did they feel the Princes power whom they conquered And are they not blasphemous Mahumetans to this day And did not the Goths and Vandals prevaile for neer foure hundred yeers as wee shewed afore in Italy to the utter devastation of the Church almost And what conversion had the Goths c. unlesse a perversion to Arrianisme by those Arrians Valens the Emperour sent them as we shewed afore And lastly how were those Princes Nurses who though they opposed forreigne Princes to defend their dignity yet meane while persecuted at home being Arians as Valens or c. and the Christian Princes that went against the Saracens into the Holy-land were Papists of whose persecutions Fox and many Ecclesiastical Histories make large mention As to the Doctors third distinction That the persecution in the Doctors thousand yeers was not universal but particular We answer If the Dr. means an absolute universal persecution over the face of the whole earth where ever were any Christians and at the same time then when ever was Satan so loose according to the Doctors opinion But if the Doctor means by universal a persecution in most Kingdomes of the World here and there and ever and anon in the space of the Doctors thousand yeers where ever were any Christians then we shall prove this if not more to have been so all the time of the Doctors thousand yeers For example of Persia We spake afore something of the same Persia we adde that Mr. Fox in his Book of Martyrs 1. Vol. pag. 127. of his Edit Anno 1641. having spoken of the persecution in Persia in Constantine M. time and the copy of his letter goes on to shew us and that by particular instances of terrible persecutions in the same Persia after Constantine M. time viz. in the time of Theodosius his reign Theodosius 1. was in Anno three hundred seventy eight after Christ Helvic Theodosius 2. in Anno foure hundred and eight Theodosius 3. Anno seven hundred and five Take either or all all are within the Doctors thousand yeers And this persecution was so notorious that the Roman Emperour at this time sent Embassadours for deliverance of some of the Martyrs So in Fox ibid. Then for the Roman Empire of Goths and Vandals invading Italy Anno seven hundred seventy one after Christ
there almost ruining the Church with all manner of calamities for four hundred yeers ye heard afore also of the Saracens invading Gallia Anno seven hundred and thirty after Christ and of their going into Judaea Anno 1009 yeers after Christ After which Warre continued with Christian Princes for divers hundreds of yeers not repelled as yet And as it was a good while after Constantine was Emperour ere he had stayed the bulke and rage of the tenth persecution many suffering almost in all Constantines time in several Kingdomes under the Roman Empire See Mr. Fox so after Constantines time downe all along the Doctors thousand yeers more or lesse in most Kingdomes under the Roman Empire See Mr. Fox or any Chronology which for avoyding tediousnesse we omit as to particulars So that from within the Doctors thousand yeers a long time The two Witnesses have Prophesied a great part of their one thousand two hundred and sixty yeers in sackcloth The Woman hath fled into the wildernesse The Beast hath power and the Dragon hath endeavoured the ruine of the Woman Rev. 11. Rev. 12. Rev. 13. And is not this universal persecution all the Doctors thousand yeers surely there were so many particulars as made up an universal To the Doctors last distinction That it was not continual but by turns or vicissitudes First we retort this upon the Doctor He saith that Satan was loosed before Constantine M. time Yet then the persecution was but by turnes witnesse the number of ten 2 After the time of Constantinus M. time which was about three hundred thirty six some say three hundred thirty one where or when was there any eminent stop for at least divers hundred yeers in the Roman Empire As all this while from the beginning of Constantines M. down those severall hundreds of yeers the persecution in Persia continued 3 In the Revel in the time of Satans being loosed yee shall finde it prophesied of some little interruption of the full tide of persecution yet then is Satan loosed To close our answer the Doctors whole Argument is not so proper and demonstrative but it may bee retorted Satans binding and Saints reigning concur But the Saints have not yet reigned no not in the pict thousand yeers of the Doctors but errours persecutions wars c. pressing downe the Churches as ye have heard have that time abounded by Arians Julian Goths and Vandals Saracens and Pope and Papists and Socinians and Turke and tyranical Kings and Princes to this day ergo this is not the thousand yeers of the binding of Satan And therefore if this the Doctors thousand yeers be past farewell they Carnall and low Saints seeing the sorrowfull preface wish and study to make them past Higher Saints seeing the joyful possession beleeve the plaine Scripture that they are yet to come The Saints must reign with Christ saith our Text Rev. 20.4 But in heaven Christ reignes not with them therefore upon earth Rev. 5.10 But they have not yet reigned For before that Antichrist must downe in the West the tenth part of the City must fall 2 The Jewes must be called 3 Satan bound that hee deceive no more till after the thousand yeers surely therefore the world must bee altered from that it is now afore that SECT II. The Doctors second Argument WHich he asserts he saith from those periods in which the event hath dictated to the more circumspect that Satan was loosed There are foure periods saith he more famous then the rest First in the yeer one thousand after the birth of Christ in the time of Pope Sylvester the second At which time the manifestation of Antichrist was promulgated in France preached at Paris divulged over the world and believed of many Second period is terminated by Pope Benedict the ninth whose time in and out and in the Papall chaire Reusner puts in the yeer Anno one thousand thirty two to one thousand forty six yeers or thereabout in which time all both Easterne and Westerne cry out Satan is loosed Third period takes its beginning in the destruction of Jerusalem in the time of Pope Hildebrand called Gregory the seventh and placed Anno one thousand seventy three by Reusner The life acts decrees of which Hildebrand seemed so mischievous and hellish to the Divines and Historians of that age that they were out of all doubt that the mystery of iniquity in the Revelation then attained its 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 highest increment and perfection of age and strength Fourth and last is terminated in Pope Boniface the 8. and is the beginning of the Ottoman family which time Reusner and Bucholcerus and Helvious put about Anno one thousand three hundred but draws its original begining from the government of Constantine the Great Of this Boniface the eighth it was common to say He entred in as a Fox lived as a Lion and dyed like a Dog So that from hence forward the Westerne Antichrist on one hand and the Easterne Mahumetan on the other rushing in with open robberies shew that Satan is loosed setting both of them on fire which ever since more or lesse burning as yet as wee feel are not extinguished All this is in Doctor Prideaux his major Proposition But saith he in the minor It is agreed among many as I have intimated afore in our first Argument and the events of things agree to it that the yeers of the binding of Satan did runne downe all the time of the said termes I have described of which this last is most conspicuous therefore this last opinion should at least out-weigh the rest viz. that Satan was all that time bound Wee answer first in general by denying the minor And as hee refers us to his former argument for proof so we refer you to our answer to it for refutation of it As hee urgeth the argument of many so we have and shall ballance against them the agreement of very many famous men on the contrary Howbeit we goe by divine rule and reason not by humane vote And as the Dr. argues so wee shall take up some passages in the Doctors argument to overthrow his argument and his distinction he gives by way of exposition to that his argument For in the close of this argument he fearing lest some viewing the said four periods should object as he expresseth that in these four terms appears rather the licentionsnesse of Satan then the binding of Satan distinguisheth thus We must saith he hold or keep in mind which before we inculcated That Satan invades the Church either with open butcheries by Tyrants raging with the sword or with occult hypocrisie under pretence of piety Now as Satan being bound the Papal Apollyon his Vicar was not wanting strenuously to supply his place so he being loosed afterwards the Turke in the Ottoman family came in to make up the band or legion Now I say to overthrow the minor and this his distinction we will take up some passages in his argument against him ¶ 1
family in heaven and earth is named There is Bethel even where God in special appears which special appearance is in the person of Christ And lastly where ever Christ is with us wee are with him so as that for that time is heaven to us therefore the Apostle Paul desiring a state in the world to come Phil. 1.23 calls it a being with Christ not heaven So that yet still it remaines to bee proved that Christ shall not appear to his people before the ultimate day of judgement or that Christ hath no place of refreshing his people for a time before the ultimate day of judgement but onely the highest heavens after the ultimate day of judgement SECT II. Mr. Baylies second Argument § 1 AS to his accusation of coyning new and false senses to many Scriptures wee say it is a begging of the Question And we retort it For Mr. B. opinion for many generations hath so allegorised upon all the Prophets speaking of the state of the Jewes and of the universal Church to be on earth afore the ultimate day of â—udgement that I confesse I was thereby for a long time kept in the darke so that I could make no use of the Histories and Prophesies of the Old and New Testament in relation to these things but onely here and there by way of morall observations and allusions § 7 But let us heare his Argument Christ sits at the right hand of God till the last day therefore he comes not to reign on earth a 1000 yeers before the last day To which we say that this argument thus far hath been argued and answered in effect in the first argument yet because there are some fresh proofs we are contented againe to answer it and to discusse them And for answer we deny the Antecedent taking the last day in Mr. Bailyes sense for the ultimate day of judgement But if we take the last day for that day in 2 Pet. 3. which shall be a thousand yeers then Mr. Baily concludes nothing against us But Mr. Baily will prove the Antecedent that Christ doth sit at the right hand of the Father till the last day meaning the ultimate day of judgement viz. the evening of our last day For so I suppose he means his proof is his major Proposition in Ps 110.1 Christ sits at the right hand of God till ALL his enemies be made his footstool Whence he assumes this minor But all his enemies are not made his footstool till the last day For till then Satan death and all wicked men are not fully destroyed therefore c. To this major Proposition out of Ps 110.1 Mr. B puts in a word of great consequence to serve his own turne which in divine arguing from a text is very foule play viz. the word ALL. For as it is not in our English Translation so nor is it in the Hebrew text where it is onely 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 thine enemies indefinitly And the Apostle having an infallible spirit to know the mind of the Scriptures quoting this place Heb. 10.13 renders it that Christ sits there expecting 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. putting no ALL in But suppose it be said ALL all his enemies this is sufficiently fulfilled when Christ overcomes all all his enemies are so subdued yea visibly in themselves or in their effects that they shall never hurt the Church more which shall come to passe when the Iewes are settled at the beginning of the thousand yeers as many Scriptures afore shewed And to speake according to St. Iohn in the Revelation then as in Chap. 19. Antichrist and all his adherents shall downe then as in Chapter 20. Satan shall downe then as in Chapter 21 Sinne shall downe And for death this is destroyed Chapter 20. For if all the Saints then live and reigne a thousand yeers then is this a state of immortality of their bodies And for the ultimate day of judgement then is not a destroying of death but a reviving of the worst death sc the second death to the worst of men so that the wicked live onely to dye that death Rev. 20.12 to the end It is said that the last enemy of the Saints that is destroyed is death 1 Cor. 11. Because so St. Iohn names the enemes in order First all the wicked Rev. 19. Then the Devill Rev. 20.1 And last of all death v. 4. and all these orderly at the beginning of the thousand yeers at the beginning of the seventh Angels sounding his Trumpet I say at the beginning thereof And to make all our answer plainer When it is said All shall be under Christs feet the meaning is not that all shall be annihilated For after the ultimate day of judgement there shall be viz. in hell sinne and devils and wicked men and the greatest death viz. the second death i. e. eternall condemnation therefore the meaning must bee that all shall be so under Christs feet that they shall no more mischiefe the Church Satan shall not seduce them Sinne shall not touch them Death shall not dissolve them But at the end of the thousand yeers Satan and the hypocrites in the corners of the world shall begin to make an head and this immediately draws downe Christ to the ultimate day of judgement who raiseth all the dead wicked and takes them and the wicked that are then alive and passeth everlasting condemnation upon them Rev. 20.7 to the end of the Chapter SECT III. Mr. Bailyes third Argument § 1 ALL the godly at Christs comming from heaven doe rise immediately to a heavenly glory ergo none of them doe arise to a temporall glory for a thousand yeers upon earth § 2 Answ We might deny that wee call the Argument you call it the consequence because Mr. Baily doth not say to glory in heaven much lesse the highest heaven For their state on earth a thousand yeers is not onely an heavenly glory but the state is called Heaven Rev. 21.1 c. 2 Pet. 3. But that we shall fix our answer upon will be the denying of the Antecedent and expounding of the proof Mr. Baily brings for proof of the Antecedent 1 Cor. Chap. 15. vers 22.1 Thess 4.14 Matth. 25.31 Joh. 6.39.40.44 Heb. 9.28 ¶ 1 To the two first we answered afore For the third place of Matthew it concludes nothing to the said Antecedent For Christ separates the sheep from the goats notably at the beginning of the thousand yeers when the open wicked then alive generally perish Revelation 19. and all the Saints alive are set in a glorious condition Chap. 20. ¶ 2 To the fourth place viz. in Joh. 6.39.40.44 I will raise it up at the last day We answer this doth not infer any thing in behalf of the Antecedent For lo this thousand yeers is truly the last day For as it is in 2 Pet. 3. before it are the last dayes in which men shall say Where is the promise of his comming And it is after said A thousand yeers
are as one day with the Lord and then after that by way of exposition he saith We expect new heavens and a new earth All this in 2 Pet. 3. The beginning of the thousand yeers is the morning and day-light of this last day And the last end is the evening and night So that in the morning of this last day they that are Christs are raised and as soon as raised their everlasting life begins for they dye no more for ought I know ¶ 3 To the fifth and last place we answer It doth not infer the Antecedent The words in that Heb. 9.28 are Unto them that looke for him shall he appeare the second time without sinne unto salvation All that Mr. Baily saith upon this place to stretch it to his end is That Christ hath but two times of comming to the earth First in weaknesse to dye upon the Crosse Second time in glory to give everlasting salvation without distinction to all beleevers who look for his comming To which words of Mr. Baily wee say That it doth not follow infallibly that because the Apostle there names two commings by reason of the Antithesis of a second state in opposition to the state of humiliation that therefore there is no third time of his comming Mr. B. now confesseth a second comming of Christ to the earth And it were nothing contrary to Scripture if wee should say that after his second comming at the beginning of the thousand yeers he shall come againe the third time to universall and ultimate judgement But we contend not in this as in relation to our particular point here in hand but shall conclude our answer with this that all that can be inferred from this place is onely this That whereas Christ appeared with sinne upon the Crosse i. e. Hee was reputed a sinner by men and our sin imputed to him by God and was so was made a sacrifice for sin Isa 53.2 Cor. 5. v. ult At his next appearing his second appearing after this as the Apostle reckons hee shall appear in no such garb under no such opinion or notion but most glorious which is truly performed at the beginning of the thousand yeers at which time begins the salvation of them that look for him SECT IV. Mr. Bailyes fourth Argument THe conceit of the thousand yeers makes Christs Kingdome to be earthly and most observable for all worldly glory But the Scripture makes it to be spirituall without all worldly pompe Neither doth the word of God make the Kingdome of the Mediator of two kinds and of a different nature but one uniform from the beginning to the end Luke 1.32 The Lord shall give unto him the Throne of his Father David and he shall reigne over the house of Jacob for ever And 1 Cor. 15.25 He must reigne till hee hath put all things under his feet Here this is but one Kingdome and one way of ruling a Kingdome meerly spiritual and no wise worldly Luke 17.20 The Kingdome of God commeth not with observation neither shall they say Lo here or lo there but the Kingdome of God is within you And John 18.36 My Kingdome is not of this world If my Kingdome were of this world then would my servants fight but now is my Kingdome not from hence Rom. 14.17 The Kingdome of God is not meat and drinke but righteousnesse peace and joy of the Holy Ghost Eph. 1.20 Hee raised him up from the dead and set him at his right-hand in heavenly places and hath put all things under his feet and gave him to be head over all to the Church Then Mr. Baily concludes with this untrue speech The Millenaries make his Kingdome to appeare in Armies and Battels in feasts and pleasures in worldly pomp and power and will not have his Kingdome to stand in ANY of that spiritual power which since his ascension he hath executed on Principalities and Powers which is a false speech if intended as it appears of all Millenaries and so of Protestant Millenaries And it is an answer sufficient meerly to deny what he doth simply affirme without proof If any shall say that we may give a word of answer to this aspersion and rid our hands of it that Battels and Armies at first shall be remotio impedimenti to beat downe Turk and Pope and all their obstinate adherents as it is in Dan. 12. Rev. 17.16 Rev. 19.19 to the end that so these enemies being beaten downe the Kingdome we speak of might be set up it doth not therefore follow that it is asserted that this Kingdome doth consist in these or if it should be said that to all the spiritual glory and power and pleasures they shall have added all outward comforts in a sanctified manner as Adam had as the Apostle Heb. 2.6 in a quotation out of the eighth Psalme as the eighth Psalme is quoted out of Gen. 1.26 sets forth this Kingdome in its peace and comfort to bee like that of Adam in innocency doth it therefore follow that its ave red that this Kingdome consists in these as in its essentials They marbee additionals and circumstantials Isa 65.16 to the end and Matthy 19.29 yet not be the fundamentals and essentials much lesse can it bee truly imagined that any Protestant so indeed would say as Mr. B. affirmes that this Kingdome of which we speake doth not stand in any of that spiritual power which since Christs Ascension hee hath executed on Principalities and Powers Sure the spiritual power shall continue there though it doth not exercise it selfe on Principalities c. when they have submitted onely I make this exception If Mr. Baily means a Classical Presbyterian power I think there shall be none at all I say the lesse to these foule aspersions in this place because I have so abundantly anticipated my selfe afore where I have ripped up the whole mystery of all this iniquity In the third Book Chapter 3. Section 2. beginning at page 369. Jerome is brought in jerking at the Millenaries to the same tune as doth Mr. Baily But hee is I thinke as soundly and justly jerked for his injustice more scholastico as ever any Libeller was by the Lictor or Bedle of the Magistrate There for his fables you have it retorted upon him that by his owne allegation he intimates that the opinion of the thousand yeers was ancienter then his time And his own words are brought against him wherein he confesseth that many Ecclesiastical men and Martyrs have said the same things that he spake against And therefore hee confesseth that he cannot condemne them even when hee had reported them farre worse then ever they spake Yee have there likewise Justin Martyr brought effectually disproving Jerom. Adde to all yee have there Mr. Medes taking Jerom to task In the same third Book third Chapter and third Section yee have the particulars of the aspersions discussed and their Authors disproved They are fathered upon Cerinthus by one Gaius seconded by Dionysius Alexandrinus simply
beleeved and reported by Eusebius But by the best Antiquity Cerinthus is quitted Gaius doubted of and suspected Dionysius blamed and Eusebius reproved And to make these things good against them we produce Irenaeus Tertullian and Epiphanius And to conclude wee give you there Mr. Medes answer to the said Gaius Dionysius and Eusebius Thus we have repeated the more lest some should not take the paines to read the fore-quoted places But let us leave the tayle of the Argument and wound the head and heart of it and then the heels will easily fall ¶ 1 To the major Proposition and first to the first clause that The conceit of the thousand yeers makes Christs Kingdome to be earthly We answer It no more it makes earthly then to say the Church of Christ on earth makes the Church of Christ earthly because all this while it hath been on earth which notwithstanding is called heavenly Gal. 4.26 Heb. 12.22 Again the Angels businesses are with the Church on earth and about earthly things in relation to the Churches welfare Heb. 1. Dan. 10. yet it follows not that they are therefore earthly To the second clause of the major It makes Christs Kingdome most observable for all worldly glory Answer Though this Kingdome shall have observable for outward glory according to Rev. 21. Kings and Nations shall bring their honour to it yet it doth not follow that we say it shall be most observable for that But for the speciall manifestation of God and the Lamb and all the spirituall beams irradiating from them Rev. 21. dispelling all uncleanness and spiritualizing every thing so that though they injoy the earth upon earth yet not in an earthly manner Sure then shal that be much more verified in 1 Cor. 10.31 and Phil. 3.20 Their conversation is in heaven and doe all to the glory of God ¶ 2 To his minor Proposition First to the first clause But the Scriptures makes it to be spiritual without all Worldly pomp I Answer words are as they are intended In English pomp and vanity are much of the same sense But if by pomp Mr. B. means outward glory Christ hath promised it abundantly in many places of the old Testament before alleadged And also in the new Testament in many places of which afore and particularly in Rev. 21. throughout To the second clause of his minor Neither doth the word of God make the Kingdome of the Mediator of two kinds and of a different nature We answer As all orthodox Divines do distinguish the Church of the Mediator into visible and invisible yet do say and Mr. B. can see it as well as I that they doe not distinguish the Church into severall kinds so it is in this As notwithstanding that in Heb. 1.1 The Church and Word are still of the same kinde and nature in Essence To the third clause of his minor The Word makes the Church one uniform from the beginning to the end We answer This word Uniform is variously used by Prelates and Presbyters which variety doth arise from Diocess and Classes But we thinke if we distinguish of an internal and an external form we shall satisfie the objection The Church is one Uniforme Church in the internal form which is union in and with Christ and through him with one another Eph. 4. And yet this doth not hinder the Church in several ages to have several external formes In Adams standing it was outwardly most glorious as well as inwardly perfect In the ten Fathers time afore the Flood it was in Families with a mean outward glory In the time of Tabernacle made by Moses and of the Temple built by Solomon it had a world of glorious types and abundance of pomp i. e. outward glory In the New Testament in the first 300 yeers it was mean in Constantine M. c. a great deal of outward glory But again of late times in many places very mean yet still wee truly confesse one universal Church in kinde nature essence and internal forme why therefore should it make an objection that when Christs time shall come that is greater then Constantine the Great then Moses then Solomon then Adam that HEE shall make the Church as internally and spiritually most exact so externally glorious If there be any outward glory on earth it shall not be in the hands of the foure Monarchies or any part thereof but in the hands of the Saints considered as the Church not as the world For then the world shall bee Churched Christ not Bishops Christs Spirit not their Liturgy or Letany or Collects shall Church her and give her an Hallelujah for her safe delivery and fulfill that neither the Sunne of worldly power nor the Moon of worldly things shall fright her any more For that Psalme is meant of the Church ¶ 3 To his proofs of the minor viz. That the Scripture makes the Kingdome of the Mediator to be spiritual without all worldly pompe and that neither doth the word of God make that Kingdome to be of two kindes and of two different natures but one and uniforme from the beginning to the end I say that proof he brings for this will be too short by many rounds to reach all this pompe of words in which he dresseth forth his minor Proposition Let us examine his proofs by particulars First that in Luke 1.32 The Lord shall give him the Throne of his Father David and he shall reigne over the house of Jacob for ever Now we aske the question Doth this make out all the straines of Mr. B. minor Nay we have largely shewed this place mightily confirmes our opinion and overthrows the contrary See before Book 3. Chap. 4. Sect. 2. page 383. c. I am loath to spend time and paines in repetition and so to swell this Treatise with unnecessaries I will onely aske Mr. B. where or when yet was fulfilled this same SHALL And WHERE is DAVIDS THRONE now And how doth Christ reigne over the HOUSE of JACOB in any part or in any manner in inward and outward glory To his second proof 1 Cor. 15.25 He must reigne till he have put all things under him We answer first by a question doth this place prove all the clauses of his minor Is here one word to say that in Christs Kingdome there is but one way of ruling that there is but one Kingdome meerly spiritual and in no wise worldly Yea doth not this Text speak the contrary whâ—n it faith all his things as Mr. B. alleadgeth it must be put under his feet Surely this intimates a great alteration of the world that the world shall submit to Christ for the good and service of the Church as many places in the Old Testament doe gloriously inlarge Mr. B. quips us with a Socino-remonstration But sure it is plaine Familisme to turne plaine places into Allegories To the third proof in Luke 17.20 The Kingdome of God commeth not with observation Neither shall they say Lo here or lo there
And accordingly John shews it us Chapt. 11. Chapt. 12 Chapt. 13 Chap. 19. Chap. 20. Lastly Mr. Baily confutes himselfe as hee propounds his argument For hee saith our Doctrine makes the day openâ— when we say The day shall be either one thousand six hundred and fifty or one thousand six hundred ninety five Surely this is not to make the day so certaine or the yeer For saith the Philosopher qui indefinite c. He that answers indefinitely answers nothing Beside we cannot for our lives count so exactly but we may misse at least one yeer if we did absolutely pitch on any one account that were never so right in the footing For my part I shall affirme what is most probable about the account when I come to the seventh and last Book SECT VII Mr. Bailyes seventh Argument THe reward of the Martyrs is everlasting life in the heavens promised to them at Christs comming to judge the just and unjust therefore it is not temporall in an earthly Kingdome of a thousand yeers The Antecedent is proved Matth. 5.10 2 Tim. 4.6 2 Thess 1.6 7 8 9 10. which without doubt is not before the last judgement else the Martyrs would be in a worse case then the soules of other Saints continuing in heaven injoying the Trinity yea a punishment to them being brought downe to the earth to returnâ— to a body not like to the glorious body of Christ nor yet unto these incorruptible immortall spirituall bodies which yet are promised to the least of the faithfull at their resurrection 1 Cor. 15. But unto such a body that eats drinks sleeps fights delights in fleshly pleasures and converseth with beasts and earthly creatures in such a Paradise whereof the Turkish Alcoran and the Jewish Talmud doth speak much But to a godly soule is very tastelesse and to a soul that hath been in heaven exceeding burthensome Answ first We deny the consequence of the Argument For Gods rewarding his people on earth doth not anticipate heaven nor the reward in heaven cut off the rewards on earth See Mat. 19.29 shall receive an hundred fold and shall also inherit eternall life And this in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the New Creation as the word signifies And when they sit on Thrones according to Dan. 7.22 which is according to our Text of Rev. 20.4 Secondly we say that those places Mr. B. brings for the proof of his Antecedent doe prove our assertion viz. of an happinesse of the Saints on earth as well as in heaven As that in 1 Tim. 4.6 7 8. For verse 8. it is said At that day and particularly at Christs appearing To understand which see verse 1. And remember our arguing upon those words Shall judge the quicke and the dead at his appearing and his Kingdome Compare Rev. 19. latter end with Rev. 20.3 4. Likewise that which Mr. Baily urgeth out of 2 Thess 1.6 7 8 9.10 plainly proves a reward on earth as well as in heaven It is a RIGHTEOUS thing c. It is mercy to the Saints but righteousnesse chiefly appears upon the wicked that are punished And this appears more to all the world being done on earth To you that are troubled REST WITH US The Apostle aims at a Rest first on earth compare Heb. 2.5 and Chapter 4. verse 9. Rest when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from HEAVEN Not in Heaven And the flames of fire are expresse Rev. 17 16. and Chapter 18. verse 8 and 9. and Chapter 19 two last Lastly It is said in that 2 Thess 1.9 They shall be punished from the presence of the Lord and from the glory of his power But Christ hath no power in heaven at the ultimate day of judgement but then layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.24 As for Matth. 5.10 there is no mention of the place but in the word Heaven not expressing which of the three heavens as Paul distinguisheth Now St. John calls the â—â—te of the thousand yeers Heaven Rev. 21.1 And in this place of Matth. 5.10 The adjoyning the word KINGDOME to Heaven clearly imports a state on earth For in heaven above nor Saints nor Christ have any Kingdome at the ultimate day of judgement Yee see now how truely Mr. B. saith without doubt the reward in these places is not till the last day of judgement As for M. B. words The Martyrs would be in worse case c. They are grounded on a mistake For all the Saints both the deceased and living shall then share in the same glory on earth For those words It would bee a punishment c. These all flow from ignorance of what the Scripture hath said in this point viz. that their bodies shall in the thousand yeers bee immortall and glorious and conformable to Christs body as we have shewed afore For that Mr. Baily concludes of fighting in the thousand yeers c. let him affirm it when he can without contradicting himself he affirming it a time of all corporall pleasures and when we affirme it And for Turkish Alcoran and Jewish Talmud we have nothing to do with any thing but what we are convinced is according to Scripture But it is the Scottish manner to dispute by branding with reproaches But sure their contrary opinion tends to Familisme SECT VIII Mr. Baylies eighth Argument § 1 THe opinion of the Millenaries supposeth the restauration of Jerusalem and of the Jewish Kingdome after their destruction by the Romans But the Scriptures deny this Ezek. 16.53.55 When I shall bring againe the captivity of Sodome and of Samaria and her daughters then will I bring again the captivity of thy Captives c. The Jews saith Mr. Baily are never to be restored to their ancient outward estate much lesse to a greater and more glorious Kingdome Jerusalem was to be re-builded and the spirituall glory of the second Temple was to be greater then the first And in the end of the same Chapter the restitution of the Jews after the Babylonish Captivity by vertue of the New Covenant is promised But the outward estate of that people was never to be restored to its ancient lustre more then Samaria or Sodome As Amos speakes of Samaria Chap. 5. 2. The Virgin of Israel is fallen and shall no more rise And Isa saith of Jerusalem The transgression thereof shall be heavy and it shall fall and not rise againe According to the prophesie of Jacob Gen. 49.10 The Scepter shall not depart from Judah till Shiloh come Importing saith Mr. Baily that the Tribe of Judah should ever have some outward visible rule till the comming of Christ in the flesh but thereafter the Scepter and Power of the Church shall be onely spirituall in the hand of Shiloh the Messias He was the substance and body of all these types the restauration of Jerusalem and the erecting of the Monarchy in Judah § 2 Answ The Scripture doth not deny the restauration of Jerusalem but affirme it and that most strongly as we have shewed in many
it for a ground that Antichrist shall be destroyed and fully abolished before the thousand yeers begin But saith Mr. B. the Scripture makes Antichrist to continue to the day of judgement 2 Thess 2.8 Then shall the wicked one be revealed and destroyed by the brightnesse of Christs comming which is not before the last day as before is proved See also Rev. 19.20 The Beast was taken c. compare with it verse 7. Let us be glad and rejoyce for the marriage of the Lamb is come Antichrist is cast alive into the Lake at the Marriage of the Lamb. No living men are cast into Hell before the last day And Christs Marriage with his Church is not solemnized with a part of the Elect but with the whole body at the general Resurrection ¶ 2 Ans There is no such thing in 2 Thess 2.8 as that Antichrist shall continue to the day of judgement unlesse Mr. B. agree with us that the day of judgement begins at the thousand yeers whereat indeed is Christs appearing That Master Baily saith Christ shall not come till the last day of judgement that Master Baily hath not yet proved that in 19 of the Rev. v. 20. and in v. 7. wee grant but Mr. B. glosse upon it we have no reason to receive which was this That no living men are cast alive into hell before the last day of judgement This Mr. B. hath not proved we have a text to the contrary even that of M. B. quoting Rev. 19.20 which is at the beginning of the thousand yeers compare Chap. 20.1 2 3. But Mr. Baily faith this was done immediately before the Marriage of the Lamb. An. we grant it And this is in the beginning of the thousand yeers But Christ solemnizeth his Marriage saith Mr. B. not with a part of his Elect but with the whole body Answ We grant it And this shall be at the beginning of the thousand yeers At which time all the Elect shall rise CHAP. IV. § 1 WEE have done with the Objections of Dr. Prideaux and Pareus and Mr. Baily against our Point Next wee should come to answer the Objections of the Book called Christs Kingdome on earth opened according to the Scriptures set forth by T. HAYNE 1645 if they were worthy the writing out Indeed I expected much but found very little for in his first Chapter he hath three Arguments to prove That Christs Kingdome is long since begun But in his stating the Question as he pretends he never distinguisheth of Christs several formes of his Kingdom viz. invisible and visible but speaks of Christs Kingdome as of one onely form whereupon these three inconveniences to himself do follow ¶ 1 That in all his Arguments there is not one conclusion that doth distinctly conclude against our point viz. to conclude as he should therefore Christs visible Kingdome is begun already upon ear◠¶ 2 That his three last arguments conclude in effect that Christ had no spiritual Kingdome in the Old Testament for he saith Christ began to bee King when he sent out his Disciples with that Commission in Mat. 28.20 If then only Christ began to be King then was he not King before that but Christ told Pilate the contrary afore that ¶ 3 That he contradicts himselfe First In this P. 1. he saith That at all times Christ rules hath an absolute Kingdome in the world with many other expressions of the same effect yet P. 4. he by three severall arguments would prove when and what yeer Christs Kingdome began And P. 5. at such a particular time Christs Kingdome was at hand long since Secondly He contradicts himselfe in this that P. 1. He affirmes Christs Kingdome is to be for ever quoting Heb. 1.8 making no distinction upon it and yet P. 2. He confesseth that Christ shall at the last judgement resigne his Kingdome to the Father quoting 1 Cor. 15.24 making no interpretation to explaine or reconcile these By this you may see that his arguments were not worth the writing out much lesse the answering CHAP. V. Containing an Answer to an UNIVERSAL ARGUMENT or to the ARGUMENT OF THE UNIVERSALITY or generality of men that oppose § 1 THere is one knot yet behinde like to have been let slip which is chawed in the mouths of many yea of most Disputants that are contrary minded to rivet it faster as mine ears in part can witnesse The Argument is from 1 Thess 4.16 17. The Lord himselfe shall descend from Heaven c. And the DEAD IN CHRIST shall rise first THEN WE which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the CLOUDS to meet the Lord in the aire and so shall be EVER WITH THE LORD Now say they how can this consist with the Saints reigning on earth a thousand yeers For if they must reigne there a thousand yeers what need they be caught up into the CLOUDS or how if they reigne on earth a thousand yeer are they said to be EVER with the Lord especially if there they be as some say subject to mortality at last § 2 Answ Mr. Mede hath so learnedly and appositly discussed this place for our use in this particular that his Dilucidations thereon will suffice for a full answer It is not needfull saith he that the resurrection of those which slept in Christ and the rapture of those which shall be left alive together with them into the aire should be at one and the same time For the words in 1 Thess 4. v. 16 17. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 first and then or afterwards may admit a great distance of time as 1 Cor. 1.15.23 Everyone or all mankinde shall rise in their order Christ the first fruits that is first 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 afterwards they that are Christs at his coming Here 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 afterwards notes a distance of time of above a thousand and a halfe of yeers as we finde by experience Suppose therefore this rapture of the Saints into the aire be to translate them to heaven yet it might be construed thus The dead in Christ that is for Christ namely the Martyrs shall rise first afterwards 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 viz. a thousand yeers after we which are alive and remain shall together with them be caught up in the Clouds and meet the Lord in the aire and so from thenceforth we shall ever bee with the Lord. Thus Tertullian seems to understand it who interprets 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or as it is in verse 14. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of Martyrs namely such as dye propter Christum for Christ by means of Christ through Christ for Christs sake taking 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as noting the cause or meanes of their death so Piscator expounds the like speech Apâ—c 14.13 Blessed are the dead which die 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 id est propter Dominum for the Lord Beza qui Domini causa moriuntur which dye for the Lords sake 2 If thus
to restraine 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seem not so fully to answer the Apostles scope and intention which seems to be a general consolation to all that dye in the faith viz. a fruition of Christ then may we give it the largest sense and yet say that it is not needful that the Resurrection of those which dyed in Christ should be all at once or altogether but the Martyrs first in the first resurrection Then after an appointed time the rest of the dead in the last resurrection Afterward when the resurrection shall be thus compleat those which remaine alive at Christs comming shall together with those which are risen be caught into the clouds to meet the Lord in the aire and from thenceforth be eternally with him And so the reason why those which Christ found alive at his coming were not instantly translated should be in part that they might not prevent the dead but bee consummate with them 3 Both these interpretations suppose the rapture of the Saints into the clouds to be for their present translation into heaven But suppose that be not the meaning of it for the words if we weigh them well seem to imply it to be for another end namely to do honour unto their Lord and King at his returne and to attend upon him when he comes to judge the world Those saith the Text which sleep in Jesus will God bring with him He saith not carry away with him Again they and those which are alive shall be caught up together in the Clouds to meet the Lord in the air to meet the Lords coming hither to judgement not to follow him returning hence the judgement being finished Besides it is to be noted that although in the Hebrew notion the air be comprehended under the name of heaven yet would not the Apostle here use the word heaven but the word aire as it were to avoid the ambiguity lest we might interpret it of our translation into heaven If this be the meaning then are those words we shall ever be with the Lord. thus to be interpreted after this our gathering together * In T. More sc his coming c. or gathering unto Christ at his comming so the Apostle calls this rapture 2 Thess 2.1 wee shall from henceforth never lose his presence but alwayes enjoy it partly on earth during his reigne of the thousand yeers and partly in heaven when we shall bee translated thither For it cannot be concluded because the Text saith the Saints after their rapture on high should thenceforth be ever with the Lord Therefore they shall from thenceforth be in heaven for no heaven is here mentioned If they must needs be with Christ there where they are to meet him it would rather follow they should be ever with him in the aire then in heaven which I suppose none will admit And otherwise the Text will afford no more for heaven then it will for earth nay the words he shall bring them with him make most for the latter 4 I will adde this more namely what may be conceived to be the cause of this rapture of the Saints on high to meet the Lord in the clouds rather then to wait his comming to the earth What if it bee that they may be preserved during the conflagration of the earth and the works thereof 2 Pet. 3.10 That as Noah and his family were preserved from the deluge by being lift up above the waters in the Ark so should the Saints at the conflagration bee lift up in the clouds unto their Ark Christ to be preserved there from the Deluge of fire wherein the wicked shall be consumed There is a tradition of the Jews sounding this way which they ascribe unto Elias a Jewish Doctor whose is that Tradition of the duration of the world and well knowne among Divines Duo millia Inane duo millia Lex duo millia dies Messiae viz. Sex mille annos duraturus est mundus He lived under the second Temple about the first times of the Greek Monarchy so that it is no devise of any later Rabbies but a Tradition anciently received amongst them whilst they were yet the Church of God I will transcribe it because it hath something remarkable concerning the thousand yeers It sounds thus Traditio domus Eliae Justi quos resuscitabit Deus non redigentur iterum in pulverem He means of the first and particular resurrection before the general which the Jews acknowledge and talke much of See Wisdome Chapt. 3. ab initio ad finem verse 8. Si quaeras Mille annis ist is quibus Deus Sanctus Benedictus renovaturus est mundum suum de quibus dicitur Et exaltabitur Dominus solus in die illo Es 2.11 quid just is futurum sit sciendum quod Deus benedictus dabit illis alas quasi aquilarum ut volent super facie aquarum unde dicitur Psal 46.3 Propterea non timebimus cum * Psal 46.3 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 mutabitur i. e. changed though we there translate it movebitur i. e. moved mutabitur terra At forte inquies erit ipsis dolori seu afflictioni Sed occurrit illud Esa 40.31 Exspectantibus Dominum innovabunt vires efferentur alâ instar aquilarum The Hebrew words are in Gemara Sanhedrin c. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Tradition of the house of Eliah The just whom God shall raise viz. in the first resurrection shall not returne to dust But if you aske what shall happen to the just in those thousand yeeres wherein the holy and blessed God shall renew this World whereof it is said Esa 2.11 And the Lord alone shall be exalted in that day you must know that God shall give them the wings as it were of Eagles to flye upon the face of the waters for it is said Psal 46.3 Therefore shall wee not feare when the earth shall bee changed But you will say Perhaps it will be to them a paine and trouble but we are otherwise taught by that in Esa 40.31 They that wait upon the Lord shall renew their strength they shall mount up with wings as Eagles c. CHAP. VI. § 1 SO much for answering Objections against our Point Next I should come to answer Objection against our Arguments And indeed all men are more busie to reply then to prove the contrary which argues that they are ignorant of our Point and cannot tell what the state of the Church shall bee or of the Jewes what it shall be § 2 Doctor Prideaux his exceptions besides those afore to his own Arguments discussed are first That the Revelation is not a representation of a continued story That computations are not demonstrative To which we answer First Either the Revelation is a continued History or else it is no Revelation as Rev. 1.1 and 4.1 and so we may make quidlibet ex quodlibet what we will of it Secondly It answers to Daniels Prophesie and that is a
continued History of future times And thirdly Doctor Prideaux himselfe makes it so in presuming to determine the binding of Satan to be past Fourthly Some anticipations there are in the Revelation as we have shewed but they doe no more overthrow the confirmation of the order of things then in Genesis or other Books of Scripture in which are many anticipations Fifthly Mark the order of continuation In 6 7 8 Chapters are the seven Seals then out of the seventh Seale seven Trumpets c. all which methodically carry on the continuation as Mr. Mede hath demonstrated And for the computations they are so noted in their beginnings and endings that we can with more certainty compute our conclusion then the Doctor doth the contrary § 3 Pareus his exceptions doe but idem saxum volvere tumble over againe the same stone That which wee have before laid downe will sufficiently refute him and Mr. Hain and other Replicants Finis Libri Quinti THE SIXTH BOOK Holding forth particularly WHAT this GLORIOUS State on Earth shall be of which we have treated all this while in the former five BOOKS THE INTRODUCTION Laying forth the generall Heads of this Book touching the WHAT of this Glorious Time § 1 HAving demonstrated the Quòd sit THAT there is A Glorious state of all things yet to bee on Earth afore the universal judgement of all the quicke and dead Next we are to declare the Quid sit WHAT the said glorious state shall be § 2 For which we have already made some way and preparation by a necessitated anticipation by reason that the proofs being Divine and interwoven with severall passages of both viz. of the That and What of this aforesaid state we could not pick the one from the other nor explaine and demonstrate the meaning of the former without a scruteny into some passages of the later where we found them so intermixt Howbeit we insisted upon them no further then to a proofe of the literall meaning of the place reserving the distinct and larger discusse for this Book In this WHAT are to be considered these five Heads § 3 I The Chaos Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement II The Creation Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement III The Dimensions Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement IV The Qualifications Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement V The Priviledges Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement CHAP. I. Touching the Chaos § 1 BY the Chaos we mean the preparation to this estate or the manner of the beginning thereof That as in the old and first Creation the Chaos was the evening of the world with which it began as the Rabbins before quoted * Lib. 4. Chap. 4. use to speake so this second or New Creation as it is called Isa 65.17 2 Pet. 3.13 Rev. 21.1 begins with an evening And as after that as an Antitypicall memoriall of the finishing thereof celebrated on the Sabbaticall seventh day the Church of the Jews in all ages to Christs time began their Sabbath in the evening so this Sabbatisme of the glorious state of which we speak as it is called Heb. 4. afore largely explained shall begin and have its Ante-scene or Prelude in a kind of evening Now as the evening taken in that largeness as Gen. 1. in the first part hath some light and sometimes a glare of the Sun at its last withdrawing though the day hath been dusk and dim all afore and receives for a farewell a reflexion of the beams darted backward upon the clouds with a twy-light following it but in the latter part it is darke So in this evening in the first part thereof there shall be some manifestation of the Sonne of Righteousnesse the Lord Jesus Christ for the Call of the Jewes Zach. 12.10 Rev. 1.7 and the setting them on foot to contend for their liberty against the Turk and all Antichristian enemies But in the latter part of this evening after that Christ hath rowsed them up to that contest there shall be a darknesse of great troubles Da. 12.1 And these troubles it seems by the two last ver of that 12 of Dan. may last 45 yeers afore the Jews with the Gentiles come to their glorious enjoyments at the resurrection of all the Elect deceased and the change of the believers then alive But when that evening and night is passed over the Righteous shall have the DOMINION in the morning Psal 49. v. 14. which learned Junius interprets of the Saints happy estate in the morning of the resurrection which S. John Rev. 20.4 calls the first Resurrection as we have before demonstrated For at the last ultimate end when CHRIST layes downe all his rule and power 1 Cor. 15.24.28 we cannot imagine that Christians may be said to have Dominion § 2 Now as in the evening shutting in there is an end a setting in a cloud and a darkning of all the glory of the precedent day all glorious things are wrapt up in obscurity and all glorious persons their Masters Kings Princes and Potentates are couched and crouched downe as beasts in their dens and lye like dead men and none of all these things or persons survive but whom and what God will permit to escape fire or death c. So this glorious state shall begin as to the preface or preparation with a setting and dark eclipsing of all the worldly glory of former times things and persons viz. of the foure former Monarchies root and branch with all their impertinent appurtenances that stand in the way to hinder Christs glorious Kingdome on earth Dan. 7. Rev. 11.18 and 19. Chapters c. of which abundantly afore And we have seen it far more by experience since this subject was divers yeers by-past preached and asserted Wonder not therefore at the pullings downe of humane glories to this day and the many scuffles about them almost over the whole World The summe of worldly pompe is declining towards Sun-set the shadowes grow long it begins to be duske upon all Secular splendor The night comes on great stormes will arise but though they may be universall on the Jewes for the said five and forty yeers because universally they have for above five and forty scores of yeers refused the Messiah yet likely the tempest on the Gentiles that have owned Christ may but drive along by coasts falling here and there by succession they having suffered much already for Christs sake by Heathens Turks Papists and falsely named Protestants § 3 But as after the shutting down of the evening even in the dark night there is still a continued tendency towards the succeeding day and the glory thereof The Sunne is still hastening to rise again So
be raised incorruptible viz. never to dye any more and we shall be CHANGED viz. all in the same moment ¶ 3 This glorious state of all things on earth yet to come is as a creation in regard of parts That as the whole creation is in Gen. 1. distinguished into six dayes worke so this New creation shall be perfected though not in that successive order of time but rather as I conceive at once in all those things that are enumerated to bee the workmanship of the six dayes workes You had the opinion of the Rabbins in this afore * In 4 Book 4 Chap. 3 Sect. 6 Pat. f. 428. Mine is this First For light answerable to the extraordinary LIGHT created on the first day for the Sunne and Starres were not extant till the fourth day The light of the Church at this time shall be a supernatural light above any created light according to Isa 60.19 The Sunne and Moon shall be no more light but THE LORD shall be unto thee an EVERLASTING LIGHT Sutable to St. Johns Vision and Prophesie Rev. 21.23 The City had no need of the Sunne or of the Moon for the GLORY of GOD did lighten it and the LAMB is the light thereof For it God shall be the Churches Sunne Psal 84.11 as he is likewise light it selfe 1 John 1.5 yea dwels in unspeakable light 1 Tim. 6.16 And Christ is prophesied to be the Sunne arising on the Church Malach. 4.2 That he comes as the Apostle saith 2 Thess 2.8 with a brightnesse yea as Christ himselfe promiseth his comming shall be as lightning shineing from the East to the West yea with GREAT GLORY Matth. 24. verse 27. and verse 30. then will their speciall presence or manfestation be a transcendent light to the Church which must be supernatural far above any created either that which was made the first day or after contracted upon the fourth day into the body of the Sunne as the waters extant the first day were couched into the Channels of the seas on the third day For both these were created But the light of the Church now shall be elucidations and emanations from the Deity overcomming and as it were drowning the glory of the Sunne c. And therefore though the Sunne and the Moon and Stars that now receive their light from the Sunne shall in that New creation be extant existing in their Orbs yet they shall not be there to give light to the Church Both these are distinctly mentioned in both the fore-quoted places Isa 60.19 The Sunne shall be no more thy LIGHT by day neither for brightnesse shall the Moon give LIGHT unto thee Observe it is not said they shall not exist they shall not be but they shall not be for the light of the Church Just so Rev. 21.23 it is not said the being of the Sunne and Moon shall bee nulled or annihilated but there shall be no NEED of the Sunne nor of the Moon to SHINE in New Jerusalem And the reason is because God and the Lamb shall lighten it and be the light and glory thereof So that though according to the creation of the Sunne and Moon and Stars in the fourth day those lights with the rest of the universe shall bee perfected in this New creation Isa 30.26 The light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sunne and the light of the Sunne sevenfold as the light of seven dayes in the day the Lord bindeth up the breach of his people yet not used for a light to the Church at that glorious time For then there shall be no nights and dayes as is intimated in that 60. of Isa verse 19. afore quoted mark it well The Sunne shall be no more thy light by DAY c. but the Lord shall be unto thee an EVERLASTING light i. e. perpetuall without interruptions by vicissitudes of nights succeeding the dayes and for ever But it is expresse in Rev. 21.25 St. John having said as afore quoted in the 23. verse There shall be no need of the Sunne neither of the Moon he addes in this 25. verse The gates of the New Jerusalem shall not be shut at all by day for there shall bee NO NIGHT THERE And if we should suppose that the motion of the heavenly orbs and all the planets and fixed Stars which is the onely cause of night should cease at this glorious time of REST seeing that all motion as saith the Philosopher truly is for rest which these heavenly bodies never had since their creation whiles the Plants have had theirs in the Winter the Sonnes of men in the night on the seventh day and in the grave the Wilde-beasts in the day c. And it is recorded as the most glorious time when the Sunn and Moon stood still Josh 10.12 13 14. There was no day like that before it or since that And if we should conceive that it is not contrary to that text of Isa 30.26 The light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sun and the light of the Sunne sevefold greater c. to understand it as well if not rather of the extension of those bodies of light then of the intension of their beams of light their very bodies being called lights Gen. 1. And the sevenfold intensivenesse and strength of the beams might be an affliction and so the little globe of the earth would not be of bulke to interpose and eclipse the sight and prospect of any Starre from view and looking upon the rest especially on the magnified dimension of the body of the Sunne so that there should be a continued natural light round the world yet all these should be but for a comely ornament not a naturall concernment to the Church because the paramount presence and elucidation of God and the Lamb should be their light sutable to their paramount condition swallowing up as it were all other glories as the said text of Isa 60.19 Rev. 21.23 hold forth So that as the world began in the first Creation with an extraordinary light so at the end of this world in the New creation there shall be a supernatural light And thus of the state of it in regard of light in parallel with the first and fourth dayes worke in the first Creation Secondly As on the second day was created the Firmament as our Translators render it following the Greeke alias the Expanse according to the Hebrew that is at least the whole element of the ayre so in this New creation it shall be re-created anew that is perfected that there shall be no noysome fumes or vapours or any other noxious exhalations fiery or watery c. to cause sicknesse death it selfe being now swallowed up in victory 1 Cor. 15. And all sorrows removed Rev. 21.4 And the aire shall not be an habitation for devils over the Church as formerly for which he was called the Prince of the ayre Eph. 2.2 But the devill shall be chained up Rev. 20.2 and every unclean
HARD BONDAGE Observe both to what persons and what time these high expressions relate before largely opened and we shal easily conclude this Text was never yet fulfilled and therefore according to the truth of God must bee fulfilled before the ultimate day of judgement for with that time this Prophesie cannot agree ¶ 6 In Isa 25.8 we have it plenissimè planissimè most fully and plainly That in that day viz. of the great restauration of the Church and ruine of their enemies verse 5 6. The Lord will WIPE AWAY ALL TEARS FROM ALL FACES And the rebuke of his people shall hee take away FROM OFF ALL THE EARTH for the Lord hath spoken it Which was never yet fulfilled and therefore is yet to come at the time we treat off as hath been before demonstrated ¶ 7 Isa 54.13 14. is also very high in expressions Thy children shall be taught of the Lord and great shall be the peace of thy children In righteousnesse shalt thou be ESTABLISHED thou shalt be far from oppression for thou SHALT NOT FEAR and FROM TERROR for it SHAL NOT COME NEER THEE You see the expressions are exceeding high and they are evidently spoken concerning external rest as well as internal and wee see it by experience that this place was never yet fulfilled therefore it is yet to come as we have cleered it afore ¶ 8 In Isa 60.14 c. it is thus written The Sonnes of them that aâ—flicted thee shall come BENDING TO THEE and all that despised thee shall BOW THEMSELVES DOWN AT THE SOLES of thy feet Whereas thou hast been forsaken I will make thee an ETERNAL EXCELLENCY violence shall be NO MORE heard in thy land The dayes of thy mourning shall be ENDED Which place relates to our Thesis as is before demonstrated The expressions are far too high for us to acknowledge they have been fulfilled therefore we must expect them yet to come before the ultimate day of judgement for that will be no fit time for this Prophesie ¶ 9. Isa 65.19 is likewise very full to the particular in hand though in few words viz. I will joy in my people and the voyce of weeping or crying shall be NO MORE HEARD IN HER. Let the Reader judge whether this was ever yet fulfilled ¶ 10. Isa tells us Chap. 66.12 Thus saith the Lord I will extend peace to her the Church consisting of Jews and Gentiles as a river and the glory of the Gentiles like a flowing stream I leave it likewise to the Reader to consider whether hee hath not reason to expect this as yet to come ¶ 11 We come to the Prophesies of Jeremiah Chap. 23.3 4. I will gather the remnant of my flocke out of all Countries c. and they shall fear no more nor be dismayed Which expressions are a great deal too high for our knowledge of Scripture of history or of experience to acknowledge them to have been fulfilled to this day And therefore our faith must be on God for the fulfilling of them and that before the ultimate day of judgement as the nature of the things require ¶ 12 We have in the same Prophet Chap. 30. verse 10. Jacob shall returne and shall be in rest and quiet and none shall make him afraid ¶ 13 Place is in Jer. 46.27 28. to the same effect ¶ 14 Place is in Ezek. 28.24 There shall be no more a pricking briar unto the house of Israel nor any grieving thorne of all that are round about them ¶ 15 Place Mich. 4.1 2 3. The same with Isa 2. v. 2 3 4. It s added here in verse 4. They shall sit every man under his owne vine c. and none shall make them afraid ¶ 16 Place Zeph. 3.13 14 15. They shall feed and lye downe and none shall make them afraid Sing O daughter of Zion rejoyce with all the heart the Lord hath taken away thy judgements he hath cast out thine enemies The Lord is in the midst of thee thou shalt not see evill any more This and all the rest have been proved to mean the time intended in our Position § 2 Adde in the New Testament ¶ 1 Matth. 19.29 Shall receive an hundred fold and inherit eternal life of the large opening of this place see before in the third Book ¶ 2 That in 2 Thess 1.7.9 10. To you REST as Heb. 4. when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed FROM HEAVEN his enemies being punished from the presence of the Lord as Chap. 2. and from the glory of his POWER ¶ Rev. 7.16 17 They that are sealed c. serve him day and night in HIS TEMPLE he that sitteth on the Throne shall dwell among them They shall hunger no more for the Lamb in the middest of the Throne shall feed them and wipe away all tears from their eyes ¶ 4 Rev. 21.4 St. John speaking of the state of the Church in the thousand yeers saith God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more sorrowing nor crying nor paine Every verse of this Chapter shewes it cannot bee meant of everlasting happinesse in the highest heavens Let the close of this Section be to encourage us to patience Patience in perseverance and patience in sufferance Now is Christs Kingdome of patience But anon his Kingdome of peace Twice it is said of the present state of sufferings Here is the patience of the Saints Rev. 13.10 and 14.12 Once it is said Keep the word of patience Rev. 3.10 But after a while comes the Kingdome of peace therefore Christ seales up all the Bible and all the Revelation almost with this Rev. 22.11 12. He that is righteous let him be righteous still He that is holy let him be holy still and behold I come quickly and my reward is with me Then in the last verse save one sc 20. Surely I come quickly Amen Amen Then to that end Iohns prayer closeth all as I close in verse 21. The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all Amen SECT III. § 1 THus you have seen it is a sorrowlesse condition Next follows it shall be a deathlesse condition The Elect once raised at the beginning of the thousand yeers shall dye no more much lesse those alive and changed For if those alive shall not prevent them that are asleep given by the Apostle as an answer to an Objection against this Resurrection much lesse shall they that are alive being the patterne to whom the dead are promoted bee sent to death as to give place to the Elect dead that are raised And if all the Elect are raised to what end or use shall they dye that are alive If it be the priviledge that the other Saints shall be alive at Christs comming why shall they dye when here in soule and body they may behold him which is a fuller injoyment If this time of Christs appearance at the beginning of the thousand yeers be the Kingdome of Saints the prefacing beginning of their full
the first Adam that if in a sinfull state his age at a hundred yeers was but as it were youth his whole age amounting to near a thousand yeers how much more shall the Saints by means of the second Adam live a thousand in a sinlesse condition ¶ 2 It may bee congruously made out that the Prophet in this Text intends rather the immortality of the Saints then their mortality thus There shall be no more THENCE an infant of dayes nor an old man that hath not filled his dayes that the childe youth or young man should dye an hundred yeers old OR the sinner an hundred yeers old should be cursed Thus we read the whole verse to the tune or sound of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 THAT as before we rendred it turning our English but in the latter clause into Or the Hebrew being the conjunction 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which as Mr. Mede saith being like materia prima capable of innumerable forms of significations may well be so rendred here And then the sense will bee this that at that time of the New creation which St. John saith shall be a thousand yeers there shall be neither he that shall naturally dye in his infancy nor he that shall naturally dye in his riper age before he hath made up his full dayes nor he that shall be a sinner whereby his dayes should be violently cut off ¶ 3 If it may better please some they may read it to this sense That at that time and that glorious estate though the old sinner shall be cut off yet no Saint either young or old shall dye at all All these wayes of reading the text in favour of the immortality of the Saints the word THENCE doth much animate and justisie As if the Prophet should say thus out of this New Creation for the duration thereof there shall no such person be found that shall be mortal though all the transgressors the enemies thereof that are without it shall be cut off at its very beginning even as we have largely amplified afore upon sundry occasions But if wee lanch out into the context as wee intimatedly promised afore to wade into the depth of the precedent and subsequent coherence or dependence of this text our reading of the words and rendring of the sense of it for the immortality of Saints will bee made much more perspicuous First it is said in v. 17. Behold I creat new Heavens and a new Earth alluding no doubt to the first Creation of the world in glorious perfection and Adam in innocency who should never have dyed if he had never sinned And the former shall not be remembred viz. for their meannesse by reason of mans sin Nor as it is in the Hebrew ascend upon you That is the imperfections of the former state of things should not touch them when they should attain this New one of the main imperfections of the former state being mortality it being the sad memoriall and effect of dolefull-sin Therefore the removall of this the Prophet must mainly mind 2. It is said in verse 18. Be you glad and rejoyce 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 age to age or for ever in that I create which cannot consist with death or death with it which quencheth natural joy which every thing hath in its natural being and morall joy which it hath in the injoyment of its well-being 3. It is said in verse 19. I will saith the Lord rejoyce in JERUSALEM and joy in my people and the voyce of weeping shall be NO MORE heard in HER nor the voyce of crying Now if sorrow must be gone that it shall be no more then I thinke there shall be no more death 4. In the 20. verse it self It is strange that according to our English there should be mentioned the death of Saints and not the death of the wicked of whom it is said onely the sinner an hundred yeers old shall be accursed And what doth this Atheistical creature care for that as long as he may live and enjoy his sinfull pleasure on earth therefore according to our reading in the third and lowest sense at ¶ 2 the sense must be that of the Saints nor young nor â—â—old shall be incompleat in their yeers by death but the sinner at an hundred yeers old which is much for him to live shall be accursed that is he shall dye sc be mortal So first The Antithesis Secondly The story of Gen. 2. The curse was In the day thou eatest thereof thou shalt dye i. e. be mortal liable to death And this thing death is that which strikes a dart through the liver of a wicked man The fear of this to him is worse then that of hell For hee seldome fears hell till he sees death If he were sure he should not dye he saith in his heart a pin for hell Fifthly It is said in verse 22. They shall not build and another inhabit which is whiles mortality reignes marke the reason For as the dayes of a tree are the dayes of my people And many sorts of trees live a thousand yeers It is a promise and therefore to be taken in a favourable sense And surely trees in Paradise at least so long lived as Adam once eating of the tree of Life continuing in obedience But at this time is all obedience and here is the tree of life Rev. 21. And sixthly it followes in this 22. verse of this 65. of Isay And mine elect shall LONG injoy the works of their own hands How doe they injoy them long if no longer then heretofore in the reign of mortality It is a promise and a promise is to be interpreted in favour of the Promisee as a Lease in favour of the Lessee All these plainly to mee justifie my reading of this Text to cast out mortality from the Saints And that I may the lesse seem presumptuous and singular in this and withall adde something for illustration give me leave to shew you other famous Translations to the same tune First The Arabick renders this 65. of Isa 20. thus Neither shall there be any more a young man imperfect in age nor an old man that shall not fulfill his time For the young man shall fill up an hundred yeers But the SINNER that after an hundred yeers dyes shall be accursed Observe This Translation casts out mortality from the Saints and applies it to Sinners onely as it were by not regarding the common pointing of the Hebrew by which points oft-times we suffer much as Arcanum punctationis hath abundantly demonstrated 2 The seventy Greek Translators translate much to the same effect 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. Neither shall there be any more one that is not ripe sc in age nor an old man that hath not fulfilled his time For the young man shall bee an hundred yeers old but the sinner that dyes a hundred yeers old shall be also accursed Observe here as on the Arabick 3 The Chaldee Paraphrase also favours our
shall not If we might be tempted this were not a sorrowlesse condition It was a part of Christs great humiliation that he was tempted though he could not be prevailed against If wicked men the instruments shall not be neer to tempt them then nor Satan the Author So the Text Rev. 19. The wicked are removed Chap. 20. Satan is removed bound up that he should not seduce the Nations any more which phrase would be weighed more then it is I have before shewed in our answer to Doctor Prideaux That the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies any the least temptation And now I adde that for ought I know 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 may fitly be rendred Satan shall not to that end wander up and downe among the Nations The Greek may beare it And the context speaks for it For were all those expressions and acts sc laid hold on and bound him cast him into the pit and sets a seale onely to that end that he might not seduce If God had onely laid his command it had been enough to restrain his acting as when Christ commanded him out of the possessed Rather therefore the meaning is that hee might not have so much as the liberty to peragrare Gentes to wander up and downe over the Nations It must not be with him as in the dayes of the Churches afflictions Job 1.7 and 1 Pet. 5.8 Now he is held chained cast down sealed that he may not wander 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the active is to wander as planets that compasse the Earth And 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the middle voice signifies to wander from place to place viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as the Greek Criticks give instance obire multa loca to travel over much ground And Christ saith Now is the houre of temptation and the Kingdome of patience Then the Kingdome of perfect peace purity and exultation Rev. 11. Rev. 20. Rev. 21. The Serpent then shal only eat his dust Isa 65.25 in opposition to Gen. 3.14 And the devill that abused his body shall be shut up Now shall be fulfilled that promise Rom. 20.16 The God of PEACE mark Gods title shall tread Satan under your feet c. Now that Satan is in the pit he must be under their feet while the Saints stand on their feet on earth Satan must be under them As all things under Christs feet Heb. 2. As for Satans utter prevailing that was subdued when the Apostle spake those words For this purpose the Sonne of God was manifested that he might destroy the works of the Devill 1 Joh. 3.8 Observe it is said works c. therefore now Satan himselfe must be under their feet as that text speaks Rom. 16.20 now is to bee fulfilled perfectly that Heb. 2.8 c. All must be subject to Christ And he must destroy death AND HIM THAT HAD THE POWER OF DEATH WHICH IS the Devil verse 14. So that that time that is a Deathlesse condition is a Devil-lesse a Satanlesse time And as in Rev. 20.7 the letting loose of Satan and Satans tempting go together so by an Antithesis Satans binding and his Non-tempting goe together verse 3. Indeed it is said so frequently in the Revelation that at the seventh Trumpet at this first Resurrection when Christ reigns and the Saints with him on Earth that their businesse shall be to joy praise triumph and sing Hallelujahs Rev. 5. Rev. 7. Rev. 14. and Rev. 19.5 or six times in the beginning of that Chapter that it cannot enter into the thoughts of the purest reason that there should be any sad songs of Satan sung to the ears of a Saint Sin and temptation are more sad then death to a Saint and therefore if the lesser sorrow and death shall be gone at this time then much more temptation If nothing that defileth shall enter into this state then not the unclean spirit as Christ calls him O glorious time when there shall be no disposition within nor temptation without to sinne but so full of God and happinesse in manifestation of Christ that there shall be no thoughts but in relation to him The souls of the Elect shall not returne to their bodies to be tempted that were their losse And the living Saints are changed therefore to a state of grace beyond that now which at present is liable to Temptation SECT VI. The next Quality is the RESTAURATION OF ALL THE CREATURES AS Isa 65.17 it is said there must be New Heavens sc a New Church-state so a New Earth a New naturall politick state of persons and things For there is mention of plantings and injoying of them And verse 25. of the Wolfe dwelling with the Lamb c. and that dust shall be the Serpents meat no devouring or hurting So the close They shall not destroy nor hurt in all the holy Mountaine Of this of the Wolfe c. we spake once afore largely on Isa 11.6 7 8 9. which Lactantius takes litterally See before and after the Text it is intended for the time we speake of And the reason of all is For the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the Sea Knowledge signifies oft all spirituals and here imports that there shal be such an abundant manifestation of Gods presence that all whether taken litterally or metaphorically shall be as in Paradise before Adams fall So Psal 8. makes Gen. 1.26 A Prophesie or Type or both of what man shall injoy in after times And Heb. 2. applies Psal 8. to the time we speak of And Heb. 4. applies Gods resting the seventh day to a Sabbatisme on earth yet to come So the 2 Pet. 3. and Rev. 21.1 apply the New Heavens and New Earth to the said time and call it the New Jerusalem comming downe from God out of Heaven And the addition to the glory of this New Jerusalem shall be a lustre of all creatures materials of building shall be like all manner of precious stones and men shall be like Angels Kings honouring the Church No sea sc to devoure but adorn and comfort man if it be not in a great part crusted into a chrystal body like heaven above consolidated for men to travel upon and come together and to shine to adde an inlightning to the earth for more glory Adde to all this that of Rom. 8.18 As vox naturae THE VOYCE OF NATURE for our point full to our purpose though it may be not heeded for this purpose For Peter gives us a good item when being about to speak of the New Heavens and New Earth 2 Pet. 3. He tels us in v. 3. That before that shall be scoffers and slighters of this opinion of Christs comming they will be as heedlesse as men were before the renovation of the world by Noahs flood Chap. 2. And then having spoken of the New Heavens c. according to Gods promise verse 13. then in the 14. verse he exhorts men to be diligent to bee found blamelesse
the glorious representations They shall have the word for inspection Rev. 22.14.19 and admiration to see all revealed and all fulfilled They shall be taught of God to know the full minde of that word and they themselves shall see with their eyes that fulfilled which out of the word they heard with their ears So that their Joshua sc Jesus shall say to them according to their experience Nothing hath failed of all that God hath spoken They shall have the effect of sublime purity and glory of Discipline sc Angelical order Rev. 21.12 sc 4. Gates and three Angels at every gate So that verse 25. Though the gate be never shut yet verse 27. no unclean thing shall enter in which is the cream and quintessence of the effect of all Discipline In summe As then the labour of the body in moving shall be more excellent a labour-lesse labour a pain-lesse labour a pleasant labour so the worship of the minde shall be without irksomenesse So full of grace that all actings of grace shall be heavenised into all sweetnesse SECT V. The fifth Priviledge Union of Saints throughout the world UNion of heads and union of hearts sc unity in judgement and unity in affection Zach. 14.9 The Lord shall be King over all the earth In that day there shall be one Lord and his name one Is hee not King now Yea but not so actually visibly and absolutely before the eyes of all many great wicked ones yet domineering as he shall be then Is not his name now one yes in it selfe he is the God of truth But by mens pretences that he favours this way and that way men intimate of him several names as Papist Lutheran Calvinist Episcopal Presbyterian Independent But then it shall be cleer which is the onely way of truth And so God shall have one name because as Zeph. 3.9 They shall serve the Lord with onenesse of consent all being of a pure language So that their judgements being one and consequently their practises one great will be the onenesse of affections as Isa 11.13 The envy of Ephraim shall depart Ephraim shall not envy Judah nor Judah vexe Ephraim If so great was the union of Saints in the first fruits Act. 4.32 how much more when the whole lump is fully perfected surely their union shall be as that in Paradise before Adam fell The history of dissention now is grievous to Saints therefore on the contrary how sweet will the mystery bee in the injoyment of Union SECT VI. The sixth Priviledge Honour shall be given to all holy things sc to Religion and religious men § 1 GOd hath in several passages you heard afore promised to take away the reproach of his people as in other things so in Religion This is Gilgal the Great to rowle away the reproach from Israel In the day when the Jewes shall be converted ten shall take hold of one Jew Zach. 8.23 therefore it is said divers times in the Revelation sc Rev. 14.1 Rev. 22.4 The Saints shall have the name of their Father in their foreheads They shall be no more ashamed of their Religion then of their faces Though the Church kisse Christ sc dearly imbrace him yet shall she not be despised Cant. 8.1 Hebrew I will finde thee in the streets I will kisse thee and also they shall not contemne me Publick profession and imbracing of Christ shal not be despised as 't is spoken in the very same Chap. of Canticles where is handled the call of the Jewes So Isa 49.23 Kings shall bee thy Nurses Rev. 21. Kings shall bring their honour to the Church Isa 60.13 The glory of Lebanon c. shall come to beautifie my Sanctuary and I will make the place of my feet glorious Christ the head the Church the feet And there Christ walks Rev. 1. And that Christ will make glorious afore all though formerly men trampled Yea Zach. 9.16 The Church shall be as the stones of a crown lifted up Not as stones in the street but of a Crowne Not of a Crowne falling but of a Crowne lifted up Zach. 12.5 The Governours of Judah shall say in their hearts the inhabitants of Jerusalem my strength in the Lord of Hosts We know that of late dayes governours have put all the reproachfull names upon the Saints and Churches of the purest judgement and profession as Faction Schisme Puritans c. But the time is at hand they shall be convinced and shall know that Saints are the best men the interest and stay of Kingdomes § 2 Let the consideration of these Priviledges make us walk like them that shall see these times let the dawning be upon us now the Sun is about to rise cleaving to Christ in Ordinances and to one another in love honouring them most that have most holinesse Yea let this comfort us that all the glorious Promises and Prophesies shall then be fulfilled Finis Libri Sexti THE SEVENTH BOOK Containing an Essaie Touching the time when this future Glorious state of the Church on Earth for a Thousand Yeers probably shall begin CHAP. I. The Introduction unfolding and cutting out the Worke for this BOOK § 1 I Know Lubrious est hic locus this is a point wherein my Pen may soon slip and as soon will sleight-spirited 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 carp and over-austere Cato censure As for the extremous multitude whose Motto or Character is Hosanna to day and Crucifie to morrow they will deifie if a man hit right but infinitly vilifie if he mistake But the ingenuous prudent will neither reckon me a God for the first nor cypher mee into lesse then a man for the second The best of men in such a labyrinth and lesse have mistaken Upon this ground I take my trip Christo duce the Lord being my Leader § 2 And the better to stave off some blows I shall take into me the guard of other learned pious mens judgements and present the Reader with variety of accounts with their grounds and thence let him not I Prophesie if any will so call it § 3 The worke we have to doe in relation to this is ## ¶ 1 To give the Reader severall Prognosticks shewing indefinitly that this glorious state of things is not far off ¶ 2 To cast up the severall Computations found in the Scriptures pointing at a determinate time when most probably this state shall begin CHAP. II. HOlding forth the several Prognosticks that the Glorious time we speake of is not far off but now approacheth especially in the introduction thereunto viz. The Call of the Jews SECT I. The first Prognostick The expiration of Accounts § 1 IN the first place severall numbers of yeers Prophesied to fore-run the Commencement of this state are now almost expired I shall now but touch and but some of them intending by Gods assistance to give you as I am enabled a more exact account in the third Chapter ¶ 1 The One thousand two hundred and ninety dayes that is yeers foretold Dan.
our Saviour also testifies to this Prognostick Matth. 24. After the signes to come to passe whiles the end was not yet but were onely the beginnings of sorrow verse 6. verse 8. Christ addes other signes that should more neerly precede and point at the end And amongst many direful signes he gives this INIQUITY SHALL ABOUND after which the Gospel being preached to all the world as a witnesse to them THEN SHALL THE END COME verse 9. to 15. To the same purpose Rev. 18. verse 2 3 4 5 6. Babylon the Great is fallen is fallen that is shall fall as certainly as if already fallen c. FOR HER SINNES HAVE REACHED UNTO HEAVEN § 2 Now whether the enemies wickednesse is not mounted up to the height and the Antichristian parties sinnes I mean all that oppose Christ by what names or titles soever by what way or means or manner soever are not come to the full I leave the well-principled sound sanctified spiritual soul to judge Turcisme and Papisme is now worse then ever by how much more they have of late prevailed and have sinned against greater light and are more encouraged by the enmities and impieties among Protestants The Arminian and Socinian party with their Articuli perpendendi Advancements of mans will Disputes against the Deity of Christ with some questionings of the Holy Ghost have struck in with the Antichristian party and joyning in effect at least their forces with them have greatly enlarged their Quarters The Lutherans still as obstinately as ever if not more obstinately since against more light shining in sundry disputes destroy the humanity of Christ by their doctrine of Consubstantiation The learned of the Jews poor soules are now more obstinate against Christ come in the flesh then ever And for Protestant Nations or Peoples I am utterly astonished in my thoughts and distressed for words to expresse their unparallelable Apostasies The revolt among Professours is generall Their blasphemous words against God Christ the Holy Ghost the Holy Scriptures and consequently against Salvation Heaven Hell the Immortality of the Soule and all Fundamentals are nefanda so wicked that they are not to be mentioned though I could distinctly lest I should leave some staine upon some pious soule that may read this Treatise Their many wicked practices are sutable Community of women swearing drinking c. And these practised by principle as the way to destroy the flesh By this meanes many Jesuits false Prophets false Teachers and damnable Seducers are encouraged as the mutter abroad is every where to creep in amongst them All Religious worship is decried as flesh and forme The wicked prophane are extreamly encouraged the commers on in Religion offended and beaten off And the very knees and hearts of true Saints are made feeble and ready to faint And all this account is brought in as the returne of all the marvells of mercies and miraculary deliverances that God hath given them Whiles Politicals have been recovered Religion hath been lost And whosoever will not be high in these enormities is scorned as low The Nations called Protestant minde conquest rather then conscience Hellish Heresies break out in Print from beyond and on this side the Seas The profession of most of those Countries is come to looke like dirt gain being their godlinesse Their words and promises but lyes and flatteries And selfe is now the great God that ruleth all And of all these I would I could not give so true an account as I can with admiration of Gods patience the meane while I have nor list nor cause maliciously to inveigh against Protestant Nations but out of griefe of soule and to prosecute the point in hand I have given these few hints SECT IV. The fourth Prognostick Wars and rumors of Wars c. THis Prognosticke our Saviour gives us Matth. 24.6 7. in answer to that question put to him by the Disciples verse 3. saying to him Tell us when shall these things be And what shal be the sign of thy comming and of the end of the world But withal he gives us this caution that these wars and rumors of wars are a remoter signe adding to this signe verse 6. That the end is not yet And verse 8. That they are but the beginnings of sorrow But Daniel brings this signe as it may comprehend all great and remarkable wars viz. those the Jewes shall have with their adversaries the Turke c. neerer to the end Dan. 11.44 45. compared with Dan. 12.1 viz. at that time of the Jews wars aforesaid Michael shall stand up to deliver his people though the worke of that deliverance in those wars will it seems by verse 12.13 collated take up the time of five and forty yeers Now I leave all knowing men to judge whether we have not Wars and rumors of Wars whiles most if not all Nations of the Gentiles viz. England Scotland Ireland France Spaine Italy Netherlands or Low-Countries Denmarke Portugal Sweadland Helvetia or Switzerland Poland Muscovy The huge Empire of the Turke The vast Indies c. are either in the practise or posture or preparations and expectations of War There is wanting but the driving and fall of this storme of the Gentiles Wars on the Romish Westerne Antichrist and next the Jews taking up armes against the Turkish Easterne Antichrist and then the Worke or thing signified of which those rumors of Wars are a signe will be doing at least in the Preface and preparation Which last Warre some thinke is not far off in regard of their great Mathematicians wonderfull words to that end their abundant pursing up of gold their writing letters to each other in severall Countries to that purpose their late change of their letter for concealment of their messages by writing The professed expectation of some of their Learned of the Messiah to come in the yeer 1656. or thereabouts SECT V. Giving a touch upon several other Prognosticks viz. THe more we shall see Monarchy to fall Dan. 2.34 35. the oftner there appears strange signes in the Heavens following the great tribulations upon earth Matth. 24.29.30 And the lowder is heard vox populi the voyce of the generality of Gods people in their discourses and prayers that Babylon is falling and the Lord Christ is about to reigne Rev. 19. first six verses the neerer wee may expect the approach of this Glorious state on earth How much of these things have or doe appear already I leave wise men to recall to minde and consider CHAP. III. Containing several Computations of time searching when this glorious state on Earth shall approach § 1 OF which in general I would admonish the Reader First That I shall not trouble my selfe with any Computation whose period is expired because experience hath sufficiently confuted it § 2 Secondly That I would not have him to be troubled at the Computers though he finde their numerary principles different and their Computations inconsistent one with the other but in such darke and difficult
C Gaius Dionysius Alexandrinus and Eusebius most falsely to have fathered the opinion of the thousand yeers with a mixture of abhorred impieties and absurdities upon Cerinthus is proved fully out of the best Antiquity Page 372 The qualities of men in the future glorious state on earth shall be Co-ordinate Page 523 Chiliasme vindicated from voluptuousnesse Page 372 The Chaos preceding the glorious state Page 497 The new Creation of the glorious state Page 499 No Church-Censures in the glorious state held forth in this Treatise Page 523 No procreation of Children in the glorious state treated of in this Book Page 523 In that state shall be a restauration of all the Creatures Page 526 Item a confluence of all comforts Page 533 How the six dayes work of the first Creation typifie the state of the New Creation according to the opinion of the Rabbins Page 428 How according to the opinion of the Author Page 502 D Dionysius Alexandrinus in Eusebius confuted in his standering the opinion of the thousand yeers Page 372 The Dimensions of the glorious state held forth in their Treatise Page 505 That state also shall be Death-lesse Page 515 No desertions in that state Page 523 No Decay in that state ibid. E Eusebius Pamphylus justly reproved and confuted for his facile and simple credulity to Gaius and Alexandrinus falsely calumniating the Doctrine of the thousand yeers Page 372 F No Fears in the glorious state intended in this Treatise Page 523 G Gaius mentioned in Eusebius reproaching the opinion touching the thousand yeers confuted Page 372 Divers opinions about Gog and Magog Page 427 Jews confesse they shal have a strivng with Gog and Magog after their return into their own Country with their Scripture proofs thereof Page 426 H Hieronymus alias Jeroms jeers jirkings at the proofs of the glorious state to come discussed and confuted 369 The confession of beathens touching the glorious state on earth yet to come 414 I Jerom opposing the 1000 yeers confuted See Hieronimus Jerom reproved for it by Mr. Mede 435 How Christs intercession doth doth not remain in the future glorious state on earth 485 K King Edwards Catechism set forth by his authority and brought by the Bishops to M. Philpots trial expounds the Petition in the Lords Prayer Thy KINGDOM come of this GLORIOVS KINGDOM ON EARTH YET TO COME of which this Book doth treat 438 L Of the Saints living a 1000 y. on earth 53 Of the cleering of Lactantius touching voluptuous Chiliasme 435 M The confession of the Mahumetans acknowledging in substance the summe of the general position of this Treatise 418 No humane ruling Majesty in the glorious state on earth yet to come 523 N The voice of Nature for this restauration or Nature in all things groans by Natural instinct for this restauration of all things on earth yet to come which must be fulfilled God never impressing any kind of Natural instinct on the species of things in vain See largely 526 O Objections against our arguments for the general Thesis refelled 495 P The general Position propounded 1 The general Position expounded 2 The Position divided into two parts viz. I That Christ shal visibly appear in person 2 That under him the Saints shal sensibly and properly reign 77 Dr. Prideaux his arguments answered 443 Dr. Pareus answered 471 No procreation of children in the glorious state intended in this Treatise 523 The priviledges in that glorious state 536 All Prophesies shall then be fulfilled 536 Q Ten Qualifications or Qualities of the glorious state yet to come upon earth with several other consequences from those ten 507 At that time shall bee a perfection of all Qualities 532 R Of the Jewish Rabbins confession of the main of this Treatise 410 In the glorious state we speak of shall be a Restauration of all the creatures 526 S Ten Scriptures out of the N. Testament to prove the visible appearance of Christ to the Church on earth at the great Restauration 78 Five places out of the old Testament to prove the same 170 666 is fitted to be the Antichristian numeral name of Turk and Pope 87 One and fifty Scriptures out of the O. Testament collated with those allegation of them in the New to prove that there shal be yet on earth a glorious state of al things 115 c. The glorious state intended in this Treatise shall be sin-lesse 507 It shall also bee sorrowlesse 511 An abundant pouring out of the Spirit shall then be 538 12 Scriptures in the N. Testament to prove that there shal be yet on earth a most glorious state of all things 377 to 406 T Of the Saints living gloriously a THOVSAND YEERS on earth 55 Of their Reigning there so LONG 66 Of their Reigning with Christ THERE that while 68 More of the space of time of 1000 Y. of the Saints reigning with Christ on earth 74 The doctrine of the 1000 yeers vindicated from voluptuous Chiliasme 372 The state in that time shal be Temptation-lesse 525 The glorious state shal be a Time-lesse condition viz. more like eternity 530 536 V The voyce or vote of al Nations confesseth in substance the Tenet of a glorious c. 413 Our Tenet little lesse then the voice of the law of nature 434 A full answer to an universal objection 492 The state of the thousand yeers vindicated from voluptuousnesse 369 c. 479 c. W What in particular the glorious state held forth in this Treatise shal be 464 No wants in that State 523 The six dayes Works of the Creation applied by the R. to typifie the new Creation 428 FINIS
a thousand yeers The yeer thereof four hundred thousand yeers Possibly the thousand yeers intend the limited felicity on earth the foure hundred thousand yeers the eternal in ultimate glory And then the said Tract of Theologie goes on saying They that possesse this estate shall be all perfect in STATURE to wit in the STATURE OF ADAM and in FORM viz. in the FORM OF JESUS CHRIST never suffering any increment or decrement They shall have all sweet contentment and all at their pleasure without difficulty or delay § 5 It is there added concerning the day of judgement That the day of judgement shall continue a long time Three Trumpets shall bee sounded At the last all shall be gathered together to Jerusalem § 6 Thus you see what glimmering light the Turks had of the future state we speake of If they erre in the manner of their discourse it is no wonder being such Barbarians as I may say in many respects We have in substance confessed by them what wee contend for A wise man hath been sometimes cloathed in a fools Coat We told you before we should not justifie all the words the Heathens Turks and Jews should speak of this point Yet let not this as Mr. Mede saith touching the rubbish mixt in the Fathers and others touching this opinion make us cast away the substance of gold The Turks you see in part and I might have shewed you more sometimes speak in substance according to Scripture And sometimes they speake in effect touching our point against themselves wherein they are to be regarded As in that touching Jagog and Magog who are they themselves and touching Jesus Christ his comming againe to confirme the Law and to be the patterne of our perfection at the Resurrection and not their Mahomet And that the children of Isaac shall at last overcome them Great is the power of truth and it shall prevaile as Cardanus said and in a demonstration thereof as he professeth he wrote the disgracefull story of his owne birth and life CHAP. IV. Containing the Doctrine of the Jewish Rabbins concerning the state of the godly after the Resurrection and the Scriptures they alleadge for their Doctrine § 1 FIrst we will present to you some passages out of a collection of them compiled learnedly by R. Menasse Ben Israel * In his Treatise De Resurrectione mortuorum libritres As for the Rabbi himselfe in the first Book hee doth very orthodoxly assert abundantly out of many Scriptures of the Old Testament and the consent of some Rabbins therein the Resurrection I will touch one because according to his allegation the inference thence naturally flowing looks more particularly with favour on our Thesis Moreover saith he * Ibid. lib. 1. cap. p. 13. 101. Jacob in Egypt would be buried with his Fathers in Canaan and Joseph commanded his brethren that when they should depart out of Egypt they should carry his bones with them All which are of that nature that by them it easily appears that they believed the soule to be immortal or else that care had been ridiculous Yea it had been ridiculous if they had not hoped for an happy estate among the godly in their bodies upon the earth at the Resurrection Else they needed not take any regard of places on earth neer the faithfull or c. of this inference as allowed by the Rabbins see after in this Chapter § 2 In his second Book he brings us many resolutions of questions out of the learned Rabbins 1 That men that were monsters here shall rise againe without all monstrousnesse because else their monstrosity would terrifie the minds of men c. * Ibid. lib. 2. cap. 5. p. 163. which reason argues a conversing of men on earth after the Resurrection 2 That the dead shall rise cloathed ** Ibid. 2. c. 6. p. 164 165. c Thus saith he R. Meyr in Tract Sannedrim asserted when Cleopatra put it as a Question to him 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. He gives his answer in summe thus If the Wheat-corne sowne in the earth doth not need for its putrefaction so many wrappers as it springs up with yet it ariseth out of the earth with a blade and ear How much more convenient is it that pious and good men for decorum sake shall rise cloathed with garments And in the Jerusalem Talmud it is said under the name of R. Natan 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. with the same vestiment with which a man is buried shall he rise againe according to that Job 38.14 He is changed as a lump of clay and stands as a garment To the same effect R. Johanan in Beresit Raba R. Irmihah These things I doe not take time to dispute whether true or false but this I inferre that those Rabbins that beleeved this must needs thus thinke upon this ground that there should be an happy estate of good men on EARTH at their resurrection Howbeit for mine own part if you will needs presently know my inclination what to thinke herein remember that Adam and Eve being both naked in innocencie and our estate at the Resurrection shall not bee more imperfect they were not thereby obnoxious either to sinne or shame 3 How the world shall be able to containe all that shall be raised and particularly the land of PALESTINE Ibid. l. 2. c. 10. p. 186 187. c all the JEWS To which the Rabbins answer That there are now many Tracts of the world which are not habitable but either are at present unknown or if known yet through too much heat or too much cold are not inhabited Which things shall not be so at the Resurrection For then all parts of the whole Earth shall be known and all shall be made habitable And for the capacity of PALESTINE or the Holy-land promised to the ISRAELITES as the place of their entertainment this Isaias excellently explains Chap. 54.2 3. Sing O barren c. Enlarge the place of thy Tent and let them stretch forth the Curtaines of thine habitations Spare not lengthen thy cords and strengthen thy stakes For thou shalt break forth on the right hand and on thy left and thy seed shall inherit the Gentiles and shall make the desolate Cities to be inhabited By the place of the Tent saith the Rabbin is meant Jerusalem and by the Curtains of her Tabernacle are meant the Cities of the Holy-land Moreover faith the prophet those Curtains shall extend themselves too far In which matter this Prophet agrees with the words of Zachary Chap. 9. v. 1. That Jerusalem as the Rabin renders it shall be extended unto the gates of Damascus and Hamat with Tyre and Sidon shall enter into the borders of the Holy-land even as the Chalde Paraphrase doth expound which also may be confirmed out of Jeremiah Chapter 31. v. 38. Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that the City shall be built to the Lord from the Tower of Hananeel unto the gate of the
corner And the line shall go forth over against it upon the hill Gareb c. Thus the Rabbins to this question by which it is apparent they expect a glorious state on earth at the resurrection Fourthly he gives this as the last reason of the resurrection the rest being not so pat to our purpose Ibid. l. 2. c. 10. p. 186 187 c. I mention not Because saith he if they onely that shall be alive at the time the rest should rise shall enjoy the salvation and deliverance of the Lord and the FELICITY OF THE DAYES OF THE MESSIA then many should be most unjustly dealt with viz. they that have suffered much and that unto death for godlinesse sake c. This reason is as alleadged by R. Menasse so asserted by R. Arisba in his Commentaries called Agadot and assented unto by R. Isaac Abravanel This reason is good but because not pertinently driven home to my purpose as touching making Saints to triumph where they have been trampled I quoted it I confesse rather for the sake of a By-expression as more direct to my Thesis viz. That the Saints at the Resurrection shall enjoy the felicity of the dayes of the Messia which dayes unlesse they be fulfilled on earth afore the ultimate universall judgement I know not how they should in the ultimate glory when Christ shall lay down all Kingdome and power and God must be all in all 1 Cor. 15.24.28 § 3 The third Book presents us with the full minde of the stream of learned Rabbins viz. with the whole state of the world to come immediately following the Resurrection ¶ 1 In the first Chapter are presented to us three several opinions of the Rabbins touching the meaning of the phrase oft in Scripture the world to come Some understanding the world of separated souls others that world that shall follow a certaine terme of time after the time of the Resurrection Others that World that begins at the very hour of the Resurrection Which third opinion saith learned R. Manasse is to me most probable Of this opinion was R. Moses Gerundensis in a contest against R. Moses Egyptius who held the first of the three opinions aforesaid And Gerundensis opinion in sum was this That the world to come is that which immediately follows the resurrection of the dead into which all that live piously probously and honestly being raised shall be brought in soule and body conjoyned to enjoy indefinentlie and without end the reward of their labours With this compare the prayer which the men of the Great Synagogue composed whose words are these 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. That is There is no proportion with thee O Lord our God in this world There is none besides thee O our King in the world to come none besides thee O our Redeemer in the daies of the Messiah and who is like to thee in the resurrection of the dead Which words thus rendred close to the Hebrew without â—aking liberty of neoterick phrase may conveniently bee thus explained That in opposition to this life in its mighty length throughout all ages first named they put the World to come of the Eternal state set in the second place And lastly they name the daies of the Messiah at the resurrection of the dead as intercident between both For plainly they here speak in the two last of a World to come 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as they speak and that with an emphasis And therefore the dayes of the resurrection of the dead and of the Messiah at this coming are according to their sense all one With this well concurs that in the Sanhedrim That no man of those that deny the resurrection shall partake of the world to come giving this reason 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. Who ever denieth the resurrections of the dead by this very thing there cannot redound to him a share in the resurrection from the dead Consonantly R. Abraham Bibag in his book called Derech * Emuna l. 3. part 4. proves by severall places of Scripture that The houre of the resurrection of the dead and the continued and perpetuall life which shall follow is called the world to come For although oftentimes the same name is given to the world of separated soules yet properly and more rightly is understood the world of the resurrection of the dead I insist not upon the application of these to our purpose being I have hinted sufficient afore in this Section and we shall anon hear the Rabbins come nearer to us and carry the matter up to the very achme and top of their prospect of light ¶ 2 In the next the second Chapter of the said third Book the Rabbins speak out plainly and freely what before we struggled for by deduction whiles their speeches were darker It shall not bee grievous to us as much haste as we are in to translate much of this Chapter and those that follow of the said third book out of the Latine and Hebrew whiles the things much conduce to the truth in hand because the Book it selfe is not to be had The head or summe of this second Chapter is That the RESURRECTION OF THE DEAD shall be conjoyned unto the DAYES of the MESSIAH This R. Menasse Ben Israel 1 Learnedly proves out of the books of Moses and the Prophets And secondly brings the stream of learned ancient Rabbins consenting thereunto It is apparent saith he out of Moses by that song of his Deut. 32. v. 35 36. to v. 40. To me belongeth vengeance c. their foot shall slide in due time For the Lord shall JUDGE his people and repent himself for his servants when he seeth that their power is gone c. See now that I even I am he and there is no God with me I kill and I make alive See here saith Menasse the day of the comming of the Messiah and the day of the resurrection are conjoyned As for the Prophets it is manifest saith he out of the second Chapter of Isaiah It shall come to passe in the last of dayes that the mountaine of the Lords house shall be established in the top of the Mountains c. and all Nations shall flow unto it And many people shal say Come let us go up to the Mountaine of the Lord to the house of the God of Jacob and he will teach us his wayes and we will walk in his paths for out of Zion shal go forth the Law and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem and he shal judge among the Nations c. and they shal beat their swords into plow-shares The Prophet here teacheth saith R. Menasse not onely temporal good things but also spiritual which shall come to passe when the Messiah shall come For then all Nations with unanimous consent even as Zephany also foretels adhering to the God of Isaac and Jacob and imbracing his Doctrine shall serve him with one kinde of worship Then all shall enjoy a quiet
tell One of our opposites said that it must be a long while that Christ judgeth as man and judgeth men as men and therefore the ultimate judgement must be a long time ¶ 2 To the second proof viz. out of Act. 3.21 wee have already largely shewed that that place is very full and home for our opinion See our second Book page 96. But because Mr. Bayly will undertake to urge some speciall particulars we will answer particularly to them First He urgeth That the time here understood is that when all things spoken by all the Prophets are performed But all things spoken by all the Prophets are not performed till the last day of judgement Hee backs this with Rom. 8.21 compared with verse 18. and 23. where saith he The restitution of the creatures to their desired liberty comes not before the redemption of our bodies and the glory to be revealed on the whole Church at the last day To which wee answer Mr. B. in most of these Propositions refers which in our English peremptorily to all things But the Greeks is plainly this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. and is duely rendred thus Whom the heavens must receive untill the TIMES of restitution of all things WHICH TIMES God hath spoken c. And so the Arabecke Christ must be received of heaven unto THE TIMES which shall confirm the perfecting of all the speeches which times God hath spoken of c. And plain reason is most fair for this reading of referring which to times not to all things because all the Prophets of the Old Testament generally for the most part have spoken of the TIMES of restitution but have not spoken of all things that are to bee fulfilled witnesse many things in the New Testament which the Apostles tell us were hid in old time and St. Johns six first Seales Trumpets and Vials shew as much As also the binding of Satan And therefore that speech of Mr. B. That the time of the performing of all things which any of the Prophets have spoken cannot possibly exist before he last judgement is a false proposition because some of the Prophets whole Prophesies in the Old Testament for them Peter then must needs mean have been fulfilled already As the Prophesie of Jonah the utmost of which was the resurrection of Christ which was a time of restitution of our Head but not of all things by our Head Adde that it is said Here the TIMES of restitution of ALL THINGS which are distinguished from the ultimate day of judgement which is a time of dissolution and destruction of things To which RESTITUTIOâ— is quite opposite And TIMES are in the plurall as well as THINGS And therefore a precise ultimaâ—e day of judgement in Mr. B. sense is not particularly pointed out But that ALL THINGS MUST HAVE their TIMES to be restored As the Saints for a thousand yeers And restitution imports a state once had and lost not a state altogether new and different as that in heaven And therefore Psal 8. and Heb. 2. doe refer to such a state as Adam had For Rom. 8.18 to 24. which Mr. B. quotes for proof That the time of fulfilling all things which any of the Prophets have spoken cannot possibly exist before the last judgement I say his quoting this eighth of Rom. to confirme this Proposition Mr. Bayly taking the last judgement for the ultimate day of judgement overthrows himselfe For in these thousand yeers is revealed the glory IN US Rom. 8.18 Marke the phrase in us And in verse 19. Then is the manifestation viz. to all the world of the Sonnes of God which in heaven is hid from the world And verse 19.20 31 22. Then in those thousand yeers the creature IT SELFE and whole creation according to their groans shall be delivered from the vanity and travell and paine it is now in into the liberty of the Sons of God which cannot be at the ultimate day of judgement when comes the dissolution And then in that thousand yeers most properly is it said in verse 25 And not onely the CREATURES but OUR SELVES ALSO shall have the redemption of our bodies it being a condition proper in place and nature for bodies The second thing that Mr. Bayly urgeth out of this third of Act. 21. is That the time here spoken of is when the Jews to whom Peter spake were to be refreshed by the Lords presence But that shall not be before the generall Resurrection To which we answer This is a begging of the question wee have shewed that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the face or appearance of Christ shall the Saints in this thousand yeers have a great refreshing especially here meant of the Jewes in generall who then must be called and so injoy this refreshing For at the ultimate judgement and generall Resurrection will bee too late a time to call them The third thing Mr. Bayly urgeth out of this Act. 3. is this The time when God doth solemnly before men and Angels declare the absolution and blotting out of the sins of all his people is not before the last day But this is the time whereof the Apostle Peter speaks in the present place as appears by verse 19. That your sins may be blotted out when the time of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord. To which we answer as to the minor Proposition First that Peter here speaks of the blotting out the Jews sins and those sins were refusing and crucifying Christ Act. 2. And these are blotted out when Christ appears and they repent at sight of him and owne him and this is before the last day of judgement Zach. 12.10 Rev. 1.7 as we have before demonstrated out of these places As for all those words Mr. Bayly heaps up of solemnly before men and Angels declare the absolution c. they cannot be inferred from this text As the word refreshing is but a low word to signifie the absolutest highest happinesse And the last day is a late time to blot out the sins of the Jews when they are not yet converted nor shall then bee but by the appearance of Christ unto them Zach. 11. Rev. 1. ¶ 3 The third and last proof of Mr. Baylies minor Proposition of his first Argument That Christ remaines in the heavens till the last judgement is in John 14.2 and 3. To which we answer Christ doth not in the least there intimate that he would not come againe till the last judgement as Mr. B. understands the last judgement And it is very plaine that Christ will first come againe and receive them to himselfe before he carry them into the mansion in the highest heavens if Mr. Bayly wil needs understand those mansions onely Howbeit there is no expression of Heaven And the Greek is prepare a place without any article of emphasis And the Fathers house is large Ephes 3.14 15. For this cause I bow my knees unto the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ of whom the whole
to the Church Which is added to this All-New condition Rev. 21.4 As there shal be no place so no more time for any sorrowful or sorrow-making things or persons or mutable matters Christ will not allow them an houre nor a minute in the Church Dives had his time Their glasse is run Christs houre is come The Sonne of righteousnesse ariseth the dark must be gone ¶ 5 This imports that the happinesse of Saints shall not be given them by measure of time Tempus est numerus motus Time is measured motion Saints shall not be happy so long and no longer This thousand yeers is the prelude to everlasting infinite glory Saints shall not need to wish saying This is a happy condition if it would hold So that as miseries shall not have the least time allowed them on earth so the Saints mercies shall not be measured out to continue onely so long and no longer The thousand yeers are the preface and then Magog stirring at last gives Christ occasion to give them the Saints everlasting infinit injoyment So that in the glorious state of the Church shall be no measuring it out by time as so long to continue and no longer It shall be a thousand yeers happy on earth But then it is not said shall be an end But this is swallowed up of a greater Of this stability of things at this time see further in Isa 33.6 spoken in relation to the call of Jewes c. wisdome and knowledge shall be the stability of times and strength of salvation and the feare of the Lord thy treasure As grace shall not period with time And God cannot period with time so nor the Churches condition Isa 60.19 The Sunne shall be no more thy light by day nor the Moon thy brightnesse by night but the Lord shall be thy EVERLASTING LIGHT and thy God thy glory which applied to Church state in the seventh Trumpet Rev. 21.23 It followes Isa 60.20 Thy Sunne shall no more goe downe neither shall thy Moon withdraw it selfe for the Lord shall be thy everlasting light and the dayes of thy mourning shall be at an end Rather then the Sun and Moon shall play fast and loose with the Church they shall not Move There shall bee no more Sun set or change of the Moon No measuring out Saints happinesse by times SECT VIII The next Quality is That at this time there shall be a perfection of all qualities both natural and spiritual in the Saints § 1 AS before we said No measuring by fading time so now we affirm no stinting to an infirme degree Now there shall bee no lower degree then a freedome from all imperfection Zach. 12.8 It s spoken of this time see verse 12. viz. When the Jews shall see Christ and mourne and repent and bee filled with grace Then verse 8. Hee that is feeble shall be as David And the house of David as God better rendred as Angels The Hebrew is Kelohim Elohim oft signifying Angels and here is an Incrementum so that the last must be highest then it follows as the Angel of God Hebrew is emphatical Hamaleak the name of Christ Malach. 3. The sense then is They shall be as Christs how strong the feeble shall be viz. as strong firm and sublime in perfection as David And how shall David be As an Angel Yea as Christ Sutable to 1 Cor. 15. We shall be conformable to Christ And Phil. 3.21 Our bodies like his glorious body And 1 Cor. 13.12 Know as we are knowne our graces shall be as Rivers in the Ocean Isa 11.9 So that as our perfection cannot period so nor last by vicissitudes as now sometimes up sometimes sinke but shall be still at full height SECT IX A Confluence of all Comforts in the injoyers and injoyed § 1 AS it is said 1 Pet. 1. who in 2 Epist 3. Chapter speaks of this glorious time I say as it is said 1 Pet. 1. verse 3 4 5. He hath begotten us againe to a lively hope by the Resurrection of Jesus Christ to an inheritance incorruptible RESERVED IN HEAVEN for you who are kept by the power of God ready to be REVEALED in the LAST TIME so now in this Heaven as it is called Rev. 21. the inheritance is kept perfect to us and us in it Of this see all the 35. Chapter of Isa Wee did before demonstrate that that Isa 34. relates to this time we speake of And this 35. Chapter is but a part of the same discourse As the forme viz. the 34. Chapter is of the ruine of the Churches enemies and the delivery of the Church so this 35. Chapter is a description what the Church shall injoy Viz. verse 1. The solitary places shall be glad for them and the Desart shall rejoyce and blossome like a rose Verse 2. The glory of Lebanon shall be given to it The excellency of Carmel and Sharon shall see the glory of the Lord. Verse 3. Strengthen ye the weake hands and confirme the feeble knees Verse 4. Say unto them that are of a fearful heart be strong feare not behold your God will come with vengeance he will come and save you Verse 5. The eyes of the blinde shall be opened and the deafe eares unstopped Verse 6. Then shall the lame man leap as an Hart and the tongue of the dumb sing for in the wildernesse shall waters break out and streams in the desart Verse 7. The parched ground shall become a poole and the thirsty land springs of waters In the habitation of Dragons shall bee grasse and rushes Verse 8. An high-way there shall be and it shall bee called the way of holinesse the unclean shall not passe over it Fools shall not erre therein Verse 9. No Lion shall be there nor ravenous beast shall goe up thereon but the redeemed shall walk there Verse 10. And the ransomed of the Lord shall returne and come to Zion with songs and everlasting joy upon their heads they shall obtaine joy and gladnesse and sorrow and sighing shall flye away Yee see how all happinesse is upon the possession and the Possessor The possession shall not bee defective and unserviceable and the Possessour shall not by any impediment bee hindered of his injoyment All the Injoyers and Injoyments shall be varnished with beauty environed with peace enlarged with liberty perpetuated with stable equability ¶ 1 Varnished with beauty As Homer saith of the Golden Sea because of the beams of the Sun raditing upon it so the Church and all the Churches injoyments shall be guilded with beams guilded with beams of Christs glorious presence At this time Christ shall arise as the Sunne Malach. 4. as wee have shewed compared with 2 Pet. 1.19 And because he ariseth and shines on the Church therefore the Church shall arise and shine as the Sunne rising in the East looks on the Moon and makes it at the full in the West Isa 60.1 2. Arise shine for thy light is come and the glory of the Lord
is risen upon thee Darknesse on the earth and people thereof but the Lord shall rise upon thee and his glory shall be seen upon thee This shining is inward and outward For as the Church shall shine in her selfe with Gods beams So verse 3. The Gentiles shall come to thy light and Kings to the brightnesse of thy rising And verse 6. They from Sheba c. shall bring gold and incense and shall shew forth the praises of the Lord. Accordingly Rev. 21 as the Church is glorious in her selfe so from without verse 24. The Nations of them that are saved shal walke in the light of the Church which God shines on it and Kings shall bring their honor unto it As is the glory of the Sun in its ascending over every Horizon is the glory of the world In the inside in the life of all things In the outside in the light and lustre on all So shall it bee with the Church If in this time as Isa 30.26 At the day the Lord bindeth up the breach of his people the light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sun c. So gloriously shall God manifest himselfe to the Church that all glory shall her condition be As New Jerusalem is new decked c. Rev. 21. So all her buildings walls streets gates c. according to Isa 54. verse 11. are compared to gold and all precious stones which comparison of glorious gold and precious stones c. import all manner of glory of the Church If our bodies shall bee conformed to Christs glorious body so every bodily thing shall have the highest perfection that it was created in And the best jewels and treasures shall not be appropriated to Heathens Atheists Popish Hypocrites or gracelesse Kings and Princes and Potentates But if it may adde to the Churches glory they shall be brought to the Church as right owner ¶ 2 Environed with peace and safety Christ the King and Prince of peace Heb. 7. Isa 9. Createth peace for all his subjects far and neer Isa 57.19 sc As inward peace So outward too Isa 65. last No preying on one another no destroying no hurting So Psal 72.3.7 See the Title sc A Psalme for Solomon sc Solomon the Great sc Christ The Mountaines shall bring peace to the people and little hils by righteousnesse In his dayes shall the righteous flourish and abundance of peace as long AS THE MOON INDURES See by this what Solomon is meant Mountains and Hils signifie that Emperours Princes Dukes Lords c. shall no longer as Mountaines shadow the Church by oppression or that men shall not make mountaines and hills holds and garrisons to subdue the Church Isa 11.6 There shall be peace between Man and all creatures between Children and Aspes the Wolfe and Lamb Cow and Bear of which say two learned Authors there is both a spiritual and litteral sense All men with their great power glory wits policies and potency shall be so tame as a childe may rule them and all creatures shall be restored as in the day of Creation Calvin upon this 11. of Isa 6. saith That the Prophet aimes at a further thing then we are aware of For it intimates saith he a restauration of all things as at the first creation and so goes on in many words See learned men consulâ—ò handling this question are lost in Allegories but when they are off of that question sincerely weighing the places of Scripture tending to it then it drops from them ere they are aware So Calvin here So Pareus on Rom. 8. is against Pareus on Rev. 20. ¶ 3 Enlarged with liberty It is the great yeer of Jubilee even in the opinion of the Jews As it is freedome from all evill as we have shewed so a freedome to injoy all good They shall have the waters of life the comforts of the Gospel free for their use Rev. 22.17 and enough for all And the Tree of life Christ free for all to injoy him fully Verse 2. And the Gates of the Church are alwayes open freely for all Saints to enter Rev. 21. They shall bee as free in all injoyments as in heaven for this is an Heaven ¶ 4 Perpetuated with stable equability Now they fully injoy him that is the first and last with an even continuance the heavens and earth must be as one as he pleaseth Isa 48.12 13. And this his Title of Alpha and Omega Christ makes his preface Rev. 1.17 to the glorious Catastrophe Rev. 20.4 c. to the end of the Bible Now the substance of all eternity is entred upon Christ the everlasting Father the eternall God the everlasting Spirit and Covenant c. must now appeare in a perpetuated stability of all perfect Church glory to all the Elect. Magog shall not interrupt but occasionally promote the Churches eternall blisse Therefore now let not our hearts be unstable in hope nor our affections unstable in love nor our judgements unstable in principles nor our practice unstable in duties and ordinances Remember the evill of the foolish Virgins Remember the good precepts and promises of Christ as a warning us afore his comming now at hand Rev. 22.7.11 12 13 14 15 16 17. v. 7. I come quickly blessed is he that keepeth these sayings of this Prophesie Verse 11. Let him that is righteous be righteous still 12. Behold I come quickly and my reward is with me I am Alpha and Omega sc I make no other end or beginning but happinesse in and with me 14. Blessed are they that keep his commandements that they may eat of the Tree of life and enter the Gates of the City of the Church Without shall be Dogs They that are found out of it shall goe for Dogs 16. I Jesus have sent my Angel to testifie these things to the CHURCHES 17. Hee that testifies these things saith Surely I come quickly then John concludes as I Come Lord Jesus come quickly SECT X. This state will have the face and character of Eternity IN the three last Qualities of this state of the Church sc First No more time Secondly A perfection of Qualities natural and spirituall in the Saints Thirdly A confluence of all comforts in the injoyer and the injoyment I say in regard of these three This state of the Church will have the face a semblance of Eternity the property and character of Eternity For the idiom and peculiar of Eternity is to give a man all parts and degrees of his comfort at once throughout every moment of Eternity In Time is succession where is the beginning middle and the end The embrion augment and the highest perfection that that comfort will amount to but in Eternity a man is as happy the first moment as ten thousand yeers after if there were any time in Eternity So here proportionably the Saints blisse after Christ hath begun the compleatnesse of this estate shall be as full at first as at last The difference from a state in Time is as